WG40 WriterGuideLO PDF

LibreOffice 4.
0 Writer Guide
Word Processing with Style
Copyright
This document is Copyright 20112013 by its contributors as listed below. You may distribute it and/or modify it under the terms of either the !" eneral #ublic $icense %http&//www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html'( )ersion 3 or later( or the Creati)e Commons *ttribution $icense %http&//creati)ecommons.org/licenses/by/3.0/'( )ersion 3.0 or later. *ll trademar+s within this guide belong to their legitimate owners.
Contributors
,ohn * -mith ,ohn 0. .1ugos2 4on 5aile ,r. #eter -chofield Cover art: 8laus9,:rgen 7eghorn .rew ,ensenn .a)id /lymire /arbara .uprey 6a2el 4ussman ,ean 6ollis 7eber ,ean 6ollis 7eber ,eremy Cartwright ,amie 3by ary -chnabl
Christoph !oac+
Acknowledgments
This boo+ is adapted and updated from the OpenOffice.org 3.3 Writer Guide. The contributors to that boo+ are listed on page 13.
Feedback
#lease direct any comments or suggestions about this document to& documentation;global.libreoffice.org
Publication date and software version

#ublished < ,une 2013. /ased on $ibre=ffice >.0.3.
Documentation for LibreOffice is available at http !!www.libreoffice.org!get"help!documentation
Contents
Copyright..................................................................................................................................... 2
Preface.................................................................................................................................. 9
7ho is this boo+ for?................................................................................................................. 10 7hat is in this boo+?.................................................................................................................. 10 7here to get more help?........................................................................................................... 10 7hat you see may be different................................................................................................... 11 "sing $ibre=ffice on a 0ac........................................................................................................ 12 7hat are all these things called?............................................................................................... 12 7ho wrote this boo+?................................................................................................................ 13 *c+nowledgements.................................................................................................................... 13 5re@uently as+ed @uestions....................................................................................................... 1> !ew features in $ibre=ffice 7riter >.0....................................................................................... 1A
Chapter 1 ntroducing !riter.............................................................................................................. 1"

7hat is 7riter?.......................................................................................................................... 1B #arts of the main 7riter window................................................................................................ 1B Changing document )iews......................................................................................................... 2A -tarting a new document........................................................................................................... 2< =pening an eCisting document...................................................................................................2B -a)ing a document.................................................................................................................... 2D #assword protection.................................................................................................................. 30 Closing a document................................................................................................................... 32 Closing $ibre=ffice..................................................................................................................... 32 "sing the !a)igator................................................................................................................... 33 "ndoing and redoing changes................................................................................................... 3E
Chapter # $etting up !riter................................................................................................................ %9

Choosing options for 7riter that affect all $ibre=ffice components............................................ >0 Choosing options for loading and sa)ing documents................................................................. A0 Choosing options for 7riter........................................................................................................A> Choosing options for 6T0$ documents..................................................................................... <3 Choosing language settings....................................................................................................... <3 Controlling 7riterFs *utoCorrect functions..................................................................................<A
Chapter % !orking with &e't...............................................................................................................("

Gntroduction................................................................................................................................ <B -electing teCt............................................................................................................................. <B Cutting( copying( and pasting teCt.............................................................................................. <D 5inding and replacing teCt and formatting.................................................................................. E0 Gnserting special characters....................................................................................................... E3 5ormatting paragraphs............................................................................................................... EA 5ormatting characters................................................................................................................ EB
LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide 3
*utoformatting........................................................................................................................... ED Creating numbered or bulleted lists........................................................................................... B0 "sing footnotes and endnotes................................................................................................... B3 Chec+ing spelling and grammar................................................................................................. B< "sing built9in language tools...................................................................................................... D0 "sing synonyms and the thesaurus........................................................................................... D1 6yphenating words.................................................................................................................... D3 "sing *utoCorrect...................................................................................................................... D> "sing word completion............................................................................................................... DA "sing *utoTeCt........................................................................................................................... D< $ine numbering.......................................................................................................................... DB Trac+ing changes to a document............................................................................................... DD *dding other comments........................................................................................................... 102 $in+ing to another part of a document...................................................................................... 103 -witching between insert and o)erwrite mode......................................................................... 10< Counting the words in a selection............................................................................................ 10E Changing the case of selected teCt.......................................................................................... 10E
Chapter ) Formatting Pages.............................................................................................................1*9

Gntroduction.............................................................................................................................. 110 Choosing a layout method........................................................................................................110 -etting up basic page layout using styles................................................................................. 112 Changing page margins........................................................................................................... 11< "sing columns to define the page layout.................................................................................. 11E "sing frames for page layout................................................................................................... 120 "sing tables for page layout.................................................................................................... 12A "sing sections for page layout................................................................................................. 12E "pdating lin+s.......................................................................................................................... 13> Creating headers and footers...................................................................................................13A !umbering pages.................................................................................................................... 13D .efining borders and bac+grounds.......................................................................................... 1>E
Chapter + Printing, -'porting, Fa'ing, and -./ailing................................................................... 1+1

Huic+ printing........................................................................................................................... 1A2 Controlling printing................................................................................................................... 1A2 #rinting en)elopes................................................................................................................... 1AB #rinting labels.......................................................................................................................... 1<0 -ending a faC........................................................................................................................... 1<2 3Cporting to #.5..................................................................................................................... 1<2 39mailing 7riter documents..................................................................................................... 1<E .igital signing of documents.................................................................................................... 1E0 4emo)ing personal data.......................................................................................................... 1E1
LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
Chapter ( ntroduction to $tyles...................................................................................................... 1"%

7hat are styles?...................................................................................................................... 1E3 The -tyles and 5ormatting window.......................................................................................... 1E> *pplying styles......................................................................................................................... 1EB 0odifying styles....................................................................................................................... 1BE Creating custom paragraph styles& eCamples.......................................................................... 1D1 *ssigning styles to shortcut +eys............................................................................................. 1DA .efining a hierarchy of headings.............................................................................................. 1DA
Chapter " !orking with $tyles......................................................................................................... #*%

Gntroduction.............................................................................................................................. 20> Creating custom %new' styles................................................................................................... 20> 7or+ing with paragraph styles................................................................................................. 20E 7or+ing with conditional paragraph styles............................................................................... 21< 7or+ing with character styles.................................................................................................. 21B 7or+ing with frame styles........................................................................................................ 21D 7or+ing with page styles......................................................................................................... 221 7or+ing with list styles............................................................................................................. 22D
Chapter 0 !orking with 1raphics.................................................................................................... #%+

raphics %images' in 7riter..................................................................................................... 23< Creating and editing images.................................................................................................... 23< *dding images to a document.................................................................................................. 23E 0odifying an image.................................................................................................................. 2>1 "sing 7riterFs drawing tools.................................................................................................... 2>E #ositioning graphics within the teCt.......................................................................................... 2A0 *dding captions to graphics..................................................................................................... 2AE Creating an image map............................................................................................................ 2<0 0anaging the allery............................................................................................................... 2<1 $ibre$ogo scripting.................................................................................................................. 2<>
Chapter 9 !orking with &ables........................................................................................................ #("

Gntroduction.............................................................................................................................. 2<B Creating a table....................................................................................................................... 2<B 5ormatting the table layout...................................................................................................... 2E1 5ormatting the table teCt.......................................................................................................... 2EB .ata entry and manipulation in tables...................................................................................... 2B1 *dditional table operations....................................................................................................... 2B> The Table menu and toolbar.................................................................................................... 2BD
Chapter 1* !orking with &emplates.................................................................................................. #9%

Gntroduction.............................................................................................................................. 2D> "sing a template to create a document....................................................................................2D>
LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide %
Creating a template.................................................................................................................. 2DA 3diting a template.................................................................................................................... 2DE *dding templates obtained from other sources........................................................................ 2DB -etting a default template........................................................................................................ 2DD *ssociating a document with a different template.................................................................... 301 =rgani2ing templates............................................................................................................... 301
Chapter 11 2sing /ail /erge..............................................................................................................%*+

7hat is mail merge?................................................................................................................ 30< Creating and registering the data source................................................................................. 30< .eregistering a data source..................................................................................................... 30D 4e9registering an eCisting data source..................................................................................... 30D Creating a form letter............................................................................................................... 30D #rinting mailing labels.............................................................................................................. 313 #rinting en)elopes................................................................................................................... 31B "sing the 0ail 0erge 7i2ard to create a form letter................................................................ 321
Chapter 1# &ables of Contents, nde'es, and 3ibliographies.........................................................%%%

Gntroduction.............................................................................................................................. 33> Tables of contents.................................................................................................................... 33> *lphabetic indeCes................................................................................................................... 3>> =ther types of indeCes............................................................................................................. 3A2 /ibliographies.......................................................................................................................... 3A>
Chapter 1% !orking with /aster 4ocuments................................................................................... %(+

7hy use a master document?................................................................................................. 3<< -tyles in master documents and subdocuments...................................................................... 3<< Creating a master document& scenarios...................................................................................3<E -plitting a document into master and subdocuments............................................................... 3<E Combining se)eral documents into a master document........................................................... 3<B -tarting with no eCisting documents......................................................................................... 3E0 4estarting page numbering...................................................................................................... 3EA 3diting a master document...................................................................................................... 3E< Cross9referencing between subdocuments.............................................................................. 3EE "sing the !a)igator................................................................................................................. 3B0 Creating one file from a master document and its subdocuments............................................ 3B1 #roblem sol)ing& *nchoring pictures to a page........................................................................ 3B2
Chapter 1) !orking with Fields......................................................................................................... %0+

Gntroduction to fields................................................................................................................. 3B< Huic+ and easy field entry........................................................................................................ 3B< "sing document properties to hold metadata and information that changes............................ 3B< "sing other fields to hold information that changes..................................................................3BB "sing *utoTeCt to insert often9used fields................................................................................ 3D0
& LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
.efining your own numbering se@uences................................................................................ 3D0 "sing automatic cross9references............................................................................................ 3D2 "sing fields in headers and footers.......................................................................................... 3D< "sing fields instead of outline numbering for appendiC numbering..........................................3DE Tric+s for wor+ing with fields.................................................................................................... 3DE .e)eloping conditional content................................................................................................ 3DB "sing placeholder fields........................................................................................................... >0> "sing input fields and input lists............................................................................................... >0A
Chapter 1+ 2sing Forms in !riter......................................................................................................)*9

Gntroduction to forms................................................................................................................ >10 7hen to use forms................................................................................................................... >10 Creating a simple form............................................................................................................. >11 5orm controls reference........................................................................................................... >13 3Cample& a simple form........................................................................................................... >1E *ccessing data sources........................................................................................................... >22 *d)anced form customi2ation.................................................................................................. >2B I5orms.................................................................................................................................... >31
Chapter 1( Customi5ing !riter.......................................................................................................... )%%

Gntroduction.............................................................................................................................. >3> Customi2ing menu content...................................................................................................... >3> Customi2ing toolbars............................................................................................................... >3E *ssigning shortcut +eys........................................................................................................... >>0 *ssigning macros to e)ents..................................................................................................... >>A *dding functionality with eCtensions........................................................................................ >>A
Appendi' A 6eyboard $hortcuts.........................................................................................................))"

Gntroduction.............................................................................................................................. >>B =pening menus and menu items............................................................................................. >>B !a)igating and selecting with the +eyboard............................................................................. >>D Controlling dialogs................................................................................................................... >A0 0acros..................................................................................................................................... >A0 -hortcut +eys for controlling documents and windows............................................................. >A1 5unction +eys for 7riter........................................................................................................... >A2 -hortcut +eys for 7riter........................................................................................................... >A3 -hortcut +eys for tables........................................................................................................... >AA -hortcut +eys for paragraphs and heading le)els.................................................................... >A< -hortcut +eys for mo)ing and resi2ing frames( graphics( and obJects...................................... >AE -hortcut +eys in the allery..................................................................................................... >AE -hortcut +eys in the !ew Theme area of the allery............................................................... >AB -hortcut +eys in the allery pre)iew area................................................................................ >AB -electing rows and columns in a database table %opened by 5>'............................................>AD -hortcut +eys for drawing obJects............................................................................................ >AD
'
nde'.................................................................................................................................. )(1
Preface
!ho is this book for7

*nyone who wants to get up to speed @uic+ly with $ibre=ffice 7riter will find this boo+ )aluable. You may be new to word processing software( or you may be familiar with another office suite.
!hat is in this book7

This boo+ introduces some of the main features of 7riter( the word processor component of $ibre=ffice&
TeCt entry( editing( and formatting %Chapter 3' #age9layout methods( including frames( columns( and tables %Chapter >' 3Cport to #.5( including boo+mar+s %Chapter A' Templates and styles %Chapters <( E( and 10' 3mbedding or lin+ing of graphics( spreadsheets( and other obJects %Chapter B' /uilt9in drawing tools %Chapter B' Tables of data %Chapter D' 0ail merge %Chapter 11' Tables of contents( indeCes( and bibliographies %Chapter 12' 0aster documents( to group a collection of shorter documents into a single long document %Chapter 13' 5ields and forms %Chapters 1> and 1A' .atabase integration( including a bibliography database %Chapters 11( 12( 1A' *nd many more
!here to get more help7

This boo+( the other $ibre=ffice user guides( the built9in 6elp system( and user support systems assume that you are familiar with your computer and basic functions such as starting a program( opening and sa)ing files.
8elp system
$ibre=ffice comes with an eCtensi)e 6elp system. This is your first line of support for using $ibre=ffice. To display the full 6elp system( press )* or go to 8elp 9 :ibre;ffice 8elp on the main menu bar. Gn addition( you can choose whether to acti)ate +ips( ,-tended tips( and the .elp /gent by going to &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice 9 1eneral on the main menu bar. Gf +ips are enabled( ho)er the mouse pointer o)er any of the icons to see a small boC %tooltip' with a brief eCplanation of the iconFs function. 5or a more detailed eCplanation( select 8elp 9 !hat<s &his7 on the main menu bar and ho)er the pointer o)er the icon.
Free online support

The $ibre=ffice community not only de)elops software( but pro)ides free( )olunteer9based support. -ee Table 11 and this web page& http&//www.libreoffice.org/get9help/ You can get comprehensi)e online support from the community through mailing lists and the *s+ $ibre=ffice website. =ther websites run by users also offer free tips and tutorials. This forum pro)ides community support for $ibre=ffice& http&//en.libreofficeforum.org/
*$ LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
This site pro)ides support for $ibre=ffice( among other programs& http&//forum.openoffice.org/en/forum/ +able * )ree support for LibreOffice users Free LibreOffice support
*s+ $ibre=ffice .ocumentation 5*Hs 0ailing lists Huestions and answers from the $ibre=ffice community http&//as+.libreoffice.org/en/@uestions/ "ser guides( how9tos( and other documentation. http&//www.libreoffice.org/get9help/documentation/ https&//wi+i.documentfoundation.org/.ocumentation/#ublications *nswers to fre@uently as+ed @uestions http&//wi+i.documentfoundation.org/5a@ 5ree community support is pro)ided by a networ+ of eCperienced users http&//www.libreoffice.org/get9help/mailing9lists/ The $ibre=ffice website in your language. http&//www.libreoffice.org/international9sites/ Gnternational mailing lists http&//wi+i.documentfoundation.org/$ocalK0ailingK$ists Gnformation about a)ailable accessibility options. http&//www.libreoffice.org/get9help/accessibility/
Gnternational support
*ccessibility options
Paid support and training

*lternati)ely( you can pay for support ser)ices. -er)ice contracts can be purchased from a )endor or consulting firm speciali2ing in $ibre=ffice.
!hat you see may be different

llustrations
$ibre=ffice runs on 7indows( $inuC( and 0ac =- I operating systems( each of which has se)eral )ersions and can be customi2ed by users %fonts( colors( themes( window managers'. The illustrations in this guide were ta+en from a )ariety of computers and operating systems. Therefore( some illustrations will not loo+ eCactly li+e what you see on your computer display. *lso( some of the dialogs may be different because of the settings selected in $ibre=ffice. You can either use dialogs from your computer system or dialogs pro)ided by $ibre=ffice %default'. To change to using $ibre=ffice dialogs if settings ha)e been altered& 1' =n $inuC and 7indows operating systems( go to &ools 9 ;ptions 9:ibre;ffice 9 1eneral on the main menu bar to open the dialog for general options. 2' =n a 0ac operating system( go to :ibre;ffice 9 Preferences 9 1eneral on the main menu bar to open the dialog for general options. 3' -elect 0se LibreOffice dialogs in Open!Save dialogs and/or( in $inuC or 0ac =-I operating systems only( Print dialogs to display the $ibre=ffice dialogs on your computer display. >' Clic+ ;6 to sa)e your settings and close the dialog.
Preface
**
cons
The icons used to illustrate some of the many tools a)ailable in $ibre=ffice may differ from the ones used in this guide. The icons in this guide ha)e been ta+en from a $ibre=ffice installation that has been set to display the alaCy set of icons. Gf you wish( you can change your $ibre=ffice software pac+age to display alaCy icons as follows& 1' =n $inuC and 7indows operating systems( go to &ools 9 ;ptions 9:ibre;ffice 9 =iew on the main menu bar to open the dialog for )iew options. 2' =n a 0ac operating system( go to :ibre;ffice 9 Preferences 9 =iew on the main menu bar to open the dialog for )iew options. 3' Gn 0ser interface 1 2con si3e and style select Gala-y 4default5 from the options a)ailable in the drop9down list. >' Clic+ ;6 to sa)e your settings and close the dialog.
-ome $inuC operating systems( for eCample "buntu( include $ibre=ffice as part of the installation and may not include the alaCy icon set. You should be able to download the alaCy icon set from the software repository for your $inuC operating system.
>ote
2sing :ibre;ffice on a /ac

-ome +eystro+es and menu items are different on a 0ac from those used in 7indows and $inuC. The table below gi)es some common substitutions for the instructions in this chapter. 5or a more detailed list( see the application 6elp. Windows or Linux
&ools 9 ;ptions menu selection 6ight"clic7 8trl 48ontrol5 )% )**
Mac equivalent
:ibre;ffice 9 Preferences 8ontrol9clic7 z 48ommand5 ShiftLzL)% zL+
Effect
*ccess setup options =pen a conteCt menu "sed with other +eys =pen the !a)igator =pen the -tyles and 5ormatting window
!hat are all these things called7

The terms used in $ibre=ffice for most parts of the user interface %the parts of the program you see and use( in contrast to the behind9the9scenes code that actually ma+es it wor+' are the same as for most other programs. * dialog is a special type of window. Gts purpose is to inform you of something( or re@uest input from you( or both. Gt pro)ides controls for you to use to specify how to carry out an action. The technical names for common controls are shown in 5igure 1. Gn most cases we do not use the technical terms in this boo+( but it is useful to +now them because the 6elp and other sources of information often use them.
*:
)igure * Dialog showing common controls 1' 2' 3' >' Tabbed page %not strictly spea+ing a control'. 4adio buttons %only one can be selected at a time'. Chec+boC %more than one can be selected at a time'. -pin boC %clic+ the up and down arrows to change the number shown in the teCt boC neCt to it( or type in the teCt boC'. A' Thumbnail or pre)iew. <' .rop9down list from which to select an item. E' #ush buttons. Gn most cases( you can interact only with the dialog %not the document itself' as long as the dialog remains open. 7hen you close the dialog after use %usually( clic+ing ;6 or another button sa)es your changes and closes the dialog'( then you can again wor+ with your document. -ome dialogs can be left open as you wor+( so you can switch bac+ and forth between the dialog and your document. *n eCample of this type is the 5ind M 4eplace dialog.
!ho wrote this book7

This boo+ was written by )olunteers from the $ibre=ffice community. #rofits from sales of the printed edition will be used to benefit the community.
Acknowledgements
This boo+ is adapted and updated from the OpenOffice.org 3.3 Writer Guide. The contributors to that boo+ are& ,ean 6ollis 7eber 0ichele Narri ary -chnabl 0agnus *dielsson *gnes /el2unce 8en /yars /ruce /yfield .aniel Carrera .ic+ .etwiler *leCander !oOl .unne $aurent .uper)al 0artin 5oC 8atharina reif Tara 6ess #eter 6illier9/roo+ $ou Gorio ,ohn 8ane 4achel 8artch -tefan *. 8eel ,ared 8obos
Preface *3
0ichael 8otsarinis *lan 0adden Carol 4oberts ,anet 0. -wisher /ob 7ic+ham
-igrid 8ronenberger #aul 0iller Gain 4oberts /arbara 0. Tobias Claire 7ood
#eter 8upfer Pincen2o #on2i ,oe -ellman Catherine 7aterman $inda 7orthington
Gan $aurenson -cott 4hoades 4obert -cott -haron 7histon
Fre?uently asked ?uestions

8ow is :ibre;ffice licensed7 $ibre=ffice is distributed under the =pen -ource Gnitiati)e %=-G' appro)ed $esser eneral #ublic $icense %$ #$'. The $ #$ license is a)ailable from the $ibre=ffice website& http&//www.libreoffice.org/download/license/ /ay distribute :ibre;ffice to anyone7 Yes. 8ow many computers may install it on7 *s many as you li+e. /ay sell it7 Yes. /ay use :ibre;ffice in my business7 Yes. s :ibre;ffice available in my language7 $ibre=ffice has been translated %locali2ed' into o)er >0 languages( so your language probably is supported. *dditionally( there are o)er E0 spelling( hyphenation( and thesaurus dictionaries a)ailable for languages( and dialects that do not ha)e a locali2ed program interface. The dictionaries are a)ailable from the $ibre=ffice website at& www.libreoffice.org. 8ow can you make it for free7 $ibre=ffice is de)eloped and maintained by )olunteers and has the bac+ing of se)eral organi2ations. 8ow can contribute to :ibre;ffice7 You can help with the de)elopment and user support of $ibre=ffice in many ways( and you do not need to be a programmer. To start( chec+ out this webpage& http&//www.documentfoundation.org/contribution/ /ay distribute the P4F of this book, or print and sell copies7 Yes( as long as you meet the re@uirements of one of the licenses in the copyright statement at the beginning of this boo+. You do not ha)e to re@uest special permission. Gn addition( we re@uest that you share with the proJect some of the profits you ma+e from sales of boo+s( in consideration of all the wor+ we ha)e put into producing them.
*#
>ew features in :ibre;ffice !riter ).*

$ibre=ffice >.0 offers a large number of new characteristics( which are listed on this page& https&//www.libreoffice.org/download/>909new9features9and9fiCes.
Gntegration with se)eral content and document management systemsQincluding *lfresco(

G/0 5ile!et #B( 0icrosoft -harepoint 2010( !uCeo( =penTeCt( -*# !et7ea)er Cloud -er)ice and othersQthrough the C0G- standard.
/etter interoperability with .=CI and 4T5 documents( than+s to se)eral new features and
impro)ements including the possibility of importing in+ annotations and attaching comments to teCt ranges.
*dditional user interface %"G' incremental impro)ements( including "nity integration and
support of 5irefoC Themes %#ersonas' to gi)e $ibre=ffice a personali2ed loo+.
The ability to ha)e a different header and footer on the first page of a 7riter document(
without the need of a separate page style.
The ability to attach comments to a selected range of teCt. R$ibre$ogoR )ector graphics language& $ogo toolbar and interpreter. The ability to hide/show styles in the -tyles and 5ormatting dialog. The *pply -tyle list boC now gi)es a pre)iew of the selectable styles. TeCt can be selected and copied from message boCes. * new Template 0anager allows for use of non9nati)e template files& templates from other office suites are now handled li+e the =.5 ones. with particular impro)ements for large =.- and I$-I spreadsheets and 4T5 files.
-ignificant performance impro)ements when loading and sa)ing many types of documents( .ropped support for&
3Cport to legacy 7ord and 3Ccel %)ersion <.0/DA' files. These files can still be opened. $egacy binary -tar=ffice %)ersion 1.C thru A.C' files. =.0* document management integration. 7indows 2000.
Preface
*%
8hapter * 2ntroducing Writer
!hat is !riter7
7riter is the word processor component of $ibre=ffice. Gn addition to the usual features of a word processor %spelling chec+( thesaurus( hyphenation( autocorrect( find and replace( automatic generation of tables of contents and indeCes( mail merge( and others'( 7riter pro)ides these important features&
Templates and styles %see Chapters < and E' #age9layout methods( including frames( columns( and tables %Chapter >' 3mbedding or lin+ing of graphics( spreadsheets( and other obJects %Chapter B' /uilt9in drawing tools %Chapter B' 0aster documents( to group a collection of shorter documents into a single long document %Chapter 13' Change trac+ing during re)isions %Chapter 3' .atabase integration( including a bibliography database %Chapters 11( 12( 1A' 3Cport to #.5( including boo+mar+s %Chapter A' *nd many more
Parts of the main !riter window

The main 7riter wor+space is shown in 5igure 2. Gts features are described in this section.
)igure : Parts of the main Writer window
&itle bar
The Title bar is located at the top of the 7riter window( and shows the file name of the current document. 7hen the document is newly created( the document name will appear as 0ntitled ;( where ; is a number.
*(
/enus
The <enu bar is located Just below the Title bar. 7hen you select one of the menus( a submenu drops down to show further options such as&
3Cecutable commands( such as Close or $ave( found in the File menu. Commands to open dialogs( indicated by the command being followed by an ellipsis %S'(
such as Find or Paste $pecial found in the -dit menu.
5urther submenus( indicated by a right9pointing blac+ arrow( such as &oolbars and @oom
found in the =iew menu. 0o)ing the cursor onto these causes them to open.
&oolbars
7riter displays toolbars in different ways& doc+ed %fiCed in place'( or floating. -ome toolbars ha)e sections which you can tear9off. .oc+ed toolbars can be mo)ed to different locations or made to float( and floating toolbars can be doc+ed. The top doc+ed toolbar( Just under the 0enu bar( is called the Standard toolbar. Gt is consistent across all the $ibre=ffice applications %7riter( Calc( .raw( Gmpress'. The second toolbar at the top is conteCt sensiti)e. 5or eCample( when wor+ing with teCt( the 5ormatting toolbar is displayed. 7hen the cursor is on a graphic %image type'( the raphics toolbar is displayed( and the #ictures toolbar is displayed doc+ed at the bottom of the screen. *n additional toolbar %/ullets and !umbering' is displayed neCt to the 5ormatting toolbar( when for eCample( the cursor is in a numbered/bulleted list.
Displayin or !idin toolbars

To display or hide toolbars( choose =iew 9 &oolbars( then clic+ on the name of a toolbar in the list. *n acti)e toolbar shows a chec+ mar+ beside its name. Tear9off toolbars are not listed in the Piew menu.
"ub#enus and tear$off toolbars

Toolbar icons with a small triangle to the right will display submenus( tear"off toolbars( and other ways of selecting things( depending on the toolbar. 5igure 3 shows a tear9off toolbar from the .rawing toolbar. Tear9off toolbars can be floating or doc+ed along an edge of the screen or in one of the eCisting toolbar areas. To mo)e a floating tear9off toolbar( drag it by the title bar( as shown in 5igure A.
)igure 3 ,-ample of a tear"off toolbar
*=
Movin toolbars
To mo)e a doc+ed toolbar( place the mouse pointer o)er the toolbar handle %the small )ertical bar to the left of the toolbar'( hold down the left mouse button( drag the toolbar to the new location( and then release the mouse button.
)igure # <oving a doc7ed toolbar To mo)e a floating toolbar( clic+ on its title bar and drag it to a new location.
)igure % <oving a floating toolbar
%loatin toolbars
7riter includes se)eral additional conteCt9sensiti)e toolbars( whose defaults appear as floating toolbars in response to the cursorFs current position or selection. 5or eCample( when the cursor is in a table( a floating Table toolbar appears. You can doc+ these toolbars to the top( bottom( or side of the window( if you wish %see T0o)ing toolbarsU abo)e'. The default position is the bottom of the screen.
Doc&in 'floatin windows and toolbars

Toolbars and some windows( such as the !a)igator and the -tyles and 5ormatting window( are doc+able. You can mo)e( resi2e( or doc+ them to an edge. To doc+ a window or toolbar( hold down 8trl and double9clic+ on the frame of the floating window %or in a )acant area near the icons at the top of the floating window' to doc+ it in its last position.
)igure & 8trl9double"clic7 to doc7 or undoc7 To undoc+ a window( hold down 8trl and double9clic+ on the frame %or a )acant area near the icons at the top' of the doc+ed window.
:$
4ocking AAuto8ideB
=n any window edge where another window is doc+ed you will see a button which allows you to show or hide the window.
Gf you clic+ the button on the window edge to show the window( the window will remain
)isible until you manually hide it again %with the same button'.
Gf you show the window by clic+ing the window border( but not the button( you acti)ate the
Auto8ide function. The *uto6ide function allows you to temporarily show a hidden window by clic+ing on its edge. 7hen you clic+ in the document( the doc+ed window hides again.
)igure ' +he .ide button
)igure ( Show button and /utohide
(usto#i)in toolbars
You can customi2e toolbars in se)eral ways( including choosing which icons are )isible and loc+ing the position of a doc+ed toolbar. To access a toolbarFs customi2ation options( right9clic+ between the icons on the toolbar to open a conteCt menu. To show or hide icons defined for the selected toolbar( choose =isible 3uttons from the conteCt menu. Pisible icons are indicated by a border around the icon %5igure D' or by a chec+ mar+ beside the icon( depending on your operating system. Clic+ on icons to hide or show them on the toolbar. You can also add icons and create new toolbars( as described in Chapter 1<( Customi2ing 7riter.
Gn earlier )ersions of $ibre=ffice( these options were accessed by clic+ing on an arrow at the end of the toolbar. The arrow is still present on floating toolbars( but not on doc+ed ones. 6owe)er( the arrow has no effect.
>ote
:*
)igure = Selection of visible toolbar icons
Cight.click Aconte'tB menus

4ight9clic+ on a paragraph( graphic( or other obJect to open a conteCt menu. =ften the conteCt menu is the fastest and easiest way to reach a function. Gf youFre not sure where in the menus or toolbars a function is located( you can often find it by right9clic+ing.
Culers
4ulers are enabled by default. To show or hide the rulers( choose =iew 9 Culer. To disable the rulers( choose &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice !riter 9 =iew and deselect either or both rulers.
)igure *$. /ccessing the ruler settings
$tatus bar
The 7riter status bar is located at the bottom of the wor+space. Gt pro)ides information about the document and con)enient ways to @uic+ly change some document features. Gt can be hidden by deselecting it in the Piew menu.
)igure ** Left end of Status bar

:: LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
)igure *: 6ight end of Status bar Page number -hows the current page number( the se@uence number of the current page %if different'( and the total number of pages in the document. 5or eCample( if you restarted page numbering at 1 on the third page( its page number is 1 and its se@uence number is 3. Gf any boo+mar+s ha)e been defined in the document( a right9clic+ on this field pops up a list of boo+mar+sV clic+ on the re@uired one. To Jump to a specific page in the document( double9clic+ on this field. The !a)igator opens %see page 32'. Clic+ in the Page >umber field in the !a)igator( type the se>uence number of the re@uired page( and press ,nter. !ord count The word count is shown in the status bar( and is +ept up to date as you edit. *ny teCt selected in the document will be counted and displayed alongside the total count.
To display eCtended statistics such as character count( double9clic+ the word count in the status bar( or choose &ools 9 !ord Count. Page style -hows the style of the current page. To change the page style( right9clic+ on this field. * list of page styles pops upV choose a different style by clic+ing on it. To edit the current page style( double9clic+ on this field. The #age -tyle dialog opens. -ee Chapters < and E for more information about styles. :anguage -hows the language for the selected teCt. Clic+ to open a menu where you can choose another language for the selected teCt or for the paragraph where the cursor is located. You can also choose >one A4o not check spellingB to eCclude the teCt from a spelling chec+ or choose /ore... to open the Character dialog. -ee Chapter 3( 7or+ing with TeCt( for more information. nsert mode This area is blan+ when in Gnsert mode. .ouble9clic+ to change to Overwrite modeV single9clic+ to return to Gnsert mode. Gn Gnsert mode( any teCt after the cursor position mo)es forward to ma+e room for the teCt you typeV in =)erwrite mode( teCt after the cursor position is replaced by the teCt you type. This feature is disabled when in -dit 9 Changes 9 Cecord mode. $election mode Clic+ to choose different selection modes. The icon does not change( but when you ho)er the mouse pointer o)er this field( a tooltip indicates which mode is acti)e. 7hen you clic+ in the field( a conteCt menu displays the a)ailable options. =n 7indows systems( you can hold down the /lt +ey while dragging to select a bloc+ of teCt. You donWt need to enter the bloc+ selection mode. -ee Chapter 3( 7or+ing with TeCt( for more information about these modes.
8hapter * 2ntroducing Writer :3
Mode
-tandard selection
Effect
Clic+ in the teCt where you want to position the cursorV clic+ in a cell to ma+e it the acti)e cell. *ny other selection is then deselected. Clic+ing in the teCt eCtends or crops the current selection. * new selection is added to an eCisting selection. The result is a multiple selection. * bloc+ of teCt can be selected.
3Ctending selection %)(' *dding selection 4Shift9)(5 /loc+ selection 48trl9Shift9)(5
4ocument changes status The icon that is displayed here changes from this one changes( to this one if the document has no unsa)ed if it has been edited and the changes ha)e not been sa)ed.
4igital signature Gf the document has been digitally signed( this icon To )iew the certificate( double9clic+ the icon.
is displayed hereV otherwise( it is blan+.
$ection or obDect information 7hen the cursor is in a section( heading( or list item( or when an obJect %such as a picture or table' is selected( information about that item appears in this field. .ouble9clic+ing in this area opens a rele)ant dialog.
;bDect #icture $ist item 6eading Table -ection =ther nformation shown -i2e and position $e)el and list style =utline numbering le)el !ame or number and cell reference of cursor !ame of section %/lan+' 4ialog opened #icture /ullets and !umbering1 /ullets and !umbering1 Table 5ormat 3dit -ections 5ields
=iew layout Clic+ an icon to change between single page( side9by9side( and boo+ layout )iews %see 5igure 13. You can edit the document in any )iew. Noom settings %see below and neCt page' interact with the selected )iew layout and the window width to determine how many pages are )isible in the document window. @oom To change the )iew magnification( drag the Noom slider( or clic+ on the L and X signs( or right9 clic+ on the 2oom le)el percent to pop up a list of magnification )alues from which to choose.
Gf a list style was used with a list item or heading( no dialog appears.
:#
)igure *3. ?iew layouts single@ side"by"side@ boo7
Changing document views

7riter has three ways to )iew a document& Print Layout( Web Layout( and )ull Screen. To change the )iew( go to the =iew menu and clic+ on the re@uired )iew. #rint $ayout is the default )iew in 7riter. Gn this )iew( you can use the Noom slider and the Piew $ayout icons on the -tatus bar to change the magnification. You can also choose =iew 9 @oom from the menu bar to display the Noom M Piew $ayout dialog( where you can set the same options as on the -tatus bar.
)igure *#. 8hoosing Aoom and ?iew Layout options Gn 7eb $ayout )iew( you can use only the Noom sliderV the Piew $ayout buttons on the -tatus bar are disabled( and most of the choices on the Noom M Piew $ayout dialog are not a)ailable. Gn 5ull -creen )iew( the document is displayed using the 2oom and layout settings pre)iously selected. To eCit 5ull -creen )iew and return to either #rint or 7eb $ayout )iew( press the ,sc +ey or clic+ the Full $creen icon in the top left9hand corner. You can also use 8trl9Shift9B to enter or eCit 5ull -creen )iew.
8hapter * 2ntroducing Writer :%
$tarting a new document

You can start a new( blan+ document in 7riter in se)eral ways. Gf a document is already open in $ibre=ffice( the new document opens in a new window.
From the $tart Center

7hen $ibre=ffice is open but no document is open %for eCample( if you close all the open documents but lea)e the program running'( the $tart Center is shown. Clic+ one of the icons to open a new document of that type( or clic+ the &emplates icon to start a new document using a template.
)igure *% LibreOffice Start 8enter
From the Euickstarter

The Huic+starter is found in 7indows( some $inuC distributions( and %in a slightly different form' in 0ac =- I. The Huic+starter is an icon that is placed in the system tray or the doc+ during system startup. Gt indicates that $ibre=ffice has been loaded and is ready to use. The Huic+starter must be enabled in &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice 9 /emory by selecting the chec+boC. 4ight9clic+ the Euickstarter icon %5igure 1<' in the system tray to open a pop9up menu from which you can open a new document( open the Templates and .ocuments dialog( or choose an eCisting document to open. You can also double9clic+ the Euickstarter icon to display the Templates and .ocuments dialog. -ee Chapter 1( Gntroducing $ibre=ffice( in the Getting Started guide for more information about starting 7riter and using the Huic+starter.
:&
)igure *& Cuic7starter pop"up menu
From the operating system menu

You can open $ibre=ffice from the operating system menu in the same way that you start other programs. 7hen $ibre=ffice was installed on your computer( in most cases a menu entry for each component was added to your system menu. Gf you are using a 0ac( you should see the $ibre=ffice icon in the *pplications folder. 7hen you double9clic+ this icon( $ibre=ffice opens at the -tart Center %5igure 1A'.
From the menu bar, toolbar, or keyboard

7hen $ibre=ffice is open( you can also start a new document in one of the following ways.
#ress the 8trl9D +eys. "se File 9 >ew 9 &e't 4ocument. Clic+ the >ew button on the -tandard toolbar.
From a template
You can use templates to create new documents in 7riter. * template is a set of predefined styles and formatting. Templates ser)e as the foundation of a set of documents( to ma+e sure they all ha)e a similar layout. 5or eCample( all the documents of the Writer Guide are based on the same template. *s a result( all the documents loo+ ali+eV they ha)e the same headers and footers( use the same fonts( and so on. * new $ibre=ffice installation does not contain many templates. Gt is possible for you to add new templates to your installation and use them for new documents. This is eCplained in Chapter 10( 7or+ing with Templates. 0ore templates can be downloaded from http&//templates.libreoffice.org/ and other websites. =nce you ha)e templates on your system( you can create new documents based on them by using File 9 >ew 9 &emplates. This opens a window where you can choose the template you want to use for your document. The eCample shown in 5igure 1E uses a template in the .ocuments Y 0y Templates folder. .ouble9clic+ on the re@uiredtemplate. * new document is created based on the styles and formats defined in the template.
:'
)igure *'. 8reating a document from a template
;pening an e'isting document

7hen no document is open( the $tart Center %5igure 1A' pro)ides an icon for opening an eCisting document or choosing from a list of recently9edited documents.
You can also open an eCisting document in one of the following ways. Gf a document is already open in $ibre=ffice( the second document opens in a new window.
Choose File 9 ;pen. Clic+ the ;pen button on the -tandard toolbar. #ress 8trl9O on the +eyboard. "se a File 9 Cecent 4ocuments selection.
"se the ;pen 4ocument or Cecent 4ocuments selections on the Huic+starter.

Gn each case( the =pen dialog appears. -elect the file you want( and then clic+ ;pen. Gf a document is already open in $ibre=ffice( the second document opens in a new window. Gn the =pen dialog( you can reduce the list of files by selecting the type of file you are loo+ing for. 5or eCample( if you choose &e't documents as the file type( you will only see documents 7riter can open %including .odt( .doc( .txt'. This method opens 7ord %.doc and .docx' files as well as $ibre=ffice files and other formats. You can also open an eCisting 7riter document using the same methods you would use to open any document in your operating system. Gf you ha)e associated 0icrosoft =ffice file formats with $ibre=ffice( you can also open these files by double9clic+ing on them.
:( LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
$aving a document
To sa)e a new document in 7riter( do one of the following&
#ress 8trl9S. Choose File 9 $ave. Clic+ the $ave icon on the -tandard toolbar.
7hen the -a)e *s dialog appears( enter the file name( )erify the file type( and clic+ $ave. To sa)e an opened document with the current file name( choose File 9 $ave. This will o)erwrite the last sa)ed state of the file. To sa)e an opened document with a different file name in order to preser)e the original and ha)e edits sa)ed in another )ersion( choose File 9 $ave As( gi)e it another name and/or select a different file type. * document can be sa)ed with the same file name if the file type is changed( but must ha)e a different name if the same file type is retained.
$aving a document automatically

You can choose to ha)e 7riter sa)e your document automatically in a temporary file at regular inter)als. *utomatic sa)ing( li+e manual sa)ing( o)erwrites the last sa)ed state of the target file in the temporary file. To set up automatic file sa)ing& 1' -elect &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :oadF$ave 9 1eneral. 2' Clic+ on $ave AutoCecovery information every and set the time inter)al. The default )alue is 1A minutes. 3nter the )alue you want by typing it or by pressing the up or down arrow +eys.
$aving as a /icrosoft !ord document

Gf you need to eCchange files with users of 0icrosoft 7ord who are unwilling or unable to recei)e =pen .ocument 5ormat %=.5' files( you can sa)e a document as a 0icrosoft 7ord file. 1' mportantQ5irst sa)e your document in the file format used by $ibre=ffice 7riter( =.T. Gf you do not( any changes you made since the last time you sa)ed will only appear in the 0icrosoft 7ord )ersion of the document. 2' Then clic+ File 9 $ave As. 3' =n the -a)e *s dialog( in the File type %or $ave as type' drop9down menu( select the type of 7ord format you need. You may also choose to change the file name. >' Clic+ $ave. 5rom this point on( all changes you ma7e to the document will occur only in the new 4<icrosoft Word5 document. You ha)e changed the name and file type of your document. Gf you want to go bac+ to wor+ing with the =.T )ersion of your document( you must open it again.
To ha)e 7riter sa)e documents by default in the 0icrosoft 7ord file format( go to &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :oadF$ave 9 1eneral. Gn the section named Default file format and OD) settings( under 4ocument type( select &e't document( then under /lways save as( select your preferred file format. Gt is recommended that if you use a 0icrosoft 7ord format( you use the %.=C' and not the %.=CI' format. There is anecdotal e)idence that the %.=CI' format eCperiences problems e)en within nati)e 0icrosoft applications. -a)ing in =.5 format gi)es you the option to redo the document if the recipient of your document eCperiences trouble with the 0icrosoft format.
:=
&ip
Caution
)igure *(. Saving a file in <icrosoft Word format
Password protection
7riter pro)ides two le)els of document protection& read9protect %file cannot be )iewed without a password' and write9protect %file can be )iewed in read9only mode but cannot be changed without a password'. Thus you can ma+e the content a)ailable for reading by a selected group of people and for reading and editing by a different group. This beha)ior is compatible with 0icrosoft 7ord file protection. 1' "se File 9 $ave As when sa)ing the document. %You can also use File 9 $ave the first time you sa)e a new document.' 2' =n the -a)e *s dialog( select the $ave with password option( and then clic+ $ave.
3' The -et #assword dialog opens.
3$
)igure *= +wo levels of password protection 6ere you ha)e se)eral choices& To read9protect the document( type a password in the two fields at the top of the dialog.
To write9protect the document( clic+ the /ore ;ptions button and select the ;pen file
read.only chec+boC.
To write9protect the document but allow selected people to edit it( select the ;pen file
read.only chec+boC and type a password in the two boCes at the bottom of the dialog. >' Clic+ ;6 to sa)e the file. Gf either pair of passwords do not match( you recei)e an error message. Close the message boC to return to the -et #assword dialog and enter the password again. Gn $ibre=ffice 3.A( a different( more often used encryption %*3-' was introduced to replace the pre)iously used one %/lowfish'. Gn conse@uence( files encrypted with $ibre=ffice 3.A or later can not be opened by $ibre=ffice 3.>.> and earlier. $ibre=ffice 3.>.A enables you to open those files. 6owe)er( on sa)ing again in $ibre=ffice 3.>.A( the old encryption will be used. 5iles with the old encryption can be used in $ibre=ffice 3.A.0 and later.
Caution
$ibre=ffice uses a )ery strong encryption mechanism that ma+es it almost impossible to reco)er the contents of a document if you lose the password.
Changing the password for a document

7hen a document is password9protected( you can change the password while the document is open. Choose File 9 Properties 9 1eneral and clic+ the Change Password button.
3*
Closing a document
To close a document( choose File 9 Close or clic+ the Close icon on the document window. The appearance and placement of this icon )aries with your operating system( but it typically loo+s li+e the I in the red boC shown in 5igure 20. *lso( clic+ing the component icon at the left side of the title bar opens a menu in which you can select Close. Gf more than one $ibre=ffice window is open( each window loo+s li+e the sample shown on the left in 5igure 20. Closing this window lea)es the other $ibre=ffice windows open. Gf only one $ibre=ffice window is open( it loo+s li+e the sample shown on the right in 5igure 20. !otice the small blac+ I below the larger I in the red boC. Clic+ing the small blac+ I closes the document but lea)es $ibre=ffice open. Clic+ing the larger I closes $ibre=ffice completely.
)igure :$. 8lose icons Gf the document has not been sa)ed since the last change( a message boC is displayed. Choose whether to sa)e or discard your changes.
$ave& The document is sa)ed and then closed. Close without saving& The document is closed( and all modifications since the last sa)e
are lost.
Cancel& !othing happens( and you return to the document.
Closing :ibre;ffice
To close $ibre=ffice completely( clic+ File 9 -'it, or close the last open document as described in TClosing a documentE abo)e. Gf all the documents ha)e been sa)ed( 7riter closes immediately. Gf any documents ha)e been modified but not sa)ed( a warning message appears. 5ollow the procedure in TClosing a documentE to sa)e or discard your changes.
2sing the >avigator

Gn addition to the #age !umber field on the -tatus bar %described on page 22'( 7riter pro)ides other ways to mo)e @uic+ly through a document and find specific items by using the many features of the !a)igator( the !a)igation toolbar( and related icons. The !a)igator lists all of the headings( tables( teCt frames( graphics( boo+mar+s( and other obJects contained in a document. To open the !a)igator( clic+ its icon on the -tandard toolbar( or press )%( or choose =iew 9 >avigator on the menu bar( or double9clic+ on the #age number field on the status bar. You can doc+ the !a)igator to either side of the main 7riter window or lea)e it floating %see T.oc+ing/floating windows and toolbarsE on page 20'. To hide the list of categories and show only the icons at the top( clic+ the :ist 3o' ;nF;ff icon . Clic+ this icon again to show the list. Clic+ the L sign or triangle by any of the lists to display the contents of the list.
3: LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
Table 2 summari2es the functions of the icons at the top of the !a)igator.
>ote
The !a)igator has different functions in a master document. -ee Chapter 13( 7or+ing with 0aster .ocuments.
)igure :*. +he Davigator +able : )unction of icons in the Davigator

Toggle& !ot acti)e in ordinary documents %left image'. Gn a master document %right image'( switches between the master document file and its subdocuments. !a)igation& =pens the !a)igation toolbar %see page 3>'. #re)ious( !eCt& ,umps to the pre)ious or neCt item in the selected category %page( graphic( hyperlin+( comment( and so on'. To select the category of items( see T"sing the !a)igation toolbar F on page 3>. #age number& ,umps to the page se@uence number showing in the boC. Type the re@uired page number or select it using the up and down arrows. .rag 0ode& -elect 6yperlin+( $in+( or Copy. -ee TChoosing drag modeE on page 3< for details. $ist /oC =n/=ff& -hows or hides the list of categories. Content Piew& -witches between showing all categories and showing only the selected category. -et 4eminder& Gnserts a reminder %see page 3<'.
33
6eader/5ooter& ,umps between the teCt area and the header or footer area %if the page has them'. *nchor ZY TeCt& ,umps between a footnote anchor and the corresponding footnote teCt. 6eading $e)els -hown& Choose the number of heading le)els to be shown.
/oving ?uickly through a document

The !a)igator pro)ides se)eral con)enient ways to mo)e around a document and find items in it&
To Jump to a specific page in the document( type its se>uence number in the boC at the top
of the !a)igator and press ,nter. The se@uence number may be different from the page number if you ha)e restarted numbering at any point.
7hen a category is showing the list of items in it( double9clic+ on an item to Jump directly to
that itemFs location in the document. 5or eCample( you can Jump directly to a selected heading( graphic( or comment by using this method. To see the content in only one category( highlight that category and clic+ the Content =iew icon. Clic+ the icon again to display all the categories. You can also change the number of heading le)els shown when )iewing 6eadings.
"se the Previous and >e't icons to Jump to other obJects of the type selected in the
!a)igation toolbar. %-ee neCt page for details.'
* hidden section %or other hidden obJect' in a document appears gray in the !a)igator( and displays the word ThiddenU as a tooltip. 5or more about hidden sections( see Chapter >( 5ormatting #ages.
>ote
&ip
=bJects are much easier to find if you ha)e gi)en them names when creating them( instead of +eeping $ibre=fficeFs default names of graphics1( graphics2( Table1( Table2( and so onQwhich may not correspond to the position of the obJect in the document. To rename an image( right9clic+ on the image( select Picture 9 ;ptions( and then edit the name in the dialog. -imilarly( to rename a table( right9clic+ on the table( select &able 9 &able( and then edit the name.
2sing the >avigation toolbar

To display the >avigation toolbar %5igure 22'( clic+ the >avigation icon %second icon from the left at the top of the >avigator( 5igure 21' or the small >avigation icon near the lower right9 hand corner of the document window below the )ertical scroll bar %5igure 23'.
)igure :: Davigation toolbar

3# LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
)igure :3 Previous@ Davigation@ and De-t icons The !a)igation toolbar shows icons for all the obJect types shown in the !a)igator( plus some eCtras %for eCample( the results of a Find command'. Clic+ an icon to select that obJect type. !ow all the Previous and >e't icons %in the !a)igator itself( in the !a)igation toolbar( and on the scroll bar' will Jump to the pre)ious or neCt obJect of the selected type. This is particularly helpful for finding items li+e indeC entries( which can be difficult to see in the teCt. The names of the icons %shown in the tooltips' change to match the selected categoryV for eCample( >e't 1raphic( >e't 3ookmark( or Continue search forward.
Cearranging chapters using the >avigator

You can rearrange chapters and mo)e headings in the document by using the !a)igator. 1' Clic+ the Content =iew icon to eCpand the headings( if necessary. 2' %=ptional' Gf you ha)e se)eral subheading le)els( you can more easily find the headings you want( by changing the 6eading $e)els -hown selection to show only 1 or 2 le)els of headings. 3' Clic+ on the heading of the bloc+ of teCt that you want to mo)e and drag the heading to a new location on the !a)igator( or clic+ the heading in the !a)igator list( and then clic+ either the Promote Chapter or 4emote Chapter icon. *ll of the teCt and subsections under the selected heading mo)e with it. To mo)e only the selected heading and not the teCt associated with the heading( hold down 8trl( and then clic+ the Promote or 4emote icon.
The tooltips Promote Chapter and 4emote Chapter can be misleadingV all headingsQwhether at $e)el 1 %chapter' or lowerQcan be rearranged using this functionV and the feature might be better described as 0o)e "p or 0o)e .own %within the document( without changing the heading le)el' to distinguish it more clearly from Promote :evel and 4emote :evel( which change the heading le)el within the document %see below'.
&ip
>' To @uic+ly change the outline le)el of a heading and its associated subheadings( select the heading in the !a)igator( and then clic+ either the Promote :evel or 4emote :evel icon. This action does not change the location of the heading( only its le)el. To increase the outline le)el of only the selected heading( but not its associated subheadings( hold down 8trl( and then clic+ the icon.
)igure :#. 6eorgani3ing with the Davigator
3%
>ote
"sers of 0- =ffice 7ord will note the similarity between this functionality and 7ordWs =utline Piew.
$etting reminders
=ne of the little9+nown features of 7riter that you may find @uite useful is the possibility of Jumping between reminders. 6eminders let you mar+ places in your document that you want to return to later on( to add or correct information( ma+e some other change( or simply mar+ where you finished editing. The possible uses of reminders are limited only by your imagination. To set a reminder at the cursorWs current location( clic+ on the icon in the !a)igator. You can set up to A reminders in a documentV setting a siCth causes the first to be deleted. 4eminders are not highlighted in any way in the document( so you cannot see where they are( eCcept when you Jump from one to the neCtQthe location of the cursor then shows the location of the reminder. To Jump between reminders( first select the Ceminder icon on the !a)igation toolbar. Then clic+ the Previous and >e't icons. 4eminders are not sa)ed with the document.
Choosing drag mode

To select the drag and drop options for inserting items such as other documents and images( into a document using the !a)igator( choose one of the following from the drop9down menu of the 4rag /ode icon .
nsert As 8yperlink Creates a hyperlin+ when you drag and drop an item into the current document. nsert As :ink Gnserts the selected item as a lin+ where you drag and drop in the current document. TeCt is inserted as protected sections. 6owe)er( you cannot create lin+s for graphics( =$3 obJects( references( or indeCes using this method. nsert As Copy Gnserts a copy of the selected item where you drag and drop in the current document. You cannot drag and drop copies of graphics( =$3 obJects( or indeCes.
2ndoing and redoing changes

7hen a document is open( you can undo the most recent change by pressing 8trl9A( or clic+ing the 2ndo icon on the -tandard toolbar( or choosing -dit 9 2ndo from the menu bar.
The -dit menu shows the latest changes that can be undone.
3&
)igure :% ,dit 1 0ndo last action Clic+ the small triangle to the right of the 2ndo icon to get a list of all the changes that can be undone. You can select multiple changes and undo them at the same time %see 5igure 2<'.
)igure :& List of actions that can be undone *fter changes ha)e been undone( Cedo becomes acti)e. To redo a change( select -dit 9 Cedo( or press 8trl9G or clic+ on the Cedo icon . *s with 2ndo( clic+ on the triangle to the right of the arrow to get a list of the changes that can be restored.
3'
8hapter : Setting up Writer

8hoosing options to suit the way you wor7
Choosing options for !riter that affect all :ibre;ffice components

This section co)ers some of the settings that apply to all the components of $ibre=ffice and are particularly important when using 7riter. =ther general options are discussed in Chapter 2( -etting "p $ibre=ffice( in the Getting Started guide. Clic+ &ools 9 ;ptions. The list on the left9hand side of the =ptions $ibre=ffice dialog )aries depending on which component of $ibre=ffice is open. The illustrations in this chapter show the list as it appears when a 7riter document is open. Clic+ the eCpansion symbol %L sign or triangle' by :ibre;ffice on the left9hand side. * list of pages drops down. -electing an item in the list causes the right9hand side of the dialog to display the rele)ant page.
The Cevert button %located in the lower right of the full =ptions dialog' has the same effect on all pages of the =ptions dialog. Gt resets options to the )alues that were in place when you opened the dialog.
>ote
2ser 4ata options

/ecause 7riter uses the name or initials stored in the :ibre;ffice G 2ser 4ata page for se)eral things( including document properties %created by and last edited by information' and the name of the author of comments and changes( you will want to ensure that any information which appears here is correct. Gnformation here is also used by default in the sender details of mailing creations. 5ill in the form or amend or delete any eCisting incorrect information.
1eneral options
The options on the :ibre;ffice G 1eneral page are described below.
)igure :' Setting general options for LibreOffice
#$
8elp G &ips 7hen &ips is acti)e( one or two words will appear when you hold the mouse pointer o)er an icon or field( without clic+ing. 8elp G -'tended tips 7hen -'tended tips is acti)e( a brief description of the function of a particular icon or menu command or a field on a dialog appears when you hold the mouse pointer o)er that item. 8elp Agent To turn off the .elp /gent %similar to 0icrosoftFs =ffice *ssistant'( deselect this option. To restore the default beha)ior( clic+ Ceset 8elp Agent. ;penF$ave dialogs G 2se :ibre;ffice dialogs To use the standard =pen and -a)e dialogs for your operating system( deselect the 2se :ibre;ffice dialogs option. 7hen this option is selected( the =pen and -a)e dialogs supplied with $ibre=ffice will be used. -ee Chapter 1( 2ntroducing Writer( for more about the $ibre=ffice =pen and -a)e dialogs. This boo+ uses the $ibre=ffice =pen and -a)e dialogs in illustrations. Print dialogs G 2se :ibre;ffice dialogs %0ac only' To use the standard #rint dialogs for your operating system( deselect the 2se :ibre;ffice dialogs option. 7hen this option is selected( the #rint dialogs supplied with $ibre=ffice will be used. This boo+ uses the $ibre=ffice #rint dialogs in illustrations. 4ocument status G Printing sets Hdocument modifiedI status Gf this option is selected( then the neCt time you close the document after printing( the print date is recorded in the document properties as a change and you will be prompted to sa)e the document again( e)en if you did not ma+e any other changes. 4ocument status G Allow to save document even when the document is not modified !ormally when a document has not been modified( the File 9 $ave menu option and the $ave icon on the -tandard toolbar are disabled and the +eyboard shortcut 8trl9S has no effect. -elect this option to allow documents to be sa)ed e)en when they ha)e not been modified. Jear Atwo digitsB -pecifies how two9digit years are interpreted. 5or eCample( if the two9digit year is set to 1D30( and you enter a date of 1/1/30 or later into your document( the date is interpreted as 1/1/1D30 or later. *n TearlierU date is interpreted as being in the following centuryV that is( 1/1/20 is interpreted as 1/1/2020. -nable e'perimental AunstableB features -electing this option enables features that are not yet complete or contain +nown bugs. The list of these features is different )ersion by )ersion. -nable macro recording AlimitedB This option enables macro recording( with some limitations. =pening a window( switching between windows( and recording in a different window to that in which the recording began( is not supported. =nly actions relating to document contents are recordable( so changes in =ptions or customi2ing menus are not supported.
#*
/emory options
The options on the :ibre;ffice G /emory page control how $ibre=ffice uses your computerFs memory and how much memory it re@uires. /efore changing them( you may wish to consider the following points&
0ore memory can ma+e $ibre=ffice faster and more con)enient %for eCample( more undo
steps re@uire more memory'V but the trade9off is less memory a)ailable for other applications and you could run out of memory altogether.
Gf your documents contain a lot of obJects such as images( or the obJects are large(
$ibre=fficeFs performance may impro)e if you increase the memory for $ibre=ffice or the memory per obJect. Gf you find that obJects seem to disappear from a document that contains a lot of them( increase the number of obJects in the cache. %The obJects are still in the file e)en if you cannot see them on screen.'
To load the Huic+starter %an icon on the des+top or in the system tray' when you start your
computer( select the option near the bottom of the dialog. This ma+es $ibre=ffice start fasterV the trade9off is that $ibre=ffice uses some memory e)en when not being used. This option %called -nable systray Euickstarter on $inuC' is not a)ailable on 0ac =- I.
)igure :( 8hoosing <emory options for the LibreOffice applications
=iew options
The options on the :ibre;ffice G =iew pageaffect the way the document window loo+s and beha)es. -ome of these options are described below. -et them to suit your personal preferences. 2ser nterface G $caling Gf the teCt in the help files or on the menus of the $ibre=ffice user interface is too small or too large( you can change it by specifying a scaling factor. -ometimes a change here can ha)e uneCpected results( depending on the screen fonts a)ailable on your system. 6owe)er( it does not affect the font si2e of the teCt in your documents. 2ser nterface G con si5e and style The first boC specifies the display si2e of toolbar icons %Automatic( $mall( or :arge'V the Automatic icon si2e option uses the setting for your operating system. The second boC specifies the icon style %theme'V here the Automatic option uses an icon set compatible with your operating system.
#:
)igure := 8hoosing ?iew options for LibreOffice applications 2ser nterface G 2se system font for user interface Gf you prefer to use the system font %the default font for your computer and operating system' instead of the font pro)ided by $ibre=ffice for the user interface( select this option. 2ser interface G $creen font Anti.Aliasing %!ot a)ailable in 7indowsV not shown in 5igure 2D.' -mooths the screen appearance of teCt. 3nter the smallest font si2e to apply anti9aliasing. /enu G $how icons in menus Causes icons as well as words to be )isible in menus. Choice of Automatic( 8ide or $how. Font :ists G $how preview of fonts Causes the font list to loo+ li+e 5igure 30( $eft( with the font names shown as an eCample of the font. 7ith the option deselected( the font list shows only the font names( not their formatting %5igure 30( 4ight'. The fonts you will see listed are those that are installed on your system.
)igure 3$ )ont list 4Left5 showing previewH 46ight5 without preview Font :ists G $how font history Causes the last fi)e fonts you ha)e assigned to the current document to be displayed at the top of the font list. 1raphics output G 2se hardware acceleration .irectly accesses hardware features of the graphical display adapter to impro)e the screen display. !ot supported on all operating systems and $ibre=ffice distributions.
#3
1raphics output G 2se Anti.Aliasing 3nables and disables anti9aliasing( which ma+es the display of most graphical obJects loo+ smoother and with fewer artifacts. !ot supported on all operating systems and $ibre=ffice distributions.
&ip
#ress Shift98trl96 to restore or refresh the )iew of the current document after changing the anti9aliasing settings( to see the effect.
/ouse positioning -pecifies if and how the mouse pointer will be positioned in newly opened dialogs. /iddle mouse button .efines the function of the middle mouse button.
Automatic scrolling dragging while pressing the middle mouse button shifts the )iew. Paste clipboard pressing the middle mouse button inserts the contents of the T-election
clipboardU at the cursor position. The T-election clipboardU is independent of the normal clipboard that you use by -dit 9 CopyFCutFPaste or their respecti)e +eyboard shortcuts. Clipboard and T-election clipboardU can contain different contents at the same time. %unction
Copy content #aste content #asting into another document
(lipboard
-dit 9 Copy or 8trl98 -dit 9 Paste or 8trl9? pastes at the cursor position. !o effect on the clipboard contents.
"election clipboard
-elect teCt( table( or obJect. Clic+ing the middle mouse button pastes at the mouse pointer position. The last mar+ed selection is the content of the selection clipboard.
$election G &ransparency .etermines the appearance of selected teCt or graphics( which appear on a shaded bac+ground. To ma+e the shaded bac+ground more or less dar+( increase or decrease the Transparency setting. Gf you prefer selected material to appear in re)ersed color %typically white teCt on a blac+ bac+ground'( deselect this option.
Print options
=n the :ibre;ffice G Print page( set the print options to suit your default printer and your most common printing method. Gn the Printer warnings section near the bottom of the page( you can choose whether to be warned if the paper si2e or orientation specified in your document does not match the paper si2e or orientation a)ailable for your printer. 6a)ing these warnings turned on can be @uite helpful( particularly if you wor+ with documents produced by people in other countries where the standard paper si2e is different from yours.
Gf your printouts are incorrectly placed on the page or chopped off at the top( bottom( or sides or the printer is refusing to print( the most li+ely cause is page9si2e incompatibility.
&ip
##
)igure 3* 8hoosing general printing options to apply to all LibreOffice components
Path options
=n the :ibre;ffice G Paths page( you can change the location of files associated with( or used by( $ibre=ffice to suit your wor+ing situation. Gn a 7indows system( for eCample( you might want to store documents by default somewhere other than 0y .ocuments. To ma+e changes( select an item in the list shown in 5igure 32 and clic+ -dit. =n the -elect #aths dialog %not shown'( add or delete folders as re@uired( and then clic+ ;6 to return to the =ptions dialog. !ote that many items can ha)e at least two paths listed& one to a shared folder %which might be on a networ+' and one to a user9specific folder %normally on the userFs personal computer'. Gtems with more than one path allowed will use an 3dit #aths dialog %not shown'.
)igure 3: ?iewing the paths of files used by LibreOffice
#%
&ip
You can use the entries in the :ibre;ffice G Paths dialog to compile a list of files( such as those containing *utoTeCt( that you need to bac+ up or copy to another computer.
Color options
=n the :ibre;ffice G Colors page( you can specify colors to use in $ibre=ffice documents. You can select a color from a color table or selection list( edit an eCisting color( or define new colors. These colors will then be a)ailable in color selection lists in $ibre=ffice. 5or details on how to modify a color or create a new color( see Chapter 1>( Customi2ing $ibre=ffice( in the Getting Started guide.
)igure 33 Defining colors to use in color lists in LibreOffice
Font options
You can define replacements for any fonts that might appear in your documents. Gf you recei)e from someone else a document containing fonts that you do not ha)e on your system( $ibre=ffice will substitute fonts for those it does not find. You might prefer to specify a different font from the one the program chooses. =n the :ibre;ffice G Fonts page %5igure 3>'& 1' -elect Apply Ceplacement &able option. 2' -elect or type the name of the font to be replaced in the Font boC. %Gf you do not ha)e this font on your system( it will not appear in the drop9down list in this boC( so you need to type it in.' 3' Gn the Ceplace with boC( select a suitable font from the drop9down list of fonts installed on your computer. >' The chec+ mar+ to the right of the Ceplace with boC turns green. Clic+ on this chec+ mar+. * row of information now appears in the larger boC below the input boCes. -elect Always to replace the font( e)en if the original font is installed on your system. -elect $creen only to
#&
replace the screen font only and ne)er replace the font for printing. The results of combining these selections are gi)en in Table 3. A' Gn the bottom section of the page( you can change the typeface and si2e of the font used to display source code such as 6T0$ and /asic %in macros'.
)igure 3# Defining a font to be substituted for another font +able 3. )ont substitution replacement actions *lways c!ec&box chec+ed
chec+ed blan+ blan+
"creen only c!ec&box blan+

chec+ed chec+ed blan+
+eplace#ent action
5ont replacement on screen and when printing( whether the font is installed or not. 5ont replacement only on screen( whether the font is installed or not. 5ont replacement only on screen( but only if font is not a)ailable. 5ont replacement on screen and when printing( but only if font is not a)ailable.
$ecurity options
"se the :ibre;ffice G $ecurity page to choose security options for documents containing hidden information and for opening documents that contain macros. $ecurity ;ptions and warnings Gf you record changes( sa)e multiple )ersions( or include hidden information or notes in your documents( and you do not want some of the recipients to see that information( you can set warnings to remind you to remo)e it( or you can ha)e $ibre=ffice remo)e some of it automatically. !ote that %unless remo)ed' much of this information is retained in a file whether the file is in $ibre=fficeFs default =pen .ocument format( or has been sa)ed to other formats( including #.5. Clic+ the ;ptions button to open a separate dialog with specific choices %5igure 3<'.
#'
/acro security Clic+ the /acro $ecurity button to open the /acro $ecurity dialog( where you can adJust the security le)el for eCecuting macros and specify trusted sources.
)igure 3% 8hoosing security options for opening and saving documents
"ecurity options and warnin s

The following options are on the $ecurity options and warnings dialog %5igure 3<'. Cemove personal information on saving -elect this option to always remo)e user data from the file properties when sa)ing the file. To manually remo)e personal information from specific documents( deselect this option and then use the 4elete button under File 9 Properties 9 1eneral. Ctrl.click re?uired to follow hyperlinks The default beha)ior in $ibre=ffice is to 8trl9clic7 on a hyperlin+ to open the lin+ed document. 0any people find creation and editing of documents easier when accidental clic+s on lin+s do not acti)ate the lin+s. To set $ibre=ffice to acti)ate hyperlin+s using an ordinary clic+( deselect this option. The other options on this dialog should be self9eCplanatory.
)igure 3& Security options and warnings dialog
#(
Personali5ation
"sing #ersonali2ation( you can add a theme to your $ibre=ffice installation. Choices on this page are to not use a #ersona( use a pre9installed #ersona if one is a)ailable( select a persona from the 0o2illa 5irefoC site( or add your own design. This option defaults to Pre.installed Persona at installation time.
)igure 3' Personali3ation options To install a persona( clic+ the $elect Persona button to open the install dialog %5igure 3D'. 5rom here you can enter an address %"4$' to the persona or clic+ the =isit Firefo' Personas button. *n internet connection is re@uired for this process. Gnstallation instructions are on this dialog. 5ull details about #ersonas are on the website& http&//www.getpersonas.com.
)igure 3( /n e-ample of an installed persona
)igure 3= Persona installation dialog
#=
Appearance options
7riting( editing( and %especially' page layout are often easier when you can see the page margins %teCt boundaries'( the boundaries of tables and sections( grid lines( and other features. Gn addition( you might prefer to use colors that are different from $ibre=fficeFs defaults for such items as comment indicators or field shadings. =n the :ibre;ffice G Appearance page( you can specify which items are )isible and the colors used to display )arious items.
To show or hide items such as teCt boundaries( select or deselect the options neCt to the
names of the items.
To change the default colors for items( clic+ the down9arrow in the 8olor setting column by
the name of the item and select a color from the list boC. !ote that you can change the list of a)ailable colors as described in Chapter 1>( Customi2ing $ibre=ffice( in the Getting Started guide.
To sa)e your color changes as a color scheme( clic+ $aveK and you will be prompted for a
name.
)igure #$ Showing or hiding te-t@ obIect@ and table boundaries
Choosing options for loading and saving documents

You can set the $oad/-a)e options to suit the way you wor+. Gf the =ptions dialog is not already open( clic+ &ools 9 ;ptions. Clic+ the eCpansion symbol %L sign or triangle' to the left of :oadF$ave.
1eneral
0ost of the choices on the :oadF$ave G 1eneral page are familiar to users of other office suites. -ome items of interest are described below.
%$
)igure #* 8hoosing Load and Save options :oad user.specific settings with the document * $ibre=ffice document contains certain settings which are read from the userWs system. 7hen you sa)e a document( these settings are sa)ed with it. -elect this option so that when a document loads( it ignores the stored settings in fa)or of the settings on your computer. 3)en if you do not select this option( some settings are ta+en from your $ibre=ffice installation&
Gnformation about wor+ing with *sian character formats. The following settings are always loaded with a document( whether or not this option is mar+ed&
-ettings a)ailable in File 9 Print 9 ;ptions !ame of 5aC -pacing options for paragraphs before teCt tables Gnformation about automatic updating for lin+s( field functions and charts
.ata source lin+ed to the document and its )iew.

Gf you deselect this option( the userFs personal settings do not o)errule the settings in the document. 5or eCample( your choice %in the options for $ibre=ffice 7riter' of how to update lin+s is affected by the :oad user.specific settings option. :oad printer settings with the document Gf enabled( the printer settings will be loaded with the document. This can cause a document to be printed on a distant printer %perhaps in an office setting'( if you do not change the printer manually in the #rint dialog. Gf disabled( your standard printer will be used to print this document. The current printer settings will be stored with the document whether or not this option is selected. -dit document properties before saving Gf this option is selected( the documentFs Properties dialog pops up to prompt you to enter rele)ant information the first time you sa)e a new document %or whene)er you use $ave As'.
%*
$ave AutoCecovery information every LL /inutes Choose whether to enable *uto4eco)ery and how often to sa)e the information used by the *uto4eco)ery process. *uto4eco)ery in $ibre=ffice sa)es the information needed to restore all open documents in case of a crash. Gf you ha)e this option set( reco)ering your document after a system crash will be easier. Always create backup copy -a)es the pre)ious )ersion of a document as a bac+up copy whene)er you sa)e a document. 3)ery time $ibre=ffice creates a bac+up copy( the pre)ious bac+up copy is replaced. The bac+up copy gets the eCtension .3A6. *uthors whose wor+ may be )ery lengthy should always consider using this option. $ave 2C:s relative to file system F internet "se these options to select the default for relati)e addressing of "4$s in the file system and on the Gnternet. 4elati)e addressing is only possible if the source document and the referenced document are both on the same dri)e. * relati)e address always starts from the directory in which the current document is located. Gn contrast( absolute addressing always starts from a root directory. The following table demonstrates the difference in syntaC between relati)e and absolute referencing& Exa#ples
relati)e absolute
%ile syste#
../images/img.Jpg file&///c[/wor+/images/img.Jpg
,nternet
../images/img.Jpg http&//myser)er.com/wor+/images/img.Jpg
Gf you choose to sa)e relati)ely( the references to embedded graphics or other obJects in your document will be sa)ed relati)e to the location in the file system. Gn this case( it does not matter where the referenced directory structure is recorded. The files will be found regardless of location( as long as the reference remains on the same dri)e or )olume. This is important if you want to ma+e the document a)ailable to other computers that may ha)e a completely different directory structure( dri)e or )olume names. Gt is also recommended to sa)e relati)ely if you want to create a directory structure on an Gnternet ser)er. Gf you prefer absolute sa)ing( all references to other files will also be defined as absolute( based on the respecti)e dri)e( )olume or root directory. The ad)antage is that the document containing the references can be mo)ed to other directories or folders( and the references remain )alid. 4efault file format and ;4F settings ;4F format version. $ibre=ffice by default sa)es documents in =pen .ocument 5ormat %=.5' )ersion 1.2 3Ctended. 7hile this allows for impro)ed functionality( there may be bac+wards compatibility issues. 7hen a file sa)ed in =.5 1.2 is opened in an earlier )ersion of $ibre=ffice %using =.5 1.0/1.1'( some of the ad)anced features may be lost. Two notable eCamples are cross9references to headings and the formatting of numbered lists. Gf you plan to share documents with people who are still using older )ersions of $ibre=ffice( you may wish to sa)e the document using =.5 )ersion 1.0/1.1( e)en though some information will be lost.
$i5e optimi5ation for ;4F format. $ibre=ffice documents are I0$ files. 7hen you select
this option( $ibre=ffice writes the I0$ data without indents and line brea+s. Gf you want to be able to read the I0$ files in a teCt editor in a structured form( deselect this option.
4ocument type. Gf you routinely share documents with users of 0icrosoft 7ord( you might
want to change the Always save as attribute for teCt documents to one of the 7ord formats. Current )ersions of 0icrosoft 7ord can open =.5 files( so this may no longer be needed.
%: LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
)igure #: Supported <icrosoft Word formats

Gf you need to sa)e in 0icrosoft 7ord format( it is good practice to sa)e in $ibre=ffice %=pen.ocument' format %;4&' first and then do a $ave As from your finished document to a 0icrosoft 7ord format. 5or best results( sa)e to the 4;C and not the 4;CM format. -a)ing first in ;4& format gi)es you the option to redo the document if the recipient of your document eCperiences trouble with the 0icrosoft format.
Caution
=3A Properties
=n the :oadF$ave G =3A Properties page( you can choose whether to +eep any macros in 0icrosoft =ffice documents that are opened in $ibre=ffice. These macros are disabled in $ibre=ffice.
)igure #3 8hoosing Load!Save ?J/ Properties Gf you choose :oad 3asic code( you can edit the macros in $ibre=ffice. The changed code is sa)ed in an $ibre=ffice document but is not retained if you sa)e into a 0icrosoft =ffice format. Gf you are importing a 0icrosoft 7ord or 3Ccel file containing P/* code( you can select the option -'ecutable code. 7hereas normally the code is preser)ed but rendered inacti)e( with this option the code is ready to be eCecuted. Gf you choose $ave original 3asic code( the macros are retained unchanged if you sa)e the file into 0icrosoft =ffice format. $ave original 3asic code ta+es precedence o)er :oad 3asic code. Gf both options are selected and you edit the disabled code in $ibre=ffice( the original 0icrosoft /asic code will be sa)ed when sa)ing in a 0icrosoft =ffice format. To remo)e any possible macro )iruses from the 0icrosoft =ffice document( deselect $ave original 3asic code. The document will be sa)ed without the 0icrosoft /asic code.
%3
/icrosoft ;ffice
=n the :oadF$ave G /icrosoft ;ffice page( you can choose what to do when importing and eCporting 0icrosoft =ffice =$3 obJects %lin+ed or embedded obJects or documents such as spreadsheets or e@uations'. -elect the \$] chec+ boCes to con)ert 0icrosoft =$3 obJects into the corresponding $ibre=ffice =$3 obJects when a 0icrosoft document is loaded into $ibre=ffice %mnemonic& T$U for TloadU'. -elect the \-] chec+ boCes to con)ert $ibre=ffice =$3 obJects into the corresponding 0icrosoft =$3 obJects when a document is sa)ed in a 0icrosoft format %mnemonic& T-U for Tsa)eU'.
)igure ## 8hoosing Load!Save <icrosoft Office options
8&/: compatibility
Choices made on the :oadF$ave G 8&/: Compatibility page %not shown' affect 6T0$ pages imported into $ibre=ffice and those eCported from $ibre=ffice. -ee .+<L documentsH importing!e-porting in the 6elp( and the Getting Started boo+( for more information.
Choosing options for !riter

-ettings chosen on the pages in the $ibre=ffice 7riter section of the =ptions dialog determine how your 7riter documents loo+ and beha)e while you are wor+ing on them. Gf the =ptions dialog is not already open( clic+ &ools 9 ;ptions. Clic+ the eCpansion symbol %L sign or triangle' by $ibre=ffice 7riter on the left9hand side of the dialog. * list of pages drops down %see 5igure >A'.
)igure #% LibreOffice Writer options

%# LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
1eneral options
The choices on the :ibre;ffice !riter G 1eneral page affect the updating of lin+s and fields( the units used for rulers and other measurements( and the default tab stop positions.
)igure #& 8hoosing general options for Writer 2pdate links when loading .epending on your wor+ patterns( you may not want lin+s to be updated when you load a document. 5or eCample( if your file lin+s to other files on a networ+( you wonFt want those lin+s to update when you are not connected to the networ+. 2pdate fields and charts automatically You may not want fields or charts to update automatically when you are wor+ing( because that slows down performance. $ettings G &ab stops The +ab stops setting specifies the distance the cursor tra)els for each press of the +ab +ey. This setting is also used for the indent distance applied by the ncrease ndent and 4ecrease ndent buttons on the Formatting toolbar( which affect the indentation of entire paragraphs. "sing the default tab stops to space out or indent material on a page is not recommended. Gf you use the default tab inter)al and then send the document to someone who uses a different default tab inter)al( then your tabbed material will be displayed using the other personFs default tab settings. Gn addition( any changes to the default tab stops will change the eCisting default tab stops in any document you open afterward( as well as tab stops you insert after ma+ing the change. To a)oid these unwanted changes( define your own tabs in paragraph styles or indi)idual paragraphs %see F.efining your own tab stops and indentsE in Chapter 3( 7or+ing with TeCt'. !ord Count *llows eCtra word boundary characters. This feature o)errides long dash %Q' and short dash %' to be word boundary characters for the purposes of counting words( and allows the user to specify additional word boundary characters
%%
=iew options
Two pages of options set the defaults for )iewing 7riter documents& =iew %described here' and Formatting Aids %described below'. 3nabling the uides helps you to precisely position a drawing obJect on a page by pro)iding hori2ontal and )ertical parallel lines the height and width of the obJect( across the complete wor+ing area of the screen as the obJect is mo)ed. Gf the remaining items on the :ibre;ffice !riter G =iew page are not self9eCplanatory( you can easily test their effects in a blan+ document. This is a good page to chec+ if( for eCample( you cannot see graphics on the screen or you see field codes instead of the teCt or numbers you are eCpecting.
)igure #' 8hoosing ?iew options for Writer
Formatting Aids options

The display of symbols such as paragraph ends and tabs help you when writing( editing( and doing page layout. 5or eCample( you might want to +now if any blan+ paragraphs or tabs are included or if any tables or graphics are too wide and intrude into the margins of the page. -elections here determine which symbols show when you select the >onprinting Characters icon in the -tandard toolbar. =n the :ibre;ffice !riter G Formatting Aids page( select the re@uired options.
)igure #( 8hoosing )ormatting /ids options
%&
>ote
.irect cursor lets you enter teCt( images( tables( frames( and other obJects in any blan+ area in your document. 7riter inserts blan+ paragraphs and tabs to position the teCt or obJects. This feature is incompatible with rigorous use of styles and can lead to many formatting oddities( so it should be a)oided by professional writers.
1rid options
-pecifying snap to grid can be )ery helpful when you are trying to align se)eral obJects such as graphics or tables. =n the :ibre;ffice !riter G 1rid page( you can choose whether to enable this feature and what grid inter)als to use. Gf the grid inter)als %subdi)isions' are too large( you may find that you do not ha)e enough control in placing the obJects.
)igure #= 8hoosing Grid options
4efault fonts
The default fonts specified on the :ibre;ffice !riter G 3asic Fonts A!esternB page %5igure A0' apply to both 7riter documents and 6T0$ %7eb' documents. They define the basic fonts for the predefined templates. Gf you want to change the defaults( do so on this page. Gf you ha)e *sian language support enabled %see 5igure AB on page <>' there will be a page for 3asic Fonts AAsianB as well. You can also modify specific templates %as described in Chapter 10' or choose other fonts for use in specific documents( either by applying direct formatting or by defining and applying styles in those templates and documents. 7hen choosing fonts on this page( you are not limited to single fonts or to the ones shown in the drop9down list. You can specify a Tfont familyU as a comma9separated set of fonts that includes those suitable for 7indows( 0acintosh( $inuC( and other operating systems. These choices are particularly important in 6T0$ documents. Gf the document is )iewed on a system that does not ha)e the first font specified( it will use one of the other fonts if that one is a)ailable. =therwise( it will substitute a font that is a)ailable on the system. Type the list of fonts( separated by commas( in the boCes. Gf you want these defaults to apply to the current document only( select that option. The 4efault button resets the )alues on this page to the defaults installed with $ibre=ffice.
%'
)igure %$ 8hoosing default fonts
Print options
=n the :ibre;ffice !riter G Print page( you can choose which items are printed with the document by default. These options are in addition to those on the :ibre;ffice G Print page %5igure 3>'.
)igure %* 8hoosing Print options for Writer -ome considerations&
7hen you are wor+ing on drafts and you want to sa)e printer in+ or toner( you might want
to deselect some of the items in the 8ontents section.
The Print te't in black selection causes color teCt %but not graphics' to print as blac+ on a
color printerV on a blac+9and9white printer( this option causes color teCt to print as solid blac+ instead of shades of gray %dithered'.
%( LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
The Print te't in black option has a different effect than the Convert colors to grayscale
option on the ;ptions G :ibre;ffice G Print page %5igure 3>'( which prints all graphics as grayscale on color printers. %=n blac+9and9white printers( color in graphics normally prints as grayscale.'
Gf you are printing double9sided on a non9dupleCing printer( you might choose to print only
left or right pages( then turn the stac+ o)er and print the other pages.
You can o)erride any of these defaults when printing a document. Clic+ File 9 Print( then use the options on the )arious pages of the #rint dialog.
&ip
4efault table options

=n the :ibre;ffice !riter G &able page( you can specify the default beha)ior of tables.
)igure %: 8hoosing default +able options -ome considerations&
Gf most of your tables will re@uire borders or headings( select those options. Gf most of your
tables are used for page layout( deselect borders and headings.
>umber recognition can be )ery useful if most of your tables contain numerical dataV
7riter will recogni2e dates or currency( for eCample( and format the numbers appropriately. 6owe)er( if you want the numbers to remain as ordinary teCt( this feature can be @uite irritating( so you will want to deselect it.
The Keyboard handling section specifies the distances that cells mo)e when you use
+eyboard shortcuts to mo)e them and the si2e of rows and columns inserted using +eyboard shortcuts.
The choices in the Jehavior of rows!columns section determine the effects that changes to
rows or columns ha)e on adJacent rows or columns and the entire table. You might need to test these selections to fully understand the effects.
%=
Change tracking options

Gf you plan to use the change9trac+ing feature of 7riter( use the :ibre;ffice !riter G Changes page to choose the way inserted and deleted material is mar+ed( whether and how attribute changes are mar+ed( and whether and how change bars are mar+ed in the margins.
)igure %3 8hoosing options for trac7ing changes
Compatibility options
.o you need to import 0icrosoft 7ord documents into $ibre=ffice 7riter? Gf so( you might want to select some or all of the settings on the :ibre;ffice !riter G Compatibility page %5igure A>'. Gf you are not sure about the effects of these settings( lea)e them as the defaults pro)ided by $ibre=ffice. 5or information about the settings not described below( see the 6elp. 2se printer metrics for document formatting Gf this option is selected( the printer specified for the document determines how the document is formatted for )iewing on screen. The line brea+s and paragraph brea+s you see on screen match those that apply when the document is printed on that printer. This setting can be useful when se)eral people are re)iewing a document that will e)entually be printed on a specific printer or when the document is eCported to #.5 %a process that uses T*dobe #.5U as the printer'. Gf this option is not selected( a printer9independent layout will be used for screen display and printing. Add spacing between paragraphs and tables Ain current documentB Gn $ibre=ffice 7riter( paragraph spacing is defined differently than it is in 0- 7ord documents. Gf you ha)e defined spacing between two paragraphs or tables( spacing is also added in the corresponding 0- 7ord documents. Gf this option is selected( 0icrosoft 7ord9compatible spacing is added between paragraphs and tables in $ibre=ffice 7riter documents.
&$
)igure %# 8hoosing compatibility options Add paragraph and table spacing at tops of pages Ain current documentB You can define paragraphs to ha)e space appear before %abo)e' them. Gf this option is selected( any space abo)e a paragraph will also appear if the paragraph is at the beginning of a page or column( if the paragraph is positioned on the first page of the document( or after a manual page brea+. Gf you import a 0icrosoft 7ord document( the spaces are automatically added during the con)ersion. Add paragraph and table spacing at bottom of table cells -pecifies that the bottom spacing is added to a paragraph( e)en when it is the last paragraph in a table cell. 2se as 4efault Clic+ this button to use the current settings on this page as the default in $ibre=ffice.
AutoCaption options
.o you want $ibre=ffice to automatically insert captions for tables( pictures( frames( and =$3 obJects that ha)e been inserted in a 7riter document?
>ote
You may not always want captions for e)ery table( for eCample( if you use tables for layout as well as for tables of data. You can always add captions to indi)idual tables( graphics( or other obJects %right9clic+ 9 Caption'.
Gf you do want automatic captions on one or more obJect types( use the options on the :ibre;ffice !riter 9 AutoCaption page. 3nable the chec+ boC neCt to an obJect you want to be automatically captioned %Picture in the eCample shown'.7ith the item highlighted( specify the characteristics of the caption. The supplied categories for captions are 4rawing( llustration( &able( and &e't. 6owe)er( you are not limited to the supplied categories. Gf you want to use another name %for eCample( Figure' for the caption label( type the re@uired term in the boC. Gn the eCample shown( Figure has been added to the list.
8hapter : Setting up Writer &*
*dditional information about numbering captions by chapter( character styles( frame styles( and other items on the AutoCaption page( is gi)en in later chapters in the Writer Guide.
)igure %% Setting up a new category for automatic captions on graphics
/ail /erge -.mail options

You can produce form letters using 7riter and then use the mail merge function to personali2e those letters and send them to a number of addresses ta+en from a data source( such as an address boo+. 0ail merged documents can be printed and mailed( or sent by e9mail. %-ee Chapter 11( "sing 0ail 0erge( for details.' "se the :ibre;ffice !riter G /ail /erge -.mail page to set up the user and ser)er information for sending form letters by e9mail. Gf you are not sure what information to put in any of the fields( consult your e9mail program or your Gnternet ser)ice pro)ider.
)igure %& Specifying settings for use when e"mailing mail"merged form letters
&: LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
Choosing options for 8&/: documents

You can configure $ibre=ffice to treat 6T0$ documents in 7riter differently than regular documents. 1' Gf the =ptions dialog is not already open( clic+ &ools 9 ;ptions. 2' Clic+ the eCpansion symbol %L sign or triangle' by :ibre;ffice !riterF!eb on the left9hand side of the =ptions dialog. * list of pages drops down. 6ere you can customi2e settings related to printing( formatting aids( )iew options( table defaults( the grid( and a default bac+ground for 6T0$ documents youWre wor+ing with in 7riter. The pages for Piew( 5ormatting *ids( rid( #rint( and Table are the same %or subsets' of the pages described abo)e under $ibre=ffice 7riter( but are for 7riter/7eb instead. The /ac+ground page allows you to specify the default bac+ground color for documents in 7riter/7eb.
Choosing language settings

You may need to do se)eral things to set the language settings to what you want&
Gnstall the re@uired dictionaries Change some locale and language settings Choose spelling options
nstall the re?uired dictionaries

$ibre=ffice automatically installs se)eral dictionaries with the program. To add other dictionaries( be sure you are connected to the Gnternet( and then use &ools 9 :anguage 9 /ore 4ictionaries ;nline. $ibre=ffice will open your default web browser to a page containing lin+s to additional dictionaries that you can install. 5ollow the prompts to select and install the ones you want.
Change some locale and language settings

You can change some details of the locale and language settings that $ibre=ffice uses for all documents or for specific documents. Gn the =ptions dialog( choose :anguage $ettings 9 :anguages. Clic+ the eCpansion symbol %L sign or triangle'. The eCact list shown depends on the ,nhanced language support settings %see 5igure AB'.
)igure %' LibreOffice language options@ with /sian language options enabled on the right side =n the right9hand side of the :anguage $ettings G :anguages page %5igure AB'( change the 2ser interface@ :ocale setting( 4efault currency( and the settings under Default languages for documents as re@uired. Gn the eCample( 3nglish %"-*' has been chosen for all the appropriate settings.
8hapter : Setting up Writer &3
Gf you want the language setting to apply to the current document only( instead of being the default for all new documents( select For the current document only. Gf necessary( select the options to enable support for *sian languages %Chinese( ,apanese( 8orean' and support for CT$ %compleC teCt layout' languages such as 6indi( Thai( 6ebrew( and *rabic. Gf you choose either of these options( the neCt time you open the =ptions dialog( you will see some eCtra pages under :anguage $ettings( as shown in the right side of 5igure AE. These pages %-earching in ,apanese( *sian $ayout( and CompleC TeCt $ayout' are not discussed here.
)igure %( 8hoosing language options
Choose spelling options

To choose the options for chec+ing spelling( choose :anguage $ettings 9 !riting Aids. Gn the Options section of the page( choose the settings that are useful for you. -ome considerations&
Gf you do not want spelling chec+ed while you type( deselect Check spelling as you type.
This option can also be deselected using the Auto$pellcheck button on the -tandard toolbar.
Gf you want grammar to be chec+ed as you type( you must ha)e Check spelling as you
type enabled too.
Gf you use a custom dictionary that includes words in all uppercase and words with
numbers %for eCample( /S!#$$'( select Check uppercase words and Check words with numbers.
Check special regions includes headers( footers( frames( and tables when chec+ing
spelling. 6ere you can also chec+ which of the user9defined %custom' dictionaries are acti)e( or you can add or remo)e user installed dictionaries by clic+ing the >ew or 4elete buttons. .ictionaries installed by the system cannot be deleted.
&#
)igure %= 8hoosing languages@ dictionaries@ and options for chec7ing spelling
Controlling !riterNs AutoCorrect functions

-ome people find some or all of the items in 7riterFs *utoCorrect feature annoying because 7riter changes what you type when you do not want it changed. 0any people find some of the *utoCorrect functions @uite helpfulV if you do( then select the rele)ant options. /ut if you find uneCplained changes appearing in your document( this is a good place to loo+ to find the cause. To open the *utoCorrect dialog( choose &ools 9 AutoCorrect ;ptions. %You need to ha)e a document open for this menu item to appear.' Gn 7riter( this dialog has fi)e tabs. 0any of the options are described in Chapter 3( 7or+ing with TeCt( in this boo+.
)igure &$ +he /uto8orrect dialog in Writer

8hapter : Setting up Writer &%
8hapter 3 Wor7ing with +e-t
ntroduction
This chapter co)ers the basics of wor+ing with teCt in 7riter( the word9processing component of $ibre=ffice. Gt assumes that you are familiar with the use of a mouse and +eyboard and that you ha)e read about 7riterFs menus and toolbars and other topics co)ered in Chapter 1( Gntroducing 7riter. 7e recommend that you also follow the suggestions in Chapter 2( -etting up 7riter( about displaying formatting aids( such as end9of9paragraph mar+s( and selecting other setup options. 7hen you ha)e read this chapter( you should +now how to&
-elect( cut( copy( paste( and mo)e teCt 5ind and replace teCt Gnsert special characters 5ormat paragraphs and characters Create numbered or bulleted lists Chec+ spelling and grammar( use the thesaurus( and choose hyphenation options "se the autocorrection( word completion( autoteCt( and line numbering features Trac+ changes( undo and redo changes( and insert comments $in+ to other parts of a document
$electing te't
/efore you can do anything with teCt( you need to select it. -electing teCt in 7riter is similar to selecting teCt in other applications. Gn addition to selecting bloc+s of teCt( you can select items that are not consecuti)e( and columns %)ertical bloc+s' of teCt.
$electing items that are not consecutive

To select nonconsecuti)e items %as shown in 5igure <1' using the mouse& 1' -elect the first piece of teCt. 2' 6old down the 8trl +ey and use the mouse to select the neCt piece of teCt. 3' 4epeat as often as needed. !ow you can wor+ with the selected teCt %copy it( delete it( change the style( and so on'. To select nonconsecuti)e items using the +eyboard& 1' -elect the first piece of teCt. %5or more information about +eyboard selection of teCt( see the topic T!a)igating and -electing with the 8eyboardU in the $ibre=ffice 6elp %)*'.' 2' #ress Shift9)(. This puts 7riter in T*dding selectionU mode. 3' "se the arrow +eys to mo)e to the start of the neCt piece of teCt to be selected. 6old down the Shift +ey and select the neCt piece of teCt. >' 4epeat as often as re@uired. !ow you can wor+ with the selected teCt. #ress ,sc to eCit from this mode.
&(
)igure &* Selecting items that are not ne-t to each other
$electing a vertical block of te't

You can select a )ertical bloc+ or TcolumnU of teCt that is separated by spaces or tabs %as you might see in teCt pasted from e9mails( program listings( or other sources'( using $ibre=fficeFs bloc+ selection mode. To change to bloc+ selection mode( use -dit 9 $election /ode 9 3lock Area( or press 8trl9)(( or clic+ on the $election icon in the status bar and select 3lock selection from the list.
!ow you can highlight the selection( using mouse or +eyboard( as shown in 5igure <2.
)igure &: Selecting a vertical bloc7 of te-t
Cutting, copying, and pasting te't

Cutting and copying teCt in 7riter is similar to cutting and copying teCt in other applications. You can copy or mo)e teCt within a document( or between documents( by dragging or by using menu selections( icons( or +eyboard shortcuts. You can also copy teCt from other sources such as 7eb pages and paste it into a 7riter document. To move %drag and drop' selected teCt using the mouse( drag it to the new location and release it. To copy selected teCt( hold down the 8trl +ey while dragging. The teCt retains the formatting it had before dragging. To move %cut and paste' selected teCt( use 8trl9; to cut the teCt( insert the cursor at the paste9in point and use 8trl9? to paste. *lternati)ely( use the icons on the $tandard toolbar.
&=
7hen you paste teCt( the result depends on the source of the teCt and how you paste it. Gf you clic+ on the Paste icon( then the pasted teCt +eeps its original formatting %such as bold or italics'. TeCt pasted from 7eb sites and other sources may also be placed into frames or tables. Gf you do not li+e the results( clic+ the 2ndo icon or press 8trl9A. To ma+e the pasted teCt ta+e on the formatting of the teCt surrounding where it is pasted&
Choose -dit 9 Paste $pecial( or Clic+ the triangle to the right of the Paste icon( or Clic+ the Paste icon without releasing the left mouse button.
Then select 2nformatted te't from the resulting menu. The range of choices on the #aste -pecial menu )aries depending on the origin and formatting of the teCt %or other obJect' to be pasted. -ee 5igure <3 for an eCample with teCt on the clipboard.
)igure &3 Paste Special menu
Finding and replacing te't and formatting

7riter has two ways to find teCt within a document& the 5ind toolbar for fast searching and the 5ind M 4eplace dialog. Gn the dialog( you can&
5ind and replace words and phrases "se wildcards and regular eCpressions to fine9tune a search 5ind and replace specific formatting 5ind and replace paragraph styles
2sing the Find toolbar

Gf the 5ind toolbar is not )isible( you can display it by choosing =iew 9 &oolbars 9 Find from the menu bar or by pressing 8trl9). The 5ind toolbar is shown doc+ed at the bottom of the $ibre=ffice window %Just abo)e the -tatus /ar' in 5igure <>( but you can float it or doc+ it in another location. 5or more information on floating and doc+ing toolbars( see Chapter 1( Gntroducing 7riter.
)igure &# Doc7ed position of )ind toolbar To use the 5ind toolbar( clic+ in the boC and type your search teCt( then press ,nter to find the neCt occurrence of that term. Clic+ the Find >e't or Find Previous buttons as needed. -electing the icon neCt to the arrows opens the 5ind M 4eplace dialog and +eeps the 5ind dialog open.
'$ LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
2sing the Find O Ceplace dialog

To display the 5ind M 4eplace dialog( use the +eyboard shortcut 8trl9. or choose -dit 9 Find O Ceplace from the menu bar. =ptionally( clic+ the /ore ;ptions button to eCpand the dialogV the button changes to Fewer ;ptions. To use the 5ind M 4eplace dialog& 1' Type the teCt you want to find in the Search for boC. 2' To replace the teCt with different teCt( type the new teCt in the 6eplace with boC. 3' You can select )arious options( such as matching the case( matching whole words only( or doing a search for similar words. %-ee below for some other choices.' >' 7hen you ha)e set up your search( clic+ Find. To replace the found teCt( clic+ Ceplace.
&ip
Gf you clic+ Find All( 7riter selects all instances of the search teCt in the document. -imilarly( if you clic+ Ceplace All( 7riter replaces all matches.
Caution
"se Ceplace All with cautionV otherwise( you may end up with some highly embarrassing %and hilarious' mista+es. * mista+e with Ceplace All might re@uire a manual( word9by9word( search to fiC.
)igure &% ,-panded )ind L 6eplace dialog
'*
Find and replace specific formatting

* )ery powerful use of 5ind M 4eplace ta+es ad)antage of the Format option. 5or eCample( you might want to replace underlined words with italics. =n the 5ind M 4eplace dialog %with /ore ;ptions displayed( as in 5igure <A'& 1' To search for teCt with specific formatting( enter the teCt in the Search for boC. To search for specific formatting only( delete any teCt in the Search for boC. 2' Clic+ Format to display the TeCt 5ormat %-earch' dialog. The tabs on this dialog are similar to those on the #aragraph format and #aragraph -tyle dialog. 3' Choose the formats you want to search for and then clic+ ;6. The names of selected formats appear under the Search for boC. 5or eCample( you might search for all teCt in 1>9 point bold Times !ew 4oman. >' To replace teCt as well as formatting( type the replacement teCt in the 6eplace with boC. To search for specific teCt with specific formatting %for eCample( the word hello in bold'( specify the formatting( type the teCt in the Search for boC and lea)e the 6eplace with boC blan+. To remo)e specific character formatting( clic+ Format( select the Font tab( then select the opposite format %for eCample( !o /old'. The >o Format button on the 5ind M 4eplace dialog clears all pre)iously selected formats. A' Clic+ Find, Find All( Ceplace( or Ceplace All.
"nless you plan to search for other teCt using those same attributes( clic+ >o Format to remo)e the attributes after completing your search. Gf you forget to do this( you may wonder why your neCt search fails to find words you +now are in the document.
&ip
Finding and replacing paragraph styles

Gf you combine material from se)eral sources( you may disco)er that lots of unwanted paragraph styles ha)e suddenly shown up in your document. To @uic+ly change all the paragraphs from one %unwanted' style to another %preferred' style& 1' =n the eCpanded 5ind M 4eplace dialog %5igure <A'( select $earch for $tyles. %Gf you ha)e attributes specified( this option is labeled ncluding $tyles.' The Search for and 6eplace with boCes now contain a list of styles. 2' -elect the styles you want to search for and replace. 3' Clic+ Find, Find All( Ceplace( or Ceplace All. 4epeat steps 2 and 3 for each style that you want to replace.
2sing wildcards and regular e'pressions

0ost users will be familiar with the concept of a wildcardMa special character that represents one or more unspecified characters. 7ildcards ma+e teCt searches more powerful but often less specific. $ibre=ffice enables you to use combinations of characters +nown as regular e-pressions which are more specific than simple wildcards but less so than a literal string. 4egular eCpressions are )ery powerful but not )ery intuiti)e. They can sa)e time and effort by combining multiple finds into one. Table > shows a few of the regular eCpressions used by $ibre=ffice.
&ip
The online help describes many more regular eCpressions and their uses.
':
To use wildcards and regular eCpressions when searching and replacing& 1' =n the 5ind M 4eplace dialog( clic+ /ore ;ptions to see more choices. =n this eCpanded dialog %5igure <A'( select the Cegular e'pressions option. 2' Type the search teCt( including the wildcards( in the Search for boC and the replacement teCt %if any' in the 6eplace with boC. !ot all regular eCpressions wor+ as replacement charactersV the line brea+ %\n' is one that does wor+. 3' Clic+ Find, Find All( Ceplace( or Ceplace All %not recommended'.
>ote
To search for a character that is defined as a wildcard( type a bac+slash % \' before the character to indicate that you are using it literally. 5or eCample( to find the teCt P+.**( you would conduct a search using \$5\.00.
+able #. ,-amples of search wildcards 4regular e-pressions5 -o find

*ny single character =ne of the specified characters *ny single character in this range *ny single character eCcept the characters inside the brac+ets The beginning of a word The end of a word * paragraph mar+er * line brea+
.se t!is expression

. \Cy2] \C9y] \^C]
Exa#ples and co##ents

b.d finds bad( bud( bid( and bed. b\iu]n finds bin and bun. \r9t]eed finds reed( seed( and teedV ranges must be in alphabetically ascending order. p\^a]st finds post and pest( but not past.
_Zstart end_Y ` _n
_Zlog finds logboo7 and logistics( but not catalog. log_Y finds catalog( but not logistics. .oes not wor+ as a replacement character. "se Qn instead. 5inds a line brea+ that was inserted with Shift9,nter. 7hen used as a replacement character( it inserts a paragraph mar+er.
nserting special characters

* special character is one not found on a standard 3nglish +eyboard. 5or eCample( a b c d e f g h i are all special characters. To insert a special character& 1' #lace the cursor in your document where you want the character to appear. 2' Clic+ nsert 9 $pecial Character to open the -pecial Characters dialog. 3' -elect the characters %from any font or miCture of fonts' you wish to insert( in orderV then clic+ ;6. The selected characters are shown in the lower left of the dialog. *s you select each character( it is shown on the right( along with the numerical code for that character.
&ip
.ifferent fonts include different special characters. Gf you do not find a particular special character you want( try changing the )ont selection.
'3
)igure && +he Special 8haracters dialog@ where you can insert special characters
nserting non.breaking spaces and hyphens

>on.breaking spaces To pre)ent two words from being separated at the end of a line( press 8trl9Shift when you type the space between the words. >on.breaking hyphen You can use a non9brea+ing hyphen in cases where you do not want the hyphen to appear at the end of a line( for eCample in a number such as 1239>A<E. To insert a non9brea+ing hyphen( press Shift98trl9minus sign. These are also a)ailable through nsert 9 Formatting /ark.
nserting en and em dashes

To enter en and em dashes( you can choose the 6eplace dashes option under &ools 9 AutoCorrect ;ptions %5igure EA on page ED'. This option replaces two hyphens( under certain conditions( with the corresponding dash. Gn Table A( the * and / represent teCt consisting of letters * to 2 or digits 0 to D. *nother means of inserting en or em dashes is through the nsert 9 $pecial Characters menu. -elect the 2R#*1% or 2R#*1) character %found in the General punctuation subset'( respecti)ely. * third method uses +eyboard shortcuts. These shortcuts )ary depending on your operating system( as described on the neCt page.
You can also record macros to insert en and em dashes and assign those macros to unused +ey combinations( for eCample 8trl9Shift9D and 8trl9Shift9<. 5or more information( see Chapter 1E( Customi2ing 7riter.
&ip
'#
+able % 2nserting dashes -ext t!at you type

* 9 / %*( space( hyphen( space( /' * 99 / %*( space( hyphen( hyphen( space( /' *99/ %*( hyphen( hyphen( /' *9/ %*( hyphen( /' * 9/ %*( space( hyphen( /' * 99/ %*( space( hyphen( hyphen( /'
+esult
* / %*( space( en9dash( space( /' * / %*( space( en9dash( space( /' *Q/ %*( em9dash( /' *9/ %unchanged' * 9/ %unchanged' * / %*( space( en9dash( /'
!indows =n most non9*sian installations of 7indows( hold down one of the /lt +eys and type on the numeric +eypad& 01A0 for an en dash or 01A1 for an em dash. The dash appears when you release the /lt +ey.
=n a +eyboard with no numeric +eypad( use a )n %)unction' +ey combination to type the numbers. %The )n +ey is usually to the right of the left9hand 8trl +ey on the +eyboard.' 5or eCample( on a "- +eyboard layout( the combination for an en dash should be /lt9)n9mIim and for an em dash it should be /lt9)n9mIiI.
&ip
:inu' 6old down the 8ompose +ey and type two hyphens and a period for an en dash( or three hyphens for an em dash. The dash appears when you release the 8ompose +ey.
The +ey that operates as a 8ompose +ey )aries with the $inuC distribution. Gt is usually one of the /lt or Win +eys( but may be another +ey( and should be user9 selectable.
&ip
/ac ;$ M 6old down the Option %/lt' +ey and type a hyphen for an en dash. 5or an em dash( the combination is Shift9Option9.yphen.
Formatting paragraphs
You can apply many formats to paragraphs using the buttons on the 5ormatting toolbar. 5igure <E shows the 5ormatting toolbar as a floating toolbar( customi2ed to show only the buttons for paragraph formatting. Gf you ha)e *sian or CompleC TeCt $ayout language support enabled( two additional buttons are a)ailable& $eft9to94ight and 4ight9to9$eft. The appearance of the icons may )ary with your operating system and the selection of icon si2e and style in &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice 9 =iew.
The use of paragraph styles is highly recommended as an alternati)e to manually formatting paragraphs( especially for long or standardi2ed documents. 5or information on styles and how to use them( see Chapters < and E in this boo+.
&ip
'%
Caution
0anual formatting %also called direct formatting' o)errides styles( and you cannot get rid of the manual formatting by applying a style to it. To remo)e manual formatting( select the teCt( right9clic+( and choose Clear 4irect Formatting from the conteCt menu. *lternati)ely( use 8trl9<.
1 =pen -tyles and 5ormatting 7indow # *pply -tyle % *lign $eft ) Centered
+ ( " 0 9
*lign 4ight ,ustified $ine -pacing& 1 $ine -pacing& 1.A $ine -pacing& 2
1* 11 1# 1% 1)
!umbering =n/=ff /ullets =n/=ff .ecrease Gndent Gncrease Gndent #aragraph format dialog
)igure &' )ormatting toolbar@ showing icons for paragraph formatting 5igure <B shows eCamples of the teCt alignment options.
)igure &( +e-t alignment options 7hen using Justified teCt( the last line is by default aligned to the leftV howe)er( if so desired( you can also align the last line to the center of the paragraph area or Justify it so that spaces are inserted between the words in order to fill the whole line. Gf you select the -'pand single word option( then whene)er the last line of a Justified paragraph consists of a single word( this word is stretched by inserting spaces between characters so that it occupies the full length of the line. 5igure <D shows an eCample of the effect obtained when setting each of these options.
)igure &= )our choices for the last line of a Iustified paragraph These options are controlled in the /lignment page of the #aragraph dialog( reached by choosing Format 9 Paragraph from the menu bar or by right"clic7ing in the paragraph and selecting Paragraph from the conteCt menu.
'&
)igure '$ Options for the last line of a Iustified paragraph
$etting tab stops and indents

The hori2ontal ruler shows both the default tab stops and any tab stops that you ha)e defined. Tab settings affect indentation of full paragraphs %using the ncrease ndent and 4ecrease ndent icons on the 5ormatting toolbar' as well as indentation of parts of a paragraph %by pressing the +ab +ey on the +eyboard'. "sing the default tab spacing can cause formatting problems if you share documents with other people. Gf you use the default tab spacing and then send the document to someone else who has chosen a different default tab spacing( tabbed material will change to use the other personFs settings. Gnstead of using the defaults( define your own tab settings( as described in this section. To define indents and tab settings for one or more selected paragraphs( double9clic+ on a part of the ruler that is not between the left and right indent icons to open the 2ndents L Spacing page of the Paragraph dialog. .ouble9clic+ anywhere between the left and right indent icons on the ruler to open the +abs page of the Paragraph dialog.
)igure '* Specifying tab stops and fill characters
''
* better strategy is to define tabs for the paragraph style. 4efer to Chapters < and E for more about paragraph styles.
&ip
"sing tabs to space out material on a page is not recommended. .epending on what you are trying to accomplish( a table is usually a better choice.
Changing the default tab stop interval

>ote
*ny changes to the default tab setting will affect the eCisting default tab stops in any document you open afterward( as well as tab stops you insert after ma+ing the change.
To set the measurement unit and the spacing of default tab stop inter)als( go to &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice !riter 9 1eneral.
)igure ': Selecting a default tab stop interval You can also set or change the measurement unit for rulers in the current document by right9 clic+ing on the ruler to open a list of units( as shown in 5igure E3. Clic+ on one of them to change the ruler to that unit. The selected setting applies only to that ruler.
)igure '3 8hanging the measurement unit for a ruler
Formatting characters
You can apply many formats to characters using the buttons on the 5ormatting toolbar. 5igure E> shows the 5ormatting toolbar customi2ed to show only the buttons for character formatting. The appearance of the icons may )ary with your operating system and the selection of icon si2e and style in &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice 9 =iew. Gt is highly recommended that you use character styles rather than manually formatting characters. 5or information on styles and how to use them( see Chapters < and E.
'(
1 =pen -tyles and 5ormatting 7indow # *pply -tyle % 5ont !ame ) 5ont -i2e + /old
( Gtalic " "nderline 0 -uperscript 9 -ubscript 1* Gncrease 5ont 11 4educe 5ont
1# 5ont Color 1% 6ighlighting 1) /ac+ground Color 1+ =pen Character 5ormat dialog
)igure '# )ormatting toolbar@ showing icons for character formatting

To remo)e manual formatting( select the teCt and choose Format 9 Clear 4irect Formatting from the menu bar( or right9clic+ and choose Clear 4irect Formatting from the conteCt menu( or use 8trl9< from the +eyboard.
&ip
Autoformatting
You can set 7riter to automatically format parts of a document according to the choices made on the Options page of the *utoCorrect dialog %&ools 9 AutoCorrect ;ptions'.
)igure '% /utoformat choices on the Options page of the /uto8orrect dialog
'=
The 6elp describes each of these choices and how to acti)ate the autoformats. -ome common unwanted or uneCpected formatting changes include&
6ori2ontal lines. Gf you type three or more hyphens %---'( underscores %_ _ _' or e@ual
signs %===' on a line and then press ,nter the paragraph is replaced by a hori2ontal line as wide as the page. The line is actually the lower border of the preceding paragraph. %*'( or plus sign %9'( followed by a space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph. * numbered list is created when you type a number followed by a period %.'( followed by a space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph. *utomatic numbering is only applied to paragraphs formatted with the Default( +e-t body or +e-t body indent paragraph styles.
/ulleted and numbered lists. * bulleted list is created when you type a hyphen %-'( asteris+
&ip
Gf you notice uneCpected formatting changes occurring in your document( this is the first place to loo+ for the cause.
To automatically format the file according to the options you ha)e set( choose Format 9 AutoCorrect and select or deselect the items on the submenu. !hile &yping *utomatically formats the document while you type. Apply *utomatically formats the document. Apply and -dit Changes *utomatically formats the file and then opens a dialog where you can accept or reJect the changes. AutoCorrect ;ptions =pens the *utoCorrect dialog %5igure EA'.
Creating numbered or bulleted lists

There are se)eral ways to create numbered or bulleted lists&
"se autoformatting( as described abo)e. "se list %numbering' styles( as described in Chapters < and E in this boo+. "se the >umbering and 3ullets icons on the paragraph formatting toolbar %see 5igure
<E'. This method is described here. To produce a numbered or bulleted list( select the paragraphs in the list and then clic+ on the appropriate icon on the toolbar.
>ote
Gt is a matter of personal preference whether you type your information first( then apply !umbering//ullets or apply these as you type.
2sing the 3ullets and >umbering toolbar

You can create a nested list %where one or more list items has a sub9list under it( as in an outline' by using the buttons on the /ullets and !umbering toolbar %5igure E<'. You can mo)e items up or down the list( or create subpoints( and e)en change the style of bullets. "se =iew 9 &oolbars 9 3ullets and >umbering to see the toolbar.
($
&ip
To mo)e a list entry up( together with all of its sub9entries( clic+ the Promote ;ne :evel !ith $ubpoints button.
1 # % ) +
/ullets =n/=ff !umbering =n/=ff !umbering =ff #romote =ne $e)el .emote =ne $e)el
( " 0 9 1*
#romote =ne $e)el with -ubpoints .emote =ne $e)el with -ubpoints Gnsert "nnumbered 3ntry 0o)e "p 0o)e .own
11 1# 1% 1)
0o)e "p with -ubpoints 0o)e .own with -ubpoints 4estart !umbering /ullets and !umbering
)igure '& Jullets and Dumbering toolbar Gf you create a nested list using the buttons on this toolbar( all the le)els of the list %up to 10' apply the same numbering %or bullet'. 6owe)er( in many circumstances you will want to use a combination of numbering formats and bullets when creating nested lists. -uch lists( with a miCture of numbering formats and bullets( can be easily configured as described in the following eCample. *dditional information on lists( in particular the techni@ue to create your own list style( is described in Chapter E( 7or+ing with -tyles.
7hen creating nested lists( one option is to enter all the list paragraphs first and apply the le)els afterwards. You can use +eyboard shortcuts to mo)e paragraphs up or down the outline le)els. #lace the cursor at the beginning of the numbered paragraph and press&
&ip
+ab Shift9+ab
.own a le)el "p a le)el
To insert a tab stop at the beginning of a numbered paragraph %that is( after the number but before the teCt'( press 8trl9+ab.
-'ample: configuring a nested list

7e will use a numbering style to produce the following effect& G. $e)el91 list item *. $e)el92 list item i. $e)el93 list item a' $e)el9> list item This eCample uses one of the supplied styles( Dumbering *. Gf you intend to reuse this type of nested list( you can also create a new style as illustrated in Chapter E( 7or+ing with -tyles. 1' =pen the -tyles and 5ormatting window and clic+ the List Styles icon at the top. -pecify /ll in the drop9down list at the bottom of the window. 4ight9clic+ on the Dumbering * style and choose /odify from the pop9up menu.
(*
)igure '' <odifying a list style 2' =n the !umbering -tyle dialog( go to the Outline page( where you will find that one style matches our re@uirements. Clic+ once on that style.
)igure '( 8hoosing a predefined outline"numbering style 3' To modify the layout of the list( use the Options tab %5igures ED and B0'. !otice that the pre)iew on the right shows the outline selected. Gn the Level boC on the left( select 1( then #( %( and ) and see how the information in the Dumbering and /fter boCes changes. "se the Options page to set different punctuationV for eCample( a period %full stop' after TaU on le)el > instead of a parenthesis. To ma+e the indentation at each le)el greater or less than the default( change it on the Position page. -elect the le)el( then ma+e any changes in the indentation( spacing( or numbering alignment. >' 4epeat for each le)el as re@uired( then clic+ ;6.
(:
)igure '= 8hec7ing the outline numbering for level"* list items
)igure ($ Dumbering style for level": list items

7ith outline numbering you can define different bullet styles for the different le)els of a bullet list. "se the Jullets tab of the /ullets and !umbering dialog %not shown' to select the basic style. 4eturn to the Options tab to customi2e the bullet for each indent le)el. 6ere you can set bullets to any character. -ee the Graphics tab for more bullets.
&ip
2sing footnotes and endnotes

5ootnotes appear at the bottom of the page on which they are referenced. 3ndnotes are collected at the end of a document. To wor+ effecti)ely with footnotes and endnotes( you need to&
Gnsert footnotes. .efine the format of footnotes. .efine the location of footnotes on the page( and the color and line styles for separator
lines.
nserting footnotesFendnotes
To insert a footnote or an endnote( put the cursor where you want the footnote/endnote mar+er to appear. Then select nsert 9 FootnoteF-ndnote from the menu bar or clic+ the nsert FootnoteF-ndnote 4irectly or nsert -ndnote 4irectly icon on the Gnsert toolbar. * footnote or endnote mar+er is inserted in the teCt and( depending on your choice( the cursor is relocated either to the footnote area at the bottom of the page or to the endnote area at the end of the document. Type the footnote or endnote content in this area.
(3
)igure (* 0sing the 2nsert )ootnote Directly icon on the toolbar Gf you use nsert 9 FootnoteF-ndnote( the Gnsert 5ootnote/3ndnote dialog %5igure B2' is displayed. 6ere you can choose whether to use the automatic numbering se@uence specified in the footnote settings and whether to insert the item as a footnote or an endnote. Gf you use the nsert FootnoteF-ndnote 4irectly or nsert -ndnote 4irectly icon( the footnote or endnote automatically ta+es on the attributes pre)iously defined in the 5ootnote -ettings dialog. You can edit an eCisting footnote or endnote the same way you edit any other teCt. To delete a footnote or endnote( delete the footnote mar+er. The contents of the footnote or endnote are deleted automatically( and the numbering of other footnotes or endnotes is adJusted automatically.
)igure (: 2nserting a footnote!endnote
4efining the format of footnotesFendnotes

To format the footnotes themsel)es( clic+ &ools 9 FootnotesF-ndnotes. =n the 5ootnotes/3ndnotes -ettings dialog %5igure B3'( choose settings as re@uired.
4efining footnote location and separator line

The location of footnotes on the page( and the color and style of the line that separates the footnotes from the teCt( are defined in the page style. Gf you are using se)eral page styles( and may ha)e footnotes on any of them( you need to define the footnote location and separator line on each of the page styles. Choose Format 9 Page from the menu bar or right9clic+ on a page and choose Page from the conteCt menu( to display the Page $tyle dialog. o to the )ootnote tab %5igure B>' and ma+e your selections( then clic+ ;6 to sa)e the changes.
(#
)igure (3 Defining footnote formatting
)igure (# Defining footnote location and separator line
(%
Checking spelling and grammar

$pelling
7riter pro)ides a spelling chec+er( which chec+s to see if each word in the document is in the installed dictionary. This can mean that proper names which are correctly spelled but which do not appear in the dictionary will be flagged as misspelled. *lso pro)ided is a grammar chec+er( which can be used separately or in combination with the spelling chec+er. Gf it is enabled before entering teCt( Auto$pellcheck chec+s each word as it is typed. Gf it is enabled after teCt is inserted it chec+s the teCt already in the document. * wa)y red line is displayed under any unrecogni2ed words. Gt can be enabled from the $tandard toolbar by clic+ing the *uto-pellchec+ icon ( or from &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :anguage $ettings 9 !riting Aids and selecting it in the ;ptions list. 4ight9clic+ing on an unrecogni2ed word brings up the *utoCorrect conteCt menu.
)igure (% /uto8orrect conte-t menu Clic+ing on one of the suggested words in the top section of the menu replaces the underlined word with the one selected. The choices in the center section of the menu are& gnore This one instance of the underlined word will be ignored while the document is open. =ther instances( if they eCist( will still be underlined. This setting is not stored with the document. gnore All *ll instances of the word in the document will be ignored( and the word will be added to the gnoreAll:ist user9defined dictionary. Add The word is added to a user9defined dictionary. Gf only one dictionary is enabled( no choice is offered here( and it is added by default to the $tandard dictionary. AutoCorrect -electing this opens the submenu( which repeats the suggestions for the word from the top section listing. -electing a replacement word here stores the word pair in the replacement table
(& LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
under &ools 9 AutoCorrect ;ptions 9 Ceplacement. The underlined word is replaced with the selected word. $pelling and 1rammar This opens the $pelling and 1rammar chec+er. -ee the eCplanations for this which follow. Gn the third section of the conteCt menu( language settings for the teCt can be set. These settings can be applied to the teCt( or to the paragraph containing the teCt.
$pelling and grammar

To perform a combined spelling and grammar chec+ on the document %or a teCt selection'( clic+ the $pelling and 1rammar button on the -tandard toolbar ( or press )'. Gn order to use this( the appropriate dictionaries must be installed. /y default( four dictionaries are installed& a spellchec+er( a grammar chec+er( a hyphenation dictionary( and a thesaurus. Gn operation the $pelling and 1rammar tool chec+s either the document from the cursor point onwards( or the teCt selection. Gt opens the $pelling and 1rammar dialog if any unrecogni2ed words are found( or if any of the built9in grammar rules are bro+en. The option to restart from the beginning of the document is offered on reaching the end of the document.
)igure (& Spelling alert using the Spelling and Grammar dialog The elements of the -pelling and rammar dialog are as follows.
>ot in dictionary The sentence containing the error is displayed in the pane. Gf an unrecogni2ed word is found it is highlighted. Gf the error is grammatical( then it is indicated in a pale colored bar below the &e't language setting %5igure BE'. The sentence or the word can be edited in the pane. $uggestions The pane contains suggested replacement words for the highlighted word. -elect a word and then select Change or Change All to replace it. 5or grammatical errors there is no multiple choice. -elect Change to accept the suggestion.
8hapter 3 Wor7ing with +e-t ('
&e't language The language to be used for the spell and grammar chec+ing can be selected from this list. Gf the spell chec+ is enabled for this language( a chec+ mar+ is displayed in front of it. gnore ;nce, gnore All, and Add -electing one of these buttons has the same effect as the item in the AutoCorrect conteCt menu detailed abo)e. Change 4eplaces the un+nown word with the suggested word. Gf the sentence was edited( the whole sentence is changed. 5or grammar( the suggested replacement is used to correct the teCt. Change All This replaces all instances of the word with the selected replacement word. AutoCorrect This beha)es in a similar fashion to AutoCorrect described abo)e. .owever( the word is not replaced and you must select one of the Change buttons. 2ndo This button is enabled when a change has been made to the sentence( in case you wish to re)erse the change. The button is not accessible if you use a Change button to replace a word. ;ptions -electing this opens the ;ptions dialogue boC where you can select user defined dictionaries and set the spell chec+ing rules.
Gt is recommended you run the -pelling and rammar chec+er twice on your document. * minor software problem may pre)ent it detecting all the grammar errors in a single pass.
>ote
1rammar
/y default( Check grammar as you type is enabled in &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :anguage $ettings 9 !riting Aids 9 ;ptions. *uto-pellchec+ must be enabled for this to wor+. Gf any errors are detected( they are shown underlined by a wa)y blue line. 4ight clic+ing on this line brings up a conteCt menu which may be similar to one of those those below.
((
The first entry in the menu informs you of the suspected bro+en grammatical rule. The second menu item in the left eCample is -'planations( which if selected opens your browser and ta+es you to a web page offering more information about the error. This entry is not always present in the conteCt menu( as seen in the right eCample. Gn the second section of the menu is the suggested correction. Clic+ing this changes the teCt to the suggestion. The eCample to the right appears blan+( but clic+ing here remo)es the eCtra space causing the error. Gn the third section of the menu you can select to ignore the indicated error( or to open the -pelling and rammar chec+er. This dialog is shown below. This eCample displays the "4$ which will ta+e you to a web site for more information on the error indicated.
)igure (' Dialog showing the 06L for e-panded e-planation Gn the final section of the menu( you can set the language for the selection or the paragraph. *dditional grammar chec+ing rules can be selected through &ools 9 -'tension /anager 9 -nglish spelling dictionaries 9 ;ptions.
)igure (( /dditional grammar chec7ing options
(=
2sing built.in language tools

7riter pro)ides some tools that ma+e your wor+ easier if you miC multiple languages within the same document or if you write documents in )arious languages&
-election of paragraph and character styles The functions in &ools 9 :anguage The use of language settings in =ptions The functions a)ailable on the status bar
The main ad)antage of changing the language for a teCt selection is that you can then use the correct dictionaries to chec+ spelling and apply the locali2ed )ersions of *utoCorrect replacement tables( thesaurus( and hyphenation rules. * grammar chec+ing dictionary may be a)ailable for the selected language. You can also set the language for a paragraph or a group of characters as >one A4o not check spellingB. This option is especially useful when you insert teCt such as web addresses or programming language snippets that you do not want to chec+ for spelling.
2sing paragraph and character styles

-pecifying the language in character and paragraph styles is the preferred method( because styles allow a greater le)el of control and ma+e changing the language much faster. =n the )ont tab of the #aragraph -tyle dialog( you can specify that certain paragraphs be chec+ed in a language that is different from the language of the rest of the document. -ee Chapter E( 7or+ing with -tyles( for information on how to manage the language settings of a style.
2sing &ools 9 :anguage

You can also set the language for the whole document( for indi)idual paragraphs( or e)en for indi)idual words and characters( from &ools 9 :anguage on the menu bar. For $election *pplies a specified language to the selected teCt. For Paragraph *pplies the specified language to the paragraph where the cursor is located. For all &e't *pplies the specified language to all of the document( including teCt inserted after ma+ing the change.
2sing language settings in ;ptions

*nother way to change the language of a whole document is to use &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :anguage $ettings 9 :anguages. Gn the Default languages for documents section %5igure BD'( you can choose a different language for all the teCt that is not eCplicitly mar+ed as a different language.
"nli+e the menu tool that applies to the indi)idual document( a change in the default language from the ;ptions dialog is a general change of settings of $ibre=ffice and will therefore apply to all the documents created in the future. Gf you want to change the language for the current document only( be sure to select the )or the current document only option.
Caution
=$
)igure (= Options available in the Languages settings The spelling chec+er wor+s only for those languages in the list which ha)e the symbol neCt to them. Gf you do not see this symbol neCt to your preferred language( you can install the dictionary using &ools 9 :anguage 9 /ore dictionaries online.
2sing the status bar

The language used for chec+ing spelling is also shown in the status bar( neCt to the page style in use. You can change the language for the paragraph or the entire documentV clic+ on the language in the status bar to pop up a menu of choices.
)igure =$ Language choices on the status bar !otice the 6eset to Default Language option on the menu and submenu. This is the fastest way to return a paragraph or the entire document to the default language set in &ools 9 ;ptions %described abo)e'.
2sing synonyms and the thesaurus

You can access a short list of synonyms from the conteCt menu %5igure D1'& 1' -elect a word or phrase( right9clic+( and point to $ynonyms on the conteCt menu. * submenu of alternati)e words and phrases is displayed. 2' Clic+ on a word or phrase to select it and replace the highlighted word or phrase in the document. The thesaurus gi)es a more eCtensi)e list of alternati)e words and phrases. To use the thesaurus& 1' -elect a word or phrase( and then choose &ools 9 :anguage 9 &hesaurus( or press 8trl9)'( or right9clic+ and choose &hesaurus from the $ynonyms submenu. 2' Gn the dialog( clic+ on a word or phrase within the numbered list of meanings to select it. 3' Clic+ Ceplace to ma+e the substitution. 5or eCample( when gi)en the word house( the thesaurus offers se)eral meanings( including dwelling( legislature( sign of the 3odiac( and others. -elect a replacement word from the list under the rele)ant meaning( so for dwelling( you will see dwelling( home( domicile( abode( and other alternati)es( as shown in 5igure D2.
8hapter 3 Wor7ing with +e-t =*
)igure =* Synonyms on the conte-t menu

Gf the current language does not ha)e a thesaurus installed( this feature is disabled.
>ote
)igure =: +he thesaurus offers alternatives to words
=:
8yphenating words
You ha)e se)eral choices regarding hyphenation& let 7riter do it automatically %using its hyphenation dictionaries'( insert conditional hyphens manually where necessary( or donFt hyphenate at all. 3ach choice has its pros and cons.
Automatic hyphenation
To turn automatic hyphenation of words on or off& 1' #ress )** to open the -tyles and 5ormatting window. =n the Paragraph Styles page( right9 clic+ on 4efault and select /odify.
)igure =3 <odifying a paragraph style 2' =n the #aragraph -tyle dialog( select the +e-t )low tab.
)igure =# +urning on automatic hyphenation 3' "nder .yphenation( select or deselect the Automatically option. >' Clic+ ;6 to sa)e.
Turning on hyphenation for the Default paragraph style affects all other paragraph styles that are based on Default. You can indi)idually change other styles so that hyphenation is not acti)eV for eCample( you might not want headings to be hyphenated. *ny styles that are not based on Default are not affected. 5or more on paragraph styles( see Chapters < and E in this boo+.
>ote
You can also set hyphenation choices through &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :anguage $ettings 9 !riting Aids. Gn Options( near the bottom of the dialog( scroll down to find the hyphenation settings.
=3
)igure =% Setting hyphenation options To change the minimum number of characters for hyphenation( or the minimum number of characters before or after a line brea+( select the item( and then clic+ the -dit button in the =ptions section. 8yphenate without in?uiry -pecifies that you will ne)er be as+ed to manually hyphenate words that the hyphenation dictionary does not recogni2e. Gf this boC is not selected( when a word is not recogni2ed( a dialog will open where you can manually enter hyphens. 8yphenate special regions -pecifies that hyphenation will also be carried out in footnotes( headers( and footers. 6yphenation options set in the !riting Aids dialog are effecti)e only if hyphenation is turned on through paragraph styles.
/anual hyphenation
To manually hyphenate words( do not use a normal hyphen( which will remain )isible e)en if the word is no longer at the end of a line when you add or delete teCt or change margins or font si2e. Gnstead( use a conditional hyphen( which is )isible only when re@uired. To insert a conditional hyphen inside a word( clic+ where you want the hyphen to appear and press 8trl9hyphen or use nsert 9 Formatting /ark 9 ;ptional hyphen. The word will be hyphenated at this position when it is at the end of the line( e)en if automatic hyphenation for this paragraph is switched off.
2sing AutoCorrect
7riterFs *utoCorrect function has a long list of common misspellings and typing errors( which it corrects automatically. 5or eCample( ThteU will be changed to TtheU. *utoCorrect is turned on when 7riter is installed. To turn it off( unchec+ Format 9 AutoCorrect 9 !hile &yping. -elect &ools 9 AutoCorrect ;ptions to open the *utoCorrect dialog. There you can define what strings of teCt are corrected and how. Gn most cases( the defaults are fine. To stop 7riter replacing a specific spelling( go to the Ceplace tab( highlight the word pair( and clic+ 4elete. To add a new spelling to the list( type it into the 6eplace and With boCes on the 4eplace tab( and clic+ >ew. -ee the different pages of the dialog for the wide )ariety of other options a)ailable to fine9tune *utoCorrect.
&ip
*utoCorrect can be used as a @uic+ way to insert special characters. 5or eCample( %c' will be autocorrected to a. You can add your own special characters.
=#
)igure =& 6eplace tab of /uto8orrect dialog
2sing word completion

Gf 7ord Completion is enabled( 7riter tries to guess which word you are typing and offers to complete the word for you. To accept the suggestion( press ,nter. =therwise( continue typing. To turn off 7ord Completion( select &ools 9 AutoCorrect ;ptions 9 !ord Completion and deselect -nable word completion. You can customi2e word completion from the Word 8ompletion page of the *utoCorrect dialog.
*dd %append' a space automatically after an accepted word. -how the suggested word as a tip %ho)ering o)er the word' rather than completing the teCt
as you type.
Collect words when wor+ing on a document( and then either sa)e them for later use in
other documents or select the option to remo)e them from the list when closing the document.
Change the maCimum number of words remembered for word completion and the length of
the smallest words to be remembered.
.elete specific entries from the word completion list. Change the +ey that accepts a suggested entryQthe options are right arrow( ,nd +ey(
,nter %6eturn'( Space bar( and +ab.
*utomatic word completion only occurs after you type a word for the second time in a document.
>ote
=%
)igure =' 8ustomi3ing word completion
2sing Auto&e't
"se *utoTeCt to store teCt( tables( fields( and other items for reuse and assign them to a +ey combination for easy retrie)al. 5or eCample( rather than typing T-enior 0anagementU e)ery time you use that phrase( you can set up an *utoTeCt entry to insert those words when you type TsmU and press )3. *utoTeCt is especially powerful when assigned to fields. -ee Chapter 1>( 7or+ing with 5ields( for more information.
Creating Auto&e't
To store some teCt as *utoTeCt& 1' Type the teCt into your document. 2' -elect the teCt. 3' o to -dit 9 Auto&e't %or press 8trl9)3'. >' Gn the *utoTeCt dialog( type a name for the *utoTeCt in the Dame boC. 7riter will suggest a one9letter shortcut( which you can change. A' Gn the large boC to the left( choose the category for the *utoTeCt entry( for eCample <y /uto+e-t. <' Clic+ the Auto&e't button on the right of the dialog and select from the menu either >ew %to ha)e the *utoTeCt retain specific formatting( no matter where it is inserted' or >ew Ate't onlyB %to ha)e the *utoTeCt ta+e on the eCisting formatting around the insertion point.. E' Clic+ Close to return to your document.
=&
)igure =( Defining a new /uto+e-t entry
&ip
Gf the only option under the Auto&e't button is mport( either you ha)e not entered a name for your *utoTeCt or there is no teCt selected in the document.
To sa)e a table %such as the formatted Tip abo)e' as *utoTeCt& 1' Create a table and format it the way you want. 2' -elect the table. 3' o to -dit 9 Auto&e't %or press 8trl9)3'. >' Type a name for the *utoTeCt( optionally amend the suggested shortcut( and choose the category for the *utoTeCt entry. A' Clic+ the Auto&e't button and select >ew %because you want the formatting of the table preser)ed'. <' Clic+ Close to return to your document.
nserting Auto&e't
To insert *utoTeCt( type the shortcut and press )3.
Printing a list of Auto&e't entries

To print a list of *utoTeCt entries& 1' Choose &ools 9 /acros 9 ;rgani5e /acros 9 :ibre;ffice 3asic. 2' Gn the <acro from list( eCpand :ibre;ffice /acros 9 1immicks. 3' -elect Auto&e't and then clic+ Cun. * list of the current *utoTeCt entries is generated in a separate teCt document. You can then print this document.
='
:ine numbering
$ine numbering puts line numbers in the margin. The line numbers are displayed on screen and are also printed. 5igure DD shows an eCample with numbering on e)ery line.
)igure == Line numbering e-ample Clic+ &ools 9 :ine >umbering and select the $how numbering option in the top left corner of the $ine !umbering dialog %5igure 100'. Then clic+ ;6.
)igure *$$ +he Line Dumbering dialog
=(
You can choose how many lines are numbered %for eCample( e)ery line or e)ery tenth line'( the numbering type( and whether numbers restart on each page. Gn addition( a teCt separator %any teCt you choose' can be set on a different numbering scheme %one e)ery 12 lines( for eCample'.
&racking changes to a document

You can use se)eral methods to +eep trac+ of changes made to a document.
0a+e your changes to a copy of the document %stored in a different folder( under a different
name( or both'( then use 7riter to combine the two files and show the changes you made. Clic+ -dit 9 Compare 4ocument. This techni@ue is particularly useful if you are the only person wor+ing on the document( as it a)oids the increase in file si2e and compleCity caused by the other methods.
-a)e )ersions that are stored as part of the original file. 6owe)er( this method can cause
problems with documents of nontri)ial si2e or compleCity( especially if you sa)e a lot of )ersions. *)oid this method if you can.
"se 7riterFs change mar+s %often called TredlinesU or Tre)ision mar+sU' to show where you
ha)e added or deleted material or changed formatting. $ater( you or another person can re)iew and accept or reJect each change.
>ote
!ot all changes are recorded. 5or eCample( changing a tab stop from align left to align right and changes in formulas %e@uations' or lin+ed graphics are not recorded.
Preparing a document for review

7hen you send a document to someone else to re)iew or edit( you may want to prepare it first so that the editor or re)iewer does not ha)e to remember to turn on the re)ision mar+s. *fter you ha)e protected the document( any user must enter the correct password in order to turn off the function or accept or reJect changes. 1' =pen the document. To chec+ whether it contains multiple )ersions( clic+ File 9 =ersions. Gf multiple )ersions are listed( sa)e the current )ersion as a separate document with a different name and use this new document as the re)iew copy. 2' 7ith the re)iew copy open( ma+e sure that change recording is turned on. The -dit 9 Changes 9 Cecord menu item has a chec+ mar+ neCt to it when recording is turned on. 3' Clic+ -dit 9 Changes 9 Protect Cecords. =n the 3nter #assword dialog( type a password %twice' and clic+ ;6.
&ip
*n alternati)e to steps 2 and 3 abo)e is to choose File 9 Properties 9 $ecurity tab( select the Cecord changes option( then clic+ Protect and enter the password.
Cecording changes
-ee Chapter 2( -etting up 7riter( for instructions on setting up how your changes will be displayed. 1' To begin trac+ing %recording' changes( choose -dit 9 Changes 9 Cecord. To show or hide the display of changes( clic+ -dit 9 Changes 9 $how.
&ip
6old the mouse pointer o)er a mar+ed changeV you will see a .elp +ip showing the type of change( the author( date( and time of day for the change. Gf ,-tended +ips are enabled( you will also see any comments recorded for this change.
==
2' To enter a comment on a mar+ed change( place the cursor in the area of the change and then clic+ -dit 9 Changes 9 Comment. Gn addition to being displayed as an eCtended tip( the comment is also displayed in the list in the *ccept or 4eJect Changes dialog %5igure 102'. To mo)e from one mar+ed change to the neCt( use the arrow buttons. Gf no comment has been recorded for a change( the +e-t field is blan+. 3' To stop recording changes( clic+ -dit 9 Changes 9 Cecord again.
&ip
-ee also T*dding other commentsU on page 102 for a way to annotate teCt that is not associated with a recorded change.
)igure *$* 2nserting a comment during change recording
Accepting or reDecting changes

To accept or reJect recorded changes( use either of these methods&
4ight9clic+ %conteCt' menu *ccept or 4eJect Changes dialog

The results of accepting or reJecting a change are as follows&
*ccepting a change incorporates the alteration into the document and remo)es the change
indication mar+ing.
4eJecting a change re)erts the document to its original state and remo)es the change
indication mar+ing. Cight.click Aconte'tB menu 1' Gf recorded changes are not showing( clic+ -dit 9 Changes 9 $how. 2' 6o)er the mouse pointer o)er a recorded change. * boC appears with information about the type of change( who made it( and the date and time. 3' 4ight9clic+ on the changed teCt. Gn the conteCt menu( choose Accept Change or CeDect Change. Accept or CeDect Changes dialog 1' Clic+ -dit 9 Changes 9 Accept or CeDect. The *ccept or 4eJect Changes dialog %5igure 102' opens( showing changes that ha)e not yet been accepted or reJected.
*$$
2' 7hen you select a change in the dialog( the actual change is highlighted in the document( so you can see what the editor changed. 3' Clic+ Accept or CeDect to accept or reJect the selected change. You can also clic+ Accept All or CeDect All if you do not want to re)iew the changes indi)idually. To show only the changes of certain people or only the changes on specific days or )arious other restrictions( use the )ilter page %5igure 103' on the *ccept or 4eJect Changes dialog. *fter specifying the filter criteria( return to the List page to see those changes that meet your criteria.
)igure *$: +he List tab of the /ccept or 6eIect 8hanges dialog
)igure *$3 +he )ilter page of the /ccept or 6eIect 8hanges dialog
*$*
/erging modified documents

The processes discussed to this point are effecti)e when you ha)e one re)iewer at a time. -ometimes( howe)er( multiple re)iewers all return edited )ersions of a document at the same time. Gn this case( it may be @uic+er to re)iew all of these changes at once( rather than one re)iew at a time. 5or this purpose( you can merge documents in 7riter. To merge documents( all of the edited documents need to ha)e recorded changes in them. 1' =pen one copy. 2' Clic+ -dit 9 Changes 9 /erge 4ocument and select and insert another copy of the document to be merged with the first. 3' *fter the documents merge( the *ccept or 4eJect Changes dialog opens( as in 5igure 102( showing changes by more than one re)iewer. Gf you want to merge more documents( close the dialog and then repeat step 2. >' 4epeat until all copies are merged. *ll recorded changes are now included in the open copy. -a)e this file under another name.
Comparing documents
-ometimes re)iewers may forget to record the changes they ma+e. This is not a problem with 7riter because you can find the changes if you compare documents. Gn order to compare documents( you need to ha)e the original document and the one that is edited. To compare them& 1' =pen the edited document. -elect -dit 9 Compare 4ocument. 2' The Gnsert dialog appears. -elect the original document and clic+ nsert. 7riter finds and mar+s the changes and displays the *ccept or 4eJect Changes dialog. 5rom this point( you can go through and accept or reJect changes procedure as described earlier.
Adding other comments

7riter pro)ides another type of comments %formerly called TnotesU'( which authors and re)iewers often use to eCchange ideas( as+ for suggestions( or brainstorm during the re)iew process. * bloc+ of teCt may be selected for a comment( or a single point may be selected at which the comment will be inserted. To insert a comment select the teCt( or place the cursor in the place the comment refers to and choose nsert 9 Comment or press 8trl9/lt98. The anchor point of the comment is connected by a dotted line to a boC on the right9hand side of the page where you can type the teCt of the comment. 7riter automatically adds at the bottom of the comment the authorFs name and a time stamp indicating when the comment was created. 5igure 10> shows an eCample of teCt with comments from two different authors. Clic+ somewhere on the page to show 7riter that you ha)e finished your comment. =therwise( you will not be able to mo)e away from this location. -elect &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice 9 2ser 4ata to configure the name you want to appear in the *uthor field of the comment( or to change it. Gf more than one person edits the document( each author is automatically allocated a different bac+ground color.
*$:
)igure *$# 8omments in LibreOffice 4ight9clic+ing on a comment pops up a menu where you can delete the current comment( all the comments from the same author( or all the comments in the document. This part of the menu is also a)ailable by clic+ing the down9arrow in the comment. 5rom this menu( you can also apply some basic formatting to the teCt of the comment. You can also change font type( si2e( and alignment from the menu bar. To na)igate from one comment to another( open the !a)igator %)%'( eCpand the Comments section( and clic+ on the comment teCt to mo)e the cursor to the anchor point of the comment in the document. 4ight9clic+ on the comment to @uic+ly edit or delete it. You can also na)igate the comments using the +eyboard. "se 8trl9/lt9Page Down to mo)e to the neCt comment and 8trl9/lt9Page 0p to mo)e to the pre)ious comment.
:inking to another part of a document

Gf you type in cross9references to other parts of the document( those references can easily get out of date if you reorgani2e the order of topics( add or remo)e material( or reword a heading( 7riter pro)ides two ways to ensure that your references are up to date( by inserting lin+s to other parts of the same document or to a different document&
6yperlin+s Cross9references
The two methods ha)e the same result if you 8trl9clic7 the lin+ when the document is open in 7riter& you are ta+en directly to the cross9referenced item. 6owe)er( they also ha)e maJor differences&
The teCt in a hyperlin+ does not automatically update if you change the teCt of the lin+ed
item %although you can change it manually'( but changed teCt does automatically update in a cross9reference.
7hen using a hyperlin+( you do not ha)e a choice of the content of the lin+ %for eCample
teCt or page number'( but when using a cross9reference( you ha)e se)eral choices( including boo+mar+s.
To hyperlin+ to an obJect such as a graphic( and ha)e the hyperlin+ show useful teCt such
as )igure &( you need to either gi)e such an obJect a useful name instead of lea)ing it as the default name %T raphics<U'( or you need to use the 6yperlin+ dialog to modify the )isible teCt. Gn contrast( cross9references to figures with captions automatically show useful teCt( and you ha)e a choice of se)eral )ariations of the name.
Gf you sa)e a 7riter document to 6T0$( hyperlin+s remain acti)e but cross9references do
not. %/oth remain acti)e when the document is eCported to #.5.'
*$3
2sing cross.references
To ensure that references update if you reword a heading( caption( or other lin+ed item( use automatic cross9references. -ee T"sing automatic cross9referencesU in Chapter 1>( 7or+ing with 5ields( for details.
2sing bookmarks
/oo+mar+s are listed in the !a)igator and can be accessed directly from there with a single mouse clic+. Gn 6T0$ documents( boo+mar+s are con)erted to anchors that you can Jump to by hyperlin+. 5or more about boo+mar+s( see T"sing boo+mar+sU in Chapter 1>( 7or+ing with 5ields.
2sing hyperlinks
7hen you type teCt %such as website addresses or "4$' that can be used as a hyperlin+( and then press the spacebar or the ,nter +ey( 7riter automatically creates the hyperlin+ and applies formatting to the teCt %usually a color and underlining'. Gf this does not happen( you can enable this feature using &ools 9 AutoCorrect ;ptions 9 ;ptions and selecting the 2C: Cecognition option. Gf you do not want 7riter to con)ert a specific "4$ to a hyperlin+( choose -dit 9 2ndo nsert from the menu bar or press 8trl9A immediately after the formatting has been applied. You can also insert hyperlin+s using the !a)igator and the 6yperlin+ dialog( and you can modify all hyperlin+s using the 6yperlin+ dialog( as described in this section.
6yperlin+s between documents can be set as relati)e or absolute( using the $ave 2C:s relative to option in &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :oadF$ave 9 1eneral.
>ote
4elati)e lin+ing is only possible when the document you are wor+ing on and the lin+ destination are on the same dri)e( and you need to create the same directory structure on your hard dis+ as will apply on the destination website. $ibre=ffice uses absolute path names internally( so when you mo)e your mouse cursor o)er a hyperlin+( the tooltip displays the absolute reference e)en when it is set to be a relati)e lin+.
,nsertin !yperlin&s usin t!e /avi ator

The easiest way to insert a hyperlin+ to another part of the same document is by using the !a)igator& 1' =pen the document containing the items you want to cross9reference. 2' =pen the !a)igator %by clic+ing its icon( choosing =iew 9 >avigator( or pressing )%'. 3' Clic+ the arrow neCt to the 4rag /ode icon( and select nsert as 8yperlink. >' Gn the list at the bottom of the >avigator( select the document containing the item that you want to cross9reference. A' Gn the >avigator list( select the item that you want to insert as a hyperlin+. <' .rag the item to where you want to insert the hyperlin+ in the document. The name of the item is inserted in the document as an acti)e hyperlin+.
*$#
)igure *$% 2nserting a hyperlin7 using the Davigator
,nsertin !yperlin&s usin a dialo

To display the 6yperlin+ dialog %5igure 10<'( clic+ the 8yperlink icon on the -tandard toolbar or choose nsert 9 8yperlink from the menu bar. To turn eCisting teCt into a lin+( highlight it before opening the dialog. =n the left hand side( select one of the four types of hyperlin+&
nternet& a web address( normally starting with http&// /ail O >ews& for eCample an email address. 4ocument& the hyperlin+ points to another document or to another place in the
presentation.
>ew document& the hyperlin+ creates a new document.
)igure *$&. .yperlin7 dialog showing details for 2nternet lin7s The top right part of the dialog changes according to your choice for the hyperlin+ type. * full description of all the choices( and their interactions( is beyond the scope of this chapter. 6ere is a summary of the most common choices used in presentations.
8hapter 3 Wor7ing with +e-t *$%
5or an 2nternet type hyperlin+( choose the type of hyperlin+ %choose between 7eb( 5T# or Telnet'( and enter the re@uired web address %"4$'. 5or a <ail and Dews type hyperlin+( specify whether it is a mail or news lin+( the recei)er address and for email( also the subJect. 5or a Document type hyperlin+( specify the document path %the ;pen File button opens a file browser'V lea)e this blan+ if you want to lin+ to a target in the same presentation. =ptionally specify the target in the document %for eCample a specific slide'. Clic+ on the &arget icon to open the !a)igator where you can select the target( or if you +now the name of the target( you can type it into the boC. 5or a Dew Document type hyperlin+( specify whether to edit the newly created document immediately or Just create it %-dit later' and the type of document to create %teCt( spreadsheet( and so on'. 5or a teCt document( -dit now is the more li+ely choice. The $elect path button opens a directory pic+er. The )urther settings section in the bottom right part of the dialog is common to all the hyperlin+ types( although some choices are more rele)ant to some types of lin+s.
-et the )alue of Frame to determine how the hyperlin+ will open. This applies to documents
that open in a 7eb browser.
Form specifies if the lin+ is to be presented as teCt or as a button. &e't specifies the teCt that will be )isible to the user. >ame is applicable to 6T0$ documents. Gt specifies teCt that will be added as a NAME
attribute in the 6T0$ code behind the hyperlin+.
-vent button& this button will be acti)ated to allow $ibre=ffice to react to e)ents for which
the user has written some code %macro'. This function is not co)ered in this boo+.
Editin !yperlin&s
To edit a hyperlin+( clic+ anywhere in the lin+ teCt and then open the 6yperlin+ dialog by clic+ing the 8yperlink icon on the -tandard toolbar or choosing -dit 9 8yperlink from the menu bar. 0a+e your changes and clic+ Apply. Gf you need to edit se)eral hyperlin+s( you can lea)e the 6yperlin+ dialog open until you ha)e edited all of them. /e sure to clic+ Apply after each one. 7hen you are finished( clic+ Close. The standard %default' beha)ior for acti)ating hyperlin+s within $ibre=ffice is to use 8trl9clic7. This beha)ior can be changed in &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice 9 $ecurity 9 ;ptions( by deselecting the option Ctrl.click re?uired to follow hyperlinks. Gf clic+ing in your lin+s acti)ates them( chec+ that page to see if the option has been deselected. To change the color of hyperlin+s( go to &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice 9 Appearance( scroll to 0nvisited lin7s and/or ?isited lin7s( select those options( pic+ the new colors and clic+ ;6. Caution& this will change the color for all hyperlin+s in all components of $ibre=fficeQthis may not be what you want. Gn 7riter and Calc %but not .raw or Gmpress'( you can also change the 2nternet lin7 character style or define and apply new styles to selected lin+s.
$witching between insert and overwrite mode

Gn insert mode( any teCt after the cursor position mo)es forward to ma+e room for the teCt you typeV in o)erwrite mode( teCt after the cursor position is replaced by the teCt you type. =nly the =)erwrite mode is displayed on the -tatus /ar. The shape of the cursor does not change.
*$&
7ith the +eyboard( press 2nsert to toggle between o)erwrite mode and insert mode. 7ith the mouse( clic+ in the area on the -tatus /ar that indicates the current mode in order to switch to the other mode. =)erwrite mode cannot be used with -dit 9 Changes 9 Cecord enabled.
Counting the words in a selection

7ord count for the document( and any selected teCt( is displayed on the -tatus bar. 7ord count and character count can be )iewed by choosing &ools 9 !ord Count or double9clic+ing on the word count field in the -tatus barV this information updates as you edit the document. -ee Chapter 2( -etting up 7riter( for information on setting word counting boundaries.
You can also see the number of words and characters %and other information including the number of pages( tables( and graphics' in the entire document in File 9 Properties 9 $tatistics.
Changing the case of selected te't

To @uic+ly change the case of teCt( select it( choose Format 9 Change Case from the menu bar( and then choose one of the following&
-entence case( where only the first word is capitali2ed %together with any proper nouns' lower case( where no words %eCcept proper nouns' are capitali2ed "##34 C*-3( where all letters are capitali2ed Capitali2e 3)ery 7ord( where e)ery word is capitali2ed t= $3 c*-3( which changes e)ery letter to the opposite case
There are also se)eral options that are used with *sian teCt. These are not strictly TCaseU changes( but are lumped together in the broader sense of replacing characters with different forms of the same letter. These options are hidden when *sian language support is not enabled. 7riter does not ha)e an automated way to do Title Case( where all words are capitali2ed eCcept for certain subsets defined by rules that are not uni)ersally standardi2ed. To achie)e this affect( you can use 8apitali3e ,very Word and then restore those words that were incorrectly capitali2ed.
*$'
8hapter # )ormatting Pages

0sing Page Styles@ +ables@ )rames@ 8olumns@ and Sections
ntroduction
7riter pro)ides se)eral ways for you to control page layouts&
#age styles Columns 5rames Tables -ections
This chapter describes these methods and some associated functions&
6eaders and footers !umbering pages Changing page margins

#age layout is usually easier if you select the options to show teCt( obJect( table( and section boundaries in &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice 9 Appearance and the options for paragraph ends( tabs( brea+s( and other items in &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice !riter 9 Formatting Aids.
&ip
Choosing a layout method

The best layout method depends on what the final document should loo+ li+e and what sort of information will be in the document. 6ere are some eCamples. .o not worry if all this does not mean much to you now. The techni@ues mentioned are all described in this chapter. 5or a boo+ similar to this user guide with one column of teCt( some figures without teCt beside them( and some other figures with descripti)e teCt( use page styles for basic layout( and use tables to place figures beside descripti)e teCt( where necessary.
**$
"se page styles %with two columns' for an indeC or other document with two columns of teCt where the teCt continues from the left9hand column to the right9hand column and then to the neCt page( all in se@uence %also +nown as sna7ing columns of teCt'. Gf the title of the document %on the first page' is full9 page width( put it in a single9column section.
5or a newsletter with a compleC layout( two or three columns on the page( and some articles that continue from one page to some place se)eral pages later( use page styles for basic layout. #lace articles in lin+ed frames and anchor graphics to fiCed positions on the page( if necessary.
5or a document with terms and translations to appear side9by9side in what appear to be columns( use a table to +eep items lined up so you can type in both TcolumnsU.
***
$etting up basic page layout using styles

Gn 7riter( page styles define the basic layout of all pages( including page si2e( margins( the placement of headers and footers( borders and bac+grounds( number of columns( and so on. 7riter comes with se)eral page styles( which you can build on or modify( and you can define new %custom' page styles. You can ha)e one or many page styles in a single document.
>ote
*ll pages in a 7riter document are based on styles. Gf you do not specify a page style( 7riter uses the Default page style.
To change the layout of indi)idual pages( either define a new page style or use one of the techni@ues %sections( frames( or tables' described later in this chapter. This chapter describes some uses of page styles. -ome other uses are discussed in Chapter <( Gntroduction to -tyles. The #age -tyle dialog is co)ered in detail in Chapter E( 7or+ing with -tyles.
*ny modifications of page styles( including the Default page style( apply only to the document you are wor+ing on. Gf you want the changes to be the default for all documents( you need to put the changes into a template and ma+e that template the default template. -ee Chapter 10( 7or+ing with Templates( for details.
&ip
nserting a page break without switching the style

Gn many documents %for eCample( a multi9page report'( you may want the teCt to flow from one page to the neCt as you add or delete information. 7riter does this automatically( unless you o)erride the teCt flow using one of the techni@ues described earlier. Gf you do want a page brea+ in a particular place( for eCample( to put a heading at the top of a new page( here is how to do it& 1' #osition the cursor at the point you want to start the neCt page. -elect nsert 9 /anual 3reak. 2' Gn the +ype section( Page brea7 is preselected( and $tyle is set at NDoneO. 3' Clic+ ;6 to position the paragraph at the start of the neCt page.
)igure *$' 2nserting a manual page brea7
**:
&ip
You can also insert a page brea+ as followsV 1' #osition the cursor in the paragraph you want to be at the start of the neCt page. 6ight"clic7 and choose Paragraph in the pop9up menu. 2' =n the +e-t )low page of the #aragraph dialog( in the Jrea7s section( select nsert. .o not select !ith Page $tyle. 3' Clic+ ;6 to position the paragraph at the start of the neCt page.
4efining a different first page for a document

0any documents( such as letters and reports( ha)e a first page that is different from the other pages in the document. 5or eCample( the first page of a letterhead typically has a different header( as shown in 5igure 10B( or the first page of a report might ha)e no header or footer( while the other pages do. This is simple to achie)e with 7riter. "sing the .efault %or any other' page style for your document( you can add a header/footer as you wish to the first page by deselecting the $ame content on first page option on the header/footer pages in the #age -tyle dialog( and then adding the header/footer. You can then add a different header/footer to the other pages of the document.
)igure *$( Letterhead with different headers for first and following pages
**3
Changing page orientation within a document

* document can contain pages in more than one orientation. * common scenario is to ha)e a landscape page in the middle of a document( whereas the other pages are in a portrait orientation. 6ere are the steps to achie)e it.
"ettin up a landscape pa e style

1' Gf you wish to +eep the margins the same as on other pages( then note the margin settings of the current page style. %You can find the margin settings on the #age -tyle dialog( by selecting the #age tab as shown in 5igure 110.' 2' Gn the -tyles and 5ormatting window( right9clic+ on :andscape in the list of page styles and choose 0odify from the pop9up menu. 3' =n the Organi3er page of the #age -tyle dialog %5igure 10D'( ma+e sure the De-t Style property is set to :andscape %to allow for ha)ing more than one se@uential landscape page'.
)igure *$= Dame the new style and set the ne-t page style to Landscape >' =n the Page page of the #age -tyle dialog %5igure 110'( ma+e sure the Orientation is set to :andscape. Change the margins so that they correspond with the margins of the portrait page. That is( the portrait top margin becomes the landscape left margin( and so on.
)igure **$ Set orientation and margins for a landscape page A' Clic+ ;6 to sa)e the changes.
**# LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
,nsertin a landscape pa e into a portrait docu#ent

!ow that you ha)e defined the Landscape page style( here is how to apply it. 1' #osition the cursor in the paragraph or table at the start of the page that is to be set to landscape. 4ight9clic+ and choose Paragraph or &able( respecti)ely( in the pop9up menu. 2' =n the +e-t )low page of the #aragraph dialog %5igure 111' or the Table 5ormat dialog %5igure 112'( select nsert %or 3reak for a table' and !ith Page $tyle. -et the Page Style property to :andscape. Clic+ ;6 to close the dialog and to apply the new page style.
)igure *** Specifying a page brea7 before a paragraph
)igure **: Specifying a page brea7 before a table 3' #osition the cursor in the paragraph or table where the page is to return to portrait orientation and change the paragraph properties or table properties so that With Page Style is the portrait page style that was used before the Landscape page style. >' Clic+ ;6 to return to the pre)ious portrait page style.
&ip
Gf you need the headers or footers on the landscape pages to be in portrait orientation( see T#ortrait headers on landscape pagesU on page 13E.
Adding title pages

7riter pro)ides a fast and con)enient way to add one or more title pages to a document and optionally to restart the page number at 1 for the body of the document. To begin( choose Format 9 &itle Page from the 0enu bar. =n the Title #age dialog %5igure 113'( you can ma+e a )ariety of choices&
Con)ert eCisting pages to title pages( or insert new title pages 6ow many pages to con)ert or insert
8hapter # )ormatting Pages **%
7here those pages are located Gf and where to restart page numbering( and what number to start with 7hat page style to use for the title page
"sing this techni@ue( you can insert se)eral Ttitle pagesU at different points in your document( for eCample to add decorati)e pages between chapters as well as title( copyright( and other pages at the beginning of a boo+.
)igure **3 /dding title pages to a document
Changing page margins

You can change page margins in two ways&
"sing the page rulersQ@uic+ and easy( but does not ha)e fine control. "sing the #age -tyle dialogQcan specify margins to two %fractional' decimal places. >ote
Gf you change the margins using the rulers( the new margins affect the page style and will be shown in the #age -tyle dialog the neCt time you open it.
To change margins using the rulers& 1' The shaded sections of the rulers are the margins %see 5igure 11>'. #ut the mouse cursor o)er the line between the gray and white sections. The pointer turns into a double9headed arrow. 2' 6old down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to mo)e the margin.
The small arrows on the ruler are used for indenting paragraphs. They are often in the same place as the page margins( so you need to be careful to mo)e the margin mar+er( not the arrows. #lace the mouse pointer between the arrows and( when the pointer turns into a double9headed arrow( you can mo)e the margin %the indent arrows will mo)e with it'.
&ip
**&
)igure **# <oving the margins To change margins using the #age -tyle dialog %5igure 110'& 1' 4ight9clic+ anywhere on the page and select Page from the conteCt menu. 2' =n the Page page of the dialog( type the re@uired distances in the <argins boCes.
2sing columns to define the page layout

You can use columns for page layout in these ways&
.efine the number of columns and their layout on a page( using page styles. Change the number of columns for eCisting teCt.
4efining the columns on a page

Gt is a good idea to define your basic page style %such as Default' with the most common layout to be used in your document( either single9column or multiple9column. You can then either define eCtra page styles for pages with different numbers of columns or use sections %described in T"sing sections for page layoutU starting on page 12E' for pages or parts of pages with different numbers of columns.
)igure **% Defining the number of columns on a page
**'
To define the number of columns on a page& 1' Choose Format 9 Columns to go to the Columns dialog %see 5igure 11<'( or go to the 8olumns page of the #age -tyle dialog( 2' Gn the Settings section( choose the number of columns and specify any spacing between the columns and whether you want a )ertical separator line to appear between the columns. You can use one of 7riters predefined column layouts( or you can create a customi2ed column layout. The pre)iew pane( located to the right of the Settings section( shows how the column layout will loo+. !otice the /pply to boC on the right9hand side of the dialog. Gn this instance( the changes are being applied to the Default page style. 3' Clic+ ;6 to sa)e the changes.
"pecifyin t!e nu#ber of colu#ns

Gn the Settings section( enter the number of columns into the Columns selection boC( or select one of the column layout icons.
%or#attin colu#n widt! and spacin

-elect the Auto!idth option in the Width and spacing section to create columns of e@ual width. To customi2e the width and spacing of the columns& 1' Gn the Width and spacing section( deselect the Auto!idth option. 2' Gn the Width selection boCes( enter a width for each column. 3' =n the Spacing line( enter the amount of space that you want between each pair of columns. Gf you specify more than three columns( use the arrow +eys on the 8olumn line to scroll among the columns.
%or#attin separator lines

To display separator lines between the columns& 1' "sing the Style drop9down list( select the line style from the three styles a)ailable. 2' "sing the Width control( select the width of line to use( settable from 0.2Apt to D.0pt. %1 pt j 1 point j 1/12 pica j 1/E2 inch j 12E/3<0 mm j 0.3A2E mm.' 3' "sing the .eight control( select the height of line re@uired( as a percentage of the column height. Pariable from 2Ak to 100k. >' Gf you entered a height of less than 100k( use the Position drop9down list to select a )ertical alignment for the separator lines. The )ertical9positioning options are& &op( Centered( or 3ottom. A' The line color can be selected from the 8olor drop9down listWs palette of colors.
&ip
To @uic+ly input the maCimum or minimum allowed )alue in an input boC( clic+ the current )alue and press Page 0p or Page Down respecti)ely.
Ceverting to a single.column layout

To re)ert to a single9column layout for the page style( go to the Settings section and either reset the number in the 8olumns boC to 1 or clic+ the single9column layout icon.
**(
Changing the number of columns for e'isting te't

You might want some parts of a page to ha)e one column and other parts of the page to ha)e two or more columns. 5or eCample( you might ha)e a page9width headline o)er a three9column news story. You can create columns and then type or paste teCt into them( or you can select some eCisting teCt and change the number of columns for displaying it. 7hen you select teCt and change the number of columns for that teCt %Format 9 Columns'( 7riter turns the selected teCt into a section( as described in T"sing sections for page layoutU on page 12E. 5igure 11< shows the Columns dialog for a selection. The /pply to boC on the right9hand side has $election highlighted and an eCtra option %-venly distribute contents to all columns' appears in the -ettings section.
)igure **& Specifying columns for a selection

You cannot select teCt on a two9column formatted page and change it to a single column using this method. Gnstead( you need to define a single9column page and then select the teCt you want to be in a two9column section on that page.
&ip
4istributing te't across columns

*s you add teCt to the section( you will see that the teCt flows from one column to the neCt. You can distribute teCt across the columns in one of two ways& -venlyQ7riter adJusts the length of the columns to the amount of teCt( so that all the columns are approCimately the same height. *s you add or delete teCt( the columns readJust. >ewspaper.styleQ7riter fills the columns one at a time( beginning with the first column. The last column may be shorter than the others. To distribute teCt e)enly( select the -venly distribute contents to all columns option in the Settings area. .eselect this option if you want to distribute teCt newspaper9style.
**=
&ip
Choose =iew 9 >onprinting Characters %or press 8trl9)*$' to display end of paragraph mar+ers %'. =ften( uneCpected beha)ior of columns is due to eCtra paragraphs that are normally in)isible to the user but are ta+ing up space.
)igure **' 4Left5 ,venly distributed columnsH 46ight5 Dewspaper"style columns.
2sing frames for page layout

5rames can be )ery useful when producing a newsletter or other layout9intensi)e documents. 5rames can contain teCt( tables( multiple columns( pictures( and other obJects. "se frames when you need to&
#osition something in a particular place on a page( for eCample( a logo or a Tstop pressU
news boC in one corner of a page.
*llow teCt on one page to continue on another page( somewhere more distant than the neCt
one( by lin+ing the content of one frame to another so the contents flow between them as you edit the teCt.
7rap teCt around an obJect( such as a photograph.

/ecause $ibre=ffice does not allow you to define page styles with recurring frames( consider doing some @uic+ s+etches of the basic page layouts you need( indicating the approCimate positions of different frames and their purposes. Try to +eep the number of different page layouts as low as possible in order to a)oid chaos in your design. #ay special attention to the positioning of frames. 0any of the predefined styles default to a center alignment. *lthough centering all frames loo+s reasonably good in most cases( it is rarely the best choice. =ne of the most )isually effecti)e ways to position a frame is to align its left margin with that of the paragraph abo)e it. To achie)e this effect( the frame is inserted in a blan+ paragraph of the same style as the paragraph abo)e. -elect nsert 9 FrameV in the Position section of the +ype page( select From :eft in the .ori3ontal selection boC to position the frame eCactly where you want it.
*:$
You also should thin+ about the type of wrap and the spacing between the frame and teCt. Gnstead of cramming a frame close to the teCt( use the Wrap tab to place some white space between them. You can format frames indi)idually or define and apply frame stylesV see Chapter E( 7or+ing with -tyles. -'ample: 2sing a frame to center te't on a page *lthough you can center teCt hori2ontally as part of a paragraph style or by using manual formatting( those methods do not wor+ for )ertical centering. To center teCt )ertically( you need to place the teCt in a frame( anchor the frame to a page or a paragraph( and then center the frame )ertically on the page. -ee T*nchoring framesU on page 123.
Creating frames
You can create a frame in se)eral ways( depending on your needs.
Choose nsert 9 Frame to create an empty frame. The 5rame dialog %5igure 11D' appears.
You can clic+ ;6 and come bac+ to customi2e it later( or you can set the frameFs characteristics at this stage.
-elect teCt or a graphic( choose nsert 9 Frame( and clic+ ;6 to create a frame containing
the selection. The selected teCt is automatically deleted from the normal teCt flow and inserted into the frame( and the 5rame dialog appears.
Gnsert a picture or other obJect by selecting nsert 9 Picture 9 From file or nsert 9 ;bDect
9 Stype of obDectT to start the process to insert a picture or obJect. The item inserted automatically appears in a frame( but the 5rame dialog does not appear.
-elect the nsert Frame /anually
button on the Gnsert toolbar %go to =iew 9 &oolbars Y nsert to display it'( select the number of frames in the drop9down menu( the mouse cursor changes to a plus %L' symbol( clic+ and drag the mouse to draw the frame.
)igure **( 0sing an icon on the 2nsert toolbar to create a frame 4eleasing the mouse button creates the frame& an area isolated from the main document. To add content to a frame( first deselect the frame by clic+ing somewhere else on the page. Then( clic+ inside the frame to place the teCt cursor there. !ow add content Just li+e you would on the main page. 7hen you are done( deselect the frame.
/oving, resi5ing, and changing frame attributes

7hen an obJect is added to 7riter( it is automatically enclosed in a frame of a predetermined type. The frame sets how the obJect is placed on the page( as well as how it interacts with other elements in the document. You can edit the frame by modifying the frame style it uses or by using
8hapter # )ormatting Pages *:*
a manual o)erride when a frame is added to the document. 5rame styles are discussed in Chapter E( 7or+ing with -tyles. To change the si2e or location of a frame( first select the frame( then use either the mouse or the 5rame dialog %5igure 11D'. "sing the mouse is @uic+er but less accurate. You might want to use the mouse for gross layout and the dialog for fine9tuning.
)igure **= )rame dialog You can re9si2e the frame manually by clic+ing on the green s@uares %si2ing handles' and dragging to the appropriate si2e( or start adding content to it %the frame will re9si2e automatically if( for eCample( you add a large picture to it' or go bac+ to the 5rame dialog and set the si2e and other characteristics. To change the location of the frame using the mouse( drag and drop one of the edges or put the cursor anywhere within the frame. %The G9bar cursor changes to a four9headed arrow when properly positioned for a drag9and9drop mo)e.' To change the si2e of the frame( drag one of the si2ing handles. .rag a handle on one of the sides to enlarge or reduce the teCt frame in one dimension onlyV drag a corner handle to enlarge or reduce it in both dimensions. These resi2ing actions distort the proportions of the frame. 6olding down the Shift +ey while dragging one of the handles ma+es the frame +eep the same proportions. You can open the 5rame dialog at any time by selecting the frame( right9clic+ing( and choosing Frame from the conteCt menu. To remo)e the default border on a newly created frame( open the 5rame dialog( go to the Jorders page( and under Line Style( select >one. *lternati)ely( you can assign a borderless style to the frameV see Chapter E( 7or+ing with -tyles( for information on frame styles.
>ote
.o not confuse a frameFs border with the teCt boundaries that are made )isible using the Piew menu %by selecting =iew 9 &e't 3oundaries'.
*::
)igure *:$ 6emoving the border from a frame
Anchoring frames
"sing the 5rame dialog %or by right9clic+ing and pointing to Anchor'( you can anchor a frame to a page( paragraph( or character( or you can anchor it as a character. &o Page The frame +eeps the same position in relation to the page margins. Gt does not mo)e as you add or delete teCt. This method is useful when the frame does not need to be )isually associated with a particular piece of teCt. Gt is often used when producing newsletters or other documents that are )ery layout9intensi)e. This method is also used to center teCt on a page. &o Paragraph The frame is associated with a paragraph and mo)es with the paragraph. Gt may be placed in the margin or another location. This method is useful as an alternati)e to a table for placing icons beside paragraphs. Gt is also used to center teCt on a page in documents which will be used in a master document %frames anchored to pages will disappear from the master document'. &o Character The frame is associated with a character but is not in the teCt se@uence. Gt mo)es with the paragraph but may be placed in the margin or another location. This method is similar to anchoring to a paragraph. As Character The frame is placed in the document li+e any other character and( therefore( affects the height of the teCt line and the line brea+. The frame mo)es with the paragraph as you add or delete teCt before the paragraph. This method is useful for adding a small icon in se@uence in a sentence. Gt is also the best method for anchoring a graphic to an empty paragraph so it does not mo)e around the page in uneCpected ways.
:inking frames
You can lin+ frames to each other e)en when they are on different pages of a document. The contents will automatically flow from one to the neCt. This techni@ue is )ery useful when designing newsletters( where articles may need to be continued on a different page.
>ote
You cannot lin+ from a frame to more than one other frame.
*:3
To lin+ one frame to another& 1' -elect the frame to be lin+ed from. 2' Clic+ the :ink Frames icon on the 5rames toolbar. 3' Clic+ the neCt frame in the series %which must be empty'. 7hen a lin+ed frame is selected( any eCisting lin+s are indicated by a faint connecting line( as shown in 5igure 121. 5rames can be unlin+ed by selecting the 2nlink Frames icon on the 5rames toolbar.
)igure *:* Lin7ed frames The height of a frame that is being lin+ed from is fiCedV you can change this height manually or by using the 5rame dialog( but it does not automatically adJust to the si2e of the contents %that is( the *uto6eight attribute is disabled'. =nly the last frame of a chain can adapt its height to the content. The Options page of the 5rame dialog %5igure 122' shows the names of the selected frame and any frames it is lin+ed to or from. You can change this information here. =n this page( you can also select options to protect the contents( position( and si2e of the frame.
)igure *:: Options page of the )rame dialog =n the .yperlin7 page %5igure 123'( you can specify the file for the hyperlin+ to open. This file can be on your machine( a networ+( or the Gnternet.
*:#
)igure *:3 .yperlin7 page of the )rame dialog To open this file( you must 8trl9clic7 in the area between the border and the teCt boundary. !ote that as the mouse cursor mo)es o)er any area within the frame boundary the hyperlin+ tooltip will be displayed( but it will only be acti)e at the edges.
The Wrap( Jorders( Jac7ground( 8olumns( and <acro pages of the 5rame dialog are the same as those for frame styles. 4efer to the Chapter E( 7or+ing with -tyles( for details.
2sing tables for page layout

7riterFs tables can ser)e se)eral purposes( such as holding data as you might see it in a spreadsheet( lining up material( and creating more compleC page layouts. 5or information about using tables of data( see Chapter D( 7or+ing with Tables. This topic describes how to achie)e some common layouts by using tables.
-'ample: Creating sideheads using tables

-ideheads and marginal notes are commonly used in documents from resumes to computer user guides. The main body of the teCt is offset to lea)e white space %usually on the left9hand side' in which the sideheads or notes are placed. The first paragraph is aligned beside the sidehead( as in 5igure 12>. Exa#ple of a side!ead
Gn some cases you may want to put only one or two paragraphs in the table itself and the rest of the teCt and graphics in ordinary paragraphs %formatted to line up with the paragraphs in the table' so that teCt and graphics will flow more easily from one page to another when you add or delete material. Gn other cases( you might put each paragraph in a separate row of the table and allow the table to brea+ between pages.
)igure *:# ,-ample of a sidehead

-ideheads can also be created by placing teCt in a frame using the <arginalia frame style( as described in Chapter E( 7or+ing with -tyles.
>ote
*:%
To create a table for use with a sidehead& 1' #lace the cursor where you want the table to appear and choose nsert 9 &able %8trl9)*:'. 2' Gn the Gnsert Table dialog( define a one9row( two9column table with no border and no heading. Clic+ ;6 to create the table.
)igure *:% Defining a two"column borderless table with no header 3' 4ight9clic+ on the table and choose &able from the pop9up menu. =n the 8olumns page of the Table 5ormat dialog( ma+e the columns the re@uired width.
)igure *:& Defining a two"column table to line up with te-t offset at *.: inches >' =n the +able page of the Table 5ormat dialog %5igure 12E'( in the Spacing section( ma+e the /bove and Jelow )alues the same as the +op and Jottom spacing you ha)e defined for ordinary paragraphs of teCt. Clic+ ;6 to sa)e your settings.
To chec+ the top and bottom spacing for ordinary paragraphs& 1' #osition the cursor in a paragraph and press )** %unless the -tyles and 5ormatting window is already open'. Chec+ that the -tyles and 5ormatting window shows paragraph styles %top left button'. 2' The current style should be highlighted. Gf no paragraph style is highlighted( select All $tyles in the bottom drop9down list. 4ight9clic+ on it and select /odify from the pop9up list. 3' o to the 2ndents L Spacing page and loo+ in the Spacing area for the )alues in /bove paragraph and Jelow paragraph .
&ip
*:&
)igure *:' Defining the space above and below a table You may also want to turn off number recognition so that 7riter will not try to format numbers if you want them to be plain teCt. To turn number recognition off& 1' 4ight9clic+ in the table and then clic+ >umber Format on the pop9up menu. 2' =n the !umber 5ormat dialog( ma+e sure the 8ategory is set to &e't. Clic+ ;6.
Gf you use this table format often( you may want to sa)e it as *utoTeCt( as described in Chapter 3( 7or+ing with TeCt. -elect the table %not Just the contents' to assign the shortcut.
&ip
)igure *:( Setting number format to +e-t
2sing sections for page layout

* section is a bloc+ of teCt that has special attributes and formatting. You can use sections to&
7rite9protect teCt 6ide teCt .ynamically insert the contents of another document *dd columns( margin indents( a bac+ground color( or a bac+ground graphic to a portion of your document
Customi2e the footnotes and endnotes for a portion of your document
*:'
Creating sections
To create a section& 1' #lace the cursor at the point in your document where you want to insert the new section. =r( select the teCt that you want to place in the new section. 2' 5rom the 0enu bar( choose nsert 9 $ection. The Gnsert -ection dialog opens. 3' Clic+ the $ection tab( if it is not already displayed. The Gnsert -ection dialog has fi)e tabbed pages.
"se the Section page to set the sections attributes. "se the 8olumns page to format the section into columns. "se the 2ndents page to set indents from the right and left margins of the section. "se the Jac7ground page to add color or a graphic to the sections bac+ground. "se the )ootnotes!,ndnotes page to customi2e the sections footnotes and endnotes.
*t any time before closing the dialog( you can reset a tabbed page to its default settings by clic+ing the Ceset button. %!ote( howe)er( that you cannot reset the Section page. Gf you wish to undo changes to the Section page( you must do so manually.' "se the Section page to set the attributes of the section.
)igure *:= 2nserting a section using the 2nsert Section dialog
/a#in sections
7riter automatically enters a name for the section in the name boC of the Dew section list boC. To change the name( select it and type o)er it. The name is displayed in the Sections category of the !a)igator window. Gf you gi)e your sections meaningful names( you can na)igate to them more easily.
*:(
Lin&in sections
You can insert the contents of another document into the section and then ha)e 7riter update it whene)er the other document is updated. This is called lin7ing the section to the other document. To lin+ the section to another document( follow these steps& 1' Gn the Lin7 section of the dialog( select the :ink option.
)igure *3$ Lin7ing sections 2' Clic+ the %...' button to the right of the )ile name field. The Gnsert dialog opens. 3' 5ind and select the document you want to insert and then clic+ the nsert button. The Gnsert dialog closes and the name of the selected document appears in the )ile name field. >' Gf you want to insert only a section of the selected document( select the desired section from the Section drop9down list.
>ote
The section must already eCist in the selected document. You cannot create a section in the selected document at this point.
You can update lin+s automatically or manually. -ee T"pdating lin+sU on page 13>.
Write$protectin sections
To write9protect the section so that its contents cannot be edited( select the Protect option in the Write protection area.
)igure *3* Write"protecting sections
>ote
7rite9protection protects only the section s contents( not its attributes or format.
0assword$protectin sections
To pre)ent others from editing the sections attributes or format( additionally protect the section with a password( as follows& 1' -elect the !ith password option. The 3nter #assword dialog opens. 2' Type a password in the Password field and then confirm the password by typing it again in the 8onfirm field. 3' Clic+ ;6. The 3nter #assword dialog closes. *nyone who tries to edit the sections attributes or format will be prompted to enter the password.
*:=
)igure *3: Password"protecting a section

#asswords must contain at least fi)e characters. The ;6 button remains inacti)e until you ha)e typed fi)e characters.
>ote
1idin sections
You can hide the section so that it will not be displayed on the screen or printed. You can also specify conditions for hiding the section. 5or eCample( you can hide the section only from certain users.
>ote
You cannot hide a section if it is the only content on the page or if the section is in a header( footer( footnote( endnote( frame( or table cell.
To hide a section( select the 8ide option in the .ide section of the dialog.
)igure *33 .iding sections To hide the section only under certain conditions( enter the desired conditions in the With 8ondition field. The syntaC and operators that you use to enter conditions are the same ones that you use to enter formulas. 5or syntaC and a list of operators( see 7riters online help under conditions. Gf the section is write9protected with a password( the password must be entered to hide or re)eal the teCt.
6iding teCt is not a secure way to stop someone else reading it. Gt will stop the casual reader but will not pre)ent someone who acti)ely wants to find out what you ha)e hiddene)en if it is password protected.
>ote
%or#attin a section into colu#ns

"se the 8olumns page of the Gnsert -ection dialog to format the section into columns. This page is )ery similar to the Columns dialog shown in 5igure 11< on page 11D. #lease refer to that topic for details.
,ndentin t!e section fro# #ar ins

"se the 2ndents page %5igure 13>'( to set indents from the right and left margins of the section.
*3$
)igure *3# 2ndenting sections 3nter the desired left9margin indent in the Jefore section boC. 3nter the desired right9margin indent in the /fter section boC. The pre)iew boC on the right9hand side of the page shows you how the section will loo+ with the indents applied.
(!an in t!e bac& round of t!e section

"se the Jac7ground page to add color or a graphic to the bac+ground of the current section. This page is similar to the /ac+ground pages for paragraphs( frames( tables( and other obJects in $ibre=ffice. 5or more information( refer to Chapter E( 7or+ing with -tyles.
(usto#i)in footnotes and endnotes in a section

"se the )ootnotes!,ndnotes page to customi2e the current sections footnotes and endnotes.
)igure *3% Setting footnotes and endnotes for sections Customi5ing footnotes Gf you want the sections footnotes to appear separately from the other footnotes in the document( select the Collect at end of te't option in the )ootnotes area.
*3*
To number the sections footnotes separately from the other footnotes in the document( and format the numbering( follow these steps& 1' Gn the )ootnotes section of the page( ma+e sure that the Collect at end of te't option is selected. 2' -elect the Cestart numbering option. 3' Gf you want the sections footnotes to start at a number other than 1( enter the desired starting number in the Start at number boC. >' -elect the Custom format option. A' 5rom the drop9down list of the Custom format option( select a numbering format for the footnotes. <' To add teCt to the selected numbering format( use the Jefore and /fter teCt input boCes. 5or eCample( if you want the footnote numbers to be preceded by the word T!oteU and followed by a colon( fill the Jefore and /fter fields li+e this&
)igure *3& Dumbering footnotes for sections Customi5ing endnotes Gf you want the sections endnotes to appear at the end of the section rather than at the end of the document( select the Collect at end of section option in the ,ndnotes area. To number the current sections endnotes separately from the other endnotes in the document( and format the numbering( apply the procedures described abo)e to the 3ndnotes settings.
$aving a new section

To sa)e a new section so that it appears in your document( clic+ the nsert button. The Gnsert -ection dialog closes and the new section appears in your document.
-diting and deleting sections

To edit a section( follow these steps& 1' 5rom the 0enu bar( choose Format 9 $ections. The 3dit -ections dialog %5igure 13E' opens. 2' -elect the section you want to edit by clic+ing its name in the list boC.
Editin section attributes

To rename the selected section( simply type o)er its name in the Section name boC. 5rom the 3dit -ections dialog( you can also edit the selected sections lin+( write9protect( and hide attributes. To learn how to edit these attributes( see& T$in+ing sectionsU on page 12D. T7rite9protecting sectionsU on page 12D. T6iding sectionsU on page 130.
*3:
)igure *3' ,dit Sections dialog
Editin t!e for#at of a section

To edit the format of the selected section( clic+ the ;ptions button. The =ptions dialog has four tabbed pages& 8olumns( 2ndents( Jac7ground( and )ootnotes!,ndnotes. The use of these pages is described earlier in this topic. To reset a page to the conditions in place when the dialog opened( clic+ the Ceset button. To sa)e your =ptions settings and return to the 3dit -ections dialog( clic+ ;6.
)igure *3( Options dialog for sections
*33
Deletin sections
To delete the selected section( clic+ the Cemove button.
>ote
7riter will not prompt you to confirm the deletion. To undo a deletion( clic+ the Cancel button.
2pdating links
You can set 7riter to update lin+ed sections automatically( and you can also update lin+s manually.
2pdating links automatically

To set 7riter to update lin+s without prompting you( or to turn off automatic updating( follow these steps& 1' Choose &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice !riter 9 1eneral. The dialog displays general teCt document settings. 2' Gn the 0pdate section of the dialog( under 0pdate lin7s when loading( select one of the following three options&
-elect Always if you want 7riter to update lin+s automatically( without prompting you( whene)er you open a document that contains lin+s. -elect ;n re?uest if you want 7riter to prompt you before updating lin+s. -elect >ever if you do not want 7riter to update lin+s.
3' Clic+ ;6 to sa)e your settings. The =ptions dialog closes.
2pdating links manually

* protected section cannot be updated manually. Gt must first be unprotected. To update a lin+ manually& 1' =pen the document that contains the lin+. 2' Choose -dit 9 :inks. The 3dit $in+s dialog opens. 3' The list in the 3dit $in+s dialog displays the names of all the files that are lin+ed to the current document. Clic+ the file that corresponds to the lin+ that you want to update. >' Clic+ the 2pdate button. The most recently sa)ed contents of the lin+ed file appear in the current document. A' To close the 3dit $in+s dialog( clic+ Close.
*3#
)igure *3= ,dit Lin7s dialog
Creating headers and footers

6eaders are portions of a document that always appear at the top of a pageV footers appear at the bottom of a page. Typically( headers display the title or chapter name of a document. Gn $ibre=ffice( headers are specified by page stylesV therefore( when inserted( all the pages with the same page style will display the same header. The option to ma+e the header/footer on the first page of a document different is a)ailable %see .efining a different first page for a document'. Chapter E describes how to format a header as part of the page style formatting. 5or the purpose of this eCample( we will insert a header in the Default pages using manual formatting. There are two ways to insert a header. The simplest method is to clic+ abo)e the top of the teCt area( then when the 6eader mar+er appears %5igure 1>0'( clic+ on the R. %To insert a footer( clic+ below the bottom of the teCt area to display the 5ooter mar+er( and then clic+ on the R.'
)igure *#$ .eader mar7er at top of te-t area 6eaders can also be inserted from the 0enu bar by selecting nsert 9 8eader 9 SPage $tyleT. The submenu lists the page styles used in your document. Gn addition( the submenu includes the entry All( which acti)ates headers on all the pages of the document regardless of their page style. 5or our eCample( select the 4efault menu item to acti)ate the headers only on the pages that use the Default page style. -imilarly( to insert a footer( choose nsert 9 Footer 9 SPage $tyleT.
The nsert menu can also be used for deleting a preeCisting header or footer for a page style. Gf that page style has a chec+ mar+ in front of it( it contains a header/footer( and clic+ing on it opens a message boC warning about deletion and as+s whether you want to delete the header or footer for that particular page style.
>ote
*3%
.epending on which option you choose( an area will appear at the top or bottom of the page. Gn this area you can enter teCt and graphics that will appear on e)ery page unless $ame content on first page has been deselected..
)igure *#* / page with a page header Gtems such as document titles( chapter titles( and page numbers( which often go into headers and footers( are best added as fields. That way( if something changes( the headers and footers are all updated automatically. 5ields are co)ered in Chapter 1>( 7or+ing with 5ields( but one eCample here may be useful. To insert the document title into the header on a .efault page style& 1' -elect File 9 Properties 9 4escription( enter a title for your document in the +itle area( and clic+ ;6 to close the dialog. 2' *dd a header % nsert 9 8eader 9 4efault'. 3' #lace the cursor in the header part of the page. >' -elect nsert 9 Fields 9 &itle. The title should appear on a gray bac+ground %which does not show when printed and can be turned off'. A' To change the title of the document( reselect File 9 Properties 9 4escription and edit.
Formatting headers and footers

Gn 7riter headers and footers are considered paragraphs and therefore you can format the header or footer teCt using the same techni@ues you use for formatting teCt in the main body of the document.
You can define styles for headers and footers so that you can @uic+ly obtain a consistent formatting in case you use se)eral page styles. 7riter includes three named header and footer styles& header/footer( left header/footer styles( and right header/footer styles. *ll siC are identical and are a)ailable for the user to modify.
&ip
You can format the layout of headers and footers using two different methods. The first method is to use the 6eader or 5ooter mar+ers that appear within headers and footers. 5or eCample( to use the 6eader mar+er& 1' Clic+ the top of the page. The blue 6eader mar+er will appear. 2' Clic+ the plus sign in the 6eader mar+er. The plus sign will change to a down arrow. 3' Clic+ the down arrow. >' -elect Format 8eader. This opens the #age -tyle dialog where you can change the margins( spacing( and height. A' Clic+ /ore to open the /order//ac+ground dialog where you can add borders( bac+ground colors( and bac+ground images to the header. You can also format headers and footers by modifying the page style at Format Y Page Y 8eader.
*3& LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
Caution
.o not use the /ac+ground and /orders tabs on the #age -tyle dialog to format headers. -tyle choices selected from those tabs will apply to the entire page rather than to the header.
Portrait headers on landscape pages

7hen you define a header and footer on a landscape page( they will be aligned with the long side of the page. Gf your landscape pages are going to be inserted between portrait pages( you might want the headers and footers to be on the short sides of the landscape pages( so the final printed product loo+s li+e the contents of the landscape pages ha)e been rotated D0 degrees on portrait pages. You can set up portrait headers and footers on landscape pages by using a tric+ in)ol)ing frames. These are a bit tedious to set up( but once you ha)e done so( you can copy and paste them to other landscape pages. This cannot be made part of the landscape page style. Gn the following eCample we want to insert a landscape page into our printed document( to ha)e the same header and footer( and margins( as our portrait pages. 7e will use an *> page si2e here. To set up portrait headers and footers on landscape pages& 1' !ote the margin settings for the portrait page which is the same as the landscape page will be( that is to say( for a right landscape page( the settings from a right portrait page %see the table' 7e now need to ma+e the landscape right and left margins 1 cm larger than the portrait top and bottom margins( respecti)ely. This difference allows for the eCtra space used by the portrait header and footer %0.A cm for the height of the header or footer and a 0.A cm gap between the header or footer and the main teCt'. 0ortrait pa e 2ri !t pa e3
Top margin /ottom margin $eft %inner' margin 4ight %outer' margin 1.A cm 1.A cm 2.B cm 1.B cm
Landscape pa e 2ri !t pa e3
4ight margin $eft margin Top margin /ottom margin 2.A cm 2.A cm 2.B cm 1.B cm
2' 7e will continue this eCample setting the frame for the footer. The procedure is the same for doing the header. *pply these margin settings in the Landscape page style. 3' Copy and paste the footer from the portrait page into a blan+ paragraph in the teCt. #aste or mo)e it into the landscape page. This teCt will then ha)e the )ooter style so the typeface( font si2e( and tab settings will match.
)igure *#: 8opy the footer@ paste@ and select it. >' -elect the teCt %including the fields' you Just entered. Choose Format 9 Character. =n the Character dialog( choose the Position tab and set 6otation ! scaling to #"* degrees %countercloc+wise'. !ote in the pre)iew pane that the tabs are remo)ed in this process. Clic+ ;6.
*3'
)igure *#3 6otating the footer te-t :'$ degrees A' 7ith the teCt still selected( choose nsert 9 Frame. Gn the 5rame dialog( select the +ype tab and enter the width( height( and hori2ontal and )ertical position for the footer. .eselect the *utomatic options in 7idth and 6eight if they are selected.
The width is the footer height ta+en from the 5ooter page of the portrait page style
dialog.
The frame height is obtained by simple arithmetic. The *> page9width is 21cm( minus
the sum of the top and bottom margins of 2.Bcm and 1.Bcm resulting in a frame height of 1<.>cm.
The hori2ontal position is the portrait page bottom margin. The )ertical position is the landscape page top margin.
)igure *## Defining the si3e and position of the footer frame <' Gf your footer has a line abo)e the teCt( as in this boo+( on the Jorders page( select a right border and specify the line width and spacing to the frameFs contents. E' Clic+ ;6 to sa)e these settings. The footer will now appear in the re@uired position and orientation. *ny fields will update.
*3( LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
B' /ecause tabs ha)e been remo)ed( insert the cursor in the frame( at the end of the teCt where the tab was( and insert as many spaces using the +eyboard space bar( as you re@uire for the layout to match that on the portrait page. 4epeat these steps %using appropriate settings' to set up a portrait header on the landscape page.
Caution
0a+e sure to return to the paragraph in the document from which you rotated the teCt( and return it to * degrees, or any teCt typed in this location will rotate.
)igure *#% )ooters in place for both page styles.
>umbering pages
This section describes techni@ues to insert page numbers and related information in a document. -ome basic +nowledge of page styles( which are fully described in chapters < and E( may be needed to follow some of the eCamples gi)en.
Preliminaries: fields
$ibre=ffice uses fields to manage page numbers. To insert a page number field( position the cursor where you want to insert the number and choose nsert 9 Fields 9 Page >umber. The page number appears with a gray bac+ground. The gray bac+ground denotes a fieldV although it is )isible on screen( it is not printed.
&ip
Gf you wish to turn off the gray bac+ground( choose =iew 9 Field $hadings %or press 8trl9)(5.
*3=
The page number field always displays the page number for the page where it is placed. Gf you see the words T#age numberU instead of a number( press 8trl9)=. This shortcut +ey toggles $ibre=ffice between displaying the )ield Dame %the )ariable' and the fields result %the data in the )ariable'.
>ote
5or a full introduction to fields( see Chapter 1>( 7or+ing with 5ields.
Preliminaries: insert and format a header

5or the purpose of this eCample( we will insert a header in the .efault page style pages using manual formatting. -ee TCreating headers and footersU on page 13A.
$imple page numbering

The simplest case is to ha)e the page number at the top of e)ery page and nothing more. To do this( put the cursor on the header and select nsert 9 Fields 9 Page >umber.
)igure *#& Page number inserted in the header !ow the correct page number appears on e)ery page.
Combining header te't and page number

There are a lot of interesting )ariations that you can apply without further +nowledge of page styles. 6ere are some suggestions&
4ight9align the header to ma+e the page number appear on the top9right. Type the word page before the page number field so the header reads page 1, page #(
and so on. This also re@uires using the Page Dumber field( discussed earlier %page 13D'. Justified( and page ' with right Justification( where C is the )alue of the Page Dumber field. Consider using a %right9aligned' tab to separate the title from the page number.
*dd the document title so the header reads( for eCample& Peter<s Favourite Poems( left $ibre=ffice also has a Page 8ount field % nsert 9 Fields 9 Page Count'. "sing it( you
could( for eCample( ha)e a header that reads page # of 1#. These )ariations are all illustrated in 5igure 1>E.
*#$
)igure *#' ?ariations on the simple page numbering method
Changing the number format

0any more )ariations are possible. 5or eCample( you can set the page number to display in 4oman numerals. To do that( you can double9clic+ on the page number and select the desired formatV howe)er( a better choice is to specify the format of numbers in the page style as eCplained here. 4ight9clic+ in the teCt area of the page and select #age from the conteCt menu. =n the #age page of the #age -tyle dialog( in the Layout settings section( select i, ii, iii, ... from the )ormat drop9down list to use lowercase numerals.
)igure *#( 8hanging format of page numbers
>umbering the first page something other than 1

-ometimes you may want to start a document with a page number greater than 1. 5or eCample( you may be writing a boo+( with each chapter in a separate file. Chapter 1 may start with page 1( but Chapter 2 could begin with page 2A and Chapter 3 with page A1. 5ollow these instructions to start the page numbering in a document at a number greater than 1. %These instructions are for a page number in a footer( but you could use a header instead.'
&ip
.o not set a starting page number that is an e)en number because you will end up with a blan+ page before the first page when you print the file or eCport it as a #.5.
1' Choose nsert 9 Footer 9 Spage styleT to acti)ate the footer. Gf the page style already has footers acti)e( there will be a chec+ mar+ against its name. Gn which case clic+ in the footer
*#*
2' 3' >' A'
<'
area of the page without clic+ing on the page style. Gf you do clic+ the chec+ed page style name( select >o in the warning dialog if you do not want to remo)e any footer teCt already in place( or Jes if you do. Clic+ in the footer area. The cursor is now in the footer. To insert the page number( choose nsert 9 Fields 9 Page >umber. The page number will be 1. Clic+ in the first paragraph in the teCt area. Choose Format 9 Paragraph %or right9clic+ and choose Paragraph from the conteCt menu'( to display the #aragraph dialog. =n the +e-t )low page( in the Jrea7s section( select nsert and select Page in the +ype drop9down list. -elect !ith Page $tyle and the page style you are using for the first page of the document. !ote that you are not inserting a page brea+( but a brea+ in the page numbering. The Page number field is now acti)e. Type the page number you want to start with. Clic+ ;6 to close the #aragraph dialog.
>umbering pages by chapter

Technical documents often include the chapter number with the page number in the header or footer. 5or eCample( 191( 192( 193( ...V 291( 292( 293( ... To set up this type of page numbering in $ibre=ffice( you need to do three things& 1' 3nsure that your chapter titles are all identified by the same paragraph style( for eCample( the 6eading1 style. 2' "se &ools 9 ;utline >umbering to tell $ibre=ffice what paragraph style you are using for $e)el 1 in your outline( and specify T1(2(3U in the !umber boC.
)igure *#= Specifying paragraph style and numbering for chapter titles 3' Gnsert the chapter number in your document. To do this& a' b' c' #lace the cursor in the header or footer Just before the page number you inserted earlier( and choose nsert 9 Fields 9 ;ther from the menu bar. =n the 5ields dialog %5igure 1A0'( go to the Document page. -elect Chapter in the +ype list( Chapter number in the )ormat list( and 1 in the Layer boC. Clic+ nsert. Type a hyphen or other punctuation between the chapter number and the page number.
*#:
)igure *%$ 2nserting a chapter number field 5or more information( see TChoosing paragraph styles for outline le)elsU and TGncluding chapter or section information in page headersU in Chapter E( 7or+ing with -tyles.
Cestarting page numbering

=ften you will want to restart the page numbering at 1( for eCample( on the page following a title page or a table of contents. Gn addition( many documents ha)e the front matter %such as the table of contents' numbered with 4oman numerals and the main body of the document numbered in *rabic numerals( starting with 1. You can restart page numbering in two ways. /ethod 1: 1' #lace the cursor in the first paragraph of the new page %be aware a heading is a paragraph'. 2' Choose Format 9 Paragraph. 3' =n the +e-t )low page of the #aragraph dialog %5igure 111 on page 11A'( select nsert in the Jrea7s area. >' Gn the +ype drop9down list( select Page. A' Gn the Position drop9down list( select 3efore or After to position where you want to insert the page numbering brea+. <' -elect !ith Page $tyle and specify the page style to use. E' -pecify the page number to start from and then clic+ ;6. This does not insert a new page. /ethod #: 1' #lace the cursor in the first paragraph of the new page. 2' Choose nsert 9 /anual break. 3' Page break is the default selected on the Gnsert /rea+ dialog.
*#3
)igure *%* 6estarting page numbering after a manual page brea7 >' Choose the re@uired page in the Style drop9down list. A' -elect Change page number. <' -pecify the page number to start from and then clic+ ;6. This does insert a new page.
Exa#ple4 +estart pa e nu#berin 4 a preface

* standard preface has the following properties&
#age numbers are displayed in 4oman numerals %i( ii( iii( i)( '. *fter the preface( the document starts on a Default page. The page number resets to 1( and the number format becomes *rabic %1( 2( 3( >( '.
4esetting the page number re@uires page brea+s. 5irst( do the preliminary wor+ for the Preface style& 1' Create a new page style and name it Preface. 2' -et its De-t Style to Preface because a preface could span multiple pages. 3' *dd a header to Preface and insert the Page Dumber field. 0a+e the page numbers display as 4oman numerals %i( ii( iii( i)( '& a' =pen the page style window for Preface %if not already open' and clic+ the 8eader tab. -elect 8eader on under .eader. b' Clic+ the Page tab %5igure 1A2'. "nder Layout settings( in the )ormat drop9down list( set the format to i, ii, iii, . Clic+ ;6 to close the dialog. *fter the preface is written( we are ready to restart the page numbering in the main body of the document to *rabic numerals. 5ollow these steps& 1' 0a+e an empty paragraph at the )ery end of the preface. 2' #ut the cursor on the blan+ line. 3' Choose nsert 9 /anual 3reak. >' -elect Page break and choose the Default style. A' -elect the Change page number option and set the new )alue to 1. Clic+ ;6 to close the dialog. These settings are shown in 5igure 1A3.
>ote
You cannot assign an odd page number to a left page or an e)en page number to a right page. $ibre=ffice strongly adheres to the con)ention that odd page numbers go on right9hand pages and e)en page numbers on left9hand pages.
*##
)igure *%: Set page number format to 6oman numerals.
)igure *%3 Set the new page number to * and the page style to Default. This change is also reflected on the status bar. The Page section of the status bar now shows the page number( the se@uence number and the total page count %the graphic shows the cursor location is in #age 1( and that it is the third page of siC in the document'.
)igure *%# Page number in the status bar
Problems with restarting page numbering

4estarting page numbering may lead to two problems.
The Statistics page in the documentFs Properties %File 9 Properties' always displays the
total number of pages in the document( which may not be what you want to appear in the Page 8ount field.
7hen page numbering is restarted( $ibre=ffice always ma+es odd9numbered pages to be

on the right and e)en9numbered pages to be on the left. Gt does this by inserting a blan+ page( if necessary. -ometimes this blan+ page is not desired( particularly when creating #.5s or when printing single sided.
*#%
"olvin t!e pa e count proble#

-uppose you +now eCactly how many pages are not to be included in the page count. %You want one page to be eCcluded in the page count for the following eCample.' Gnstead of inserting a Page 8ount field( you can do the following& 1' #osition the cursor where you want the page count to appear. 2' #ress ): to open the formula bar( Just abo)e the hori2ontal ruler in the main 7riter window %see 5igure 1AA'. 3' *fter the e@ual sign( type page1. Gf you want to eCclude se)eral pages( substitute the number of eCcluded pages for 1 in the formula. >' #ress ,nter to close the formula bar and insert the resulting field into the document.
)igure *%% )ormula bar Gf you do not +now the total number of pages in ad)ance( then one approach is to create a boo+mar+ on the last page and then insert a cross reference to it. To create a boo+mar+ on the last page& 1' o to the last page %8trl9,nd'. 2' Choose nsert 9 3ookmark. 3' Gn the Gnsert /oo+mar+ dialog( type a name for the boo+mar+( for eCample LastPage. Clic+ ;6.
)igure *%& 2nserting a boo7mar7 To insert a cross9reference to the last page in the header or footer where you want to refer to the total number of pages& 1' #osition the cursor at the desired locationfor eCample after the space added after of in the header or footer( as in page '' of yy. 2' Choose nsert 9 Cross.reference. 3' =n the 8ross"references page of the 5ields dialog %5igure 1AE'( select 3ookmarks in the +ype column and :astPage in the Selection column. :astPage now appears in the Dame boC. >' Gn the 2nsert 6eference to boC( select As page style. Clic+ nsert.
*#&
>ote
.o not delete the boo+mar+ at the end of the document. Gf you do( the cross9 reference will not wor+. Gf a field( such as a cross9reference( does not automatically update( press )=.
)igure *%' 2nserting a cross"reference to a boo7mar7 on the last page of a document
4efining borders and backgrounds

You can apply borders and bac+grounds to many elements in 7riter. #aragraphs( pages( frames( sections( page styles( paragraph styles( and frame styles can include both borders and bac+groundsV character styles( tables of contents( and indeCes can include bac+grounds only. The dialog pages for borders and bac+grounds are similar in each case. To illustrate their use( we will define a border and bac+ground for a teCt frame.
#age bac+grounds fill only the area within the margins( including the header or footer %if any'. To eCtend the bac+ground color or graphic into the margins( you need to define a frame of appropriate si2e and position( anchor it to the page or a paragraph( and send it to the bac+ground. 5or more about anchoring frames( see Chapter B( 7or+ing with raphics.
&ip
Adding a border
To begin( select the frame( right9clic+( and choose 5rame from the conteCt menu. -elect the Jorders tab. /orders ha)e three components& where they go( what they loo+ li+e( and how much space is left around them.
Line arrangement specifies where the borders go. 7riter pro)ides fi)e default arrangements but you can Just as easily clic+ on the line you want to customi2e in the 0ser" defined area to get eCactly what you want. 3ach line can be indi)idually formatted.
*#'
Line specifies what the border loo+s li+e& the style and color. There are a number of different styles and colors to choose from. The $ine -tyle and Color will apply to those borders highlighted by a pair of blac+ arrows in the "ser9defined map on the left hand side of the dialog. Spacing to contents specifies how much space to lea)e between the border and the contents of the element. -paces can be specified to the left( right( abo)e( and below. Chec+ $ynchroni5e to ha)e the same spacing for all four sides. This spacing is li+e a padding and it is not factored in when calculating the teCt measurements. Shadow style properties always apply to the whole element. * shadow has three components& where it is( how far from the element it is cast( and what color it is.
)igure *%( )rame dialog Jorders page
Adding color to the background

Gn the 5rame dialog( choose the /ac+ground page %5igure 1AD'. 6ere you can add color or a graphic. To add color to the bac+ground( select from the color grid. You can adJust the transparency of the color to ma+e any teCt easier to read.
Adding a graphic to the background

To add a graphic to the bac+ground& 1' 5rom the /s drop9down list on the /ac+ground page( select 1raphic. The page now displays the graphics options( as shown in 5igure 1AD. 2' Clic+ the 3rowse button. The 5ind raphics dialog opens. 3' 5ind the file you want and then clic+ the ;pen button. The 5ind raphics dialog closes and the selected graphic appears in the pre)iew boC on the right9hand side of the Jac7ground tab. %Gf you do not see the graphic( select the Preview option.' >' To embed the graphic in your document( deselect :ink. To lin+ the graphic to the document but not embed it( select :ink. 5or more about lin+ing graphics( see Chapter B( 7or+ing with raphics.
*#( LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
)igure *%= )rame dialog Jac7ground page showing color choices A' Gn the +ype area( choose how you want the bac+ground graphic to appear& a' To position the graphic in a specific location( select Position and then clic+ the desired location in the position grid. b' To stretch the graphic to fill the entire bac+ground area( select Area. c' To repeat the graphic across the entire bac+ground area( select &ile. <' Gn the +ransparency area( you can adJust the transparency of the graphic. This adJustment is often necessary to ma+e any teCt easier to read.
)igure *&$ Graphic options on the Jac7ground page of the )rame dialog
*#=
4eleting color or graphics from the background

To delete color or graphics from the bac+ground& 1' 5rom the /s drop9down list( select Color. 2' Clic+ >o Fill on the color grid.
*%$
8hapter % Printing@ ,-porting@ )a-ing@ and ,"<ailing
Euick printing
Clic+ the Print File 4irectly icon your computer. to send the entire document to the default printer defined for
>ote
You can change the action of the Print File 4irectly icon to send the document to the printer defined for the document instead of the default printer for the computer. o to &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :oadF$ave 9 1eneral and select the :oad printer settings with the document option.
Controlling printing
>ote for /ac users
Gf you prefer to use the standard 0ac #rint dialogs( deselect the Print dialogs G 2se :ibre;ffice dialogs option in :ibre;ffice 9 Preferences 9 1eneral. This boo+ uses the $ibre=ffice #rint dialogs in illustrations.
5or more control o)er printing( use the #rint dialog boC %File 9 Print or 8trl9P'.
)igure *&* +he Print dialog bo-
*%:
The options selected on the #rint dialog boC apply to this printing of this document only.
>ote
To specify default printing settings for $ibre=ffice( go to &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice 9 Print and &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice !riter 9 Print. -ee Chapter 2( -etting "p 7riter( for more details.
The #rint dialog boC has four tabs( from which you can choose a range of options( as described in the following sections.
$electing general printing options for a document

=n the General tab of the #rint dialog boC( you can choose&
The printer %from the printers a)ailable' 7hich pages to print %the current page number is displayed here'( the number of copies to
print( and whether to collate multiple copies %6ange and copies section'
7hether to print any comments that are in the document( and where to print the
comments. -ome selections may not be a)ailable all the time. 5or eCample( if the document contains no comments( the #rint Comments drop9down list does not wor+.
)igure *&: 8hoosing whether and where to print comments Clic+ the Properties button to display a dialog boC where you can choose portrait or landscape orientation( which paper tray to use( and the paper si2e to print on. =n the Options tab of the #rint dialog boC( you can choose )arious other options for printing.
)igure *&3 General print options
Printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper

You can print multiple pages of a document on one sheet of paper. To do this& 1' Gn the #rint dialog boC( select the Page Layout tab %5igure 1<>'.
*%3
)igure *&# Printing multiple page per sheet of paper 2' Gn the Layout section( select from the drop9down list the number of pages to print per sheet. The pre)iew panel on the left of the #rint dialog boC shows how the printed document will loo+. 7hen printing more than 2 pages per sheet( you can choose the order in which they are printed across and down the paper. The two pictures below show the difference.
3' Gn the Page sides section( select whether to print all pages or only some pages. >' Clic+ the Print button.
&ip
To print two pages per sheet in Tfacing pagesU %boo+ layout' style( print from #rint #re)iew instead. -ee page 1AE.
*%#
$electing what to print

Gn addition to printing a full document( you can choose to print indi)idual pages( ranges of pages( or a selection of a document( as described in this section. #rinting an indi)idual page& 1' Choose File 9 Print from the 0enu bar. 2' =n the #rint dialog boC( select the page to print. a' Gn the 6anges and copies section of the eneral page( select the Pages option. b' 3nter the se>uence number of the page you want to print. This may differ from the page number if you ha)e restarted page numbering within the document. The pre)iew boC changes to show the selected page. 3' Clic+ the Print button. #rinting a range of pages& 1' Choose File 9 Print from the 0enu bar. 2' =n the #rint dialog boC( select the range of pages to print. a' Gn the 6anges and copies section of the eneral page( select the Pages option. b' 3nter the se@uence numbers of the pages to print %for eCample( 1> or 1(3(E(11'. 3' Clic+ the Print button. #rinting a selection of teCt& 1' Gn the document( select the material %teCt and graphics' to print. 2' Choose File 9 Print from the menu bar. 3' The 6anges and copies section of the #rint dialog boC now includes a Selection option and the pre)iew boC shows the selected material. -ee 5igure 1<A. >' Clic+ the Print button.
Printing a brochure
Gn 7riter( Gmpress( and .raw( you can print a document with two pages on each side of a sheet of paper( arranged so that when the printed pages are folded in half( the pages are in the correct order to form a boo+let or brochure.
&ip
#lan your document so it will loo+ good when printed half si2eV choose appropriate margins( font si2es( and so on. You may need to eCperiment.
To print a brochure on a single9sided printer& 1' Choose File 9 Print. 2' Gn the #rint dialog boC( clic+ Properties. 3' Chec+ the printer is set to the same orientation %portrait or landscape' as specified in the page setup for your document. "sually the orientation does not matter( but it does for brochures. Clic+ ;6 to return to the #rint dialog boC. >' -elect the Page layout tab in the #rint dialog boC. A' -elect the 3rochure option. <' Gn the Page sides section( select Jac7 sides ! left pages option from the Gnclude drop9down list. %-ee 5igure 1<<.' E' Clic+ the Print button.
*%%
)igure *&% Printing a selection of te-t
)igure *&& Selecting which pages to print

*%& LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
B' Ta+e the printed pages out of the printer( turn the pages o)er( and put them bac+ into the printer in the correct orientation to print on the blan+ side. You may need to eCperiment a bit to find out what the correct arrangement is for your printer. B' =n the #rint dialog boC( in the Page sides section( select )ront sides ! right pages option from the Gnclude drop down boC. D' Clic+ the Print button.
&ip
Gf your printer can print double9sided automatically( choose All pages.
Printing in black and white Aon a color printerB

You may wish to print documents in blac+ and white on a color printer. -e)eral choices are a)ailable. #lease note that some color printers may print in color regardless of the settings you choose. Change the printer settings to print in blac+ and white or grayscale& 1' Choose File 9 Print to open the #rint dialog boC. 2' Clic+ Properties to open the #roperties dialog boC for the printer. The a)ailable choices )ary from one printer to another( but you should find options for the Color settings. -ee your printerFs help or user manual for more information. 3' The choices for color might include blac7 and white or grayscale. Choose the re@uired setting. >' Clic+ ;6 to confirm your choice and return to the #rint dialog boC( A' Clic+ the Print button to print the document.
&ip
rayscale is best if you ha)e any graphics in the document.
Change the $ibre=ffice settings to print all color teCt and graphics as grayscale& 1' Choose &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice 9 Print. 2' -elect the Convert colors to grayscale option. Clic+ ;6 to sa)e the change. 3' =pen the #rint dialog boC %File 9 Print'. >' Clic+ the Print button to print the document. Change the $ibre=ffice 7riter settings to print all color teCt as blac+( and all graphics as grayscale& 1' Choose &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice SComponentT 9 Print. 2' "nder 8ontents( select the Print te't in black option. Clic+ ;6 to sa)e the change. 3' =pen the #rint dialog boC %File 9 Print'. >' Clic+ the Print button to print the document.
Previewing pages before printing

The normal page )iew in 7riter shows you what each page will loo+ li+e when printed and you can edit the pages in that )iew. Gf you are designing a document to be printed double9sided( you may want to see what facing pages loo+ li+e. 7riter pro)ides two ways to do this&
Piew $ayout %editable )iew'& use the 5acing #ages %/oo+ #re)iew' button on the status bar.
#age #re)iew %read9only )iew'.

8hapter % Printing@ ,-porting@ )a-ing@ and ,"<ailing *%'
To use #age #re)iew& 1' Choose File 9 Page Preview %or clic+ the Page Preview button on the -tandard toolbar'. 7riter now displays the Page Preview toolbar instead of the 5ormatting toolbar.
)igure *&'. Page Preview toolbar 2' -elect the re@uired pre)iew icon& &wo Pages % Preview % '. ' to open the #rint '( /ultiple Pages % ' or 3ook
3' To print the document from this )iew( clic+ the Print document icon % dialog boC. >' Choose the print options and clic+ the Print button.
Printing envelopes
#rinting en)elopes in)ol)es two steps& setup and printing. To set up an en)elope to be printed by itself or with your document& 1' Clic+ nsert 9 -nvelope from the menu bar. 2' Gn the 3n)elope dialog boC( start with the ,nvelope tab. Perify( add( or edit the information in the *ddressee and -ender boCes %the TfromU on the en)elope'.
)igure *&(. 8hoosing addressee and sender information for an envelope You can type information directly into the *ddressee and -ender boCes( or use the right9 hand drop9down lists to select the database or table from which you can draw the en)elope information( if desired. -ee Chapter 11( "sing 0ail 0erge( for details on how to print en)elopes from a database.
*%( LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
3' =n the )ormat page( )erify or edit the positioning of the addressee and the sender information. The pre)iew area on the lower right shows the effect of your positioning choices.
)igure *&=. 8hoosing positioning and si3e of elements for an envelope >' To format the teCt of these bloc+s( clic+ the -dit buttons to the right. Gn the drop9down list you ha)e two choices& Character and #aragraph. Gn Character( you can choose 5onts %-i2es...'( 5onts 3ffects %"nderlining( Color...'( #osition %4otating/scaling...'( 6yperlin+( /ac+ground and more.
Gn #aragraph( you can choose Gndents M -pacing( *lignment( TeCt 5low( Tabs( .rop
Caps( /orders and /ac+grounds. A' Gn the lower left of this page( the -i2e section( choose the en)elope format from the drop9 down list. The width and height of the selected en)elope then show in the boCes below the selected format. Gf you chose a pre9eCisting format( Just )erify these si2es. Gf you chose 0ser defined in the 5ormat list( then you can edit the si2es. <' *fter formatting( go to the Printer page to choose printer options such as en)elope orientation and shifting. You may need to eCperiment a bit to see what wor+s best for your printer. You can also choose a different printer or alter printer setup %for eCample( specify the tray that holds en)elopes' for this print Job. E' 7hen you ha)e finished formatting and are ready to print( clic+ either the >ew 4oc or nsert button to finish. >ew 4oc ma+es only an en)elope or starts a new document with the en)elope. nsert puts the en)elope into your eCisting document as page 1. To not proceed with this en)elope( clic+ Cancel or press the ,sc +ey. You can also clic+ Ceset to remo)e your changes and return to the original settings when the dialog boC opened. 7hen the 3n)elope dialog boC closes( you are returned to your document( which now has the en)elope in the same file as the document. -a)e this file before you do anything else.
*%=
)igure *'$. 8hoosing printer options for an envelope To print the en)elope& 1' Choose File 9 Print from the menu bar. 2' =n the #rint dialog boC( under Print range( choose Pages and type 1 in the boC. Clic+ ;6 to print.
Printing labels
$abels are commonly used for printing address lists %where each label shows a different address'( but they can also be used for ma+ing multiple copies of one label only( for eCample return9address stic+ers. To print labels& 1' Choose File 9 >ew 9 :abels on the menu bar. The $abels dialog boC opens. 2' =n the Labels page( fill in your own label teCt in the Gnscription boC( or use the 4atabase and &able drop9down lists to choose the re@uired information( as described in Chapter 11( "sing 0ail 0erge.
)igure *'*. Labels dialog bo-@ Labels page
*&$
3' -elect the label stoc+ in the 3rand drop9down list. The types for that brand then appear in the &ype drop9down list. -elect the si2e and type of labels re@uired. You can also select "ser in the &ype drop9down list and then ma+e specific selections on the )ormat page. >' =n the )ormat page( choose the pitch( si2es( margins( columns and rows for user9defined labels( or Just )erify with a brand of label stoc+ you ha)e loaded into the printer.
)igure *':. Labels dialog bo-@ )ormat page

A' Clic+ $ave to sa)e your new format. <' =n the Options page( choose to print the entire page of labels or one single label( then select which one by the column and row. You can also change printer setup.
)igure *'3. Labels dialog bo-@ Options page E' 7hen you ha)e finished formatting( clic+ >ew 4ocument to create your sheet of labels or clic+ Cancel %or press the ,sc +ey'. You can also clic+ Ceset to remo)e your changes and return to the original settings when the dialog boC opened. B' You can print using the Print File 4irectly icon on the toolbar or by choosing File 9 Print from the menu bar( or you can sa)e the file to print later.
*&*
$ending a fa'
To send a faC directly from $ibre=ffice( you need a faC modem and a faC dri)er that allows applications to communicate with the faC modem. 1' =pen the #rint dialog boC %5igure 1<1' by choosing File 9 Print and select the faC dri)er in the Printer list. 2' Clic+ Print to open the dialog boC for your faC dri)er( where you can select the faC recipient. You can set up a toolbar icon so that a single clic+ sends the current document as a faC. To add an icon for this purpose to a toolbar( see Chapter 1<( Customi2ing 7riter.
-'porting to P4F
$ibre=ffice can eCport documents to #.5 %#ortable .ocument 5ormat'. This industry9standard file format for file )iewing is ideal for sending the file to someone else to )iew using *crobat 4eader or other #.5 )iewers.
Euick e'port to P4F

Clic+ the -'port 4irectly as P4F icon to eCport the entire document using the #.5 settings you most recently selected in the #.5 =ptions dialog boC. You are as+ed to enter the file name and location for the #.5 file( but you do not get a chance to choose a page range( the image compression( or other options.
Controlling P4F content and ?uality

5or more control o)er the content and @uality of the resulting #.5( use File > -'port as P4F. The #.5 =ptions dialog boC opens. This dialog boC has fi)e pages % eneral( Gnitial Piew( "ser Gnterface( $in+s( and -ecurity'. -elect the appropriate settings( and then clic+ -'port. Then you are as+ed to enter the location and file name of the #.5 to be created( and clic+ -'port to eCport the file.
General pa e of 0D% Options dialo box

=n the General page %5igure 1E>'( you can choose which pages to include in the #.5( the type of compression to use for images %which affects the @uality of images in the #.5'( and other options. Cange section All& 3Cports the entire document.
Pages& To eCport a range of pages( use the format %.( %pages 3 to <'. To eCport single
pages( use the format "U9U11 %pages E( D( and 11'. You can also eCport a combination of page ranges and single pages( by using a format li+e %.(U0U1#.
$election& 3Cports whate)er material is selected.

mages section :ossless compression& Gmages are stored without any loss of @uality. Tends to ma+e large files when used with photographs. 4ecommended for other +inds of images or graphics.
VP-1 compression& *llows for )arying degrees of @uality. * setting of D0k wor+s well with
photographs %small file si2e( little perceptible loss of @uality'.
Ceduce image resolution& $ower9.#G %dots per inch' images ha)e lower @uality. 5or
)iewing on a computer screen generally a resolution of E2dpi %for 7indows' or D<dpi
*&: LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
% !"/$inuC' is sufficient( while for printing it is generally preferable to use at least 300 or <00 dpi( depending on the capability of the printer. 6igher dpi settings greatly increase the si2e of the eCported file.
3#- %3ncapsulated #ost-cript' images with embedded pre)iews are eCported only as pre)iews. 3#- images without embedded pre)iews are eCported as empty placeholders.
>ote
)igure *'# General page of PD) Options dialog bo!atermark section $ign with !atermark: 7hen this option is selected( a transparent o)erlay of the teCt you enter into the !atermark &e't boC will appear on each page of the #.5. 1eneral section -mbed ;pen4ocument file: "se this setting to eCport the document as a .pdf file containing two file formats& #.5 and =.5. Gn #.5 )iewers it beha)es li+e a normal .pdf file( and it remains fully editable in $ibre=ffice.
P4FFA.1a& #.5/*91a is an G-= standard for long9term preser)ation of documents( by

embedding all the information necessary for faithful reproduction %such as fonts' while forbidding other elements %including forms( security( and encryption'. #.5 tags are written. Gf you select #.5/*91a( the forbidden elements are grayed9out %not a)ailable'.
&agged P4F& Tagged #.5 contains information about the structure of the documentFs
contents. This can help to display the document on de)ices with different screens( and when using screen reader software. -ome tags that are eCported are table of contents( hyperlin+s( and controls. This option can increase file si2es significantly.
Create P4F form G $ubmit format& Choose the format of submitting forms from within the
#.5 file. This setting o)errides the controlFs "4$ property that you set in the document. There is only one common setting )alid for the whole #.5 document& #.5 %sends the whole document'( 5.5 %sends the control contents'( 6T0$( and I0$. 0ost often you will choose the #.5 format.
*&3
-'port bookmarks& Creates #.5 boo+mar+s %a table of contents list displayed by most
#.5 )iewers( including *dobe 4eader' for all headings in the document.
-'port comments& 3Cports comments as #.5 notes. You may not want thisl -'port automatically inserted blank pages& Gf selected( automatically inserted blan+
pages are eCported to the #.5. This is best if you are printing the #.5 double9sided. 5or eCample( boo+s usually ha)e chapters set to always start on an odd9numbered %right9hand' page. 7hen the pre)ious chapter ends on an odd page( $ibre=ffice inserts a blan+ page between the two odd pages. This option controls whether to eCport that blan+ page.
-mbed standard fonts: !ormally the 1> standard #ost-cript fonts are not embedded in a
#.5 file( because #.5 reader software already contains these fonts. 6owe)er( you can choose to embed these fonts in all #.5 documents created by $ibre=ffice to enhance display accuracy in #.5 )iewers. 5ont embedding may also be re@uired by some printers.
,nitial 5iew pa e of 0D% Options dialo box

=n the 2nitial ?iew page( you can choose how the #.5 opens by default in a #.5 )iewer. The selections should be self9eCplanatory.
)igure *'% 2nitial ?iew page of PD) Options dialog boGf you ha)e CompleC TeCt $ayout enabled %in &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :anguage settings 9 :anguages'( an additional selection is a)ailable under 8ontinuous facing& First page is left %normally( the first page is on the right when using the 8ontinuous facing option'.
.ser ,nterface pa e of 0D% Options dialo box

=n the 0ser 2nterface page( you can choose more settings to control how a #.5 )iewer displays the file. -ome of these choices are particularly useful when you are creating a #.5 to be used as a presentation or a +ios+9type display. !indow options section Cesi5e window to initial page. Causes the #.5 )iewer window to resi2e to fit the first page of the #.5. Center window on screen. Causes the #.5 )iewer window to be centered on the computer screen. ;pen in full screen mode. Causes the #.5 )iewer to open full9screen instead of in a smaller window. 4isplay document title. Causes the #.5 )iewer to display the documentFs title in the title bar.
*&# LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
)igure *'& 0ser 2nterface page of PD) Options dialog bo2ser interface options section 8ide menu bar. Causes the #.5 )iewer to hide the menu bar.
8ide toolbar. Causes the #.5 )iewer to hide the toolbar. 8ide window controls. Causes the #.5 )iewer to hide other window controls.
3ookmarks -elect how many heading le)els are displayed as boo+mar+s( if ,-port boo7mar7s is selected on the eneral page.
Lin&s pa e of 0D% Options dialo box

=n the Lin7s page( you can choose how lin+s in documents are eCported to #.5.
)igure *'' Lin7s page of PD) Options dialog bo-'port bookmarks as named destinations Gf you ha)e defined 7riter boo+mar+s( this option eCports them as Tnamed destinationsU to which 7eb pages and #.5 documents can lin+. Convert document references to P4F targets Gf you ha)e defined lin+s to other documents with =pen.ocument eCtensions %such as .odt( .ods( and .odp'( this option con)erts the files names to .pdf in the eCported #.5 document. -'port 2C:s relative to the file system Gf you ha)e defined relati)e lin+s in a document( this option eCports those lin+s to the #.5.
*&%
Cross.document links -et up the beha)ior of the #.5 lin+s to other files. -elect one among the following alternati)es&
4efault mode& The #.5 lin+s will be handled as specified in your operating system. ;pen with P4F reader application& "se the same application used to display the #.5
document to open lin+ed #.5 documents.
;pen with nternet browser& "se the default Gnternet browser to display lin+ed #.5
documents.
"ecurity pa e of 0D% Options dialo box

#.5 eCport includes options to encrypt the #.5 %so it cannot be opened without a password' and apply some digital rights management %.40' features.
7ith an open password set( the #.5 can only be opened with the password. =nce opened(
there are no restrictions on what the user can do with the document %for eCample( print( copy( or change it'.
7ith a permissions password set( the #.5 can be opened by anyone( but its permissions
can be restricted. -ee 5igure 1EB. *fter you set a password for permissions( the other choices on the -ecurity page become a)ailable.
7ith both the open password and permission password set( the #.5 can only be opened
with the correct password( and its permissions can be restricted.
>ote
#ermissions settings are effecti)e only if the userFs #.5 )iewer respects the settings.
)igure *'( Security page of PD) Options dialog bo5igure 1ED shows the pop9up dialog boC displayed when you clic+ the $et open password button on the -ecurity page of the #.5 =ptions dialog boC. =nce you ha)e set all the options you re@uire( clic+ on -'port to open the 3Cport dialog boC( where you can set the file name and the sa)e location.
*&&
)igure *'= Setting a password to encrypt a PD) *nother choice is to use File 9 -'port. This opens the 3Cport dialog boC. -elect the #.5 file format( file name and location and clic+ -'port. This then opens the #.5 =ptions dialog boC( as described abo)e. Clic+ -'port when all the selections ha)e been made.
>ote
-'porting to M8&/:
$ibre=ffice uses the term TeCportU for some file operations in)ol)ing a change of file type. $ibre=ffice can eCport files to I6T0$. =ther formats may be made a)ailable through eCtensions. To eCport to I6T0$( choose File 9 -'port. =n the 3Cport dialog boC( specify a file name for the eCported document( then select the I6T0$ in the )ile format list and clic+ the -'port button.
)igure *($ ,-port file formats
-.mailing !riter documents

$ibre=ffice pro)ides se)eral ways to @uic+ly and easily send a 7riter document as an e9mail attachment in one of three formats& =.T %=pen.ocument TeCt( 7riterFs default format'( .=C %0icrosoft 7ord format'( or #.5.
>ote
.ocuments can only be sent from the $ibre=ffice mail merge wi2ard if a mail profile has been set up in &ools 9 ;ption 9 :ibre;ffice !riter 9 /ail /erge -.mail.
*&'
To send the current document in =.T format& 1' Choose File 9 $end 9 4ocument as -.mail. 7riter opens your default e9mail program. The document is attached. 2' Gn your e9mail program( enter the recipient( subJect( and any teCt you want to add( then send the e9mail. File 9 $end 9 -.mail as ;pen4ocument &e't has the same effect. Gf you choose -.mail as /icrosoft !ord( 7riter first creates a .=C file and then opens your e9mail program with the .=C file attached. -imilarly( if you choose -.mail as P4F( 7riter first creates a #.5 using your default #.5 settings %as when using the -'port 4irectly as P4F toolbar button' and then opens your email program with the #.5 file attached.
-.mailing a document to several recipients

To e9mail a document to se)eral recipients( you can use the features in your e9mail program or you can use $ibre=fficeFs mail merge facilities to eCtract email addresses from an address boo+. You can use $ibre=fficeFs mail merge to send e9mail in two ways&
"se the 0ail 0erge 7i2ard to create the document and send it. -ee Chapter 11( "sing 0ail
0erge( for details.
Create the document in 7riter without using the 7i2ard( then use the 7i2ard to send it.
This method is described here. To use the 0ail 0erge 7i2ard to send a pre)iously9created 7riter document& 1' =pen the document in 7riter. Clic+ &ools 9 /ail /erge !i5ard. =n the first page of the wi2ard( select 2se the current document and clic+ >e't.
)igure *(* Select starting document
*&(
2' =n the second page( select -.mail message and clic+ >e't.
)igure *(: Select document type 3' =n the third page( clic+ the $elect Address :ist button. -elect the re@uired address list %e)en if only one is shown' and then clic+ ;6. %Gf the address list you need is not shown here( you can clic+ Add to find and add it to the list.'
)igure *(3 Selecting an address list >' /ac+ on the Select address list page( clic+ >e't. =n the Create salutation page( deselect the chec+boC by &his document should contain a salutation.
*&=
)igure *(# Deselecting a salutation A' Gn the left9hand list( clic+ 0. $ave, print or send. $ibre=ffice displays a TCreating documentsU message and then displays the Save@ print or send page of the 7i2ard. <' -elect $end merged document as -./ail. The lower part of the page changes to show e9mail settings choices. E' Type a subJect for your email and clic+ $end documents. $ibre=ffice sends the e9mails.
)igure *(% Sending a document as an email message
*'$
4igital signing of documents

To sign a document digitally( you need a personal +ey( also +nown as a certificate. * personal +ey is stored on your computer as a combination of a pri)ate +ey( which must be +ept secret( and a public +ey( which you add to your documents when you sign them. You can get a certificate from a certification authority( which may be a pri)ate company or a go)ernmental institution. 7hen you apply a digital signature to a document( a +ind of chec+sum is computed from the documentFs content plus your personal +ey. The chec+sum and your public +ey are stored together with the document. 7hen someone later opens the document on any computer with a recent )ersion of $ibre=ffice( the program will compute the chec+sum again and compare it with the stored chec+sum. Gf both are the same( the program will signal that you see the original( unchanged document. Gn addition( the program can show you the public +ey information from the certificate. You can compare the public +ey with the public +ey that is published on the web site of the certificate authority. 7hene)er someone changes something in the document( this change brea+s the digital signature. =n 7indows operating systems( the 7indows features of )alidating a signature are used. =n -olaris and $inuC systems( files that are supplied by Thunderbird( 0o2illa or 5irefoC are used. 5or a more detailed description of how to get and manage a certificate( and signature )alidation( see T"sing .igital -ignaturesU in the $ibre=ffice 6elp. To sign a document& 1' Choose File 9 4igital $ignatures. 2' Gf you ha)e not sa)ed the document since the last change( a message boC appears. Clic+ Jes to sa)e the file. 3' *fter sa)ing( you see the .igital -ignatures dialog boC. Clic+ Add to add a public +ey to the document. >' Gn the -elect Certificate dialog boC( select your certificate and clic+ ;6. A' You see again the .igital -ignatures dialog boC( where you can add more certificates if you want. Clic+ ;6 to add the public +ey to the sa)ed file. * signed document shows an icon in the status bar. You can double9clic+ the icon to )iew the certificate.
Cemoving personal data

You may wish to ensure that personal data( )ersions( comments( hidden information( or recorded changes are remo)ed from files before you send them to other people or create #.5s from them. Gn &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice 9 $ecurity 9 ;ptions( you can set $ibre=ffice to remind %warn' you when files contain certain information and remo)e personal information automatically on sa)ing. To remo)e personal and some other data from a file( go to File 9 Properties. =n the General tab( unchec+ Apply user data and then clic+ the Ceset button. This remo)es any names in the created and modified fields( deletes the modification and printing dates( and resets the editing time to 2ero( the creation date to the current date and time( and the )ersion number to 1. To remo)e )ersion information( either %a' go to File 9 =ersions( select the )ersions from the list and clic+ 4elete( or %b' use $ave As and sa)e the file with a different name.
*'*
8hapter & 2ntroduction to Styles

Paragraph@ Page@ 8haracter@ and List Styles
!hat are styles7

0ost people are used to writing documents according to physical attributes. 5or eCample( you might specify the font family( font si2e( and weight %for eCample& 6el)etica 12pt( bold'. -tyles are logical attributes. 7e use styles e)ery day. 5or eCample( there are different styles of personal computer& des+top( tablet( netboo+( laptop( and so on. 3ach has its own distincti)e set of properties. You ne)er say Tmy computer is a low9weight( one9piece unit with an $C. screen attached to a rectangular casing containing the computing components and the +eyboardU. Gnstead( you would probably say that you ha)e a laptop. $ibre=ffice styles are a way to do the same thing for your document. "sing styles means that you could stop saying Tfont si2e 1>pt( Times !ew 4oman( bold( centeredU and start saying TtitleU for describing that particular font usage. Gn other words( styles mean that you shift the emphasis from what the teCt loo7s li7e to what the teCt is.
!hy use styles7

-tyles help impro)e consistency in a document. They also ma+e maJor formatting changes easy. 5or eCample( you might decide to change the indentation of all paragraphs or change the font of all titles. 5or a long document( this simple tas+ could be prohibiti)e. -tyles ma+e the tas+ easy. The time is D&A0 *0( and ,ane is finishing the 309page paper for school that is due at 10&00 *0. -he loo+s o)er the assignment one more time( and suddenly she reali2es that&
The teCt must use *rial font instead of Times !ew 4oman. The headings must be dar+ blue and indented. The title must appear at the top9right of e)ery page eCcept the first. 3)en9numbered pages must ha)e a wider right margin( and odd9numbered pages must ha)e a wider left margin.
Than+fully( ,ane used $ibre=ffice 7riter and styles. -he ma+es all the changes in only two minutes and hands in the paper on time.
$tyle categories
$ibre=ffice 7riter has fi)e style categories&
Paragraph styles affect entire paragraphs represented with those styles. 8haracter styles affect a bloc+ of teCt inside a paragraph. Page styles affect page formatting %page si2e( margin( and the li+e'. )rame styles affect frames and graphics. List styles affect outlines( numbered lists( and bulleted lists.
Gn the same way that characters are the building bloc+s for creating words( paragraphs are the building bloc+s of e)ery document. 6eadings %subheads' are paragraphsV headers( footers( and numbered lists are also paragraphs. #aragraph styles are( therefore( the most fre@uently used styles and are the ones treated in most detail in this and the neCt chapter.
*'#
&he $tyles and Formatting window

-tyles are a)ailable through a floating or doc+able window called Styles and )ormatting( shown in 5igure 1B<. This window is at the center of styles management. .o not worry if( at first( some contents of this section seem obscure while progressing through this or the neCt chapter. This guide describes how to use all these functions.
)igure *(& +he Styles and )ormatting window for Writer@ showing paragraph styles To open the -tyles and 5ormatting window( do any one of the following&
Clic+ on the icon located at the left9hand end of the 5ormatting toolbar. -elect Format > $tyles and Formatting. #ress )**. &ip
You can mo)e the -tyles and 5ormatting window to a con)enient position on the screen or doc+ it to an edge.
$tyle selection basics

The first fi)e icons at the top of the -tyles and 5ormatting window select the category of styles to wor+ on. Clic+ on one of these icons to display a list of styles in that category( such as paragraph or character styles. To apply a character style to eCisting teCt( select the teCt and then double9clic+ on the name of the style in the 8haracter Styles list. To apply any other style( put the cursor in the paragraph( frame( or page you want to modify and double9clic+ on the name of the style in the corresponding section. You can select more than one paragraph or frame and apply the same style to all of them at the same time.
2sing Fill Format mode

The siCth icon at the top of the -tyles and 5ormatting window acti)ates the )ill )ormat mode. You can use 5ill 5ormat to apply a style to many different areas @uic+ly without ha)ing to go bac+ to the -tyles and 5ormatting window and double9clic+ e)ery time. This method is useful for formatting many scattered paragraphs( words( or other items with the same style( and it may be easier to use than ma+ing multiple selections first and then applying a style to all of them.
*'%
1' =pen the -tyles and 5ormatting window %5igure 1B<' and select a style. 2' Clic+ the Fill Format /ode icon . 3' To apply a paragraph( page( or frame style( ho)er the mouse o)er the paragraph( page( or frame and clic+. To apply a character style( hold down the mouse button while selecting the characters. Clic+ing on a word applies the character style to that word. >' 4epeat step 3 until you ha)e made all the changes for that style. A' To @uit the 5ill 5ormat mode( clic+ the icon again or press the ,sc +ey.
Caution
7hen this mode is acti)e( a right9clic+ anywhere in the document undoes the last 5ill 5ormat action. /e careful not to accidentally right9clic+ and mista+enly undo actions you want to +eep.
2sing >ew $tyle from $election, 2pdate $tyle, and :oad $tyles
-tyles are part of the document properties( therefore changes made to a style or new styles you create are only a)ailable within the document they belong to. -tyles always stay with a document. -o( for eCample( if you e9mail a document to another person( the styles go with it. Gf you want to reuse modified or new styles in other documents( you need to either sa)e the styles in a template %see Chapter 10' or copy the styles into the document where you want to use them. The last button in the toolbar of the -tyles and 5ormatting window is a menu button that gi)es access to three submenu functions& Dew Style from Selection( 0pdate Style( and Load Styles.
/ew "tyle fro# "election

"se the first function of the button to create a new style from the formatting of an obJect in the current document. 5or instance( you can change the formatting of a paragraph or frame until it appears as you li+e( and then you can turn that obJectFs formatting into a new style. This procedure can sa)e time because you do not ha)e to remember all the formatting settings you want( as is necessary when creating a new style with the -tyle dialog. Gn addition( unli+e when setting the formatting parameters in the pages of dialogs( which you will learn to do later( you can immediately see how the obJects will loo+ when formatted with the style you are creating. 5ollow these steps to create a new style from a selection& 1' Change the formatting of the obJect %paragraph( frame( etc.' to your li+ing. 2' 5rom the icons at the top of the window( choose the type of style to create %paragraph( character( and so on'. 3' Gn the document( select the item to sa)e as a style. >' o bac+ to the -tyles and 5ormatting window and clic+ the >ew $tyle from $election icon. Gn the Create -tyle dialog( type a name for the new style. The list shows the names of eCisting custom styles of the selected type( if any. Clic+ ;6 to sa)e the new style.
)igure *(' Dialog to name a new style from selection

*'& LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
.pdate "tyle 2fro# a selection3

$etFs use paragraph styles as an eCample. 1' Create a new paragraph %or select an eCisting paragraph' and edit all the properties you want to alter in the style %such as indentation( font properties( alignment( and others'.
Caution
0a+e sure that there are uniform properties in this paragraph. 5or eCample( if there are two different font si2es in the paragraph which is selected to be used to update the style( that particular property will not be updated.
2' -elect the paragraph by clic+ing anywhere in the paragraph. 3' Gn the -tyles and 5ormatting window( select the style you want to update %single9clic+( not double9clic+' and then clic+ on the >ew $tyle from $election icon and select 2pdate $tyle.
)igure *(( 0pdating a style from a selection The procedure to update another type of style %character( page( or frame styles' is the same& select the item in @uestion( modify it( select the style you want to update( and choose 2pdate $tyle.
Load "tyles 2fro# a te#plate or docu#ent3

The last option under the >ew $tyle from $election icon is used to copy styles into the current document by loading them from a template or another document. "sing this method( you can copy all styles( or groups of styles( at one time. 1' =pen the document to copy styles into. 2' Gn the -tyles and 5ormatting window( clic+ on the >ew $tyle from $election icon and then on :oad $tyles %see 5igure 1BB'. 3' Gn the $oad -tyles dialog %5igure 1BD'( find and select the template to copy styles from.
)igure *(= Loading styles from a template

8hapter & 2ntroduction to Styles *''
Clic+ on the From File button if the styles you want are contained in a teCt document rather than a template. Gn this case( a standard file selection dialog opens up( where you can select the desired document. >' -elect the options for the types of styles to be copied& TeCt %#aragraph and Character styles'( 5rame( #ages( !umbering %$ist styles'. Gf you select ;verwrite, the styles being copied will replace any styles of the same names in the target document. A' Clic+ ;6 to copy the styles.
2sing the visible styles filters

*t the bottom of the -tyles and 5ormatting window %5igure 1D0'( use the drop9down menu to select a filtering criterion for the contents of the main body of the window. !ormally( you will find that only a handful of styles are needed in any gi)en document( and it ma+es sense to ha)e only these styles shown. -o( at the beginning of the writing process( you may want to ha)e access to all the a)ailable styles %by selecting All $tyles'( and to eCclude some of them from use %right9clic+ each style to be eCcluded and select 8ide from the conteCt menu'. 6owe)er( as the document de)elops( it is useful to reduce the si2e of the list displayed to only the styles already in use %by selecting Applied $tyles'. Gf you wor+ on a document where you want to apply special9purpose styles only %such as those styles used in writing this user guide'( select instead Custom $tyles. The 8ierarchical $tyles )iew is most useful when modifying styles as it re)eals which styles are lin+ed together. This topic is discussed in more detail in Chapter E( 7or+ing with -tyles.
)igure *=$ Styles and )ormatting filter Gf you select the Paragraph $tyles )iew in the -tyles and 5ormatting window( the drop9down menu contains many more filtering options so you can )iew( for eCample( only &e't $tyles( $pecial $tyles( and so on.
4rag.and.drop a selection to create a style

*nother way to create a new style is to drag9and9drop a teCt selection into the -tyles and 5ormatting window. 1' =pen the -tyles and 5ormatting window. 2' -elect the style category you are going to create %for eCample a character style' using one of the fi)e icons in the top left part of the window.
*'( LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
3' -elect the obJect you want to base the style on and drag it to the -tyles and 5ormatting window. The cursor changes to indicate whether the operation is possible or not. >' Gn the Create -tyle dialog %5igure 1BE'( type a name for the new style and clic+ ;6 to sa)e the style.
>ote
You cannot use the drag9and9drop method to create a custom page style.
Applying styles
-tyles can be applied easily by means of the -tyles and 5ormatting window. 6owe)er( alternati)e ways eCist to apply certain styles( as eCplained in this section.
Applying paragraph styles

7hen drafting a document( the most used style is the paragraph style. $ibre=ffice offers two @uic+ alternati)es to the -tyles and 5ormatting window to apply this category of style& the /pply Style list and the )ormat Paintbrush icon.
.sin t!e *pply "tyle list

7hen a paragraph style is in use in a document( the style name appears on the /pply Style list near the left end of the formatting bar( to the right of the Styles and )ormatting icon. You can select styles from this menu( Just as you can from the -tyles and 5ormatting window.
)igure *=* /pply Style list To apply a style from this menu( place the cursor in the paragraph to change( clic+ on the desired style or use the up or down arrow +eys to mo)e through the list( then press ,nter to apply the highlighted style.
&ip
-elect /ore at the bottom of the list to open the -tyles and 5ormatting window.
*'=
.sin t!e %or#at 0aintbrus!

You can use the 5ormat #aintbrush to apply a certain paragraph style to another paragraph or to a group of paragraphs. -tart by placing the cursor inside the paragraph you want to copy. Table < shows the formatting copied as a result of a particular cursor position. Table E shows the formatting painted as a result of the format copied and the cursor position when painting. Cases *( /( and C refer to the eCample shown in 5igure 1D2. +able & 8ursor positioning (ase
*
-ype of selection
!o selection. Cursor in the space between two words. !o selection( cursor in any word. TeCt selected.
*ction
Copies the formatting of the paragraph and the character formatting of the neCt character in the teCt flow direction. *s abo)e. Copies the formatting of the last selected character and the paragraph.
/ C
+able ' )ormat Paintbrush clic7 position (ase selection

*( or /( or C * /( or C
0aint position
Gn a space between words. Gn a word or selection. Gn a word or a selection.
+esult
#aragraph formatting only. *s abo)e. #aragraph formatting applied. 7ord or selection formatted with character format from original paragraph.
!ow do one of the following& 1' To format a single paragraph& a' b' Clic+ the Format Paintbrush icon in the standard toolbar.
c'
The cursor changes into an in+ bottle . !ow clic+ the paragraph %see Table E' to which you want to apply the copied style. Gf you press Shift98trl while clic+ing( you eCclude any character formatting where)er you select to clic+. The paragraph is formatted and the cursor then returns to normal
2' To format more than one paragraph& a' Double"clic7 the Format Paintbrush icon. b' The cursor changes shape. !ow clic+ each of the paragraphs %see Table E' to which you want to apply the copied style. Gf you press Shift98trl while clic+ing( you eCclude any character formatting where)er you select to clic+. c' The paragraphs are formatted. Clic+ the Format Paintbrush icon once more. d' The cursor then returns to normal.
*($
)igure *=: Showing the results of +able & and +able ' on the unformatted paragraph
Exa#ple4 *pplyin a para rap! style

$etWs see the three methods described abo)e in action with an eCample. To use the Styles and )ormatting method& 1' Create a new document %choose File > >ew > &e't 4ocument or press 8ontrol9D'. 2' Type the words Heading 1 in the new document( but do not press ,nter so that the cursor remains in that same line where you typed. 3' Clic+ the $tyles and Formatting icon located on the 5ormatting /ar or press the )** +ey. This opens the -tyles and 5ormatting window. >' 0a+e sure the window is showing the Paragraph Styles section& clic+ on the top9left icon of the -tyles and 5ormatting window.
)igure *=3 8lic7 on the Styles and )ormatting icon to bring up the window
*(*
.ouble9clic+ the 8eading 1 entry of -tyles and 5ormatting %5igure 1D>'. This does two things&
i)es the line %actually( its entire paragraph' you typed the .eading * style. *dds 8eading 1 to the /pply Style menu.
)igure *=# /pplying paragraph styles To use the /pply Styles list %5igure 1D>'& 1' 4epeat steps 1 and 2 from the pre)ious eCample. 2' -elect 8eading 1 in the /pply Styles list. The teCt ac@uires the properties of the .eading * style. Gf the paragraph style you want is not in the /pply Style list( select /ore to bring up the -tyles and 5ormatting window. Gf the -tyles and 5ormatting window is still open( you may notice that the .eading * style is also highlighted in the main window( as shown in 5igure 1D>. 5inally( try the )ormat Paintbrush. 4ecreate the teCt in 5igure 1D> and add eCtra formatting to some of the teCtV bold and italic was used in the eCample. #lace the cursor at a point in the teCt and clic+ the Format Paintbrush icon to acti)ate it. The cursor changes shape. 0o)e the cursor to one of the new paragraphs and left9clic+ to apply formatting. Try the different selection points and the different paint points to see the effects. To apply the formatting to multiple paragraphs( double9clic+ the Format Paintbrush icon before clic+ing at a paint point. Clic+ing bac+ on the icon cancels the format painting. The cursor shape changes bac+ to the normal one on completion.
Applying character styles

You may ha)e a document that contains character formatting applied directly using the 5ormatting toolbar or shortcut +eys( and you decide to replace this with character styles formatting. The direct formatting should be remo)ed before applying new character styles. To remo)e the formatting manually( select the characters or words to be altered&
-elect Format 9 Clear 4irect Formatting *lternati)ely( press 8trl9<.

You can now proceed to apply character styles.
*(:
-elect all the formatting of one type at a time. 0anually remo)ing this formatting lea)es the teCt elements selected so you can then apply the new character style immediately.
&ip
5or eCample( to remo)e a number of manually italici2ed elements& 1' -elect each instance %press 8trl when selecting each subse@uent element'. 2' "se one of the methods abo)e to remo)e the formatting %the teCt remains selected after remo)al'. 3' Gn this eCample( pressing 8trl92 will also toggle off italics. >' *pply the character style %for eCample( 3mphasis'. 4epeat for each formatted style you wish to replace.
.sin t!e "tyles and %or#attin window

=pen the -tyles and 5ormatting window %press )**' and clic+ the second button in the top bar. The list of a)ailable character styles is displayed. To apply a character style( follow these steps& 1' -elect the bloc+ of teCt( or put the cursor into the single word( where you wish to apply the style. 2' .ouble9clic+ the appropriate character style in the -tyles and 5ormatting window. -ome character styles supplied in $ibre=ffice include& ,mphasis character style. $trong -mphasis character style. Teletype character style.
=ne difference between character styles and paragraph styles is the need for selecting teCt %highlighting'. To apply a character style to more than a single word( you need to select all of the teCt to be changed. To apply the style to a single word( you only ha)e to place the cursor in the word. #aragraph styles are applied to the whole of the paragraph in which the cursor is placed.
>ote
.sin t!e %or#at 0aintbrus!

The 5ormat #aintbrush can be used to apply character styles in much the same way as for paragraphs %see T"sing the 5ormat #aintbrushU on page 1B0'. The difference is that you must select a word that has the re@uired formatting( and that to paint only the character style( without the underlying paragraph style( you must hold down the 8trl +ey when applying the style.
.nset'undo c!aracter styles

-ometimes( you will want to remo)e the character style formatting from a bloc+ of teCt. Gou must resist the temptation to do this manually using the )ormatting toolbar. This will only cause trouble down the road. To remo)e character style formatting from selected teCt& 1' =pen the -tyles and 5ormatting window %press )**' and clic+ the second button in the top bar. 2' 7ith the -tyles and 5ormatting window open( double9clic+ the Default character style.
*(3
Applying frame styles

7hene)er you insert an obJect %such as a graphic' into a document( it will automatically ha)e an in)isible frame around it. -ome designers li+e to add frame styles to introduce )ariety. 5or eCample( you could ha)e one frame style for photographs and a different frame style for other graphics such as line drawings. The one for photographs might ha)e a border with a drop shadow( while the one for drawings might ha)e only a border. To apply a style to a frame& 1' -elect the frame. 2' /ring up the -tyles and 5ormatting window %for eCample( by pressing )**'. 3' Clic+ the Frame $tyles icon %the third one from the left'. >' .ouble9clic+ the frame style you want. 6a)ing applied a style to a frame( you can now modify the frame to be Just how you want it. 0ost of a frameFs design can be set in a style( but the following options must be set manually&
*nchoring& how the frame is positioned in relation to the rest of the pages contents
%Format > Anchor'.
*rrangement& the frames position in a stac+ of obJects %Format > Arrange'. *dding a hyperlin+& so that a clic+ on the frame opens a 7eb page or another document in
an 6T0$ file % nsert > 8yperlink'. 7hen a frame is selected( the 5rame toolbar replaces the 5ormatting toolbar( allowing you to modify the settings. The right9clic+ %conteCt' menu also has items for anchoring and arrangement( as well as for wrap and alignment.
Applying page styles

To apply a page style( place the cursor anywhere on the page to which the style should be applied. You can easily chec+ which page style is applied because it is shown on the status bar.
)igure *=% +he current page style is displayed on the status bar Gf you want to apply a different style( you can either right9clic+ on the style in the status bar and select a new style from the pop9up menu( or you can open the -tyles and 5ormatting window %press )**5( select the page style icon at the top of the window %fourth icon'( and then double9clic+ on the desired style.
Caution
Changing a page style may cause the style of subse@uent pages to change as well. The results may not be what you want. To change the style of only one page( you may need to insert a manual page brea+( as described below.
*s discussed in Chapter E( 7or+ing with -tyles( a correctly set up page style will( in most cases( contain information on what the page style of the neCt page should be. 5or eCample( when you apply a Left page style to a page( you can indicate in the style settings that the neCt page has to apply a 6ight page style( a )irst page style could be followed by either a Left page style or a Default page style( and so on.
*(#
*nother )ery useful mechanism to change the page style is to insert a manual page brea+ and specify the style of the subse@uent page. The idea is simple& you brea+ a se@uence of page styles and start a new se@uence. To insert a page brea+( choose nsert > /anual 3reak and choose Page break. This section illustrates two common scenarios where page brea+s are useful.
Exa#ple4 (!apters
* possible scenario& You are writing a boo+ that is di)ided into chapters. 3ach chapter starts with a page style called Dew 8hapter. The following pages use the Default page style. *t the end of each %eCcept the last' chapter( we return to the Dew 8hapter page style for the first page of the neCt chapter. 5igure 1D< illustrates the flow of page styles when using page brea+s.
)igure *=& Page style flow using a page brea7 7riter doesnFt ha)e a predefined Dew 8hapter page style( so you must create a custom style %see Chapter E'. %You could also use the 5irst #age style for this purpose( but in our eCamples we use that style for the title page of the boo+.' $etFs suppose that you already ha)e the page styles with the following properties& 0a e style
!ew Chapter .efault
/ext "tyle
.efault .efault
*t some point( you will want to start a new chapter. 5ollow these steps& 1' #ut the cursor at the end of the chapter( on a blan+ line %empty paragraph' of its own. 2' Choose nsert > /anual 3reak. The Gnsert /rea+ dialog %5igure 1DE' appears. 3' "nder +ype( choose Page break and under Style( select >ew Chapter.
)igure *=' 8hoose Page brea7 and select the Dew 8hapter page style
8hapter & 2ntroduction to Styles *(%
Exa#ple4 0a e wit! special for#attin

-ometimes you may need to insert a page with special formatting( for eCample a landscape page or a page with more columns. This can also be done with page brea+s. -uppose that the current page has the Default page style. 1' Choose nsert > /anual 3reak. 2' -elect the desired page style %say( Special Page' in the Gnsert /rea+ dialog. 3' 5ill in the contents for this page. Then insert another page brea+. >' Then select Default again. The pagination continues on as normal( eCcept that one page has been replaced by a different page style. This concept is illustrated in 5igure 1DB.
)igure *=( 2nserting a page with special formatting
Applying list styles

$ist styles define properties such as indentation( numbering style %for eCample( *@:@3V a@b@cV or bullets'( and punctuation after the number( but they do not by themsel)es define properties such as font( borders( teCt flow( and so on. The latter are properties of paragraph styles. Gf you need your list to ha)e specific paragraph9style properties( you should embed the list style into paragraph styles( as eCplained in Chapter E. You can then create a numbered list by applying paragraph styles alone. 7riter has two series of predefined list styles( named List and Dumbering. 3ach series contains fi)e list styles( intended for the different le)els of a nested list. *s with any style( you can redefine the properties of these styles( for eCample the numbering or bullet symbol and the indentation. You can also define other list styles in these series or create your own series. 3ach of the list styles predefined in 7riter has four associated paragraph styles. 5or eCample( the Dumbering * list style is associated with four paragraph styles&
!umbering 1 !umbering 1 Cont. !umbering 1 3nd !umbering 1 -tart
Dumbering * is a default paragraph style to which you can attach a list style. Gf you want to ma+e eCclusi)e use of paragraph styles and ne)er use the 5ormatting toolbar when creating a numbered list( you could use the other three styles. *ll you need to do is to create a suitable list style and set up the De-t Style property in the =rgani2er page of the #aragraph -tyle dialog so that the Dumbering * Start paragraph is followed by the Dumbering * 8ont. style( while the Dumbering * ,nd paragraph style is followed by a default style paragraph. Gf you only want to apply a list style %that is( the numbering or bullet symbol and the indentation' then( when the cursor is on the paragraph( double9clic+ on the desired list style. 7hen creating a list style( you can define up to ten le)els of depth for nested lists. -witch from one le)el to the other with either the Promote ;ne :evel
*(&
or the 4emote ;ne :evel
buttons
on the /ullets and !umbering toolbar or by pressing the +ab +ey %one le)el down' or Shift9+ab +ey combination %one le)el up' or by right9clic+ing on the list element and select 2p ;ne :evel or 4own ;ne :evel from the conteCt menu.
+estartin or continuin t!e nu#berin

7hen creating more than one numbered list of the same type within the same chapter( 7riter applies se@uential numbering to all the lists. -ometimes this is what you want %for eCample( when placing illustrations between the numbered paragraphs'( while at other times you want to restart the numbering. To restart numbering from 1( you can do any of the following&
Clic+ on the Cestart numbering icon on the /ullets and !umbering toolbar. 4ight9clic+ on the first element of the list and choose Cestart numbering from the conteCt
menu.
4ight9clic+ on the first element of the list( choose Paragraph from the conteCt menu( and
go to the =utline M !umbering tab of the #aragraph dialog. Gn the Dumbering section( select the options Cestart at this paragraph and $tart with( and set the number %see 5igure 1DD'.
)igure *== 6estarting numbering Gf you find that the numbering does not restart as intended using the first or second method( or if you want to restart from a number greater than 1( use the third method. 7hen editing a document( you may want to change from restarting numbering to continuing the numbering from a pre)ious list. To do so( right9clic+ on the list element and choose Continue previous numbering from the conteCt menu.
/odifying styles
7riter pro)ides se)eral predefined styles( but you may find that they do not fit your preferences. You can build your own library of custom styles to use in place of the predefined ones( or you can modify the eCisting styles. $ibre=ffice offers four mechanisms to modify both both predefined and custom %user9created' styles&
"pdate a style from a selection. $oad or copy styles from another document or template. Change a style using the -tyle dialog. "se *uto"pdate %paragraph and frame styles only'.
*('
The first two methods are discussed in T"pdate -tyle %from a selection'U and T$oad -tyles %from a template or document'U on page 1EE( while Chapter E( 7or+ing with -tyles( discusses at length the process of creating a new style. This section shows how you can @uic+ly ma+e simple modifications to eCisting paragraph styles using the same tools you would use for applying formatting manually.
*ny changes made to a style are effecti)e only in the current document. Gf you want to reuse modified or new styles in other documents( you need to either sa)e the styles in a template %see Chapter 10( 7or+ing with Templates' or copy the styles into the other documents( as described in T$oad -tyles %from a template or document'U on page 1EE.
&ip
Changing a style using the $tyle dialog

To change an eCisting style using the -tyle dialog( right9clic+ on the style in the -tyles and 5ormatting window and select /odify from the pop9up menu. The dialog displayed depends on the type of style selected. 5igure 200 shows an eCample of the dialog for a paragraph style. 3ach styleFs dialog has se)eral tabs. The )arious properties on these dialogs are described in the neCt chapter. 0o)e to the page where the setting you want to modify is specified and input the new )alue. You can clic+ the 8elp button at any time to bring up the online help where all the options of the current page are briefly described. 7hen you are done( clic+ ;6 to close the dialog.
)igure :$$ ,-ample of the Paragraph Style dialog
*((
-'amples: /odifying paragraph styles

5or this eCample( we need fi)e lines of teCt with three $ibre=ffice9supplied paragraph styles& .eading *( .eading :( and .eading 3. These paragraph styles could be used in formatting headings %subheads' in the framewor+ for a document that will be Tfleshed outU afterwards. =pen a new teCt document for this eCercise and type Title on the first line( clic+ the Paragraph $tyles icon on the -tyles and 5ormatting window( and double9clic+ 8eading 1 in the drop9down list. #ress ,nter to start a new line and type First section heading( applying the .eading : style. 4epeat this procedure for the other headings shown in 5igure 201( using the proper paragraph style for each& 6eading 3 for "ubsection !eadin ( and so on.
)igure :$* .eadings *3 with default styles !ow( suppose you decide to ma+e the following changes to these styles&
.eading * should be centered. .eading 3 should be indented. (enter 1eadin 6

=n the -tyles and 5ormatting window( select the Paragraph $tyles icon %if it isnFt already chosen'( right9clic+ on 8eading 1( and choose /odify.
)igure :$: <odifying a style *fter the #aragraph -tyle window opens( choose the Alignment tab( select Center %as shown below'( and clic+ ;6.
*(=
)igure :$3 8enter .eading * !ow( e)ery paragraph mar+ed as .eading * will be centered %as shown below'. Gf you ma+e another .eading * entry( it will be centered as well.
)igure :$# +he te-t +itle@ which is formatted as a centered .eading * style
,ndent 1eadin 7
=n the -tyles and 5ormatting window( right9clic+ on the 8eading % paragraph style and choose /odify %as before'. *fter the #aragraph -tyle dialog opens( follow the steps below& 1' Clic+ the ndents O $pacing tab. 2' "nder the 2ndent section( set the indentation before the teCt to 0.60 ( as shown below. Your display might be different( depending upon what measurement unit was set in the options %&ools > :ibre;ffice !riter > 1eneral > $ettings'.
)igure :$% Set indentation
*=$
The result should resemble the illustration below.
)igure :$& +he te-t formatted as .eading 3 style is now indented
2sing Auto2pdate
=n the =rgani2er page of the #aragraph -tyle dialog is a chec+ boC named *uto"pdate. Gt is present only for paragraph and frame styles. Gf this chec+ boC is selected( then $ibre=ffice itself will apply to the style( any modification made manually to a paragraph formatted with that style.
Caution
Gf you are in the habit of manually o)erriding styles in your document( be sure that *uto"pdate is not enabled( or you will suddenly find whole sections of your document reformatting uneCpectedly.
)igure :$' +he Organi3er page of the Paragraph Style dialog
Creating custom paragraph styles: e'amples

You ha)e seen that the -tyles and 5ormatting window pro)ides se)eral predefined styles( such as .eading * and +e-t body. /ut what if you need something different( li+e a poem style( that is not in -tyles and 5ormatting? 7ith 7riter you can ma+e your own styles to suit your needs. Chapter E( 7or+ing with -tyles( describes in detail the options on the )arious pages of the #aragraph -tyle dialog. This section pro)ides an eCample of a typical use of custom paragraph styles. 7e will create a Poem paragraph style and a Poem .eader paragraph style( with the following properties&
Poem& Centered( with a font si2e of 10pt. Poem.eading& Centered( bold( with a 12pt font si2e.
Gn addition( a Poem.eading style is to be followed by a Poem style. Gn other words( when you press ,nter( the neCt paragraph style in the document changes to Poem.
*=*
>ote
You may ha)e noticed this beha)ior already. *fter you enter a heading using a .eading paragraph style and press ,nter( the neCt style switches to +e-t body.
Creating the 0oe# paragraph style

=ur neCt eCample creates the Poem style. 7e will use the Default style as a starting point. 1' Clic+ the $tyles and Formatting icon or press )**. 2' Clic+ the Paragraph $tyles icon %first from the left'. 3' 4ight9clic+ 4efault and choose >ew. The #aragraph -tyle dialog opens( with the ;rgani5er page selected. To create a custom style( you ha)e to understand and configure the top three entries. "tyle fields
>ame >e't $tyle
Description
This is the name of the style itself( li+e .eading * or +e-t body. -et %type in the teCt boC' the name to P!e". This is the style of a paragraph that follows the paragraph that is in Poem style. 7hen you press ,nter while typing teCt in the Poem style( this style is applied to the new paragraph. -et this )alue to Poem. 7hen you press ,nter( the teCt of the new paragraph will remain in the Poem style.
:inked with
Gf the Poem style is lin+ed with another style( say Default( then any change in Default will affect Poem( Just as you saw with .eading in the pre)ious section. 5or our eCample( this is not the beha)ior we want. -et this entry to G >one G. This means that Poem is not lin+ed with any other style.
-elect the Custom -tyles category for new styles. *fter ma+ing these changes( your dialog should loo+ li+e 5igure 20B.
)igure :$( 2nitial configuration for the Poem style. Set the first three entries as shown. The neCt step is to configure the alignment and font properties of this style.
=n the /lignment page( select the Center option. =n the )ont page( select the 1#pt font si2e.
Clic+ ;6 to sa)e the new Poem style.
*=:
Creating the Poem8eading style

Create a new Poem.eading style. "se the same procedure as before( using with these changes&
De-t Style& -elect Poem( not Poem8eading. Lin7ed with& 8eading.

The dialog should loo+ li+e 5igure 20D.
)igure :$= Settings for the Poem.eading style !ow set the settings of the new style& 1' =n the /lignment page( select Center. 2' =n the )ont page( choose 3old and si2e 1)pt. Clic+ ;6 to sa)e the new Poem.eading style.
$ample poem
Gt is a good idea to test out your new styles and see if you are happy with them. Typing a poem using the styles we ha)e Just defined should produce the results in 5igure 210.
)igure :*$ Sample poem

8hapter & 2ntroduction to Styles *=3
Changing the formatting of your styles

=ne of the main ad)antages of styles is that they allow the document formatting to be changed after the content has been written. 5or eCample( suppose you ha)e written a 1009page boo+ of poetry. Then you decide you donFt li+e the way the poems loo+ after all. =r( perhaps( your publisher doesnFt li+e it. To learn about reconfiguring styles( we add an indentation to the Poem style instead of centering it.
,ndent 0oe#
5irst( set the Poem style to left alignment& 1' Gn the -tyles and 5ormatting window( select Poem and right9clic+ and select /odify. 2' =n the /lignment page( select :eft. -et the indentation& 1' Clic+ the ndents O $pacing tab. 2' "nder 2ndent( set the indentation before the teCt to 0.5in. .onel Clic+ ;6( and you should see the teCt change.
Final result
*fter all these changes( the poem should loo+ similar to 5igure 211. !ote in the figure that a third style has been created for the author of the poem.
)igure :** )inal result@ using three custom styles
*=#
4eleting styles
Gt is not possible to delete $ibre=fficeFs predefined styles from a document or template( e)en if they are not in use. 6owe)er( custom styles can be deleted. To delete an unwanted style( right9clic+ on it in the -tyles and 5ormatting window and choose 4elete. Gf the style is in use( a message appears( warning you that the style is in use and as+ing you to )erify that you really want to delete the style. Gf the style is not in use( a different message appears( as+ing you to )erify that you really want to delete the style.
Caution
Gf you delete a style that is in use( all obJects with that style will return to the style it was based on %lin+ed with' but retain some of the deleted styleFs formatting as manual formatting.
&ip
Gf an unwanted paragraph style is in use( you can use Find O Ceplace to replace it with a substitute style before deleting it. -ee Chapter 3( 7or+ing with TeCt( for more information.
Assigning styles to shortcut keys

You can configure shortcut +eys to @uic+ly assign styles in your document. -ome shortcuts are predefined( such as 8trl9* for the .eading * paragraph style and 8trl9: for .eading :. You can modify these shortcuts and create your own. -ee Chapter 1<( Customi2ing 7riter( for details.
4efining a hierarchy of headings

&ools > ;utline >umbering defines the hierarchy of headings in a document. 6eadings can be numbered or notV typically the first9le)el headings in a boo+9length document are the neCt le)el of headings after the chapter titles( which may be numbered( but lower9le)el headings are not numbered. -ome chapter title and heading styles %such as those commonly used in engineering documents' number each chapter and heading le)el( for eCample 1( 1.1( 1.2( 2( 2.1( and so on. 7hen chapters or sections are added or deleted( the numbering is automatically changed. #aragraph styles are the +ey to $ibre=fficeFs outline numbering feature. The default paragraph styles assigned to outline le)els are the heading styles supplied with $ibre=ffice& .eading *( .eading :( and so on. 6owe)er( you can substitute any styles you wish( including custom %user9 defined' styles. The headings defined using the outline numbering feature can be used for more than the table of contents %described in Chapter 12'. 5or eCample( fields are commonly used to display headings in headers and footers of pages %see Chapter 1>( 7or+ing with 5ields'( and 7riter can send the outline to Gmpress to use as the basis for a presentation %see the 2mpress Guide for details'.
Choosing paragraph styles for outline levels

Gf you are using the default heading styles for the headings in your outline( and you do not want to use heading numbering( you do not need to do anything on the =utline !umbering dialog. The default outline numbering scheme uses the default heading styles %6eading 1( 6eading 2( and so on'.
*=%
To use custom styles in place of one or more of the default heading styles& 1' Choose &ools > ;utline >umbering to open the =utline !umbering dialog. 2' Clic+ the number in the Level boC corresponding to the heading for which you want to change the paragraph style.
)igure :*: 8hoosing paragraph styles for outline levels 3' Gn the Dumbering Paragraph Style section( choose from the drop9down list the paragraph style you want to assign to that heading le)el. Gn this eCample( you might choose /y 8eading 1 to replace 8eading 1 and for :evel #( /y 8eading # to replace 8eading #. >' 4epeat for each outline le)el that you want to change. Clic+ ;6 when done.
Assigning outline levels to other styles

Gn 7riter( you can assign an outline le)el to any paragraph style. This feature enables you to create a table of contents that includes those headings along with the headings using styles listed in the =utline !umbering dialog. 5or eCample( you might use a different se@uence of styles for anneCes %appendiCes'( but you want the anneC headings and subheadings to appear in the T=C at the same le)els as the chapter headings and subheadings. To assign an outline le)el to a paragraph style( go to the =utline M !umbering page for the style( and select the re@uired outline le)el. Clic+ ;6 to sa)e this change.
)igure :*3 Specifying an outline level for a paragraph style
*=&
$etting up heading numbering

Gf you want one or more heading le)els to be numbered( many choices are a)ailableV this eCample defines a scheme to create headings that loo+ li+e those in the illustration below.
)igure :*# +he numbering scheme to be set up "se the !umbering page of the =utline !umbering dialog to define the numbering scheme and its appearance. 5igure 21A shows the default settings.
)igure :*% Default settings on the Outline Dumbering dialog 1' Gn the Level list( choose 1. Gn the Dumber list( choose 1, #, %, .... The result is shown in the pre)iew boC on the right in 5igure 21<.
*='
)igure :*& Specifying numbering of Level * headings 2' Gn the Level list( choose #. Gn the Dumber list( choose 1, #, %, .... The Show sublevels list is now acti)eV it should show # %if not( choose #'. The result is shown in 5igure 21E.
)igure :*' Specifying numbering of Level : headings 3' Gn the Level list( choose %. Gn the Dumber list( choose 1, #, %, .... The Show sublevels list should show % %if not( choose %'. The result is shown in 5igure 21B.
)igure :*( Specifying numbering of Level 3 headings These choices produce the layout shown in 5igure 21D.
*=(
)igure :*= 6esults of numbering choices for headings
$etting up the indentation of headings

7hether or not the headings are numbered( you may want to change some of their formatting. 5or eCample( you may want the second9le)el and third9le)el headings to be indented from the margin. 5or numbered headings( you may also want the second line of long headings to line up with the first word of the heading( not the number. 5or these changes( use the Position page of the =utline !umbering dialog.
The #osition page for documents created in $ibre=ffice is slightly different from the #osition page for documents created in earlier )ersions of similar programs that are opened in $ibre=ffice. This difference is pro)ided for bac+wards compatibility. 5or more information( refer to T#osition page for older documents opened in $ibre=fficeU %under TCreating a new list styleU' in Chapter E( 7or+ing with -tyles.
>ote
0ositionin in new LibreOffice docu#ents

5igure 220 shows the #osition page as it appears for documents created in $ibre=ffice.
)igure ::$ Setting up the position of level * headings 1' Gn the Level list on the left( choose 2. Change the )alues for Dumbering followed by... at and /ligned at( as shown in 5igure 221. You may want to use a different )alue. This indents the entire heading but does not affect the way long headings wrap around %see 5igure 222'.
*==
)igure ::* 2ndenting Level : headings
)igure ::: 6esult of changes to indentation of Level : headings 2' To change the wrapping beha)ior of long headings( change 2ndent at to a larger )alue( as shown in 5igure 223. The result is shown in 5igure 22>.
)igure ::3 Wrapping long headings
)igure ::# 6esult of changing 2ndent at value
:$$
3' Gn the Level list( choose 3. Change the )alues for Dumbering followed by... at( /ligned at( and 2ndent at( as shown in . The final result is shown in 5igure 22A.
)igure ::% 2ndenting level 3 headings
:$*
8hapter ' Wor7ing with Styles
ntroduction
Chapter <( Gntroduction to -tyles( describes the basics of how to use( apply( and manage styles. This chapter gi)es a more detailed description of how to create or modify a style( using the many options a)ailable on the )arious pages of the -tyle dialog. You will learn how these options affect the appearance of the style and how to use them efficiently. 3Camples and hints are also pro)ided. The -tyle dialogs share many of the same pages as the manual formatting dialogs( so you can also use this chapter to help you apply manual formatting %though you do not need that if you use styles'.
Creating custom AnewB styles

Gn addition to using the predefined styles pro)ided by $ibre=ffice( you can add new custom %user9 defined' styles. Gn Chapter <( two methods are gi)en for creating a new style& the drag9and9drop approach and the >ew $tyle from $election icon in the -tyles and 5ormatting window. These methods are )ery con)enient because it is possible to immediately chec+ the )isual effects that the style produces before creating it. 6owe)er( they may re@uire you to access se)eral different menus( and you ha)e a somewhat reduced amount of control on style %particularly when it comes to organi2ing them'. The method described in this chapter( therefore( concerns only the use of the -tyle dialog.
&he $tyle dialog

=pen the -tyles and 5ormatting window. -elect the category of style you want to create by clic+ing on the appropriate icon in the top part of the -tyles and 5ormatting window. 5or eCample( select the third icon from the left if you want to create a new frame style. 4ight9clic+ in the window and select >ew from the conteCt menu. 3Ccept for the Page and List styles( the style dialog which opens will be lin+ed to one of the eCisting styles. You can choose a different style from the Lin7ed with drop9down list( or choose >one. The dialog that is displayed depends on the type of style you selected. 0any of the pages are the same as those that are displayed when manual formatting is applied. Therefore( if you are familiar with manual formatting( you will find that you already +now how to use most of the options.
The dialogs used to create a new style and to modify an eCisting style are mostly the same( but with one eCception& conditional styles ha)e a different dialog. -ee T7or+ing with conditional paragraph stylesU on page 21<.
&ip
&he ;rgani5er page

7hen creating a new style( the first page you need to set up is the Organi3er@ which is shown in 5igure 22<. This page is common to all style categories( with only small differences between them. Therefore( it is described only once.
:$#
)igure ::& +he Organi3er page displayed when a new Paragraph style is created. .epending on the style you are creating( you will find the following information on this page&
>ame& present on all the categoriesuse this field to gi)e a name to the style you are
creating.
Auto2pdate& only present for paragraph and frame styles. Gf it is chec+ed( then 7riter will
apply any modification made manually to a paragraph formatted with that style to the style itself.
Caution
Gf you are in the habit of manually o)erriding styles in your document( be sure that *uto"pdate is not enabled( or you will suddenly find whole sections of your document reformatted uneCpectedly.
>e't $tyle& only a)ailable for paragraph and page styles. "se it to specify which style will
be applied to the neCt element. Gt is customary( for eCample( to ha)e a left page style followed by a right page( a first page followed by a left page( a heading followed by body teCt( and so on. You will see in the eCample later how this property is used. #redefined paragraph styles for lists or bullets also ma+e large use of the De-t Style property.
:inked with& a)ailable for paragraph( character( and frame stylesV it determines the position of the style in the hierarchy. 7hen creating a new style and lin+ing it to an eCisting style( all the starting properties of the style are copied from the lin+ed style. Category& a)ailable for all stylesV use it to associate the new style with one of the
categories. !ote that you cannot change the category of the predefined styles. -etting this field is useful when filtering the contents of the -tyles and 5ormatting window.
Contains& shows a summary of the properties of the style.
2nderstanding linked styles

7hen creating a new paragraph or a new character style( you may use an eCisting style as a starting point for its settings. Gn this sense( $ibre=ffice lin7s the styles together. 7hen styles are lin+ed( a change in the parent style affects e)ery style lin+ed to it. You can easily )isuali2e the connections between styles by switching to the 8ierarchical )iew in the -tyles and 5ormatting window filter. 5or eCample( e)ery .eading style %such as .eading *( .eading :' is lin+ed with a style called .eading. This relationship is illustrated in 5igure 22E.
)igure ::' .ierarchical view of lin7ed styles.
:$%
$in+ing styles is a )ery powerful method to create TfamiliesU of styles and allows you to change their properties simultaneously. 5or eCample( if you decide that all the headings should be green %such as in this guide'( you only need to change the font color of the parent style to achie)e the desired result. !ote howe)er( that changes made to a parameter of the parent style do not o)erride changes pre)iously made to the same parameter in the child styles. 5or eCample( if you changed the .eading : font color to green( a change of the font color of the .eading style %the parent style' to red will not affect the .eading : font color. You can easily chec+ which properties are specific to a style by loo+ing at the 8ontains section of the Organi3er page. Gn case you want to reset the properties of a child style to that of the parent style( clic+ the $tandard button located at the bottom of each #aragraph and Character style dialog page.
>ote
You cannot define a hierarchical style structure for #age( 5rame and $ist styles.
(reatin a lin&ed style

To create a lin+ed style( you can either specify the parent style %the Tlin+ed withU style' in the ;rgani5er page of the -tyle dialog( or you can start creating a new style by right9clic+ing in the -tyles and 5ormatting window on the style to be lin+ed with and selecting >ew from the drop9down menu.
Exa#ple4 (!an in a property of a parent style

-uppose that you want to change the font of not only .eading * or .eading :( but all headings. The easiest way to do that is to ta+e ad)antage of lin7ing. =pen the -tyles and 5ormatting window %press )**'( select the #aragraph -tyles category( right"clic7 on 8eading( then select /odify to open the #aragraph -tyle dialog for the .eading style. -elect the Font tab( then select a font and clic+ ;6.
)igure ::( Select .eading style.
)igure ::= Select the heading font.

:$& LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
!ow( the fonts of all the heading styles %.eading * through .eading *$' are changed in a single operation. 5igure 230 shows on the left a document using the headings 1( 2 and 3 and on the right the same document after changes ha)e been made to the .eading style.
)igure :3$ ,ffects of changing the .eading style font.
!orking with paragraph styles

*lthough this section describes most of the parameters scattered o)er the twel)e tabbed pages shown in 5igure 22D( you do not need to configure them all. Gn fact( in the )ast maJority of cases it is sufficient to modify only a few attributes( particularly if you ma+e use of the lin+ing properties of styles or when basing the new style on one which is already similar.
$ettings on the ndents O $pacing page

=n the Gndents M -pacing page( you can set up the parameters that affect the position of the paragraph on the page and the spacing between lines and between this paragraph and the paragraphs nearby. The right hand side of the page shows a pre)iew of the applied settings. "se the 2ndent section of the page to set up the indentation( using these parameters&
3efore te't& controls the space in the selected unit of measurement between the left
margin of the page and the leftmost part of the paragraph area. 3ntering a negati)e )alue results in the teCt starting on the left of the margin. This may be useful in situations where your left margin is @uite wide( but you want the headings to be centered in the page.
After te't& controls the space in the selected unit of measurement between the right
margin of the page and the rightmost part of the paragraph area. 3ntering a negati)e )alue results in the teCt eCtending into the right margin of the page.
First line& enter the offset in this boC %either positi)e or negati)e' of the first line of the
paragraph relati)e to the paragraph area. * positi)e )alue increases the indentation of the first line( while a negati)e )alue ma+es the first line start to the left of the paragraph area.
Automatic& chec+ this boC to allow 7riter to automatically control the indentation of the first
line. The )alue is calculated by 7riter on the basis of the font si2e and other parameters. "se the Spacing section of the page to determine the amount of )ertical space abo)e and below the paragraph. Gt is customary to include some Tspace abo)eU in heading styles so that they are separated from the teCt body of the pre)ious section without the need to insert empty paragraphs. -pacing between paragraphs is also normal in certain types of documents. The body teCt style of this guide is configured to lea)e some space between consecuti)e paragraphs.
8hapter ' Wor7ing with Styles :$'
)igure :3* Settings on the 2ndents and Spacing page of a paragraph style The option to remo)e space between paragraphs of the same style is a)ailable by selecting the chec+ boC. The spacing between paragraphs does not affect the spacing between lines( which is controlled using the drop9down boC in the Line spacing section. You can select one of the following )alues&
$ingle& the default settingapplies a single line spacing to the paragraph. This is
calculated automatically based on the font si2e.
1.+ lines& sets the line spacing to 1.A lines. 4ouble& sets the line spacing to 2 lines. Proportional& this )alue acti)ates the edit boC neCt to the drop9down list where you can
enter a percentage )alue. 100k means a single line spacing( 200k double line spacing and so on.
At least& this choice acti)ates the edit boC neCt to the drop9down list( where you can enter
the minimum )alue %in your selected unit of measurement' to be used for the line spacing.
:eading& if this is selected( you can control the height of the )ertical space between the
base lines of two successi)e lines of teCt( by entering a )alue( which is summed with the )alue of single line spacing( into the edit boC.
Fi'ed& this choice acti)ates the edit boC neCt to the drop9down list( where you can enter the
eCact )alue of the line spacing.
7hen using different font si2es in the same paragraph( the line spacing will be une)en( as 7riter automatically calculates the optimal )alue. To obtain e)enly spaced lines( select Fi'ed or At least in the drop9down list and a )alue that is large enough to create a spacing between the lines sufficient to account for the largest font si2e used.
&ip
The last parameter that can be set in this page is 6egister"true. This is a typography term that is used in printing. This term refers to the congruent imprint of the lines within a type area on the front and the bac+ side of boo+ pages( newspaper pages( and maga2ine pages. The register9true feature ma+e these pages easier to read by pre)enting gray shadows from shining through
:$( LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
between the lines of teCt. The register9true term also refers to lines in adJacent teCt columns that are of the same height. 7hen you define a paragraph( #aragraph -tyle( or #age -tyle as register9true( the base lines of the affected characters are aligned to a )ertical page grid( regardless of font si2e or of the presence of graphics. This aligns the baseline of each line of teCt to a )ertical document grid( so that each line is the same height. To use this feature( you must first acti)ate the 6egister"true option for the current page style. Gf you ha)e acti)ated the 4egister9true for the page style in use %refer to eneral settings for the page style on page 223' then the 6eference style and all the styles hierarchically dependent on it will ha)e the Activate Cegister.&rue boC selected. You may also( howe)er( want to acti)ate the )ertical grid for other styles %or not apply it to styles dependent on the reference style' and this is where this can be done.
$ettings on the Alignment page

"se the *lignment page to modify the hori2ontal alignment of the teCt( choosing between :eft( Cight( Center( and Vustified. The results of the selection are shown in a pre)iew window on the right9hand side of the page. 7hen selecting the Bustified alignment( you can also decide how 7riter should treat the last line of the paragraph. /y default( 7riter aligns the last line to the left( but you can choose to align it to the center or to Justify it %meaning that the words on the last line will be spaced in order to occupy it fully'. Gf you ha)e selected to Justify the last line and select the -'pand single word option( then whene)er the last line of a Justified paragraph consists of a single word( this word is stretched by inserting spaces between characters so that it occupies the full length of the line. The alignment page is also used to control the +e-t to +e-t )ertical alignmentuseful when you ha)e miCed font si2es on the same row. Choose the element of the fonts on the line that will be aligned between /utomatic( Jaseline( +op( <iddle( Jottom. 4efer to 5igure 232 for a )isual representation of these reference points.
)igure :3: +e-t to te-t vertical alignment Jaseline@ +op@ <iddle@ Jottom
&e't flow options for paragraph styles

The page of the dialog controlling the teCt flow options is shown in 5igure 233. This page is di)ided into three parts& .yphenation( Jrea7s( and Options. 7ith .yphenation selected( three parameters are settable&
8haracters at line end& controls the minimum number of characters to be left on a line
before inserting a hyphen.
:$=
8haracters at line begin& controls the minimum number of characters that can be placed at
the beginning of a new line following a hyphen.
<a-imum number of consecutive hyphens& controls the number of consecuti)e lines that
terminate with a hyphen. Gf you prefer 7riter to automatically control the hyphenation( select the Automatically option.
)igure :33 +he options on the +e-t )low page of the Paragraph dialog Gn the Jrea7s section( you can re@uire a paragraph to start on a new page or column( as well as specify the position of the brea+( the style of the new page( and the new page number. * typical use for this option is to ensure that the first page of a new chapter always starts on a new %usually right9hand' page. To always start a style on a new page( choose the following settings on the +e-t )low page of the #aragraph -tyle dialog& 1' Gn the Jrea7s section( select nsert. 0a+e sure that +ype is set to Page and Position is set to 3efore. 2' -elect !ith Page $tyle and choose the page style from the list. 3' To continue page numbering from the pre)ious chapter( lea)e Page number set at *. To restart each chapterFs page numbering at 1( set Page number to 1. Clic+ ;6.
Gf you want the first page of a new chapter to always start on a right %recto' page( ma+e sure that the page style for the first chapter page is set for the right page only by ma+ing this selection in the Layout settings field on the Page tab of the #age -tyle dialog.
>ote
The Options section of the +e-t )low page pro)ides settings to control what happens when a paragraph does not fit on the bottom of a page&
4o not split paragraph means that the paragraph is ne)er split across two pages. Gf it
does not fit on the bottom of one page( the entire paragraph mo)es to the top of the neCt page.
:*$
6eep with ne't paragraph is appropriate for headings or the lead9in sentence to a list( to
ensure that it is not the last paragraph on a page.
;rphan control and !idow control. 7idows and orphans are typographic terms. *n
orphan is the first line of a paragraph alone at the bottom of a page or column. * widow is the last line of a paragraph that appears alone at the top of the neCt page or column. "se these options to allow paragraphs to split across pages or columns but re@uire at least two or more lines to remain together at the bottom or top of a page or column. You can specify how many lines must remain together.
Font options for the paragraph style

Three pages of the #aragraph -tyle dialog are dedicated to settings controlling the appearance of the font( namely( the )ont( )ont ,ffects( and Position pages. The use of the first two pages is straightforward. 0any of the options used when creating a character style are discussed in TCreating a new character styleU on page 21B. =ptions that can be used when creating a paragraph style are described here.
"pecifyin a relative font si)e

Gf you are creating a style based on another style %lin+ed style'( you can specify a font si2e relative to that other styleQeither as a percentage or as a plus or minus point )alue %2pt or LApt'. 4elati)e font si2es are commonly used for 7eb pages. 5or eCample( the paragraph style .eading * is based on the paragraph style .eading. The font si2e of the paragraph style .eading is 1>pt( and the font si2e of paragraph style .eading * is specified as 11Ak. Thus( the resultant font si2e of teCt in a paragraph formatted with the .eading * paragraph style is 1>pt times 11Ak j 1<.1pt. To specify a percentage font si2e& in the #aragraph -tyle dialog( select the Font tab. Gn the Si3e boC( enter the percentage amount followed by the symbol k %see 5igure 23>'. -imilarly( you can enter a plus or minus sign followed by the number of points to be added or subtracted from the base font si2e. To change from a relati)e font si2e bac+ to an absolute font si2e( enter the desired font si2e in points followed by the letters pt. Gt is also possible to use a #ercentage 5ont si2e for character styles.
)igure :3# Selecting a type si3e based on a percentage
"electin a lan ua e for a para rap! style

The language you select for a document %on &ools > ;ptions > :anguage $ettings > :anguages' determines the dictionary used for spell chec+ing( thesaurus( hyphenation( the decimal and thousands delimiter used( and the default currency format.
8hapter ' Wor7ing with Styles :**
7ithin the document( you can apply a separate language to any paragraph style. This setting has priority o)er the language of the whole document. =n the )ont page of the #aragraph -tyle dialog( languages with installed dictionaries are mar+ed in the Language list by a small A3C icon %5igure 23A'. 7hen chec+ing spelling( 7riter will use the correct dictionary for paragraphs with this style. Gf you write documents in multiple languages( you can use the lin+ed styles to create two paragraph styles that differ only in the language option. Gf you then want to change some of the other properties of the paragraph style( all you need do is to change the parent style. To insert occasional words in a different language and a)oid their being pic+ed by mista+e with the chec+9spelling function( it is more con)enient to use a character style( as discussed in TCreating a new character styleU on page 21B.
)igure :3% Selecting a language for a paragraph style
;ptions for positioning te't

The #osition page of the #aragraph -tyle dialog collects all the options that affect the position of the teCt on the screen or printed page. This page is di)ided into three sections( plus a pre)iew area. They are& Position( 6otation( and Scaling.
)igure :3& +he position page of the Paragraph Style dialog "se the Position section to control the appearance of superscripts and subscripts. 6owe)er( you will normally apply superscript and subscripts to groups of characters rather than to entire paragraphs. Therefore( it is strongly recommended to change these parameters only when defining a character style and( instead( lea)e the default settings for the paragraph styles. The second section of the #osition page controls the rotation of the paragraph area. Two common uses for rotated paragraphs are&
To put portrait headers and footers on a landscape page To fit headings abo)e narrow table columns %as shown in 5igure 23E'
:*:
)igure :3' / table with rotated headings The $cale width boC controls the percentage of the font width by which to compress or stretch the rotated teCt hori3ontally. That is( from the first character to the last. Chapter >( 5ormatting #ages( describes how to create portrait headers and footers on landscape pages by rotating characters. You can achie)e the same effect by defining a separate header or footer paragraph style specifically for landscape pages.
Exa#ple4 +otatin t!e text in a para rap! style

*s an eCample( we will apply rotated table headings to a pre9eCisting table. 1' Create a new paragraph style. !ame it Ta#le Heading $!tated. 2' =n the Position page of the #aragraph -tyle dialog( in the 6otation ! scaling section( select 9* degrees. Clic+ ;6 to sa)e the new style.
)igure :3( 6otating a paragraph =$ degrees 3' -elect the heading row of the table and apply the new style. *ny teCt in the cells of the heading row is now rotated. >' Gf the headings are aligned to the top of the cells( you may want to change the alignment to the bottom of the cells( as shown in 5igure 23E. To do this( clic+ the 3ottom button on the Table toolbar or select Format > Alignment > 3ottom from the main menu.
"pacin options
"se the Spacing section of the #osition page to control the spacing between indi)idual characters in the paragraph. 7hen selecting an option other than default in the drop9down menu( use the edit boC to enter the )alue in points by which you want to eCpand or condense the teCt.
:*3
The Pair 6erning option %selected by default' increases or decreases the amount of space between certain pairs of letters to impro)e the o)erall appearance of the teCt. 8erning automatically adJusts the character spacing for specific letter combinations. 8erning is only a)ailable for certain font types and( for printed documents( only wor+s if your printer supports it.
)igure :3= Kerning disabled 4left5 and enabled 4right5.
Controlling tab stops

*lthough borderless tables are generally considered a much better solution to space out material across a page( in many situations tabs are sufficient to do what you need( with the added ad)antages of being simpler to manage and @uic+er to apply.
Caution
Gf you need to use tabs( and you will be sending a document to other people( do not use the default tab stops. Gf the recipients of the document ha)e defined default tab stops that are different from the ones you are using( the paragraph may loo+ )ery different on their machines. Gnstead( define the tab stops eCplicitly in the paragraph or the paragraph styleV then you can be sure that e)eryone will see the same layout.
To define tab stops in your paragraph style( use the Tabs page( shown in 5igure 2>0. 6ere you can choose the type of tab& left( right( centered( or decimalV the character to be used as a decimal pointV and the fill characterQthe characters that appear between the end of the teCt before the tab and the beginning of the teCt after the tab. You can also create a custom fill character by entering it in the corresponding boC. Common use of a fill character is adding dots between a heading and a page number in a table of contents or underscore character when creating a form to fill in.
)igure :#$ Specifying tab stops for a paragraph style Creating a new tab stop( therefore( is Just a matter of deciding its position relati)e to the left margin( the type( the fill character and clic+ing the >ew button. The tab stop will be entered in the Position list on the left hand side. "nfortunately( the only way to modify the position of a tab stop is to create a new one in the desired position and delete the old one using the buttons on the right9hand side of the page. !ote that it is not possible to define tabs that eCceed the page margin. Gn the rare cases where that may be needed( use a borderless table instead.
:*# LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
2sing the ;utline O >umbering page

"se the =utline M !umbering page if you want to number the paragraph( if for eCample this style is to be used for a heading or list item. You can assign an outline le)el to any paragraph style. This feature enables you to create a table of contents that includes those headings along with the headings using styles listed in &ools > ;utline >umbering. 5or eCample( you might use a different se@uence of styles for anneCes %appendiCes'( but you want the anneC headings and subheadings to appear in the T=C at the same le)els as the chapter headings and subheadings. To assign an outline le)el to a paragraph style( go to the =utline M !umbering page for the style( and select the re@uired outline le)el. Clic+ ;6 to sa)e this change. This page should be used in combination with list styles when you need to associate a certain paragraph style with a list style. 4efer to TCombining list and paragraph stylesU on page 233 for additional information on how to use this page( as well as an eCample.
)igure :#* Setting the outline level on the Outline L Dumbering page
$etting up a drop cap

Gf you want your paragraph to use drop caps %usually this is suitable for a first paragraph style'( then you can predefine the properties in the .rop Caps page of the paragraph style dialog. -electing the option to display drop caps enables the subse@uent options where you can fine tune the appearance& the number of lines occupied( the number of characters to enlarge %if you want the whole first word( chec+ the corresponding boC'( and the space between the drop caps and the teCt. .rop caps use the same font and ha)e the same properties as the rest of the paragraphV howe)er( you can easily modify their appearance by creating a specific character style and using it. 5or eCample( you may want the drop caps to be of a different color or apply an outline effect. -elect the character style you want to use in the corresponding drop9down menu.
)igure :#: Options for adding a drop cap to the paragraph style
:*%
$etting up paragraph background and borders

*dding a bac+ground color and a border to a paragraph is a good way to ma+e it stand out without ha)ing to insert a frame. You can customi2e the bac+ground and border of the paragraph areas using the corresponding pages of the #aragraph -tyle dialog. Gn addition to highlighting( borders are also often used to separate header and footer areas from the main teCt area %such as in this guide' as well as to pro)ide decorati)e elements in some heading styles. The two pages are fairly intuiti)e. You may want to pay attention to the following points when wor+ing with the Jac7ground page&
Gn case you do not find the desired color in the list of predefined ones( you can define your
own by selecting &ools > ;ptions > :ibre;ffice > Colors.
You can use a graphic instead of a solid color as bac+ground. Gn the As drop9down list(
select 1raphic( then select the graphic obJect you want to use and adJust the parameters( as re@uired. .etailed instructions on wor+ing with graphic bac+grounds can be found in the 2mpress Guide.
The bac+ground is only applied to the paragraph area. Gf you ha)e defined an indented
paragraph( the space between the paragraph and the margin does not ha)e the paragraphFs bac+ground color. =n the Jorders page( the following points are worth considering&
7atch out for the effects that the spacing between borders and paragraph area produces
on indentations and tabulations.
Gf you want the border to be drawn around multiple paragraphs( lea)e the /erge with ne't
paragraph option at the bottom of the page mar+ed.
!orking with conditional paragraph styles

* conditional paragraph style is another way of formatting teCt differently in different parts of a document. Gn some cases( you may find it sa)es time to use conditional styles rather than switching between styles as you type. 0a+ing a paragraph style conditional means it changes its formatting depending on where it is used. 5or eCample( you may want the style <y+e-tJody to be blac+ by default but turn white when inside a frame with a blue bac+ground. #robably the most common use for conditional formatting is with single9style outlining. -ingle9style outlining is a type of outline numbering designed with a Dumbering style( rather than with &ools > ;utline >umbering. Gnstead of using different styles( it changes the number formatting whene)er you press the +ab +ey to create a subordinate heading. The only trouble with single9style outlining is that all le)els loo+ the same. This is where a conditional paragraph style comes in handy. *ssign the paragraph style to an outline numbering style in the ;utline O >umbering page and then open the Condition page. There( you can assign the le)els of the outline numbering style to other paragraph styles. Then( when you press the +ab +ey while using the paragraph style( each le)el of the outline ta+es on different formatting( ma+ing single9style outlining e)en more con)enient than it is on its own.
>ote
#redefined styles %other than +e-t body' such as Default( .eading *( and .eading : cannot be set to be conditional.
:*&
Caution
Gf you want to ma+e a style conditional( you ha)e to do it while the style window is still open for the first time. *fter the window closes( the 8ondition tab no longer appears in the window.
)igure :#3 8ondition page for paragraph styles 7hen you create a conditional style( you are saying Tin this condition ma+e this style loo+ li+e that other styleU. 5or eCample( T7hen typing into a footer( ma+e this style loo+ li+e the myPfooter paragraph styleV when typing into a table( ma+e this style loo+ li+e the tablePte-t paragraph styleU. Gn addition to setting the normal %unconditional' properties of the style( you need to define which other style it will loo+ li+e in different situations. You do this on the 8ondition page. To set up a conditional paragraph style& 1' .efine a new paragraph style. 2' -elect all the paragraph properties for the style. 4o not click ;6W 3' Clic+ the Condition tab. >' -elect the Conditional $tyle option. A' -elect the first condition in the 8onte-t list %left side of the dialog' and select the style you want for this condition in the Paragraph Styles list on the right9hand side. <' Clic+ Apply. The name of the paragraph style appears in the middle list. E' 4epeat steps A and < for each condition you want to ha)e lin+ed to a different style. B' Clic+ ;6. 7hen the style is selected( you will see that the formatting of your teCt depends on the conteCt.
:*'
!orking with character styles

Character styles complement paragraph styles and are applied to groups of characters( rather than whole paragraphs. They are mainly used when you want to change the appearance or attributes of parts of a paragraph without affecting other parts. 3Camples of effects that can be obtained by means of character styles are bold or italic typeface or colored words. Two of the character styles used in this document are&
8eystro+e uses a custom KeyStro7e style. 5or eCample&

TTo set 7riter to full screen( press 8ontrol9Shift9BU.
0enu paths use a custom <enuPath style. 5or eCample&

TTo turn field shadings on or off( choose =iew > Field $hadingsU. =ther ways of using character styles are described elsewhere in the Writer Guide. These uses include ma+ing chapter numbers( page numbers( or list numbers larger than the surrounding teCt and formatting hyperlin+s. 7hen inserting words in different language or words you do not want the spell chec+er to detect as mista+es %for eCample procedure names in some programming language'( character styles are @uite useful because you can define the language to be applied in the character9style properties.
!hy use character styles7

!ew 7riter users often wonder( TWhy use character stylesQU or T.ow is this different from clic7ing the bold icon to change the font typefaceQU The following real9life e)ent illustrates the difference. ,ean is a technical writer from *ustralia. -he learned the )alue of character styles after her publisher told her to unbold menu paths in her 2009page boo+. ,ean had not used character styles. -he had to edit all 200 pages by hand( with some help from Find O Ceplace. This was the last time ,ean failed to used character styles. Character styles do not ha)e as many options as paragraph styles or page styles. Their benefits are of a different nature.
Formatting changes
*s ,eanFs story illustrates( the ability to ma+e formatting changes throughout a document can be important. Character styles pro)ide this. Consistency Character styles help ensure that typesetting guidelines are applied consistently. Focus on content TWas 2 supposed to bold 7eystro7esQ .ow about menusQU * writer should not ha)e to remember the answers to these @uestions. Typesetting details distract you from the real content of your wor+. * properly named custom character style %such as KeyStro7e or <enuPath' will remo)e this burden from you.
Creating a new character style

This section illustrates the use of the Character -tyles dialog for creating a new character style. The pages used to configure the character style ha)e already been seen in the pre)ious section on paragraph styles. Therefore( once you are familiar with creating paragraph styles( it will only ta+e a few minutes to create a character style.
"se the Organi3er to set up the hierarchical le)el of the new character style %if needed' and
to gi)e it a name.
:*(
"se the )ont page to determine the font( typeface( and si2e for your character style. *s
with paragraph styles( you can specify the si2e as a percentage rather than pro)iding the absolute )alue. 5or eCample( 1A0k means that when the character style is applied to a 10pt font si2e( the new font si2e will be 1Apt( while if applied to a 1>pt font si2e( the new si2e will be 21pt. You can also specify the :anguage of the teCt to which a certain character style is applied( so you can insert words in a different language and ha)e them spell chec+ed using the correct dictionary.
Gn the )ont ,ffects page( you can set up attributes such as font color( underlining( relief( or
other effects. Gf you fre@uently use hidden teCt( for eCample( it is )ery con)enient to define a character style where the 8idden option is mar+ed. This way you only need a few mouse clic+s to hide teCt. Celief effects may be appropriate for a drop cap or to gi)e more emphasis to the chapter number or other parts of the title %as it is the case of this guide'.
You can use the Position page to create a subscript in case you are not satisfied with the
default one or e)en a sub9subscript which may be useful for certain scientific publications. Gn the same page( you can create rotated( condensed( or eCpanded teCt.
7hen rotating a group of characters( you also need to specify whether the rotated teCt should fit in the line or if( instead( it is allowed to eCpand abo)e and below the line. This property only becomes acti)e for character styles.
>ote
5inish creating a character style by assigning a bac+ground( if so desired. *pplying a

bac+ground to a character style yields the same effect as using the 6ighlighting tool on the -tandard Toolbar.
/igrating to character styles

5or people accustomed to formatting teCt manually( character styles can ta+e some getting used to. 6ere are some suggestions for ma+ing the transition easier&
Dever miC character styles and manual formatting. 0anual formatting supersedes
character styles. Gf you combine them( you may end up wasting hours in frustration trying to figure out why your character styles donFt wor+.
4ight9clic+ing and choosing Clear 4irect Formatting remo)es manual formatting but not
character styles. To remo)e a character style( select the characters( then select the 4efault character style.
4eali2e that clic+ing the 3old icon in the toolbar is not easier than double9clic+ing on a
character style that is preset for bolding the font typeface.
$ea)e the -tyles and 5ormatting window open to ma+e character styles easy to access.
!orking with frame styles

5rames are often used as containers for teCt or graphics. To pro)ide consistency in the appearance of frames used for similar purposes( it is a good idea to define styles for frames. 5or eCample( you might want photographs to be enclosed in a frame with a drop9shadowed border( line drawings in a frame with a plain border( marginal notes in a frame without a border but with a shaded bac+ground( and so on. 7riter pro)ides se)eral predefined frame styles( which you can modify as needed( and you can define new frame styles. The techni@ue for defining and applying frame styles is similar to that for other styles.
:*=
&ip
There is considerable o)erlap between the uses of frames and of sections for some page layout purposes. You may find it useful to ta+e a loo+ at Chapter >( 5ormatting #ages( for information about the use of frames and sections.
8ow frame styles work

7hen an obJect is added to 7riter( it is automatically enclosed in a frame of a predetermined type. The frame sets how the obJect is placed on the page( as well as how it interacts with other elements in the document. You can edit the frame by modifying the frame style it uses or by using a manual o)erride when a frame is added to the document. /ecause frames and obJects are used together( it is sometimes easy to forget they are separate elements. Gn some cases( such as charts( you can edit the frame and obJect separately( so the distinction is worth remembering. "nli+e other elements that use styles( frames can be defined only partly by their style because their use can )ary so much. -e)eral elements of frames( such as the anchor and protected elements( need to be defined manually for indi)idual frames. You can format a frame manually when you select nsert > Frame. The dialog that opens contains all the settings a)ailable when frame styles are set up( as well as some only a)ailable when the frame is inserted. *s with other styles( the most efficient way to format frames is in the -tyles and 5ormatting window.
Planning the styles

Gf you are using a miC of graphics( you may want to define two related styles( one with a border line for graphics with white bac+grounds and one without a border for all other bac+grounds. You also may want to design one or more frames for teCt only. =therwise( the default frame styles %listed in Table B' co)er most usersF needs. The only significant addition that many users might need is one or more styles for teCt frames. +able (. ?arious frame styles and their uses "tyle
5ormula 5rame raphics
(o##ents and .se

The frame style used for formulas. The default includes Auto$i5e( which adJusts the si2e of the frame to the formula. The default frame style. The default style for graphics. The defaults include autosi2ing to fit the graphic( no teCt wrap( and a thin border around the frame. These are reasonable defaults( eCcept for the border. "nless the bac+ground of the graphic is white and the documentFs bac+ground also is white( the border usually is unnecessary. The default style for use with File > >ew > :abels. Gt seems to be used by $ibre=ffice automatically and is not intended for users at all. * style for placing a frame beside the left margin. *s the name suggests( the <arginalia style is intended for comments added in the margin of teCt. The style also is useful for creating sideheadsQheadings against the left margin( which often are used in technical documentation. To set up sideheads( create body9teCt paragraph styles with two inches or more indentation from the left. Then( place the cursor at the start of a body9teCt paragraph( add the frame( and apply the <arginalia style.
$abels 0arginalia
::$
"tyle
=$3 7atermar+
(o##ents and .se

The default style for =$3 obJects and floating frames. The default places the frame at the top and center of a body of teCt. The default style for a watermar+( a graphic placed as the bac+ground to a body of teCt. The default is a Through wrap( with teCt passing o)er the frame and anything in it. The graphic should be faint enough that teCt still is readable o)er top of it.
Creating new frame styles

You can access frame settings by selecting >ew or /odify in the -tyles and 5ormatting window for a frame style.
+ype page& sets the si2e and position of the frame. =ne of the most useful options here is
Auto$i5e( which automatically adJusts the frame to the obJect it contains. Gf the frame style is one used automatically( then this option should be selected.
Options page& sets whether the contents of the frame are printed and able to be edited in a
read9only document. This page also sets the teCt direction( which is useful if you are using the frame for contents in a language that uses right9to9left teCt direction.
Wrap page& sets how teCt is positioned in relation to the frame and how close teCt comes to
a frame. Gf you want the frame contents to stand out from the paragraphs around it( set the wrap to >one. This probably is the single most important page for frames.
Jac7ground page& sets the bac+ground color or graphic. This page is useful mostly for teCt
frames in compleC page layouts( in which a teCt frame has an appearance different from the general bac+ground of the page.
Jorders page& sets the line around the frame( if any. 0any new designers ma+e the
mista+e of adding a border to e)ery frame. 6owe)er( when a colored bac+ground distinctly mar+s the di)ision between the frameFs contents and the rest of the page( borders are unnecessary.
8olumns page& this page can be ignored unless the frame is being used for teCt. The page
is the same as is used to set up a page style( and its parameters are described in the section TColumns pageU on page 22A.
<acro page& sets a macro to use with the frame in order to trigger an action when the user
interacts with the frame. These options are useful only in an on9line 7riter or 6T0$ document.
!orking with page styles

#age styles control page properties %margins( page si2e( header and footer( among others'. 6owe)er( unli+e paragraphs( which can ha)e directly applied properties( pages only ha)e a page style and no directly applied properties. Christian is a lawyer from California( "-*. 5or his letters( the first page has his letterhead( and subse@uent pages only identify the recipient( the date( and the page number. Christian does this using page styles. 6e also uses page styles to comply with the spacing re@uirements %such as margins' for legal briefs in California -tate courts. This section describes how to create a new page style( eCplains the meaning of some of the options in the #age style dialog( and illustrates their usage.
8hapter ' Wor7ing with Styles ::*
Creating a new page style

"nli+e other styles( page styles can be created or modified only by using the -tyles and 5ormatting window. =pen the -tyles and 5ormatting window and clic+ the #age -tyles icon . 4ight9clic+ anywhere in the window and select >ew. Gt does not matter if you right9clic+ a style or right9clic+ in blan+ space. The #age -tyle dialog contains eight pages.
)igure :## +he tabbed pages for the Page Style dialog
&he ;rgani5er page

The =rgani2er page is described in TThe =rgani2er pageU on page 20>.
-!e next style property

"se the >e't style property to specify the style for the subse@uent page style element. This property is particularly important for a page style( as the following eCample demonstrates.
"ettin up a title pa e
Consider a common scenario& you want the document to ha)e a title page that is different from the rest of the document&
Gt should not ha)e a header or page number. The left and right margins should be the same.
5or the title page( we can use the predefined )irst Page page style that comes with $ibre=ffice( and for the rest of the document( we can use the Default page style. 5igure 2>A shows the re@uired flow of page styles. =n the ;rgani5er page of the Default page style( lea)e the De-t Style property set to 4efault. =n the ;rgani5er page of the )irst Page style( ma+e sure that the De-t Style property is set to 4efault.
)igure :#% )low of page styles

.epending on your re@uirement( it may be possible to achie)e this Just by using the .efault page style. =n the documentWs first page( deselect the Same content on first page option with 8eader on selected. The header can thus be omitted from the first page.
>ote
:::
1eneral settings for the page style

The Page page of the #age -tyle dialog is where you can control the general settings of the page. The page consists of three sections( plus a pre)iew area in the top right corner.
)igure :#& +he Page page for the Page Style dialog Gn the Paper format section( you can specify the si2e of the paper choosing from one of the many predefined formats. -electing TuserU( you can use the Width and .eight fields to define your own paper si2e. Gf using a predefined format( select the orientation of the paper between portrait and landscape. Gf your printer has more than one tray( you can specify the tray from which to print pages in the new page style. Gn the <argins section( specify the si2e of the margins in your preferred unit of measurement. Gf you select /irrored for Page layout in the Layout settings section( then the names of the margins change from :eft and Cight to nner and ;uter. Gn the Layout settings section( choose the desired Page layout from the four a)ailable options. .ecide whether the page style being defined applies to both left and right pages %default'( or applies to right or left only. -ome considerations&
Gf you plan to bind the printed pages using this style li+e a boo+( select a mirrored layout.
"se the Format drop9down menu to determine the page numbering style to apply to this page style.
* common practice in page layouts is to ha)e asymmetrical page marginsQboth for left
and right margins and for top and bottom margins. There are )arious schemes for accomplishing this. The most common of them follow these two general rules for printed page layouts& %a' The outer margin %right margin on a right9hand page' would ha)e a wider margin than an inner margin %left margin on a right9hand page'V %b' The bottom margin would be larger than a top margin. The rationale for an asymmetrical page layout is allowing more space for readers to place their hands while holding the boo+s or other printed documents. *bout.com describes some page layouts on their 7eb site& #erfect #roportions "sing #age 0argins in .es+top #ublishing.
Gf you want the first page of a new chapter to always start on a right %recto' page( ma+e
sure that the page style for the first chapter page is set for the right page only by ma+ing this selection in the Layout settings field. The typical procedure for the rest of a chapter is
8hapter ' Wor7ing with Styles ::3
to define a single TmirroredU page style for both left and right pages. * mirrored page can ha)e different headers and footers. Gf done this way( e)ery chapter will use two page styles.
You can choose to define separate page styles for left and right pages( if you want the
pages to be )ery different in appearance %for eCample( different margins or headers and footers only on right pages but not on left pagesV imagine a boo+ with a full9page photograph on the left pages and teCt on the right pages'. Gn that case( ma+e sure that the De-t Style field for the first page style is then set for a left9only page( which( in turn( is then set to be followed by a right9only page style. Gf done this way( e)ery chapter will use three page styles. * hypothetical case might ha)e these page9style names& )irst page( Left( and 6ight. Gf you chec+ the Cegister.true boC( 7riter will create a )ertical grid on the page with a spacing between grid points that depends on the selected Ceference $tyle. The )ertical grid ma+es sure that teCt printed on adJacent columns( opposite pages( or e)en both sides of the same sheet of paper( is alignedma+ing it easier to read as well as being more pleasant to see.
3ackground and 3order pages

"se the 3ackground page to apply a bac+ground or the 3order page to draw a border around the teCt area of the page %the margins'. You can also add a shadow to the teCt area. You can choose between a solid color or a graphic image for the bac+ground and se)eral styles of line for the borders. !ote that the page area affected by these changes does not include the area outside the margins. Gf you plan to print on colored paper and want to ha)e a feel of the final result you will obtain or want to use a light color for the font( rather than changing the bac+ground( then go to &ools > ;ptions > :ibre;ffice and in the /ppearance section( change the Document bac7ground color.
8eader and Footer pages

You can associate a different header or footer to each page style. This property ma+es it )ery easy to ha)e different headers on left and right pages( to a)oid headers on pages at the start of a new chapter( and so on. You can also ha)e a different header or footer on the same page style where it is used for the first page of a document. -etting up the header and footer pages is straightforward. The instructions here refer to the header( but the footer page has the same options. *cti)ate the input boCes by selecting 8eader on( then specify the left margin( right margin( and spacing to the main teCt area. 5or the height of the header area( you can either select the AutoFit height boC( which will ma+e 7riter adapt the si2e to the contents( or specify the height manually. Clic+ing /ore opens a new dialog( where you can set the borders and bac+ground of the header area. Gf you deselect the $ame content leftFright boC( you can specify a different header for left or right pages( e)en if you use a single style for both as shown here. This option is not a)ailable on the predefined Left and 6ight page styles or on any other page style defined to be a left or right page only. .eselecting $ame content on first page allows you to set a different header on a first page when using the same style for the !eCt -tyle.
)igure :#' Different content on left and right pages
::#
Columns page
"se this page to create the desired column layout for the page style. The page is subdi)ided into three sections& Settings( Width and Spacing and Separator Line. The Settings section contains thumbnails of predefined columns settings you can select( as well as a teCt boC where you can enter the desired number of columns if you need to create a customi2ed one. *fter you select more than one column( the Width and Spacing section becomes acti)e. Gf you are not satisfied with the predefined settings %e@ually spaced columns'( deselect the Auto!idth option and enter the parameters manually. 7hen you wor+ with multiple columns per page( you can also fine tune the position and si2e of a separator line between the columns.
Footnote page
"se this page to adJust the appearance of the footnotes. 8eeping the default setting >ot larger than page area( the footnotes area is calculated automatically on the basis of the number of footnotes. Gf you prefer to control manually the maCimum space that footnotes can ta+e( select the /a'imum footnote height option and enter the )alue in the preferred unit of measurement. "se the second section of the page to customi2e the separator between the footnotes and the main area.
-'ample: A book chapter se?uence of pages

/oo+ chapters typically start on a right9hand page( with the first page of the chapter ha)ing a different layout from the rest of the pages. The other pages in the chapter are TmirroredU for double9sided printing. 5or eCample( page numbers in the header or footer may be positioned on the outside edge of pages and in this instance a wider margin %allowing for binding' is placed on the inside edge. Table D shows the properties of two page styles %6ight Page and Default' set up for a typical boo+ chapterFs se@uence of pages. +able =. Properties of customi3ed page styles for boo7 chapter 0a e "tyle
4ight #age
Desired effect
5irst page always on the right %an odd9numbered page' !o header or footer Top margin of page larger than on other pages
0roperty4 settin
Page > Page layout > ;nly right 8eader > 8eader on: >ot selected Page > /argins > &op: (.**cm Page > Page layout: /irrored 8eader > 8eader on: $elected 8eader > 8eader > $ame content leftFright: >ot selected
.efault
0irrored margins 6eader with page number on the top outside of the page and chapter title in the top middle center of the page
5igure 2>B illustrates the transitions from the 6ight Page to Default page styles( with the change of header between left and right pages shown by the m symbol.
::%
)igure :#( 6ight Page and then the Default page style with different headers for alternate pages. $tep 1. $et up the Cight Page style. 1' =n the -tyles and 5ormatting window( clic+ the #age -tyles icon to display a list of page styles. 2' 4ight9clic+ on 6ight Page and select /odify from the pop9up menu. 3' =n the Organi3er page of the #age -tyle& 4ight #age dialog( change De-t Style to 4efault.
)igure :#= Specifying the ne-t style after the first page of a chapter >' =n the Page tab( specify a larger left margin for binding( and a larger top margin to mo)e the chapter title down the page.
)igure :%$ Setting page margins and layout for the 6ight Page style A' =n the .eader and )ooter pages( be sure the 8eader on and Footer on options are not selected. Clic+ ;6 to sa)e your changes. $tep #. $et up the 4efault page style. 1' =n the -tyles and 5ormatting window( in the list of page styles( right9clic+ on Default and select /odify from the pop9up menu. 2' =n the Organi3er page of the #age -tyle& .efault dialog( be sure >e't $tyle is set to 4efault.
::& LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
3' =n the Page tab of the #age -tyle& .efault dialog( select /irrored for Page layout and set the 2nner and Outer margins to the same width as the Left and 6ight margins( respecti)ely( on the 6ight Page style.
)igure :%* Setting page margins and layout for the Default page style >' =n the .eader page of the #age -tyle& .efault dialog( select the 8eader on option and deselect the $ame content leftFright option. Clic+ ;6 to sa)e your changes.
)igure :%: Setting up the header properties for the Default page style $tep %. $et up the 8eading 1 paragraph style to start on a new right.hand page. 1' Gn the -tyles and 5ormatting window( on the #aragraph -tyles page( right9clic+ on .eading * and select /odify. 2' =n the +e-t )low page of the #aragraph -tyle dialog( in the Jrea7s section( select nsert( !ith Page $tyle( and Cight Page. Clic+ ;6 to sa)e your changes.
)igure :%3 Setting a paragraph style to start on a page of a selected style
::'
$tep ). $tart a new chapter. *pply the .eading * paragraph style to the first paragraph( which is the title of the chapter.
/y default( the .eading * paragraph style is assigned to Outline Level *. The assignment of paragraph styles to outline le)els is done through &ools > ;utline >umbering.
>ote
$tep +. $et up the page headers. 1' =n a left page( put the cursor in the header and insert a page number field on the left % nsert > Fields > Page >umber'. 2' #ress +ab to put the cursor in the middle and insert a Chapter reference& #ress 8ontrol9): %or choose nsert > Fields > ;ther from the menu bar' to display the 5ields dialog %5igure 2A>'. =n the Document page( for +ype( select Chapter and for )ormat( select Chapter name. 0a+e sure that Level is set to 1 and then clic+ nsert. 3' =n a right page( put the cursor in the header( press the +ab +ey( insert a Chapter reference( press +ab again( and insert a page number field. >' Gf you need to adJust the tab stops for the header( modify the .eader paragraph style. .o not manually adJust the tab stops.
)igure :%# 2nserting a chapter title into the header of a page
::(
!orking with list styles

$ist styles %also called numbering styles' wor+ together with paragraph styles. They define indentation( alignment( and the numbering or bullet characters used for list items. You can define many list styles( from simple bulleted lists to compleC multi9le)el %nested' lists. *s with other styles( the main reasons for using list styles are consistency and speeding up your wor+. *lthough you can create simple lists @uic+ly by clic+ing the >umbering ;nF;ff or 3ullets ;nF;ff icons on the 5ormatting toolbar( and create @uite compleC nested lists using the icons on the /ullets and !umbering toolbar( the appearance of the resulting lists may not be what you want Qand you might want to ha)e more than one style of list. You can use the /ullets and !umbering choice on the 5ormat menu to manually format the appearance of some or all of the lists( but if you later need to change their appearance( you will ha)e a lot of manual wor+ to do.
$ibre=ffice uses the terms Tnumbering styleU and Tlist styleU inconsistently( but they are the same thing. 5or eCample( the tooltip in the -tyles and 5ormatting window says T$ist -tylesU( but its style dialog says T!umbering -tyleU.
>ote
4efining the appearance of a nested list

* nested list is a numbered or bulleted list with subordinate %usually indented' numbered or bulleted lists. 4ather than Just a list of numbered items %*@ :@ 3...'( a nested list may ha)e item 1( then indented items numbered a@ b@ c or i@ ii@ iii or some other numbering method before the main number 2. 7ith numbering styles( you can achie)e any combination of numbering formats you want. * nested list may e)en combine numbered items with bulleted items. There is no difference between defining a nested list style or a simple list( although nested lists re@uire more wor+. *n eCample of a nested list is gi)en in Chapter 3( 7or+ing with TeCt. Gn that case( the list was built using one of the predefined outline schemes as a starting point( while in this section we follow a more general approach so that the list can more fully suit your needs.
Creating a new list style

The dialog to create a new list style consists of siC pages in addition to the usual Organi3er page discussed in TThe =rgani2er pageU on page 20>.
8ullets9 /u#berin "tyles9 and Grap!ics pa es

The Jullets( Dumbering Style( and Graphics pages contain predefined formatting for list item symbols %bullets or numbers'. To use one of them for your style( clic+ on the image. * thic+ border indicates the selection. The bullets on the /ullets tab are font charactersV those on the raphics tab are graphics. Gf you choose a graphics bullet( you can select the :ink 1raphics option to create a lin+ to the graphic obJect rather than embedding it in the document. Gf you decide to lin+ the graphic( +eep in mind that the bullet will not be displayed when the document is opened on a different computer %unless the same graphic file is located in the same location on both computers' or if the graphic file used is mo)ed to a different location on the computer.
Outline pa e
"se the Outline page to select from eight predefined nested lists. You can also select one and use it as a starting point for your own style( customi2ing the list using the Position page and the Options page( as described below.
::=
0osition pa e
"se the Position page to fine tune the indentation and spacing of the list item symbol and the teCt of the list item. This page is particularly effecti)e when used in combination with the Options page.
)igure :%% Position settings for a List style You can adJust the following settings for each indi)idual le)el or all le)els at once %to ma+e them all the same'. Gt is generally easier to adJust the settings in the order gi)en below( instead of the order on the dialog. That is( start from the o)erall indentation for the list elements( then fiC the position of the symbols( and finally adJust the alignment of the symbols.
>umbering followed by& the character to follow the numbering symbol %plus any
charactersQfor eCample a punctuation mar+Qchosen on the =ptions page to appear after the number'. Choose between a tab stop( a space( or nothing. Gf you select the tab stop( you can specify the position of the tab.
ndent at& how much space is reser)ed for the numbering symbol( measured from the left page margin. The alignment of the first line of the list is also affected by any tab you may ha)e set to follow the numbering. page.
Aligned at& the position of the numbering symbol( measured from the left margin of the >umbering alignment& how the numbering %including any teCt before or after as set in the
Options page' will be aligned. The Aligned at )alue determines the symbol alignment.
7hen defining an indentation different from 0( the position of the tabulation is not considered.
>ote
&ip
Gn normal circumstances( setting the Dumbering followed by distance to be e@ual to the 2ndent at distance wor+s well. -ee 5igure 2A< for a graphic representation of the effects of the abo)e parameters.
:3$
)igure :%& / numbered list of 8D trac7s highlighting the various elements
Position page for older documents opened in :ibre;ffice Gf your document was created with an earlier )ersion of a similar program such as =pen=ffice.org( or if the document was sa)ed for compatibility reasons using the =.5 file format )ersion 1.1 or earlier( the Position page will appear as in 5igure 2AE.
)igure :%' +he Position page for older documents Gn this case you can adJust the following settings&
ndent& the indentation of the number or bullet area( measured from the left margin of the paragraph lin+ed to the numbering style. Gn other words( if the paragraph style already has an indentation( when the list style is applied the indentations are added together. 5or any le)el other than $e)el 1( the Celative option causes the indentation to be measured from the start of the pre)ious le)el rather than from the page margin. !idth of numbering& how much space is used by the numbering symbol. 7riter reser)es this space( e)en if only part of it is used.
/inimum spacing numbering X.9 te't& the spacing between the right edge of the
numbering symbol and the teCt. Gf the spacing to teCt is not sufficient( 7riter will honor this setting by eCpanding the numbering area. -etting the minimum spacing between numbering and teCt is )ery useful when right9aligning the numbering or when there is much teCt before or after the numbering.
:3*
>umbering alignment& how the numbering %including any teCt before or after' will be
aligned.
To fully appreciate how the !umbering alignment wor+s( try to create a numbered list with more than ten elements and ma+e sure that enough room has been made for numbers with two or more digits. You may also wish to right9align numbers 10 or greater( as in 5igure 2A< on page 231.
&ip
Options pa e
"se the Options page to define the style of the outline le)els. The options a)ailable on this page depend on the type of mar+er selected for the list. 5irst( on the left side( select the le)el you want to modify. To modify all ten le)els at once( select 1 G 1* as the le)el. Gf you started from a predefined outline( some of the le)els will already ha)e settings.
)igure :%( +he Options page for a list style .epending on the numbering style selected in the Dumbering boC %bullet( graphic( numbering'( some of the following options become a)ailable on the page&
3efore& any teCt to appear before the number %for eCample( %tep'. After& any teCt to appear after the number %for eCample( a punctuation mar+'. Color& the color for the list mar+er %number or bullet character'. Celative si5e& the si2e of the number relati)e to the si2e of the characters in the paragraph of the list. 1'.
$tart at& the first )alue of the list %for eCample( you might want the list to start at > instead of Character $tyle& the style to be used for the number or bullet. Character button& clic+ to select the character for the bullet. 1raphics selection button& opens a list of a)ailable graphics % allery' or allows the
selection of a file on the hard dis+ to be used as the list mar+er.
:3: LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
!idth and 8eight& the dimensions of the graphic mar+er. Alignment& the alignment of the graphic obJect. 6eep ratio option& fiCes the ratio between the width and the height of the graphic mar+er.
The right9hand side of the dialog shows a pre)iew of the modifications made. To re)ert to the default )alues( clic+ the Ceset button in the bottom right corner. 5inally( if you wish to use consecuti)e numbers regardless of the outline le)el( chec+ the Consecutive numbering boC at the bottom of the page.
Combining list and paragraph styles

7hen applying a list style( the underlying paragraph style remains unchanged. Gf your list must also ha)e a certain font si2e( indentations( and so on( you might eCpect to first apply a paragraph style and then a list style %or )ice )ersa'. 6owe)er( you can embed a list style in a paragraph style using the !umbering page of the #aragraph -tyle dialog( and then apply only the paragraph style to the list. This section gi)es an eCample of combining list and paragraph styles. 1' Create a list style you want to use for the paragraph. 5or eCample& <yDumberedList. 2' Create a new paragraph style. 3' =n the ;rgani5er page of the #aragraph -tyle dialog& a' i)e the new paragraph style a name( say &'"#eredParagrap(. b' 5or the De-t Style( choose >umberedParagraph %this will ma+e the following paragraph also be in this style( until you choose a different style'. c' Gn Lin7ed with( choose >one. d' $ea)e Custom $tyles( in the 8ategory field. >' -et up this paragraph style to your li+ing. /ecause the indentation is controlled by the List style( to a)oid undesired interactions do not change the indent settings on the Gndents M -pacing page. %You might want to change the spacing abo)e and below the paragraph.' A' =n the ;utline O >umbering page( choose the <yDumberedList style created in step 1. <' Clic+ ;6 to sa)e this style. To ha)e full control( it is common practice to define three base paragraph styles for lists& List Start for the first element of the list( List 8ontinue for the subse@uent elements of the list( and List ,nd for the last element of the list. You should also define a paragraph style to be used for unnumbered list items %one for each nested le)el you intend to use' as well as an introductory style for the paragraph preceding the start of the list %to allow for +eeping the introductory paragraph with the first list item( or for specifying spacing before the first list item that is different from the spacing between other paragraphs'.
-'ample: Creating a simple list style

Gn this eCample( we will create a numbered list that is used to number the songs on a C.. The numbers are right aligned( and some space is left between the number and the title of the trac+. *s we want to reuse the same numbered list for other C.s( we will define a new list style and then apply it to the trac+s list.
(reatin t!e (D-rac&s nu#bered list

*s for the pre)ious eCample( start by clic+ing the :ist $tyles icon %fifth from the left' in the -tyles and 5ormatting window. Then right9clic+ anywhere in the list boC and choose >ew.
:33
The !umbering style dialog is displayed. 5or the 8D+rac7s style( we need to customi2e fields in the Organi3er( the Options( and the Position pages. "tyle fields
>ame Category
Description
3nter )*Trac+ Custom styles will be =8 for us.
0odify the options of the Options page as follows& 1' Gn the Level boC( choose 1. 2' Gn the Dumbering list( choose 1, #, %,.... 3' $ea)e the Jefore and /fter boCes empty. >' $ea)e the 8haracter Style field as >one. A' Show sublevels should be grayed out. <' 0a+e sure Start at is set to 1. E' .o not select Consecutive numbering. *s discussed abo)e( the numbered list will adopt the settings of the underlying paragraph style. Gf you want to use a special font( si2e or color for the numbering( you can create a character style and apply it in the =ptions page. Gf you want the word +rac7 to appear before the number( add it to the Jefore field in the =ptions dialog. .o not forget to add a space character to separate the word from the number. -et up the final parameters of the 8D+rac7s list style in the Position page. 1' Gn the Level boC( choose 1. 2' 5or Dumbering followed by( choose tab stop and set it at ,.0c". 3' 5or Dumbering alignment( choose Cight. >' 5or /ligned at choose 1.5c". %this refers to the alignment of the numbers' A' 5or 2ndent at choose ,.0c". %This sets the indentation of the whole list.' Clic+ ;6 to finish.
*pplyin t!e list style

!ow that the list style is a)ailable( it can be @uic+ly applied to any list in the document& 1' Gf starting a new list( before pressing ,nter to start a new line( double9clic+ on the desired list style name in the -tyles and 5ormatting window. 2' Gf you already ha)e a list( select it and then double9clic+ on the desired list style name in the -tyles and 5ormatting window.
4emember that applying a list style does not affect the characteristics of the underlying paragraphV therefore you may want to chec+ if you are satisfied with the paragraph style before applying the list style.
>ote
Gf you ha)e more than one list in a document( the second and subse@uent lists with the same style continue their numbering from the pre)ious list. To restart at 1( place the cursor anywhere in the paragraph you want numbered 1( right9clic+( and choose Cestart numbering. To stop using numbering( press the >umbering ;nF;ff icon on the -tandard toolbar. The final result is illustrated in 5igure 2A<.
:3#
8hapter ( Wor7ing with Graphics
1raphics AimagesB in !riter

7hen you create a teCt document using $ibre=ffice 7riter( you may want to include some illustrations. Gllustrations %graphics' are added to documents for a wide )ariety of reasons& from supporting the description pro)ided in the teCtas used in this uideto pro)iding an immediate )isual representation of the contents( as is often found in a newspaper. raphics in 7riter are of three basic types&
Gmage files( such as photos( drawings( and scanned images .iagrams created using $ibre=fficeFs drawing tools Charts created using $ibre=fficeFs Chart facility
This chapter co)ers images and diagrams. 0ore detailed descriptions on wor+ing with drawing tools can be found in the Draw Guide and 2mpress Guide. Gnstructions on how to create charts are gi)en in the 8alc Guide.
Creating and editing images

You might create images %also called npicturesF in $ibre=ffice' using a graphics program( scan them( or download them from the Gnternet %ma+e sure you ha)e permission to use them'( or use photos ta+en with a digital camera. 7riter can import )arious )ector %line drawing' images( and can rotate and flip such images. 7riter also supports raster %bitmap' file formats( the most common of which are G5( ,# ( #! ( and /0#. -ee the 6elp for a full list. 7riter can import -mart*rt images from 0icrosoft =ffice files. 5or eCample( 7riter can open a 0icrosoft 7ord file that contains -mart*rt( and you can use 7riter to edit the images. -ome things to consider when choosing or creating pictures include image @uality and whether the picture will be printed in color or blac+ and white %grayscale'. To edit photos and other bitmap images( use a bitmap editor. To edit line drawings( use a )ector drawing program. You do not need to buy eCpensi)e programs. =pen9source %and usually no9cost' tools such as imp %bitmap editor' and Gn+scape %)ector drawing program' are eCcellent. 5or many graphics( $ibre=ffice .raw is sufficient. These and many other programs wor+ on 7indows( 0acintosh =- I( and $inuC. 5or best results&
Create images that ha)e the eCact dimensions re@uired for the document( or use an
appropriate graphics pac+age to scale photographs and large drawings to the re@uired dimensions. .o not scale images with 7riter( e)en though 7riter has tools for doing this( because the results might not be as clear as you would li+e.
.o any other re@uired image manipulation %brightness and contrast( color balance(
cropping( con)ersion to grayscale( and so on' in a graphics pac+age( not in 7riter( e)en though 7riter has the tools to do a lot of these things too.
Gf the document is meant for screen use only( there is no need to use high resolution
images of 300 or more dpi %dots per inch'. 0ost computer monitors wor+ at between E2 and D< dpiV reducing the resolution %and the file si2e' has no negati)e impact on what is displayed but does ma+e 7riter more responsi)e.
:3&
Preparing images for black.and.white printing

Gf color images are to be printed in grayscale( chec+ that any adJacent colors ha)e good contrast and print dar+ enough. Test by printing on a blac+9and9white printer using a grayscale setting. /etter still& change the TmodeU of the image to grayscale( either in a photo editor or in 7riter itself %see T raphics modeU on page 2>2'. 5or eCample( the following diagram loo+s good in color. The circle is dar+ red and the s@uare is dar+ blue. Gn grayscale( the difference between the two is not so clear. * third element in the diagram is a yellow arrow( which is almost in)isible in grayscale.
Original drawing in color
Drawing printed in grayscale
Changing the colors of the circle and the arrow impro)es the contrast and )isibility of the resulting grayscale image.
Original drawing in color
Drawing printed in grayscale
Gf the document will be a)ailable in blac+9and9white print only( a better result can often be obtained by choosing grayscale fills( not color fillsQand you donFt ha)e to guess and test to see if youF)e made good choices.
Adding images to a document

Gmages can be added to a document in se)eral ways& by inserting an image file( directly from a graphics program or a scanner( from a file stored on your computer( or by copying and pasting from a source being )iewed on your computer.
nserting an image file

7hen the image is in a file stored on the computer( you can insert it into a $ibre=ffice document using either of the following methods.
Dra and drop

1' =pen a file browser window and locate the image you want to insert. 2' .rag the image into the 7riter document and drop it where you want it to appear. * faint )ertical line mar+s where the image will be dropped. This method embeds %sa)es a copy of' the image file in the 7riter document. To lin+ the file instead of embedding it( hold down the 8ontrol9Shift +eys while dragging the image.
8hapter ( Wor7ing with Graphics :3'
,nsert 0icture dialo

1' Clic+ in the $ibre=ffice document where you want the image to appear. 2' Choose nsert 9 Picture 9 From File from the menu bar. 3' =n the Gnsert #icture dialog( na)igate to the file to be inserted( and select it. *t the bottom of the dialog are two options( Preview and :ink. -elect Preview to )iew a thumbnail of the selected image on the right %as shown in the eCample'( so you can )erify that you ha)e the correct file. -ee TGnserting an image fileU below for the use of :ink. >' Clic+ ;pen.
)igure :%= 2nsert picture dialog
:inking an image file

Gf the :ink option in the Gnsert picture dialog is selected( $ibre=ffice creates a lin+ to the file containing the image instead of sa)ing a copy of the image in the document. The result is that the image is displayed in the document( but when the document is sa)ed( it contains only a reference to the image fileQnot the image itself. The document and the image remain as two separate files( and they are merged together only when you open the document again.
)igure :&$ 8autionary message bo- when inserting a lin7ed image $in+ing an image has two ad)antages and one disad)antage&
*d)antage $in+ing can reduce the si2e of the document when it is sa)ed( because the
image file itself is not included. 5ile si2e is usually not a problem on a modern computer with a reasonable amount of memory( unless the document includes many large graphics filesV $ibre=ffice can handle @uite large files.
:3(
*d)antage You can modify the image file separately without changing the document
because the lin+ to the file remains )alid( and the modified image will appear when you neCt open the document. This can be a big ad)antage if you %or someone else( perhaps a graphic artist' is updating images.
.isad)antage Gf you send the document to someone else( or mo)e it to a different

computer( you must also send the image files( or the recipient will not be able to see the lin+ed images. You need to +eep trac+ of the location of the images and ma+e sure the recipient +nows where to put them on another machine( so the document can find them. 5or eCample( you might +eep images in a subfolder named Gmages %under the folder containing the document'V the recipient of the file needs to put the images in a subfolder with the same name %under the folder containing the document'.
7hen inserting the same image se)eral times in the document it would appear beneficial to create lin+sV howe)er( this is not necessary as $ibre=ffice embeds in the document only one copy of the image file.
>ote
E#beddin lin&ed i#a es

Gf you originally lin+ed the images( you can easily embed one or more of them later if you wish. To do so& 1' =pen the document in $ibre=ffice and choose -dit 9 :inks. 2' The 3dit $in+s dialog shows all the lin+ed files. Gn the Source file list( select the files you want to change from lin+ed to embedded. Clic+ 2pdate to ensure you ha)e the latest image where changes may ha)e ta+en place. 3' Clic+ the 3reak :ink button. >' Clic+ Jes in the confirmation message boC. A' -a)e the document.
>ote
oing the other way( from embedded to lin+ed( is not so easyQyou must delete and reinsert each image( one at a time( selecting the :ink option when you do so.
)igure :&* +he ,dit Lin7s dialog
:3=
nserting an image from the clipboard

"sing the clipboard( you can copy images into a $ibre=ffice document from another $ibre=ffice document and from other programs. To do this& 1' =pen both the source document and the target document. 2' Gn the source document( select the image to be copied. 3' 0o)e the mouse pointer o)er the selected image and press 8ontrol98 %or right9clic+ and select Copy from the conteCt menu' to copy the image to the clipboard. >' -witch to the target document. A' Clic+ to place the cursor where the graphic is to be inserted. <' #ress 8ontrol9? %or right9clic+ and select Paste from the conteCt menu' to insert the image.
Caution
Gf the application from which the graphic was copied is closed before the graphic is pasted into the target( the image stored on the clipboard could be lost.
nserting an image using a scanner

Gf a scanner is connected to your computer( $ibre=ffice can call the scanning application and insert the scanned item into the $ibre=ffice document as an image. To start this procedure( clic+ where you want the graphic to be inserted and select nsert 9 Picture 9 $can 9 $elect $ource. -elect the scan source from the list. This list will contain a)ailable de)ices and( on 7indows systems the 7indows Gmaging *c@uisition %7G*' platform to these de)ices. *fter choosing the de)ice( select nsert 9 Picture 9 $can 9 Ce?uest. This will open the imaging software to permit you to adJust settings for picture @uality( si2e( and other settable attributes. This practice is @uic+ and easy( but may not result in a high9@uality image of the correct si2e. You may get better results by scanning material into a graphics program and cleaning it up there before inserting the resulting image into $ibre=ffice.
nserting an image from the 1allery

The allery pro)ides a con)enient way to group reusable obJects such as graphics and sounds that you can insert into your documents. The allery is a)ailable in all components of $ibre=ffice. Gt does not come with many graphics( but you can add your own pictures or find eCtensions containing more graphics. The allery is eCplained in more detail in Chapter 11( raphics( the allery( and 5ontwor+( in the Getting Started guide. 5or more about eCtensions( see Chapter 1<( Customi2ing 7riter( in this boo+. This section eCplains the basics of inserting a allery image into a 7riter document.
1' To open the allery( clic+ on the 1allery icon %located in the -tandard toolbar and in the .rawing toolbar' or choose &ools 9 1allery from the menu bar. 2' !a)igate through the allery to find the desired picture. 3' To insert the picture( clic+ and drag it from the allery into the 7riter document. You can also right9clic+ on the picture and choose nsert 9 Copy. 5igure 2<2 shows an eCample of an image dragged from the allery. /y default( the allery is doc+ed abo)e the 7riter wor+space. To eCpand the allery( position the pointer o)er the line that di)ides it from the top of the wor+space. 7hen the pointer changes to parallel lines with arrows( clic+ and drag downward. The wor+space resi2es in response. To eCpand the allery without affecting the wor+space( undoc+ it so it floats o)er the wor+space. To do so( hold down the 8ontrol +ey and double9clic+ on the upper part of the allery neCt to the
:#$ LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
Piew icons. .ouble9clic+ in the same area while holding down the 8ontrol +ey to doc+ it again %restore it to its position o)er the wor+space'. 7hen the allery is doc+ed( to hide it and )iew the full 7riter wor+space( clic+ the 8ideF$how button in the middle of the thin bar separating the allery from the wor+space %circled in 5igure 2<2'. To close the icon again. allery( choose &ools 9 1allery to toggle the allery entry( or clic+ on the allery
)igure :&: 2nserting an image from the Gallery
/odifying an image
7hen you insert a new image( you may need to modify it to suit the document. The placement of the picture relati)e to the teCt is discussed in T#ositioning graphics within the teCtU on page 2A0. This section describes the use of the #icture toolbar( resi2ing( cropping( and a wor+around to rotate a picture. 7riter pro)ides many tools for wor+ing with images. These tools are sufficient for most peopleFs e)eryday re@uirements. 6owe)er( for professional results it is generally better to use an image manipulation program such as G0# to modify images %for eCample( to crop( resi2e( rotate( and change color )alues' and then insert the result into 7riter. G0# is an open9source graphics program that can be downloaded from http&//www.gimp.org/downloads/.
:#*
2sing the Picture toolbar

7hen you insert an image or select one already present in the document( the #icture toolbar appears. You can set it to always be present %=iew 9 &oolbars 9 Picture'. #icture control buttons from the #icture toolbar can also be added to the -tandard Toolbar. -ee Chapter 1<( Customi2ing 7riter( for more information. This toolbar can be either floating or doc+ed. 5igure 2<3 shows what the #icture toolbar loo+s li+e when it is floating. Two other toolbars can be opened from this one& the raphic 5ilter toolbar( which can be torn off and placed elsewhere on the window( and the Color toolbar( which opens as a separate floating toolbar. 5rom these three toolbars( you can apply small corrections to the graphic or obtain special effects.
Grap!ics #ode
You can change color images to grayscale( to blac+ and white( or to a watermar+ by selecting the image and then selecting the rele)ant menu item from the raphics mode list.
%lip vertically or !ori)ontally

To flip an image )ertically or hori2ontally( select the image( and then clic+ the rele)ant icon.
%ilters
Table 10 pro)ides a short description of the a)ailable filters( howe)er the best way to understand them is to see them in action. 3Cperiment with the different filters and filter settings( remembering that you can undo all the changes by pressing 8trl9A or /lt9Jac7space or by selecting -dit 9 2ndo.
1 # % ) + ( " 0 9 1* 11 1# 1% 1) 1+ 1( 1" 10 19 #* #1 ## #% 5ilter raphics mode Color Transparency 5lip 6ori2ontally 5lip Pertically 5rame #roperties Gn)ert -mooth -olari2ation *ging Charcoal -+etch 4elief 0osaic 4emo)e !oise -harpen #op *rt #osteri2e 4ed reen /lue /rightness Contrast LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
5igure 2<3& #icture toolbar plus tear9off floating Color toolbar
raphic 5ilter toolbar and
:#:
#)
amma
+able *$ Graphic filters and their effects ,con /a#e

Gn)ert -mooth -harpen 4emo)e noise -olari2ation *ging #osteri2e #op *rt Charcoal 4elief 0osaic
Effect
Gn)erts the color )alues of a color image or the brightness )alues of a grayscale image. -oftens the contrast of an image. Gncreases the contrast of an image. 4emo)es single piCels from an image. 0imics the effects of too much light in a picture. * further dialog opens to adJust the parameters. -imulates the effects of time on a picture. Can be applied se)eral times. * further dialog opens to adJust the aging le)el. 0a+es a picture appear li+e a painting by reducing the number of colors used. 0odifies the picture dramatically. .isplays the image as a charcoal s+etch. * dialog is displayed to adJust the light source that will create the shadow and( hence( the relief effect. ,oins groups of piCels into a single area of one color.
(olor
"se this toolbar to modify the indi)idual 4 / color components of the image %red( green( blue' as well as the brightness( contrast( and gamma of the image. Gf the result is not satisfactory( you can press 8ontrol9A to restore the default )alues.
-ransparency
0odify the percentage )alue in the +ransparency boC on the #icture toolbar to ma+e the image more transparent. This is particularly useful when creating a watermar+ or when wrapping the image in the bac+ground.
2sing the Formatting toolbar and Picture dialog

7hen an image is selected( you can customi2e some aspects of its appearance using the tools a)ailable on the 5ormatting toolbar %shown in 5igure 2<D' as well as in the dialog that is shown by right9clic+ing on the image and selecting Picture. You can( for eCample( create a border around the image( selecting style and colorV or you can %in the 3orders page of the #icture dialog' add a shadow to the image.
8hapter ( Wor7ing with Graphics :#3
Cropping images
7hen you are only interested in a section of the image for the purpose of your document( you may wish to crop %cut off' parts of it.
Gf you crop an image in 7riter( the image itself is not changed. 7riter hides( not cuts off( part of the image. Gf you eCport the document to 6T0$( the original image is eCported( not the cropped image.
>ote
To start cropping the image( right9clic+ on it and select Picture from the conteCt menu. Gn the #icture dialog( select the Crop page. The units of measurement shown on the Crop page are those set in &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice !riter 9 1eneral. Two options are a)ailable in the crop section for cropping an image. The first option is the defaultV 6eep scale. You can )isuali2e this as using scissors on a paper picture. *s you cut parts off( the image gets smaller.
)igure :&# 6esult on image si3e of cropping using Keep scale option The second option is 6eep image si5e. You can )isuali2e this as ha)ing a picture frame and the image is 2oomed in as much as re@uired to fill the fiCed9si2e frame. You can see in 5igure 2<> that as the )alues in $eft( 4ight( Top( and /ottom are altered( the boundaries of the image in the pre)iew boC alter to show the crop area on the image. This results in either an image si2e change( or a scale change for a fiCed image si2e %5igure 2<A'. The Width and .eight fields under either Scale or 2mage si3e change as you enter )alues in the $eft( 4ight( Top( and /ottom fields( depending on which option( 8eep scale( or 8eep image si2e( is selected. The original image si2e is indicated abo)e the ;riginal $i5e button. The bitmap image density is shown alongside this dimension.
:##
)igure :&% 6esult using Keep image scale option
Cesi5ing an image
To perfectly fit the image into your document( you may ha)e to resi2e it. There are a number of options a)ailable in 7riter to do this. * @uic+ and easy way to resi2e is by dragging the imageFs si2ing handles& 1' Clic+ the image( if necessary( to show the green si2ing handles. 2' #osition the pointer o)er one of the green si2ing handles. The pointer changes shape gi)ing a graphical representation of the direction of the resi2ing. 3' Clic+ and drag to resi2e the image. >' 4elease the mouse button when satisfied with the new si2e. The corner handles resi2e both the width and the height of the graphic obJect simultaneously( while the other four handles only resi2e one dimension at a time.
&ip
To retain the original proportions of the graphic( Shift9clic7 one of the corner handles( then drag.
5igure 2<< shows three eCamples of an image inserted into a document and resi2ed. 5or more accurate resi2ing of images( use either the Crop page of the #icture dialog %5igure 2<>' or( the &ype page of the #icture dialog. =n the Crop page you can adJust the following settings.
$cale !idth and 8eight& specify in percentages the scaling of the image. The si2e of the
image changes accordingly. 5or a symmetrical resi2ing( both )alues need to be identical.
mage si5e& specify the si2e of the image in your preferred unit of measurement. The image enlarges or shrin+s accordingly. si2e resulting after any cropping was carried out.
;riginal si5e button& when clic+ed( restores the image to its original si2e. This will be the
=n the &ype page of the #icture dialog( select the Celative option to toggle between percentage and actual dimension. 5or a symmetrical resi2ing( select the 6eep ratio option. Clic+ing on the ;riginal $i5e button restores the original image si2e( the scale dimensions are altered if the image has been cropped.
:#%
)igure :&& +hree e-amples of resi3ed images@ plus the original image
Cotating an image
7riter does not pro)ide a tool for rotating an imageV howe)er( there is a simple wor+around& 1' =pen a new Draw or 2mpress document %File 9 >ew 9 4rawing or File 9 >ew 9 Presentation'. 2' Gnsert the image you want to rotate. You can use any of the mechanisms described in T*dding images to a documentU on page 23E( although there are some slight )ariations in the position of the menu entries and icons. 3' -elect the image( then in the .rawing toolbar %shown by default at the bottom of the window in Gmpress and .raw'( select the Cotate icon from the -ffects tear9off toolbar
. >' 4otate the image as desired. "se the red handles at the corners of the image and mo)e the mouse in the direction you wish to rotate. /y default the image rotates around its center %indicated by a blac+ cross9hair'( but you can change the pi)ot point by mo)ing the blac+ cross9hair to the desired rotation center.
&ip
To restrict the rotation angle to multiples of 1A degrees +eep the Shift +ey pressed while rotating the image.
A' -elect the rotated image by pressing 8trl9/( then copy the image to the clipboard with 8trl98. <' 5inish by going bac+ to the location of the 7riter document where the image is to be inserted and pressing 8trl9?.
:#&
;ther settings
The #icture dialog %5igure 2<>' consists of eight pages. The Crop page was described on page 2>>( while the use of the Type and the 7rap pages is eCplained in T#ositioning graphics within the teCtU on page 2A0. The other pages ser)e the following purposes&
;ptions& use this page to gi)e the image a descripti)e name %as you want it to appear in
the !a)igator'( display alternati)e teCt when the mouse ho)ers o)er the image in a web browser when the image is not a)ailable( and protect some of the image settings from accidental changes. You can also pre)ent the image from being printed by deselecting the corresponding option.
3orders& use this page to create borders around the image. The /orders dialog is the
same as the one used for defining table or paragraph borders. You can also add a shadow to the image if so desired.
3ackground& use this page to change the bac+ground color of the image. This setting
produces the desired results only for images with a transparent color.
8yperlink& use this page to associate a hyperlin+ to the image. You can also create an
image map so that only certain areas of the image respond to a mouse clic+ by opening the associated "4G %"niform 4esource Gdentifier' in the default browser. 0ore information on image maps can be found in the 2mpress Guide.
Picture& use this page to flip the image as well as to display the original location of the file
in case the image is lin+ed rather than embedded.
/acro& allows you to associate a macro to the image. You can choose among the
predefined macros or write your own.
4eleting an image
To delete an image& 1' Clic+ on the image to show the green resi2ing handles. 2' #ress 4elete.
2sing !riterNs drawing tools

You can use 7riterFs drawing tools to create graphics( such as simple diagrams using rectangles( circles( lines( teCt( and other predefined shapes. You can also group se)eral drawing obJects to ma+e sure they maintain their relati)e position and proportion. You can place the drawing obJects directly on a page in your document( or you can insert them into a frame. You can also use the drawing tools to annotate photographs( screen captures( or other illustrations produced by other programs( but this is not recommended because&
You cannot include images in a group with drawing obJects( so they may get out of
alignment in your document.
Gf you con)ert a 7riter document to another format( such as 6T0$( the drawing obJects and
the graphics will not remain associatedV they are sa)ed separately. Gn general( if you need to create compleC drawings( it is recommended to use $ibre=ffice .raw( which includes many more features such as layers( styles( and so on.
:#'
Creating drawing obDects

To begin using the drawing tools( display the .rawing toolbar %5igure 2<E'( by clic+ing =iew 9 &oolbars 9 4rawing. Gf you are planning to use the drawing tools repeatedly( you can tear off this toolbar and mo)e it to a con)enient place on the window.
1 # % )
-elect $ine 4ectangle 3llipse
+ ( " 0
5reeform $ine TeCt Callouts /asic -hapes
9 1* 11 1#
-ymbol -hapes /loc+ arrows 5lowcharts Callouts
1% 1) 1+ 1( 1"
-tars #oints 5ontwor+ allery 5rom 5ile 3Ctrusion =n/=ff
)igure :&' +he Drawing toolbar To use a drawing tool& 1' Clic+ in the document where you want the drawing to be anchored. You can change the anchor later( if necessary. 2' -elect the tool from the .rawing toolbar %5igure 2<E'. The mouse pointer changes to a drawing9functions pointer . 3' 0o)e the cross9hair pointer to the place in the document where you want the graphic to appear and then clic+9and9drag to create the drawing obJect. 4elease the mouse button. The selected drawing function remains acti)e( so you can draw another obJect of the same type. >' To cancel the selected drawing function( press the ,sc +ey or clic+ on the $elect icon %the arrow' on the .rawing toolbar. A' You can now change the properties %fill color( line type and weight( anchoring( and others' of the drawing obJect using either the .rawing =bJect #roperties toolbar %5igure 2<B' or the choices and dialog reached by right9clic+ing on the drawing obJect.
Set or change properties for drawing objects

To set the properties for a drawing obJect before you draw it& 1' =n the .rawing toolbar %5igure 2<E'( clic+ the $elect tool. 2' =n the .rawing =bJect #roperties toolbar %5igure 2<B'( clic+ on the icon for each property and select the )alue you want for that property. 3' 5or more control( or to define new attributes( you can clic+ on the Area or :ine icons on the toolbar to display detailed dialogs. The default you set applies to the current document and session. Gt is not retained when you close the document or close 7riter( and it does not apply to any other document you open. The defaults apply to all the drawing obJects eCcept teCt obJects.
:#(
1 $ine # *rrow -tyle % $ine -tyle ) $ine 7idth
+ $ine Color ( *rea " *rea -tyle / 5illing 0 4otate
9 To 5oreground 1* To /ac+ground 11 /ring to 5ront 1# -end to /ac+
1% *lignment 1) Change *nchor 1+ "ngroup 1( roup
)igure :&( Drawing ObIect Properties toolbar To change the properties for an eCisting drawing obJect& 1' -elect the obJect. 2' Continue as described abo)e. You can also specify the position and si2e( rotation( and slant and corner radius properties of the drawing obJect& 1' 4ight9clic+ on the drawing obJect and then clic+ Position and $i5e from the conteCt menu. The Position and Si3e dialog is displayed. 2' Choose any properties( as re@uired.
Cesi5ing a drawing obDect

The same considerations for resi2ing an image apply also to resi2ing an obJect. -elect the obJect( clic+ on one of the eight handles around it and drag it to its new position. 5or a scaled resi2ing( select one of the corner handles and +eep the Shift +ey pressed while dragging the handle to its new position. 5or more sophisticated control of the si2e of the obJect( select Format 9 ;bDect 9 Position and $i5e from the menu bar. "se the #osition and -i2e dialog to set the width and height independently. Gf the 6eep ratio option is selected( then the two dimensions change so that the proportion is maintained( allowing for a scaled resi2ing.
1rouping drawing obDects

To group drawing obJects& 1' -elect one obJect( then hold down the Shift +ey and select the others you want to include in the group. The bounding boC eCpands to include all the selected obJects. 2' 7ith the obJects selected( ho)er the mouse pointer o)er one of the obJects and choose Format 9 1roup 9 1roup from the menu bar or right9clic+ and choose 1roup 9 1roup from the conteCt menu.
>ote
You cannot include an embedded or lin+ed graphic in a group with drawing obJects.
:#=
Positioning graphics within the te't

7hen you add a graphic to a teCt document( you need to choose how to position it with respect to the teCt and other graphics. The positioning of graphics is often rather time9consuming and may be )ery frustrating for both ineCperienced and eCperienced users. *s 7riter is a word processor rather than a des+top publishing program( there are some limitations to the fleCibility in positioning images and it ta+es time to get things eCactly as you would li+e them. #ositioning of a graphic is controlled by four settings&
/rrangement refers to the placement of a graphic on an imaginary )ertical aCis.

*rrangement controls how graphics are stac+ed upon each other or relati)e to the teCt.
/lignment refers to the )ertical or hori2ontal placement of a graphic in relation to the

chosen anchor point.
/nchoring refers to the reference point for the graphics. This point could be the page( or
frame where the obJect is( a paragraph( or e)en a character. *n image always has an anchor point.
+e-t wrapping refers to the relation of graphics to the surrounding teCt( which may wrap
around the graphic on one or both sides( be o)erprinted behind or in front of the graphic( or treat the graphic as a separate paragraph or character. The settings can be accessed in a number of ways( depending on the nature of the graphics& 1' 5rom the Format menu( where you can find Alignment( Arrange( !rap, and Anchor %both for images and drawing obJects'. 2' 5rom the conteCt menu displayed when you right9clic+ on the graphic. 3' 5rom the =$3 =bJect toolbar shown in 5igure 2<D. >' 5or images( from the +ype and Wrapping pages of the #icture dialog. !ote that you cannot control the arrangement using the dialog. To open the #icture dialog( clic+ on the image to select it and then choose Format 9 Picture or right9clic+ on the graphic and choose Picture on the conteCt menu. A' 5or drawing obJects( from the Position and Si3e page of the #osition and -i2e dialog. To open the #osition and -i2e dialog( clic+ on the drawing obJect to select it and then choose Format 9 ;bDect 9 Position and $i5e or right9clic+ on the graphic and choose Position and $i5e on the conteCt menu. !ote that you can only control the alignment and anchoring.
1 *pply -tyle # 7rap =ff % #age 7rap ) 7rap Through + *lign $eft
( Center 6ori2ontal " *lign 4ight 0 Top 9 Center 1* /ottom
11 /orders 1# $ine -tyle 1% $ine Color %of the border' 1) /ac+ground Color 1+ 5rame #roperties
1( /ring to 5ront 1" -end to /ac+ 10 Change *nchor 19 $in+ 5rames #* "nlin+ 5rames
)igure :&= ObIect toolbar 4graphical control of positioning for images5
:%$
Arranging graphics
*rranging a graphic obJect means to determine its )ertical position relati)e to other graphic obJects or teCt. *rranging is only rele)ant when obJects are o)erlapping. You can choose between four common settings( plus a fifth special setting for drawing obJects& 3ring to Front #laces the graphic on top of any other graphics or teCt. 3ring Forward /rings the graphic one le)el up in the stac+ %29aCis'. .epending on the number of o)erlapping obJects( you may need to apply this option se)eral times to obtain the desired result. $end 3ackward The opposite of /ring 5orwardV sends the selected graphic one le)el down in the obJect stac+. $end to 3ack -ends the selected graphic to the bottom of the stac+( so that other graphics and teCt co)er it. &o 3ackground F &o Foreground =nly a)ailable for drawing obJectsV mo)es the drawing obJect behind or in front of the teCt respecti)ely.
Anchoring graphics
You can anchor graphics as a character or to a page( paragraph( or character. You can also place graphics in a frame and anchor the frame to a page( paragraph( or character. 7hich method you choose depends on what you are trying to achie)e. 6ere are the ways you can anchor graphics or drawing obJects& &o Page The graphic +eeps the same position in relation to the page margins. Gt does not mo)e as you add or delete teCt or other graphics. This method is useful when the graphic does not need to be )isually associated with a particular piece of teCt. Gt is often used when producing newsletters or other documents that are )ery layout intensi)e( or for placing logos in letterheads.
Caution
Gf you plan to use a document within a master document( do not anchor graphics &o Page because the graphics will disappear from the master document. -ee Chapter 13( 7or+ing with 0aster .ocuments( for more information.
&o Paragraph The graphic is associated with a paragraph and mo)es with the paragraph. Gt may be placed in the margin or another location. This method is useful as an alternati)e to a table for placing icons beside paragraphs. &o Character The graphic is associated with a character but is not in the teCt se@uence. Gt mo)es with the paragraph but may be placed in the margin or another location. This method is similar to anchoring to a paragraph but cannot be used with drawing obJects. As Character The graphic is placed in the document li+e any other character and( therefore( affects the height of the teCt line and the line brea+. The graphic mo)es with the paragraph as you add or
:%*
delete teCt before the paragraph. This method is useful for +eeping screen9shots in se@uence in a procedure %by anchoring them as a character in a blan+ paragraph' or for adding a small %inline' icon in se@uence in a sentence. &o Frame Gf the graphic has been placed in a frame( you can anchor the graphic in a fiCed position inside the frame. The frame can then be anchored to the page( a paragraph( or a character( as re@uired.
Aligning graphics
=nce you ha)e established the anchor point of the graphic( you can decide the position of the graphic relati)e to this anchor& this is called aligning the graphics. Choose from siC options& three for aligning the graphic hori2ontally %left( center( right' and three for aligning the graphic )ertically %top( center( bottom'. 6ori2ontal alignment is not a)ailable for images anchored *s Character. 5or finer control of the alignment( use the #osition options on the Type page of the #icture dialog( shown in 5igure 2E0.
)igure :'$ )ine tuning the alignment 5or both the hori2ontal and )ertical position( start by pic+ing the reference point in the right hand side drop9down menu( then select in the first drop9down menu among :eft( Cight or Center. Gf you select the )alue From left %or From top for the )ertical positioning' you can specify the amount in your selected unit of measurement. Gn the eCample in 5igure 2E0( the upper9left corner of the image will be placed at 3 cm from the left margin of the page hori2ontally and on the top margin )ertically. * )isual representation of the area to which the image is anchored is shown in the pre)iew pane to the right of the page( indicated by a red bordered area. The graphic position is indicated by a green bordered area.
Wrapping te't around graphics

The 7rap setting determines the relation between the teCt and the graphic. -e)eral choices are a)ailable from the conteCt menu& >o !rap 7ith this option the teCt is placed abo)e and below the image but not to either side of it. This is the wrapping type used for most of the figures in this guide. Page !rap or ;ptimal Page !rap The teCt flows around the image. 0o)ing the image around the page causes the teCt to be rearranged to fill the space to the left and right of it. ;ptimal Page !rap pre)ents teCt from being placed to the side of the image if the spacing between the image and the margin is less than 2 cm.
:%:
!rap &hrough -uperimposes the image on the teCt. That is( the image is in front of the teCt. This option must be used in conJunction with the image9transparency setting in order to ma+e the teCt under the picture )isible. n 3ackground -imilar to !rap &hrough( but the image is placed below the teCt so there may be no need to change the transparency to ma+e the teCt )isible.
>ote
The >o !rap option found in the conteCt menu of a picture is e@ui)alent to the !rap ;ff menu item in the Format 9 !rap menu.
The wrap format is normally selected after the anchoring and the alignment of the picture ha)e been decided. To set the position of an image to the desired wrap format( follow these steps& 1' -elect a graphic by clic+ing on it. 2' 4ight9clic+ to display the conteCt menu and mo)e the mouse pointer to !rap to display the a)ailable wrap formats. *lternati)ely you can select Format 9 !rap from the menu bar. 3' -elect the desired wrap format.
>ote
7hen anchoring a graphic as character( you can only adJust the distance between the image and the teCt( but no wrapping option is displayed.
To fine9tune the wrapping options( open the #icture dialog and select the 7rap page( shown in 5igure 2E1.
)igure :'* +he advanced wrap format options 5or images( you can open this dialog by selecting Format 9 Picture from the menu bar or right9 clic+ and select Picture from the conteCt menu. 5or drawing obJects( you can access the !rap page by selecting Format 9 !rap 9 -dit in the menu bar or right9clic+ and select !rap 9 -dit from the conteCt menu. This page is di)ided into three sections. Gn the top part you can select from the wrap types mentioned abo)e( plus two additional wrap formats that pre)ent the teCt from filling the area to the
:%3
left %After' or to the right %3efore' of the picture. "se the Spacing section of the page to adJust the spacing between the image and the teCt. The contents of the Options section of the page may change depending on the selected wrap format. First paragraph Chec+ this boC if you want $ibre=ffice to start a new paragraph after the image e)en if it could still wrap around the image. n background This option becomes a)ailable if &hrough !rap is selectedV it mo)es the image to the bac+ground. Contour 7raps the teCt around a custom contour rather than around the edge of the picture. This option is only a)ailable for #age or =ptimal #age 7rap. ;utside only 5orces the teCt to wrap on the outside of the image( e)en if the contour contains open areas within the shape.
Editin t!e contour

Gf you select wrapping around a drawing obJect( $ibre=ffice automatically creates a contour. The 3dit Contour option is only a)ailable for image wrapping. You can automatically create a contour from the conteCt menu after right9clic+ing the image( by selecting Contour. You can access the Contour 3ditor by selecting Format 9 !rap 9 -dit Contour or from the right9clic+ menu. The dialog shown in 5igure 2E2 opens with the image loaded in the main window. "se the tools to draw the region of the image you do not want to be co)ered by the teCtQthis area will be shaded.
)igure :': +he 8ontour ,ditor in action with /uto8ontour There are four tools a)ailable to create a contour in the Contour 3ditor window& Cectangle( -llipse( Polygon( and AutoContour. -ome familiarity with drawing tools is re@uired to create compleC contoursV howe)er( in most circumstances there is no need for high accuracy. 5igure 2E2 shows the actual contour used for T3Cample 2& simple contour wrapping in actionU when using *utoContour( and as you can see the shape of the line around the edge of the apple is @uite acceptable.
:%# LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
7hen you are done( clic+ on the Apply button to sa)e the contour. Gf you are not satisfied with the result( you can select the contour line and press the Delete +ey to restart( or clic+ the 7or+space icon and then clic+ inside the contour. You can also undo the pre)ious steps or you can select the -dit Points button and adJust the contour shape point by point. /e aware that any of the graphic outside the contour line is not shown in the document. 5or simple images( the AutoContour button does a decent Job. Gf the contour has to be drawn around an area with the same or a similar color( you can select this region using the eyedropper. -elect this tool( then clic+ on a point in the image ha)ing the desired color. $ibre=ffice automatically selects all the points which ha)e the same or a similar color. The similarity le)el can be changed by modifying the )alue in the tolerance boC %100k j perfect match'.
>ote
7hile all the positioning techni@ues discussed in this section apply e@ually to frames( contour wrapping is not possible.
Exa#ple 64 pa e wrappin
5igure 2E3 shows an eCample of page wrapping in action.
5igure 2E3& 3Cample of image with #age 7rap formatting
To achie)e this& 1' Gnsert the image into the document( then anchor it to the paragraph of your choice. To mo)e the anchor( select the image or the anchor( and mo)e it until the anchor symbol is at the beginning of the chosen paragraph. 2' *lign the image so that the left margin of the image is where you want it to be. This can be done with the mouse or using the ad)anced settings. The tas+bar shows the location of the upper left corner and the image si2e. 3' Change the wrap to #age 7rap. 7e now wish to increase the space between the image and the teCt. To do this( access the 7rap page of the #icture dialog and set the gap between the image and teCt to 0.1U in all the boCes. >' The last touch is to change the position so that the image has our chosen number of lines of the paragraph abo)e it. *gain( you can use the mouse to drag the image or use the ad)anced settings( which re@uire a bit of trial and error. 0o)ing with the mouse is the simplest method.
:%%
Exa#ple :4 si#ple contour wrappin in action

Gn this eCample we again apply page wrapping as in 3Cample 1( enabling this time the contour option. 7e will wor+ on an image and on a drawing obJect as the contour option wor+s slightly differently in each case. The eCample of 5igure 2E> was created following the steps below( which you can use to practice. 1' Create some teCt %a )ery @uic+ way to do that is to use the dummy teCt a)ailable in *utoTeCt. Type *T and then press the )3 +ey'. 2' Gnsert an image of your choice and anchor it to the first paragraph. *dJust the alignment as desired then change the wrap type to #age 7rap. 3' 4ight9clic+ on the picture to select the option !rap 9 Contour( then right9clic+ again and select !rap 9 -dit Contour from the conteCt menu.
5igure 2E>& Gmage and drawing obJects with contour wrapping >' "se the techni@ue discussed in T3diting the contourU on page 2A> to create a custom contour and clic+ Apply. Gf needed( adJust the spacing between the edge of the image and the teCt using the 7rap page of the #icture dialog. A' Gnsert an *uto-hape of your choice %a triangle in the eCample' and proceed as in step 2 abo)e. <' 3nable the contour wrap by selecting Format 9 !rap 9 Contour from the menu bar. *s discussed pre)iously( $ibre=ffice automatically generates the contour. You may need to adJust the distance between the drawing obJect and the teCt using Format 9 !rap 9 -dit.
Exa#ple 74 Wrap -!rou ! and ,n 8ac& round

This eCample shows how to use an image as a watermar+ by wrapping the teCt through it and adJusting the transparency. This is not the best way to create watermar+s and it is presented here only for illustration purposes. Gf you need to create a watermar+( it is best to use a 5ontwor+s obJect wrapped in the bac+ground. -electing the 7rap Through option for an inserted image causes the image to o)erlap the teCt( which as a result will be hidden. To ma+e the teCt appear( change the transparency of the pictureV although the words under the image become )isible( they may be difficult to read and will appear lighter than the rest of the teCt. To reproduce the eCample of 5igure 2EA create some dummy teCt( then insert the image of your choice. *nchor the image %to the page in the eCample' and select the wrap through option from the Format 9 !rap menu or right9clic+ing on the image and selecting !rap 9 !rap &hrough from the conteCt menu. 0o)e the image into the desired position. The #icture toolbar should be displayed when the image is selected. Change the transparency to a suitable )alue %in the eCample this is >0k' so that the teCt can be read.
:%& LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
)igure :'% +ransparent image added over the te-t You can obtain a better result if you set a graphicFs wrap to 2n Jac7ground. 7ith this selection all the teCt will be clearly readable( with all characters ha)ing the same intensity( as long as the bac+ground is not too dar+. You may still need to adJust the transparency of the image.
Adding captions to graphics

You can add captions to graphics in three ways& automatically( by using the Caption dialog( or manually.
Adding captions automatically

You can set up $ibre=ffice to add captions automatically whene)er you insert a graphic( a table( or other obJects into a document. You can choose which obJects are captioned automatically( what the se@uence name is for each caption %for eCample( TTableU or TGllustrationU'( and the position of the caption. To set up automatic captions& 1' Clic+ &ools 9 ;ptions. =n the Options dialog( clic+ on the 9 sign neCt to $ibre=ffice 7riter to show a list of options. 2' -elect AutoCaption. -e)eral choices are a)ailable at the right of the dialog for adding captions automatically. 3' Choose which obJects you want to be automatically captioned and specify the characteristics of the captions. 5or more information( see T*utoCaption optionsU in Chapter 2( -etting up 7riter. 7hen you insert a graphic( if automatic captioning is enabled( the graphic is placed in a frame along with a caption containing the default se@uence name for graphicsoGllustration. #osition the cursor in the caption area and type the teCt for the caption. You can change the se@uence name by selecting one from the drop9down Category list or typing in your own.
You can specify where to place an automatic caption for any obJect eCcept a pictureV picture captions can only be automatically placed below the picture. Gf you need a caption abo)e the picture %for eCample( for data plots in scientific publications'( you must add the captions manually( as described in T*dding captions manuallyU on page 2AD.
>ote
:%'
&ip
* common se@uence nameQ5igureQis not one of the names pro)ided& X>one9( 4rawing( llustration( &able( and &e't. Gf you want the name T5igureU or any other custom name for your graphics( do the following& 1' =pen the ;ptions G :ibre;ffice !riter G AutoCaption dialog( as described abo)e. 2' Gn the /dd captions automatically when inserting section( select :ibre;ffice !riter Picture. This acti)ates the Caption area in the dialog for pictures %graphics'. 3' "nder the 8ategory drop9down list( enter the name that you want added %say( -ig're'( by o)erwriting any se@uence name in the list. %=)erwriting a term does not delete it from the drop9down list.' You can also set some options for the number style and for a separator between the name and the number( if desired. Clic+ ;6 to sa)e the changes.
Adding captions using the Caption dialog

To add captions using the Caption dialog&
1' Gnsert the graphic( then either right9clic+ it and select Caption from the conteCt menu( or select it and choose nsert 9 Caption from the 0enu bar. 2' "nder Properties on the Caption dialog %5igure 2E<'( ma+e your selections for the 8ategory( Dumbering( and Separator fields % llustration( Arabic A1 # %B( and a colon %:'( respecti)ely( for the eCample in 5igure 2E< and type your caption teCt in the 8aption teCt boC at the top. 7hate)er teCt you enter for the caption appears in the boC at the bottom( after the se@uence name( number( and separator. 3' Clic+ ;6. The graphic and its caption are placed in a frame( as shown in 5igure 2EE.
&ip
Gn the Category boC( you can type any name you want( for eCample )igure. $ibre=ffice will create a numbering se@uence using that name.
)igure :'& Defining the caption for an illustration
:%(
Illustration 1. An example
)igure :'' /n e-ample of a graphic and its caption contained in a frame. +he outer bo- shows the edge of the frameH this border is normally set to be invisible.
;verriding the default positioning of captions

The default positioning for picture captions is Jelow( and that position cannot be changed using the Caption dialog. 6owe)er( you can o)erride the positioning manually( as follows& 1' 5ollow the instructions in T*dding captions using the Caption dialogT on page 2AB to create the caption. 2' 4ight9clic+ on the picture %not the frame surrounding picture and caption' and ma+e sure that Anchor 9 As Character is selected. 3' $eft9clic+ on the picture and drag and drop it after the caption.
&ip
You may wish to adJust the spacing abo)e and below the caption teCt to fine9tune the appearance of the picture and its caption.
Adding captions manually

Gf you need to sa)e as p.doc files or eCport in other formats( you may find that captions applied as described abo)e %either automatically or using the Caption dialog' are lost during the eCport. To a)oid eCport problems( or as another way to put captions abo)e pictures or below them %the usual case'( you can add a caption manually( in either of two ways&
#lace the graphic and its caption in separate paragraphs. "se a table. 0lace t!e rap!ic and its caption in separate para rap!s
Gnsert the graphic and anchor it to its paragraph as a character. #ress ,nter to create a new paragraph for the caption. 1' Gn the caption paragraph( type( for eCample( -ig're and add a space. 2' To insert the figure number automatically( clic+ nsert 9 Fields 9 ;ther %8ontrol 9 ):' and select the Pariables tab. 3' -elect >umber range in the +ype list. -elect Figure in the -election list and choose( for eCample( Arabic A1 # %B in the 5ormat drop9down list. Clic+ the nsert button. >' * number will appear after the word T5igureU in the caption. !ow( type the teCt of the caption.
:%=
Gf you are manually adding captions to a lot of figures using this method( you might want to ma+e an *utoTeCt entry containing( for eCample( -ig're and a space( the figure9number field( and an optional separator and a space after it.
&ips
To ensure the picture and its caption stay together on the page( create a new paragraph style( for eCample 5igure& if the picture is going abo)e the caption( define the teCt flow of the 5igure paragraph style as 6eep with ne't paragraph and the neCt style as Caption. Con)ersely( if the caption is going abo)e( define the Caption paragraph style as 6eep with ne't paragraph and the neCt style as Figure.
.se a table
Create a one9column( two9row table. #lace the picture in one row and type the caption in the other rowQor use two or more rows for the caption and other teCt. This method can be especially useful for pictures with numbered legends( such as 5igure 2<D in this chapter.
Creating an image map

*n image map defines areas of an image %called hotspots' with hyperlin+s to web addresses( other files on the computer( or parts of the same document. 6otspots are the graphic e@ui)alent of teCt hyperlin+s %described in Chapter 12'. Clic+ing on a hotspot causes $ibre=ffice to open the lin+ed page in the appropriate program %for eCample( the default browser for an 6T0$ pageV $ibre=ffice Calc for a =.- fileV a #.5 )iewer for a #.5 file'. You can create hotspots of )arious shapes and include se)eral hotspots in the same image.
)igure :'( +he dialog to create or edit an image map
:&$
To use the image map editor& 1' Gn your $ibre=ffice document( select the image where you want to define the hotspots. 2' Choose -dit 9 mage/ap from the menu bar. The Gmage0ap 3ditor %5igure 2EB' opens. 3' "se the tools and fields in the dialog %described on the neCt page' to define the hotspots and lin+s necessary. >' Clic+ the Apply icon to apply the settings.
A' 7hen done( clic+ the $ave icon to sa)e the image map to a file( then clic+ the M in the upper right corner to close the dialog. The main part of the dialog shows the image on which the hotspots are defined. * hotspot is identified by a line indicating its shape. The toolbar at the top of the dialog contains the following tools&
Apply button& clic+ this button to apply the changes. ;pen, $ave, and $elect icons. Tools for drawing a hotspot shape& these tools wor+ in eCactly the same way as the
corresponding tools in the .rawing toolbar.
-dit( /ove( nsert( 4elete Points& ad)anced editing tools to manipulate the shape of a
polygon hotspot. -elect the 3dit #oints tool to acti)ate the other tools.
Active icon& toggles the status of a selected hotspot between acti)e and inacti)e. /acro& associates a macro with the hotspot instead of Just associating a hyperlin+. Properties& sets the hyperlin+ properties and adds the !ame attribute to the hyperlin+.
/elow the toolbar( specify for the selected hotspot&
Address: the address pointed by the hyperlin+. You can also point to an anchor in a
documentV to do this( write the address in this format& file:///<path>/document_name#anchor_name
&e't& type the teCt that you want to be displayed when the mouse pointer is mo)ed o)er the
hotspot.
Frame: where the target of the hyperlin+ will open& pic+ among Kblan+ %opens in a new
browser window'( Kself %opens in the acti)e browser window'( Ktop or Kparent.
The )alue Kself for the target frame will wor+ Just fine in the )ast maJority of occasions. Gt is therefore not recommended to use the other choices unless absolutely necessary.
&ip
Managing the Gallery

Adding an image to the Gallery
You may wish to add to the allery any images that you use fre@uently( for eCample( a company logo. You can then )ery easily insert these graphics into a document later. You can only add images to T0y ThemeU( or to any other theme that you ha)e createdV these are indicated by a green icon in the list of themes. You cannot add images to the built9in themes( indicated by an icon of another color.
:&*
/ethod 1 %selecting a file' 1' =pen the allery and select the theme where you want to add images. %You can also create a new theme for your imagesV see page 2<3.' 2' 4ight9clic+ on the desired theme and select Properties in the conteCt menu. This displays a dialog( into which the files from which the selection will be made( are added.
5igure 2ED& 0y Theme #roperties dialog in the
allery
3' =n the )iles page( clic+ the Find Files button. The -elect path dialog %not shown' opens which allows you to reach the folder containing the files of interest. >' You can enter the path for the folderFs directory in the Path teCt boC( or you can na)igate to locate the folderFs directory. A' Clic+ the $elect button to start the search. -ubfolders are included in the search. * list of graphic files is then displayed in the #roperties window. You can use the )ile type filter to limit the files displayed. <' To add all of the files shown in the list( clic+ Add All. =therwise( select the files to add and then clic+ Add. %6old down either the Shift +ey or the 8ontrol +ey when you clic+ on multiple files.'
>ote
You may need to import some graphics or create your own on your computer if the eCisting files are insufficient for your needs.
/ethod # %drag and drop' You can drag and drop an image into the allery from a document. 1' =pen the document containing an image you want to add to the allery( and display the allery theme to which you want to add it. 2' #osition the mouse pointer abo)e the image( without clic+ing. 3' Gf the mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol( the image refers to a hyperlin+. Gn this case( press the /lt +ey while you clic+ the image( to select it without acti)ating the lin+. Gf the mouse pointer does not change to a hand symbol( you can simply clic+ the image to select it. >' =nce the image is selected( e)ident from the colored selection handles around it( release the mouse button. Clic+ again on the image( +eeping the mouse button pressed for more than two seconds before mo)ing the mouse . 7ithout releasing the mouse button( drag the image into the allery. A' 4elease the mouse button.
4eleting images from the 1allery

To delete an image from a theme that you created& 1' 4ight9clic+ on the name of the image file or its thumbnail in the allery.
:&:
2' Clic+ 4elete on the conteCt menu. * message appears( as+ing if you want to delete this obJect. Clic+ Jes.
>ote
.eleting the name of a file from the list in the allery does not delete the file from the hard dis+ or other location. This includes the drag9drop folder in the allery.
Adding a new theme to the 1allery

To add a new theme to the allery& 1' Clic+ the >ew &heme button abo)e the list of themes %5igure 2<3'. 2' Gn the #roperties of !ew Theme dialog( clic+ the General tab and type a name for the new theme. 3' Clic+ the )iles tab and add images to the theme( as described earlier.
4eleting a theme from the 1allery

You can delete only themes that you ha)e added to the alleryV you cannot delete any of the built9in themes. To delete a theme from the allery& 1' o to &ools 9 1allery. 2' Gn the left part of the allery( select in the list the theme you wish to delete. 3' 4ight9clic+ on the theme( then clic+ 4elete on the conteCt menu.
:ocation of the 1allery and the obDects in it

raphics and other obJects shown in the allery can be located anywhere on your computerFs hard dis+( on a networ+ dri)e( or on a C.94=0. $istings in the allery refer to the location of each obJect. 7hen you add graphics to the allery using method 1( the files are not mo)ed or copiedV only the location of each new obJect is added as a reference. 7hen files are added using drag and drop( they are copied into a folder %dragdrop' in the allery( and allocated a file name. 5igure 2B0 shows in Detailed ?iew( two files in the <y +heme in the allery( one is contained in the dragdrop folder( and the other is a reference path to its actual location.
)igure :($ +heme showing files inserted with drag"and"drop and by reference Gn a wor+group situation( you may ha)e access to a shared allery %where you cannot change the contents unless authori2ed to do so' and a user allery( where you can add( change( or delete obJects. The location of the user allery is specified in &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice 9 Paths. You can change this location( and you can copy your gallery files %SDV' to other computers. allery contents pro)ided with $ibre=ffice are stored in a different location. You cannot change this location.
:&3
:ibre:ogo scripting
$ibre$ogo is an embedded )ector graphics language that pro)ides a simple( nati)e( $ogo9li+e programming en)ironment with turtle )ector graphics for the teaching of computing %programming and word processing'( des+top publishing %.T#'( and graphic design.
:ogo toolbar
.isplay the $ogo toolbar by selecting =iew 9 &oolbars 9 :ogo from the 0enu bar.
+he undoc7ed Logo toolbar

1 # % ) + 5orward %10 pt' /ac+ %10 pt' $eft %1A degrees' 4ight %1A degrees' -tart $ogo program %teCt or selected teCt of document' ( " 0 9 1* -top 6ome Clear screen $ogo command line %press ,nter for eCecution' "ppercase commands( also translate them to the language of the document
To start using the program( open a new blan+ document and clic+ the $tart button %A' on the toolbar. This sets the turtle( 5igure 2B1( to the center of the page. You may find it useful to adJust the page 2oom le)el so you can )iew the whole page.
)igure :(* +he graphical turtle The turtle has three attributes& 1' * location 2' *n orientation 3' * pen( itself ha)ing attributes such as color( width( and up and down. The turtle mo)es with commands that are relati)e to its own position( such as Rmo)e forward 10 spacesR and Rturn left D0 degreesR. The pen carried by the turtle can also be controlled( by enabling it( setting its color( or setting its width.
&he basics
Clic+ on the buttons 1 > to see the effects of these controls on the turtle. Clic+ the 8ome button %E' to return the turtle to its default settings and position in the center of the page. The Clear screen button %B' deletes all drawings from the page. The command teCt input boC allows you to enter command strings before pressing the ,nter +ey so that a se@uence of commands can be eCecuted at the same time.
:&#
5or eCample( entering the se@uence circle 10c" fillc!l!r .#l'e. penc!l!r .red. pensi/e 0 circle 5c" f!r1ard 000 rig(t 23 circle 50 into the command line and then pressing ,nter results in the following graphic&
)igure :(: Sample graphic from command line !ote that the graphic is anchored +o Page( and that the turtle attributes follow the setting for the line( in this instance fillcolor WblueWV pencolor WredWV linesi2e 2. You can also write your program on the page instead of entering it into the command line( allowing a larger and more compleC set of instructions to be built. Gn this case( clic+ing the -tart $ogo program button runs the script on the page. The teCt can be deleted from the page after completing the program to Just lea)e the graphic. The distance units are typographic points unless eCpressly defined as standard units such as inch or centimeters %E2 pt j 1 in j 2.A> cm'. -ee the 8elp for comprehensi)e information about $ibre$ogo. $ibre$ogo eCamples can be found on http&//eCtensions.libreoffice.org/eCtension9center/librelogo
:&%
8hapter = Wor7ing with +ables
ntroduction
Tables are a useful way to organi2e and present large amounts of information( for eCample&
Technical( financial( or statistical reports. #roduct catalogs showing descriptions( prices( characteristics( and photographs of
products.
/ills or in)oices. $ists of names with address( age( profession( and other information.
Tables can often be used as an alternati)e to spreadsheets to organi2e materials. * well9designed table can help readers understand better what you are saying. 7hile you would normally use tables for teCt or numbers( you could put other obJects( such as pictures( in cells. Tables can also be used as a page9layout tool to position teCt in areas of a document instead of using se)eral +ab characters. 5or eCample( the descriptions under 5igure 2DA were created in a table with in)isible borders. *nother( perhaps better( eCample would be in headers and footers to support independent positioning of different elements( such as page number( document title etc. This use of tables is described in Chapter >( 5ormatting #ages.
Creating a table
/efore you insert a table into a document( it helps to ha)e an idea of the )isual result you want to obtain as well as an estimate of the number of rows and columns re@uired. 3)ery parameter can be changed at a later stageV howe)er( thin+ing ahead can sa)e a large amount of time as changes to fully formatted tables often re@uire a significant effort.
nserting a new table

To insert a new table( position the cursor where you want the table to appear( then use any of the following methods to open the Gnsert Table dialog %5igure 2B3'&
5rom the 0enu bar( choose nsert 9 &able. 5rom the 0enu bar( choose &able 9 nsert 9 &able. #ress 8trl9)*:. =n the -tandard toolbar( clic+ the left side of the split &able button
To directly insert a table with the default properties( clic+ on the arrow button neCt to the Table icon on the -tandard toolbar. * graphic appears where you can choose the si2e of the table %up to fifteen rows and up to ten columns'. To create the table( clic+ on the cell that you want to be on the last row of the last column. 6olding down the mouse button o)er the Table icon will also display the graphic.
&ip
Gn the Gnsert Table dialog( you can specify the properties for the new table. General settings& Gn the Label boC( you can enter a different name from the $ibre=ffice9generated default for the table. This might come in handy when using the !a)igator to @uic+ly Jump to a table. Gn the 8olumns and 6ows boCes( specify the number of columns and rows for the new table. You can change the si2e of the table later( if necessary.
:&(
)igure :(3 2nserting a new table using the 2nsert +able dialog "nder Options( set up the initial table characteristics. -electing the options in this section of the dialog produces the following results&
8eading -electing this enables a heading to be used in the table and enables further
options for the heading. .efines the number of rows in the table to be used as headings. The default +able .eading paragraph style is applied to the heading rows. You can edit the $ibre=ffice9predefined +able .eading paragraph style in the -tyles and 5ormatting window to change these default settings %centered( bold( and italic teCt'. 7hen splitting a table into two tables( the 6eading rows can be copied into the second table. Cepeat 8eading Cows on new pages -election enables the heading rows of the table to be repeated at the top of subse@uent pages if the table spans more than one page. 8eading Cows -pecifies the number of rows to be used for the heading. .efault is 1. 4onNt split table over pages #re)ents the table from spanning more than one page. This can be useful if the table starts near the end of a page( and would loo+ better if it were completely located on the following page. Gf the table becomes longer than would fit on one page( you will need to either deselect this option or manually split the table. deleted later. The AutoFormat button opens a dialog from which you can select one of the many predefined table layouts. -ee T*utomatic formatting of tablesU on page 2B< for more information. *fter ma+ing your choices( clic+ ;6. 7riter creates a table as wide as the teCt area %from the left page margin to the right page margin'( with all columns the same width and all rows the same height. You can then adJust the columns and rows later to suit your needs.
3order -urrounds each cell of the table with a border. This border can be modified or
Creating nested tables

You can create tables within tables( nested to a depth only limited by imagination and practicality. 5igure 2B> demonstrates a simple( two9le)el eCample. The shaded table is inside a cell of the larger table. To achie)e this( simply clic+ in a cell of an eCisting table and use any of the methods mentioned in TGnserting a new tableU abo)e.
:&=
)igure :(# Dested table e-ample
2sing AutoCorrect to create a table

You can also create a table by typing a series of hyphens %9' or tabs separated by plus signs. "se the plus signs to indicate column di)iders( while hyphens and tabs are used to indicate the width of a column. 7hen using tabs( the default tab setting determines the widthV this setting can be changed in &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice !riter 9 1eneral. 5or eCample( this character se@uence& L99999999999999999L999999999999999L999999L creates a table li+e this&
>ote
This function can be disabled or enabled in &ools 9 AutoCorrect ;ptions. =n the Options tab( deselect or select Create table.
(reate a table fro# for#atted text

You can create a table from plain teCt by using the &able 9 Convert 9 &e't to &able menu item. The teCt to be con)erted must contain characters to indicate column separators. #aragraph mar+s indicate an end of a table row. To con)ert teCt to a table( start by editing the teCt to ensure the column separator character is in place where you want it. -elect the teCt you want to con)ert and choose &able 9 Convert 9 &e't to &able to open the dialog shown in 5igure 2BA.
)igure :(% Dialog for the te-t to table conversion
:'$
The Separate te-t at part of the dialog has four options for the separator for the columns of teCt. -elect ;ther to choose the default comma %useful if you are importing a C-P file' or type any character in the boC. The other options in this dialog are the same as those in the dialog used to insert a table shown in 5igure 2B3.
Exa#ple
Gn this eCample we will con)ert the following teCt into a table. Cow 1 Column 1U Cow 1 Column #U Cow 1 Column % Cow # Column 1U Cow # Column #U Cow # Column % Choose &able 9 Convert 9 &e't to &able Gn this case( the separator between elements is a semicolon. /y selecting the teCt and applying the con)ersion( we obtain the following result. Cow 1 Column 1 Cow # Column 1 Cow 1 Column # Cow # Column # Cow 1 Column % Cow # Column %
!ote that( unli+e when creating a table with other mechanisms( the con)ersion from teCt to table preser)es the paragraph style and character style applied to the original teCt. You can also use the Convert menu to perform the opposite operationV that is( to transform a table into plain teCt. This may be useful when you want to eCport the table contents into a different program. To transform a table into teCt( place the cursor anywhere in the table( choose &able 9 Convert 9 &able to &e't in the 0enu bar( pic+ the preferred row separator( and clic+ ;6 to finish.
Formatting the table layout

5ormatting a table is( generally spea+ing( a two9step process& formatting of the table layout %the subJect of this section' and formatting of the table teCt %the subJect of the neCt section'. 5ormatting the layout normally in)ol)es one or more of the following operations& adJusting the si2e of the table and its position on the page( adJusting si2es of rows and columns( adding or remo)ing rows or columns( merging and splitting indi)idual cells( changing borders and bac+ground.
4efault parameters
Gf you create a table using the Gnsert Table dialog or the &able icon on the -tandard toolbar( the following defaults are set&
The cells use the +able 8ontents paragraph style( which( in the default template( is identical
to the Default paragraph style.
The default table occupies all the space from margin to margin %teCt area'. The default table has thin blac+ borders around each cell %grid'.
*dditionally( if you acti)ate the 8eading option( the cells in the heading row %or rows' use the +able .eading paragraph style. Gn the default template( the teCt is centered and set with a bold and italic font.
Cesi5ing and positioning the table

"sing the default settings( any newly created table will occupy the entire width of the teCt area. This is sometimes what you want( or you may prefer a smaller table. To @uic+ly resi2e a table( first
8hapter = Wor7ing with +ables :'*
mo)e the mouse to either the left or right edge. 7hen the cursor changes shape into a double arrow( drag the border to the new position. This operation only changes the si2e of the first or last columnV it does not change the alignment of the table on the page. Gf you need more precise control o)er the si2e and position of the table on the page( open the Table 5ormat dialog by choosing &able 9 &able Properties or by right9clic+ing anywhere in the table and choosing &able from the conteCt menu. -elect the Table page of the dialog.
)igure :(& +he +able page of the +able )ormat dialog =n this page you can set the alignment of the table( choosing among the following options&
Automatic& the default setting for a table. :eft& aligns the table with the left margin. Cight& aligns the table with the right margin. From :eft& lets you specify under Spacing eCactly how far from the left margin the table is placed. is greater than the margin( the table will eCtend outside of the margins.
Center& aligns the table in the middle between the left and right margins. Gf the table width /anual& lets you specify the distances from both left and right margins under Spacing.
-electing an alignment option other than Automatic acti)ates the !idth field in the Properties section( where you can enter the desired si2e of the table. -elect Celative to see the width as percentage of the teCt area. Gn the Spacing section( use the Above and 3elow boCes to modify the separation between the teCt and the table. 7hen the si2e of the table is less than the si2e of the teCt area( $ibre=ffice will insert some )alues in the :eft and Cight boCes. You can change both :eft and Cight boC )alues if you select /anual alignment and you can change the :eft boC )alue when you select the From :eft alignmentV otherwise these )alues are not a)ailable. !ote that the sum of the table width( and the )alues in the :eft and Cight boCes( should not be greater than the width of the teCt area.
Cesi5ing rows and columns

You can adJust the height of rows and the width of columns in a table in se)eral ways.
0o)e the mouse neCt to the edge of the cell and when a double9headed arrow appears(
clic+ and hold the left mouse button( drag the border to the desired position( and release the mouse button.
:':
=n the hori2ontal ruler( column di)iders are mar+ed by a pair of thin gray linesV the )ertical
ruler indicates row di)iders in the same way. You can resi2e a row or column by holding the mouse button down on the appropriate di)ider and dragging it to the desired location.
"se the +eyboard as described below.

-electing &able 9 Autofit from the 0enu bar also offers some resi2ing options&
-elect Column !idth or Cow 8eight to enter a dimension into the si2e boC for each
selectable column or row of the table.
The ;ptimal Column !idth or ;ptimal Cow 8eight options ma+e the selected columns
or rows as narrow as possible while still fitting their contents.
4istribute ColumnsFCows -venly to @uic+ly bring them bac+ to all being the same width
or height. 5or greater control o)er the width of each column( use the 8olumns page of the Table 5ormat dialog.
)igure :(' +able )ormat dialog 8olumns page 4ight9clic+ on the table and choose &able from the pop9up menu or choose &able 9 &able Properties from the 0enu bar. =n the Table 5ormat dialog( select the 8olumns tab.
Adapt table width& Gf a table already stretches to the page margins( it cannot stretch any
wider and the /dapt table width option is not a)ailable. Gf the table is narrower( increasing the width of a column will increase the width of the whole table. Gf the table width already eCtends past the margins( with the /dapt table width option chec+ed( attempting to change a column width will automatically decrease that columns si2e so that the table will now shrin+ to the page margins while +eeping any other column si2es intact. AdDust columns proportionally results in all columns changing their widths by the same percentage when one is changed. 5or eCample( if you reduce by half the si2e of a column( the si2es of all the other columns will be hal)ed. the margins. This )alue cannot be edited and will not be negati)e in the e)ent that the table width is already larger than the space between the left and right margins.
Cemaining space shows how much further the table can eCpand before hitting the limit of "nder Column width( each indi)idual column can be adJusted. Gf you ha)e more than siC
columns( use the arrows at the right and left to )iew them all. 7ith no options selected( the column to the right of the one being adJusted will automatically adJust to +eep the table width constant. *dJusting the most right hand column causes the first column to adJust. 4ather than start from the +able )ormat dialog( it is often more efficient to ma+e rough adJustments to a new table using the mouse( and then fine tune the layout using the 8olumns page in conJunction with the +able page of the Table 5ormat dialog.
:'3
Gt is also possible to resi2e a table using only the +eyboard. This is sometimes easier than using the mouse. 1' #lace the cursor in the cell where you want to ma+e changes. 2' #ress and hold the /lt +ey while using the arrow +eys. a' The left and right arrow +eys adJust the column width by mo)ing the border on the right edge of the cell. b' The up and down arrows adJust the row height %when possible' by mo)ing the border on the lower edge of the cell. 3' #ress and hold the Shift9/lt +ey while using the left/right arrow +eys. *dJusts the column width by mo)ing the border on the left edge of the cell. To adJust the resi2ing parameters and beha)ior for +eyboard handling( choose &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice !riter 9 &able. "se the 6ow and 8olumn )alues in the <ove cells section to determine the amount of change produced by a single +eystro+e while resi2ing. Gn the Jehavior of rows!columns section you can choose one of the following three strategies when resi2ing&
Fi'ed& select this if you want the resi2ing to affect only the adJacent cell and not the entire
table. The width of the table does not change when resi2ing its cells.
Fi'ed, proportional& when resi2ing a cell with this option selected( all the other cells are
also resi2ed proportionally( *lso in this case the width of the table remains constant.
=ariable& this is the default option. 4esi2ing a cell affects the table si2e. 5or eCample( when
you widen a cell( the width of the table increases.
Cesi5ing individual cells

#lace the cursor in the cell you wish to change. 1' #ress and hold the 8trl9/lt +ey while using the left/right arrow +eys. 4e9si2es the current cell on its right edge. 2' #ress and hold the 8trl9Shift9/lt +ey while using the left/right arrow +eys. 4e9si2es the current cell on its left edge.
nserting rows and columns

To insert any number of rows or columns& 1' #lace the cursor in the row or column where you want to add new rows or columns and right9clic+. 2' Gn the conteCt menu( choose Cow 9 nsert or Column 9 nsert. This will display a dialog where you can select the number of rows or columns to add( and whether they appear before or after the selected one. 3' -et /mount to the number of rows or columns to insert( and Position to 3efore or After. >' Clic+ ;6 to close the dialog. The &able 9 nsert 9 Cow and &able 9 nsert 9 Column choices from the 0enu bar pro)ide the same options.
Clic+ing on the nsert Cow icon on the Table toolbar inserts one row below the selected one. Clic+ing on the nsert Column icon on the Table toolbar inserts a column after %to the right of' the selected one. 4egardless of how they are inserted( new rows or columns ha)e the same formatting as the row or column where the cursor was when the insert command was issued.
>ote
:'#
You can also @uic+ly insert a row or a column using the +eyboard& 1' #lace the cursor in the row or column neCt to the row or column you want to insert. 2' #ress /lt92nsert to acti)ate +eyboard handling. 3' "se the arrow +eys as desired to add a row or column& :eft to insert a new column to the left of the cell where the cursor is located. Cight to insert a new column to the right of the cell where the cursor is. 4own to insert a new row below the cell where the cursor is. 2p to insert a new row abo)e the cell where the cursor is. The abo)e +eyboard techni@ue can also be used to delete rows or columns by replacing the /lt92nsert +eystro+e combination in -tep 2 with /lt9Delete.
/erging and splitting cells

To merge a cell or group of cells into one cell& 1' -elect the cells to merge. 2' 4ight9clic+ and choose Cell 9 /erge in the conteCt menu( or choose &able 9 /erge Cells from the 0enu bar. *ny content of the cells appears in the merged cell. To merge a single cell into an adJacent cell( you can also place the cursor in the cell %origin'( press /lt9Delete( release( then hold down 8trl( and then press the left or the right arrow +ey. *ny contents in the origin cell are lost. To split a cell into multiple cells& 1' #osition the cursor inside the cell. 2' 4ight9clic+ and choose Cell 9 $plit in the conteCt menu( or choose &able 9 $plit Cells from the 0enu bar. 3' -elect how to split the cell. * cell can be split either hori2ontally %create more rows' or )ertically %create more columns'( and you can specify the total number of cells to create. To split a single cell( you can also place the cursor in an adJacent cell( press /lt92ns( release( then hold down 8trl( and then press the left or the right arrow +ey to split the cell to the left/right. Gt is generally a good rule to merge and split cells after completing other layout formatting. This is because some operations such as deleting a column or a row may produce a result difficult to predict when applied to a table with merged or split cells.
$pecifying table borders

=n the Table 5ormat dialog( select the Jorders tab. 6ere you can set borders for a whole table or groups of cells within a table. Gn addition( a shadow can be set for the whole table. /orders ha)e three components& where they go( what they loo+ li+e( and how much space is left around them.
Line arrangement specifies where the borders go. Gf a group of cells is selected( the border will be applied only to those cells. You can specify indi)idually the style of the border for the outside edges of the selected cells as well as for the the cell di)isions. 7riter pro)ides fi)e default arrangements but you can Just as easily clic+ on the line you want to customi2e in the 0ser"defined area to get eCactly what you want. 7hen multiple cells are selected( the "ser9defined area allows you to select the edges of the selection as well as the cell di)iders. /y clic+ing at the intersection of the lines( you can modify multiple borders simultaneously. 5or eCample( in 5igure 2BB the right edge and hori2ontal separators are modified with a single operation.
:'%
)igure :(( +able )ormat dialog Jorders page

7hen the selected cells ha)e different styles of border the "ser9defined area shows the border as a gray line. You can clic+ on the gray line to choose a new border style %first clic+'( lea)e the border as it is %second clic+' or delete the border %third clic+'.
>ote
Line specifies what the border loo+s li+e& the style( width( and color. There are a number of
different styles and colors to choose from. -tyle( 7idth( and Color selections apply to those borders highlighted by a pair of blac+ arrows in the "ser9defined map on the left9hand side of the dialog.
Spacing to contents specifies how much space to lea)e between the border and the cell
contents. -paces can be specified to the left( right( abo)e( and below. Chec+ $ynchroni5e to ha)e the same spacing for all four sides. This spacing is li+e a padding and it is not factored in when calculating the teCt measurements.
Shadow style properties always apply to the whole table. * shadow has three components&
where it is( how far from the table it is cast( and what color it is.
Gf /erge adDacent line styles is chec+ed( two cells sharing a common border will ha)e
their borders merged( rather than being side by side.
To reset e)erything if you are ha)ing problems with borders( right9clic+ in the table and choose &able or choose &able 9 &able Properties from the 0enu bar. =n the Jorders tab( select the $et >o 3orders icon under Line arrangement& Default %the boC on the left'.
&ip
:'&
$electing background colors and graphics

* table bac+ground can greatly impro)e the readability of the data( )isually highlight important parts of the table %such as the heading or a specific cell'( or Just ma+e the table more appealing. You can choose between two types of bac+ground when formatting the table& solid color or graphic. The bac+ground can be applied to the whole table( to a single cell( or to a row. The bac+ground selected for a cell will be in front of the row bac+ground which in turn will hide the table bac+ground. The row bac+ground option is @uite handy when you want to create alternate color rows or assign a different bac+ground to the heading of the table. The tables in this guide adopt this techni@ue. To set the bac+ground for a cell( row( or table& 1' #lace the cursor anywhere inside the cell( row or table you want to wor+ with. Gf you want to apply a bac+ground to a group of cells( select the group. 2' 4ight9clic+ and choose &able from the conteCt menu( or choose &able 9 &able Properties from the 0enu bar. 3' Gn the Table 5ormat dialog( select the Jac7ground tab %see 5igure 2BD'. >' Gn the )or section( chose whether to apply the settings to cell( row( or table.
Gf you choose Cell( changes apply only to the selected cells( or the cell where the cursor
currently resides. 3)en when selecting a group of cells( the bac+ground settings are applied to each cell indi)idually.
Gf you choose Cow( changes affect the entire row where the cursor resides. Gf you choose &able( changes will set the bac+ground for the entire table( regardless of
the cursor position or selected cells. A' Gn the /s selection boC( choose whether the bac+ground is a color or a graphic. To apply a color( select the color and clic+ ;6. 4emember that you can add custom colors by choosing &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice 9 Colors. To apply a graphic& a' 5irst select the graphic from your computerFs file system with the 3rowse button. %7riter supports a large number of graphics formats.'
)igure :(= +able )ormat dialog inserting a graphic bac7ground
:''
b'
c'
You can use the :ink option to lin+ the graphic file. Gf it is lin+ed( changes to the graphic %for eCample( if you edit it in a different software pac+age' are reflected in your document. 6owe)er( you also need to +eep the lin+ed graphic file with the document file. Gf( for eCample( you email the document without the graphic file( the graphic will no longer be )isible. "nder +ype( select the type of placement for the graphic.

d' e'
Gf you choose Position( you can select in the position map where the graphic will be displayed in the selected area. Gf you choose Area( the graphic is stretched to fill the whole area. Gf you choose &ile( the graphic is tiled %repeated hori2ontally and )ertically' to fill the area.
Gf the Preview option is chec+ed( the graphic displays in the pane on the right. To apply the graphic( clic+ ;6.
5igure 2D0 shows an eCample of a table set with a bac+ground image( and the first row bac+ground colored. *s you can see( the row bac+ground co)ers the table bac+ground.
)igure :=$ ,-ample of table with different row and table bac7grounds
4isplaying or hiding table boundaries

* table boundary is a set of pale %usually gray' lines around the cells when )iewed on9screen in $ibre=ffice with no borders enabled. These boundaries are not printedV their only function is to help you see where the table cells are. To display the table the same way on the screen as on the printed page( with no boundary lines( right9clic+ on the table and choose &able 3oundaries from the conteCt menu. 4epeat this to ha)e the boundaries appear again.
>ote
Turning boundaries off does not hide the borders that the table may ha)e. You can also turn table boundaries on and off through &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice 9 Appearance. =n that page( you can display or hide boundaries around teCt( pages headers and footers( figures( and other parts of a document.
&ip
Formatting the table te't

=nce the table layout is satisfactory( you can mo)e on to formatting the teCt in the indi)idual cells. You can apply manual formatting as with any other paragraph in the teCt( but it is highly recommended( for the sa+e of consistency and ease of maintenance( that you define your own paragraph and character styles.
:'( LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
/esides the paragraph and character styles( there are other aspects to consider when placing teCt in a table cell( such as teCt flow( alignment and orientation. You can format each cell independently of other cells( or you can simultaneously format a group of cells by selecting them before applying the desired formatting.
$pecifying te't flow

=n the +e-t )low page of the Table 5ormat dialog %5igure 2D1'( you can&
Gnsert a page or column brea+ either before or after the table. "se the +e-t )low& 3reak
option( combined with the Page or Column and the 3efore or After buttons. Gf you insert a page brea+ before the table %that is( start the table on a new page'( you can also change the page style that will go with it by chec+ing the !ith Page $tyle boC and selecting a new page style. *s with any page brea+( you can also reset the page numbers using the Page number boC.
8eep a table on one page by deselecting the Allow table to split across pages and
columns option. Gf this item is deselected( the neCt item is not acti)e.
8eep each row on one page by deselecting the Allow row to break across pages and
columns option.
"se the 6eep with ne't paragraph option to +eep the table and an immediately following
paragraph together if you insert a page brea+.
"se the Cepeat heading option( and its associated numbers boC( to select the number of
table heading rows that will be repeated on each page. * complicated table may need two or three heading rows to be easily read and understood.
"se the +e-t direction list to select the direction for the teCt in the cells. The most common
setting is :eft to right for 7estern languages.
The phrase 2se superordinate obDect settings means Tuse the formatting settings from the paragraph before the tableU.
>ote
)igure :=* +able )ormat dialog +e-t )low page
:'=
-elect the )ertical alignment of the teCt in the table or the selected cellsV the choices are to
align with the top of the cell( the center of the cell( or the bottom of the cell. This alignment is in addition to the $eft94ight alignment options a)ailable on the Table page of the Table 5ormat dialog.
* table heading row can not span two pages( but any other row can. * one9row table %often used for page layout purposes'( if set up with the default of including a heading( will not brea+ across pages. The cure is to ma+e sure the table is defined without a heading row.
>ote
=ertical alignment
/y default( teCt entered into a table is aligned to the top9left of the cell. You can change the default for the entire table( as described abo)e( or for indi)idually selected cells. To )ertically align the teCt in specific cells&
#lace the cursor in the cell you wish to change( or clic+ and drag to select multiple cells. 4ight9clic+ in the selected area and choose Cell 9 Center( &op( or 3ottom from the
conteCt menu to )ertically align the teCt as desired.
>umber formats
The number format can be set for a whole table or group of cells. 5or eCample( cells can be set to display in a particular currency( to four decimal places( or in a particular date format. The !umber recognition option can be enabled under &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice !riter 9 &able within the 2nput in +ables section. >umber recognition specifies that numbers in a teCt table are recogni2ed and formatted as numbers. Gf !umber recognition is not selected( numbers are sa)ed in teCt format and are automatically left9aligned. Gf >umber format recognition is not selected( only input in the format that has been set for the cell is accepted. *ny other input resets the format to +e-t. -elect the cells to format( then right9clic+ and choose >umber Format from the conteCt menu. The !umber 5ormat dialog opens for you to set options for )arious categories of numerical data.
Gn the 8ategory list( select the category you want( such as currency( date( or teCt. Gn the )ormat list( choose a format for the category you Just selected. 5or some categories( such as date( you may wish to change the language using the
Language list( while for other numerical categories you can use the Options section of the dialog to customi2e the appearance.
You will notice that $ibre=ffice displays the formatting code for the category and format selected in 5ormat Code section at the bottom of the dialog. 5or eCample( if you select a date format such as 31 .ec 1DDD the corresponding code is D MMM . *d)anced users can easily customi2e this formatting code as well as create new user9defined codes.
&ip
Alignment specifies that numbers are always bottom right aligned in the cell. Gf this field is not selected numbers are always top left aligned in the cell.
:($
>ote
.irect formatting is not influenced by the Alignment field. Gf you center align the cell content directly( it remains centered irrespecti)e of whether teCt or numbers are in)ol)ed.
Cotating te't in a table cell

You can rotate teCt in a table cell by D0 or 2E0 degrees. TeCt rotation is useful when you ha)e long headings for narrow columns.
-elect the teCt to be rotated and then choose Format 9 Character. =n the Position page( in the 6otation ! scaling section( choose the rotation angle and clic+
;6. 5igure 2D2 shows a sample table with rotated headings.
)igure :=: / table with rotated headings
>ote
TeCt rotation within table cells can also be achie)ed with the use of paragraph styles( discussed in greater detail in Chapter E( 7or+ing with -tyles.
4ata entry and manipulation in tables

/oving between cells
7ithin a table( you can use the mouse( the cursor +eys( or the +ab +ey to mo)e between cells. The cursor +eys mo)e to the neCt cell only if there is no teCt in the way. 5or eCample( pressing the right cursor +ey will mo)e the cursor to the right within the teCt in the current cell( then to the neCt cell. The +ab +ey mo)es directly to the neCt cell and( if the cursor is in the last cell in the table( creates a new row. #ressing Shift9+ab mo)es the cursor bac+ a cell.
&ip
To enter a +ab character as part of the teCt of the cell( press the 8trl and +ab +eys at the same time.
To mo)e to the beginning of the table( press 8trl9.ome. Gf the acti)e cell is empty( the mo)e is to the beginning of the table. Gf the cell has content( the first press goes to the beginning of the cell and the neCt press goes to the beginning of the table %pressing again ta+es you to the beginning of the document'.
8hapter = Wor7ing with +ables :(*
To mo)e to the end of the table( press 8trl9,nd. Gf the acti)e cell is empty( the mo)e is to the end of the table. Gf the cell has content( the first press goes to the end of the cell and the neCt press goes to the end of the table %pressing again ta+es you to the end of the document'.
$orting data in a table

,ust as in a spreadsheet( 7riter allows data in a table to be sorted. "p to three le)els of sorting can be specified %for eCample( sort first by age numerically( then alphabetically by name within each age'. To sort data in a table& 1' -elect the table %or part of the table' to be sorted. 2' 5rom the 0enu bar( choose &able 9 $ort( or select the $ort icon from the +able toolbar. 3' Gn the -ort dialog& a' .ecide whether you want to sort in the direction of rows or columns. The default sorting direction is by rows( which results in sorting the data in a column. b' -elect up to three +eys to sort on( in the correct order. c' 5or each +ey( select which column or row to sort on( whether the sort is >umeric or Alphanumeric and whether it is Ascending or 4escending. d' Clic+ ;6 to perform the sort.
>ote
You ha)e to select all cells that might be affected by the sorting. 5or eCample( if you select only the cells of one column( the sort affects that column only( while the others remain unchanged. Gn such a case( you ris+ miCing the data of the rows.
2sing spreadsheet functions in a table

Gn a table in a 7riter document( you can use some of the mathematical functions that are normally implemented by $ibre=ffice Calc. 5or many simple functions( 7riter tables can be used as basic spreadsheets. ,ust as in a spreadsheet( each table cell is identified by a letter %for the column' and a number %for the row'. 5or eCample( cell C> is the cell in the third column from the left and fourth row from the top. 7hen the cursor is in a cell( the table name and this cell reference is displayed on the status bar.
/asic spreadsheet functions in tables are much the same as in $ibre=ffice Calc. The main difference is that cell references are formatted differently. Cell *2 %first column( second row' is referred to in Calc as *2 %or `*`2 for an absolute reference'. Gn 7riter tables( it is referred to as Z*2Y.
&ip
5or eCample( suppose you had two numbers in cells Z/1Y and ZC2Y and wanted to display the sum of the two in cell Z*1Y( as shown in 5igure 2D3. .o the following& 1' Clic+ in cell Z*1Y and press the R +ey( or choose &able 9 Formula from the 0enu bar( or press ):. The 5ormula bar appears automatically( near the top of the screen. Gn the leftmost side of the bar( you can see the coordinates of the selected cell. 2' Clic+ in cell Z/1Y. The identifiers of this cell are automatically displayed in the 5ormula bar and inserted into cell Z*1Y.
:(:
)igure :=3 0sing spreadsheet functions in a table 3' #ress the 9 +ey. >' Clic+ on cell ZC2Y. You can see the final formula Y X319RXC#9 displayed both in the selected cell and in the =bJect bar. A' #ress the ,nter +ey( or clic+ the green tic+ %chec+ mar+' on the 5ormula /ar( to replace the formula in the cell with the result of the calculation.
&ip
To display a cellWs formula and ma+e it a)ailable for editing( choose &able 9 Formula from the 0enu bar( or press ):.
&ip
To display the list of the mathematical functions that you can use in a table& 1' .isplay the 5ormula toolbar by pressing ): or by selecting a blan+ cell and pressing the R 7ey. 2' Clic+ the Formula fA'B icon.
Gn our eCample( this gi)es the result 9 in the top left cell. 5or summing contiguous cells( you can simply select the cells in the row( column( or the rectangle of rows and columns. Thus( for eCample( to add a column of numbers( do this& 1' Type an e@uals sign j in an empty cell. 2' -elect the cells to be added togetherin this case the cells from *2 to *A. The formula should be something li+e YXA#:A+9. 3' #ress the ,nter +ey or clic+ the green tic+ %chec+ mar+' on the 5ormula /ar. >' The result appears in the cell you ha)e selected. 7hen using a function( you can enter the cells manually or by selecting them. Thus( to add up the four numbers that we added abo)e %*2( *3( *>( *A'( do this& 1' Type an e@uals sign R in an empty cell. 2' Type s'" or select it from the function list fA'B. 3' -elect the contiguous cells to be added together. The formula should be something li+e YsumXA#:A+9. >' #ress the ,nter +ey or clic+ the green tic+ %chec+ mar+' on the 5ormula /ar. A' The answer appears in the cell you ha)e selected.
Caution
"nli+e in Calc( when inserting or deleting rows or columns of the table( formulas are not updated automatically. Gf you plan to use compleC formulas you should consider embedding a Calc spreadsheet in your 7riter document.
:(3
Additional table operations

Protecting cells in a table
You can protect the contents of indi)idual cells of a teCt table from changes.
This protection is not intended for secure protection. Gt is Just a switch to protect the cells against accidental changes.
>ote
To turn on cell protection& #lace the cursor in a cell or select cells. 4ight9clic+ to open the conteCt menu( then choose Cell 9 Protect. To tun off cell protection( do one of the following&
#lace the cursor in the cell or select the cells. 5irst( if necessary( choose &ools 9 ;ptions
9 :ibre;ffice !riter 9 Formatting Aids and mar+ Cursor in protected areas 9 -nable. Then right9clic+ the cell to open the conteCt menu and choose Cell 9 2nprotect.
-elect the table in the !a)igator( open the conteCt menu and select &able 9 2nprotect. "se Shift98trl9+ to remo)e protection for the entire current table or all selected tables.
Adding a caption
You can easily add a caption to any table. 7riter will +eep trac+ of all your captioned tables( automatically number them( and update any lin+s to them. To add a caption to a table& 1' #lace the cursor in the table. 2' 4ight9clic+ and choose Caption from the pop9up menu. *lternati)ely( the nsert 9 Caption menu option becomes a)ailable whene)er your cursor is inside a table cell. 3' 3nter the teCt for your caption( your category selection( the numbering style( separator( and position %abo)e or below the table'. >' Clic+ ;6.
=nce the category( numbering style( and separator are established in the Caption dialog( you can edit them in the document if you choose. 6owe)er( doing so may damage the automatic numbering and reference lin+s. Gf you need to establish the numbering and reference lin+ for the caption( you can choose to lea)e your caption blan+ in the Caption dialog and add it later.
>ote
7riter supplies fi)e category labels for captions& Z!oneY( .rawing( Table( Gllustration( and TeCt. You can also create your own category labels( formatting( and separators. 5or eCample( you might want your tables to be labeled as Fantasia( formatted with roman numerals( and using a period (.) as a separator( as follows& %antasia ,. 2nteresting data %antasia ,,. <ore interesting data %antasia ,,,. Get more interesting data To accomplish this& 1' =pen the Caption dialog following the instructions abo)e. 2' Gn the 8ategory field( select the teCt and type the word -antasia. 3' Gn the Dumbering drop9down list( select the Coman A B option.
:(# LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
>' Gn the Separator field( select the teCt and type a period %.' followed by a space.
>ote
7riter will use eCactly what you type into the Category and -eparator fields( so be sure to include any additional spaces or punctuation you want to see in your caption.
*dditional options for numbering captions by chapter are a)ailable under the Options button in the Captions dialog. -ome of these settings which refer to the outline le)el will only ha)e an effect if you are using outline le)el paragraph styles on the chapter headings within your document. -ee Chapter E. 7or+ing 7ith -tyles( for information. /y adding chapter numbers to your captions( $ibre=ffice will restart the caption numbering for each chapter it encounters. 5or eCample( if the last figure caption you create in chapter 1 is 5igure 1.1A( and the neCt figure caption you create is in chapter 2( the numbering will start o)er at 5igure 2.1. =ptions a)ailable to chapter numbering for captions include the following&
"se :evel to specify the outline le)els that triggers a restart of the numbering as well as
how many le)els of outline numbering are shown before the table number. *n eCample may be useful. -uppose your document uses 6eading 1 style for chapters and 6eading 2 style for sub9headings( and that this is how you set up your outline numbering. Gf you want all the tables in a chapter %that is( between two 6eading 1 paragraphs' to be numbered se@uentially independently of the sub9heading they are under( select 1 as $e)el. Gf instead you want to restart the numbering at each sub9heading select le)el 2.
"se the $eparator field to establish the separator between the chapter number and figure
number.
"se Character style to set a character style for the caption. This is useful if the separator
of your choice is not a symbol included in the default font type of your document or if you want the caption to ha)e a special color( si2e and so on.
The Apply border and shadow option does not apply to table captions. $ibre=ffice
normally wraps the obJects you can add a caption to in a frame( but not for tables.
"se Caption order to specify whether you want the category or numbering to appear first
in the caption. *ll of the features described abo)e can also be set up to automatically apply to any new tables you create in your document. To automatically caption all your tables& 1' #lace the cursor in a table. 2' 4ight9clic+ and choose Caption 9 AutoCaption from the pop9up menu. 3' -elect :ibre;ffice !riter &able and select the settings you want and clic+ ;6. This dialog is co)ered in more detail in Chapter 2( -etting up 7riter. 7hen *utoCaption is enabled for tables( any new tables will be captioned according to your selections in the *utoCaption dialogV howe)er( you will need to add the specific teCt for each caption onto the table manually.
Cross.referencing a table
You can insert a cross9reference to a captioned table. Clic+ing on the cross9reference ta+es the reader directly to the table. 1' #osition the cursor where you want the cross reference. 2' Choose nsert 9 Cross.reference from the 0enu bar. 3' -et the +ype to Table %or whate)er you chose as the category'. * list of captioned tables will be shown in the Selection panelV select the one you want to reference.
:(%
>' Gn the )ormat pane( choose how the cross reference will appear. Page creates a reference of the page number that the caption appears on. Chapter places a reference to the chapter number in which the caption appears. This will only produce an empty space unless you ha)e set up your chapter headings with outline le)el paragraph styles. Ceference inserts the entire captionFs category( number and caption teCt as a reference. AboveF3elow inserts Tabo)eU or TbelowU depending on whether the table appears abo)e or below the cross9reference. As Page $tyle creates a reference to the page number that the caption appears on using the page style format. Category and >umber creates a cross9reference with only the captionFs category and numberV for eCample( &able 1 for the first table. Caption &e't creates the reference using the caption teCt( lea)ing off the category and number. >umbering inserts only the number of the caption. A' Clic+ nsert to add the cross9reference and clic+ Close to eCit the dialog.
Automatic formatting of tables

"sing *uto5ormat( you can apply an elaborate format to your table with Just a few clic+s. *uto5ormat is somewhat similar to paragraph styles and will enable you to obtain consistent loo+ing tables across your document. You can also create your own table formats and sa)e them as another *uto5ormat option. To apply an *uto5ormat( place the cursor anywhere in the table and choose &able 9 AutoFormat. This opens the dialog shown in 5igure 2D>.
)igure :=# +he table /uto)ormat dialog -elect from the list on the left the 5ormat most suitable for your table and clic+ ;6 to apply it. Clic+ing the /ore button opens another section of the dialog where you can rename the selected table format scheme as well as decide which parts of the predefined formatting you want to apply to your table. You can selecti)ely apply the number format( the font( the alignment( the border( or the pattern.
:(&
>ote
You cannot rename or delete the 4efault format. 5igure 2D> shows that with 4efault selected( the Cename and 4elete buttons are not a)ailable.
To create your own *uto5ormat( proceed as follows& 1' Create a table and manually format it as you wish( including borders( spacing of teCt from the top and bottom borders( fonts to be used in the table heading and data cells( and bac+ground colors. 2' #osition the cursor anywhere in the table and then clic+ &able 9 AutoFormat. 3' =n the *uto5ormat dialog( clic+ Add and gi)e the table format a name in the *dd *uto5ormat dialog and clic+ ;6. >' The newly named *uto5ormat now appears as an a)ailable format. Clic+ ;6 to close the *uto5ormat dialog. Table *uto5ormats record the following table9le)el properties&
/rea+ 8eep with neCt paragraph 4epeat heading *llow table to split across pages *llow rows to brea+ across pages 0erge adJacent line styles Table shadow
This techni@ue does not include table and column widths in the table format. To insert a table with predefined full formatting( sa)e it as *utoTeCt. -ee T"sing *utoTeCtU in Chapter 3( 7or+ing with TeCt( for instructions.
&ip
Caution
*utoformats are not easily remo)ed. You can change to a different autoformat( but it ta+es 2ndo to get bac+ to the original table.
Creating a heading row in an e'isting table

To create a heading row in an eCisting table that does not ha)e one( select the first row in the table and from the 0enu bar select &able 9 nsert 9 Cows. Gn the Gnsert 4ows dialog that opens( ensure the 3efore option is selected and clic+ ;6. -elect the new first row and then from the $tyles and Formatting window( double9clic+ the &able 8eading paragraph style to apply it to the heading row. *s an alternati)e( you could apply an *uto5ormat that does ha)e a heading defined. %6ere is where ha)ing some personali2ed table formats could come in )ery handy.' #lace the cursor anywhere in the table and then clic+ &able 9 AutoFormat. Choose a format. Clic+ ;6. "se the /ore button and deselect the formatting options you do not want to apply to your table.
/erging and splitting tables

=ne table can be split into two tables( and two tables can be merged into a single table. Tables are split only hori2ontally %the rows abo)e the split point are put into one table( and the rows below into another'.
:('
To split a table& 1' #lace the cursor in a cell that will be in the top row of the second table after the split %the table splits immediately abo)e the cursor'. 2' 4ight9clic+ and choose $plit &able in the conteCt menu. You can also use &able 9 $plit &able from the 0enu bar. 3' * -plit Table dialog opens. You can select >o heading or an alternati)e formatting for the headingthe top row%s' of the new table. >' Clic+ ;6. The table is then split into two tables separated by a blan+ paragraph.
>ote
Gf cells in one table include formulas using data from the other table( those cells will contain an error message& pp3Cpression is faultypp.
To merge two tables& 1' .elete the blan+ paragraph between the tables. You must use the Delete +ey %not the Jac7space +ey' to do this. 2' -elect any cell in one of the tables. 3' 4ight9clic+ and choose /erge &ables in the pop9up menu. You can also use &able 9 /erge &able from the 0enu bar.
&ip
To see clearly where the paragraphs are and to delete them easily( choose =iew 9 >onprinting Characters 48trl9)*$5 or clic+ the button in the -tandard toolbar.
4eleting a table
To delete a table& 1' Clic+ anywhere in the table. 2' Choose &able 9 4elete 9 &able from the 0enu bar. =r& 1' -elect from the end of the paragraph before the table to the start of the paragraph after the table. 2' #ress the Delete +ey or the Jac7space +ey.
>ote
The second method also merges the paragraph after the table with the paragraph before the table( which may not be what you want.
Copying a table
To copy a table from one part of the document and paste it into another part& 1' Clic+ anywhere in the table. 2' 5rom the 0enu bar choose &able 9 $elect 9 &able. 3' #ress 8trl98 or clic+ the Copy icon on the -tandard toolbar. >' 0o)e the cursor to the target position and clic+ on it to fiC the insertion point. A' #ress 8trl9? or clic+ the Paste icon in the -tandard toolbar.
:((
/oving a table
To mo)e a table from one part of a document to another part& 1' Clic+ anywhere in the table. 2' 5rom the 0enu bar( choose &able 9 $elect 9 &able. 3' #ress 8trl9; or clic+ the Cut icon in the -tandard toolbar. %This step remo)es the contents of the cells but lea)es the empty cells( which must be remo)ed in step <.' >' 0o)e the cursor to the target position and clic+ on it to fiC the insertion point. A' #ress 8trl9? or clic+ the Paste icon in the -tandard toolbar. %This pastes the cells and their contents and formatting.' <' 4eturn to the original table( clic+ somewhere in it and then choose &able 9 4elete 9 &able from the 0enu bar.
nserting a paragraph before or after a table

To insert a paragraph before a table( position the cursor before any teCt or other contents in the first %upper left9hand' cell and press ,nter or /lt9,nter. To insert a paragraph after a table( position the cursor after any teCt in the last %lower right9hand' cell and press /lt9,nter.
Captions are considered as paragraphs separate from the table itself. Gf there is a caption below a table( for eCample( Just position the cursor at the end of the caption and press ,nter.
>ote
2sing tables as a page layout tool

Tables may be used as a page layout tool to position teCt in a document instead of using tabs or spaces. 5or eCample( the Tip below is formatted as a table. 5or more information and tips about using tables in page layout( see Chapter >. 5ormatting #ages.
7hen inserting a table used for layout( you may wish to deselect the 8eading and 3order options %see Gnserting a new table on page 2<B'.
&ip
To remo)e the borders from an eCisting table( right9clic+ on the table( choose &able from the conteCt menu( select the 3orders tab %see 5igure 2BB on page 2E<'( and select the icon for no borders.
&he &able menu and toolbar

*ll of the table commands described in this chapter are con)eniently located in the 0enu bar under the &able item and on the Table toolbar( shown in 5igure 2DA. Table 11 describes the effects of using these icons. 7hen you create a table or select an eCisting table( the Table toolbar will be displayed automatically. You can manually display it at any time by clic+ing =iew 9 &oolbars 9 &able. The toolbar can float o)er the main 7riter window %as shown in 5igure 2DA'( or it can be doc+ed along any edge of the main window. -ee Chapter 1( Gntroducing 7riter( for more about doc+ing and floating toolbars( and how to hide and display specific tools on a toolbar.
:(=
1 Table # $ine -tyle % $ine Color %border' ) /orders + /ac+ground Color ( 0erge Cells " -plit Cells 0 =ptimi2e
9 Top 1* Center %)ertical' 11 /ottom 1# Gnsert 4ow 1% Gnsert Column 1) .elete 4ow 1+ .elete Column 1( -elect Table
1" -elect Column 10 -elect 4ow 19 *uto5ormat #* Table #roperties #1 -ort ## -um
)igure :=% +able toolbar +able ** )unctions of the icons on the +able toolbar /a#e
Table
Description
* split button. You can open the 2nsert +able dialog where you can set up and insert a table into the document( name the table for use with the !a)igator( and set some other options. -electing the triangle button neCt to the icon opens the +able window( where you can use the mouse to select the number of rows and columns to include in the table. Clic+ /ore in this window to bring up the 2nsert +able dialog as abo)e. =pens the /order -tyle window where you can modify the border line style. * split button. You can apply the color with a single clic+ on the icon( or by selecting the triangle button( open the Jorder 8olor window where you can modify the border color. =pens the Jorders window where you can select which sides of the table or of the selected cells will ha)e a border. * split button. You can apply the color with a single clic+ on the icon( or by selecting the triangle button( open the Jac7ground color window where you can select the bac+ground color of the table or of the selected cells. Combines the selected cells into a single cell. 4efer to 0erging and splitting cells on page 2EA for a description of the effect of this button. =pens the Split 8ells dialog where you can define how to split a cell. 4efer to 0erging and splitting cells on page 2EA for a description of the effect of this button. =pens a window with four options you can use to let 7riter optimi2e the distribution of the columns or rows or optimi2e the row height or column width. #ress this button to align the contents of the selected cells to the top of the cell.
$ine -tyle $ine Color %of the border' /orders /ac+ground Color 0erge Cells -plit Cells
=ptimi2e Top
:=$
/a#e
Center %)ertical' /ottom Gnsert 4ow Gnsert Column .elete 4ow .elete Column -elect Table -elect Column -elect 4ow *uto5ormat
Description
#ress this button to align the contents of the selected cells to the )ertical center of the cell. #ress this button to align the contents of the selected cells to the bottom of the cell. Gnserts a row below the selected row. Gnserts a column after the selected column. .eletes the selected rows from the table. .eletes the selected columns from the table. -elects the entire table. -elects the column in which the cursor is positioned. -elects the row in which the cursor is positioned. =pens the /uto)ormat dialog where you can select from se)eral predefined formatting sets. 3ach set is characteri2ed by its own fonts( shading( and border styles. You can also select AutoFormat from the 2nsert +able dialog. =pens the Table )ormat dialog where you can control all the properties of the table( for eCample name( alignment( spacing( column width( borders( and bac+ground. =pens the Sort dialog where you can specify the sort criteria for the selected cells. *cti)ates the Sum function. 4efer to T"sing spreadsheet functions in a tableU on page 2B2 for an eCample of using this function.
Table #roperties
-ort -um
:=*
8hapter *$ Wor7ing with +emplates
ntroduction
* template is a document model that you use to create other documents. 5or eCample( you can create a template for business reports that has your companyFs logo on the first page. !ew documents created from this template will all ha)e your companyFs logo on the first page. Templates can contain anything that regular documents can contain( such as teCt( graphics( a set of styles( and user9specific setup information such as measurement units( language( the default printer( and toolbar and menu customi2ation. *ll documents in $ibre=ffice are based on templates. Gf you do not specify a template when you start a new 7riter document( then the document is based on the default template for teCt documents. Gf you ha)e not specified a default template( 7riter uses the blan+ template for teCt documents that is installed with $ibre=ffice. -ee T-etting a default templateU on page 2DD for more information. $ibre=ffice >.0 supplies one user9selectable teCt template( 0edia7i+i( as an alternati)e to the default in documents %7riter'. !ote that erman is the default document language in the 0edia7i+i template. This can be changed on the :anguages page in &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :anguage $ettings. Ten colored bac+grounds are supplied for presentations %Gmpress'. !o alternati)e templates are supplied for drawings %.raw' or spreadsheets %Calc'.
2sing a template to create a document

To use a template to create a document& 1' 5rom the 0enu bar( choose File 9 >ew 9 &emplates to open the Template 0anager dialog.
)igure :=&. +emplate <anager 2' 5rom the tabs at the top of the dialog( select the .ocuments category %type' of template. 5olders containing templates are listed in the category page of the dialog. Gf no other folders than 0edia7i+i are )isible( there are no templates a)ailable.
:=#
3' .ouble9clic+ the folder that contains the template that you want to use( typically this will be 0y Templates. *ll the templates contained in that folder are then listed on the page( as shown in 5igure 2D<. >' -elect the template that you want to use. Gf you wish to )iew the templateFs properties( clic+ the Properties button abo)e the list of templates. The templateFs properties appear in a pop9up window. Clic+ Close to close this pop9up window. A' .ouble9clic+ on the re@uired template. * new document based on the selected template opens in 7riter. You can then edit and sa)e the new document Just as you would any other document.
Creating a template
You can create your own templates in two ways& from a document or using a wi2ard.
Creating a template from a document

To create a template from a document and sa)e it to 0y Templates& 1' =pen a new or eCisting document that you want to ma+e into a template. 2' *dd or modify the content and styles that you want. 3' 5rom the 0enu bar( choose File 9 $ave as &emplate. The Template 0anager dialog opens displaying the four default folders %and any user created folders'.
)igure :=' Saving a template >' -elect the 0y Templates folder. A' Clic+ the $ave icon. <' 3nter a name for the template in the teCt input boC that opens( and clic+ Accept %see 5igure 2DE'. E' Close the Template 0anager dialog.
8hapter *$ Wor7ing with +emplates :=%
*ny settings that can be added to or modified in a document can be sa)ed in a template. 5or eCample( below are some of the settings %although not a full list' that can be included in a 7riter document and then sa)ed as a template for later use&
#rinter settings& which printer( single9sided or double9sided printing( paper si2e( and so on -tyles to be used( including character( page( frame( numbering( and paragraph styles 5ormat and settings regarding indeCes( tables( bibliographies( table of contents
Templates can also contain predefined teCt( sa)ing you from ha)ing to type it e)ery time you create a new document. 5or eCample( a letter template may contain your name( address( and salutation. You can also sa)e menu and toolbar customi2ations in templatesV see Chapter 1<( Customi2ing 7riter( for more information.
Creating a template using a wi5ard

You can use wi2ards to create 7riter templates for letters( faCes( and agendas. 5or eCample( the 5aC 7i2ard guides you through the following choices&
Type of faC %business or personal' .ocument elements li+e the date( subJect line %business faC'( salutation( and
complimentary close
=ptions for sender and recipient information %business faC' TeCt to include in the footer %business faC'
To create a template using a wi2ard& 1' 5rom the menu bar( choose File 9 !i5ards 9 \type of template re@uired].
)igure :=( 8reating a template using a wi3ard 2' 5ollow the instructions on the pages of the wi2ard. This process is slightly different for each type of template( but the format is similar for all of them. 3' Gn the last section of the wi2ard( you can specify the template name which will show in the Template 0anager( and also the name and location for sa)ing the template. The two names can be different but may cause you confusion if you choose two different names.
:=&
The default location is your user templates folder( but you can choose a different location if you prefer. >' -electing the Path button to set the file name( and perhaps change the directory( causes the $ave As dialog to open. -etting the file name and clic+ing $ave closes the dialog. A' 5inally( you ha)e the option of creating a new document from your template immediately( or manually changing the template( by clic+ing Finish. 5or future documents( you can re9use the template created by the wi2ard( Just as you would use any other template. You may ha)e to open the Template 0anager and clic+ Cefresh on the Action menu to ha)e any new templates appear in the listings.
Gn this release of $ibre=ffice( clic+ing Finish reopens the -a)e *s dialog in which you set the file name at -tep >. Clic+ing $ave now( in the reopened dialog( causes the file to be sa)ed to the hard dri)e( and the template to open. Clic+ing $ave in -tep > only sa)ed the dialog in memory and not to the hard dri)e.
>ote
-diting a template
You can edit a templateFs styles and content( and then( if you wish( you can reapply the templateFs styles to documents that were created from that template. !ote that you can only reapply styles. You cannot reapply content. To edit a template& 1' 5rom the 0enu bar( choose File 9 >ew 9 &emplates. The Template 0anager dialog opens. 2' !a)igate to the template that you want to edit. Clic+ once on it to acti)ate the file handling controls %see 5igure 2D<'. Clic+ -dit. The template opens in $ibre=ffice. 3' 3dit the template Just as you would any other document. To sa)e your changes( choose File 9 $ave from the 0enu bar.
2pdating a document from a changed template

The neCt time you open a document that was created from the changed template( the following message appears.
)igure :==. 0pdate styles message Clic+ 2pdate $tyles to apply the templateFs changed styles to the document. Clic+ 6eep ;ld $tyles if you do not want to apply the templateFs changed styles to the document %but see the Caution notice below'.
:='
Caution
Gf you choose 6eep ;ld $tyles in the message boC shown in 5igure 2DD( that message will not appear again the neCt time you open the document after changing the template it is based on. You will not get another chance to update the styles from the template( although you can use the macro gi)en in the !ote below to re9enable this feature.
>ote
To re9enable updating from a template& 1' "se &ools 9 /acros 9 ;rgani5e /acros 9 :ibre;ffice 3asic. -elect the document from the list( clic+ the eCpansion symbol %L or triangle'( and select -tandard. Gf -tandard has an eCpansion symbol beside it( clic+ that and select a module. 2' Gf the -dit button is acti)e( clic+ it. Gf the 3dit button is not acti)e( clic+ >ew. 3' Gn the /asic window( enter the following& Su! "ixDocV# $ %et &pdate"rom'emplate oDocSettin(% ) 'hi%*omponent.create+n%tance, _ -com.%un.%tar.document.Settin(%- . oDocSettin(%.&pdate"rom'emplate ) 'rue End Su! $"ixDocV# >' Clic+ the Cun 3A$ C icon( then close the /asic window. A' -a)e the document. !eCt time when you open this document you will ha)e the update from template feature bac+.
Adding templates obtained from other sources

You can download templates for $ibre=ffice from many sources( including the official template repository at http&//templates.libreoffice.org/( and install them on your computer. =n other websites you may find collections of templates that ha)e been pac+aged into eCtension %/0'. files. These are installed a little differently( as described below.
nstalling individual templates

To install indi)idual templates& 1' .ownload the template and sa)e it anywhere on your computer. 2' Gmport the template into a template folder by following the instructions in TGmporting a templateU on page 303.
You can manually copy new templates into the template folders. The location )aries with your computerFs operating system. To learn where the template folders are stored on your computer( go to &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice 9 Paths.
&ip
nstalling collections of templates

The 3Ctension 0anager pro)ides an easy way to install collections of templates that ha)e been pac+aged as eCtensions. 5ollow these steps& 1' .ownload the eCtension pac+age %/0' file' and sa)e it anywhere on your computer. 2' Gn 7riter( select &ools 9 -'tension /anager from the 0enu bar. Gn the 3Ctension 0anager dialog %5igure 300'( clic+ Add to open a file browser window.
:=(
3' 5ind and select the pac+age of templates you want to install and clic+ ;pen. The pac+age begins installing. You may be as+ed to accept a license agreement. >' 7hen the pac+age installation is complete( the templates are a)ailable for use through File 9 >ew 9 &emplates and the eCtension is listed in the 3Ctension 0anager.
)igure 3$$ Dewly"added pac7age of templates 3Ctension pac+ages may also be installed by double9clic+ing the file( and then accepting the installation and any license agreement which is re@uested. -ee Chapter 1<( Customi2ing 7riter( for more about the 3Ctension 0anager.
$etting a default template

Gf you create a document by choosing File 9 >ew 9 &e't 4ocument from the 0enu bar( 7riter creates the document from the default template for teCt documents. You can( howe)er( set a custom template to be the default. You can reset the default later( if you choose.
>ote for !indows users
You may +now that 0icrosoft 7ord employs a normal.dot or normal.dotx file for its default template and how to regenerate it. $ibre=ffice does not ha)e a similar default template fileV the Tfactory defaultsU are embedded within the software.
$etting a custom template as the default

You can set any template to be the default( as long as it is in one of the folders displayed in the Template 0anager dialog. Gf necessary( you can add the template to a folder as described in TGmporting a templateU on page 303. To set a custom template as the default& 1' 5rom the 0enu bar( choose File 9 >ew 9 &emplates to open the Template 0anager dialog. 2' Gn the Template 0anager dialog( open the folder containing the template that you want to set as the default( then select the template. 3' Clic+ the $et As 4efault icon abo)e the list of templates %see 5igure 301'. The neCt time that you create a document by choosing File 9 >ew 9 &e't 4ocument( the document will be created from this template.
:==
*lthough many important settings can be changed in the &ools 9 ;ptions dialog %see Chapter 2( -etting up 7riter'( for eCample default fonts and page si2e( more ad)anced settings %such as page margins' can only be changed by replacing the default template with a new one.
)igure 3$* Setting a default template using the +emplate <anager dialog
Cesetting !riterNs default template as the default

To re9enable 7riterFs default template as the default& 1' Gn the Template 0anager dialog %5igure 302'( clic+ the Action /enu icon on the right. 2' #oint to Ceset 4efault &emplate on the drop9down menu( and clic+ &e't 4ocument.
)igure 3$: 6esetting the default template This choice does not appear unless a custom template had been set as the default( as described in the pre)ious section. The neCt time that you create a document by choosing File 9 >ew 9 &e't 4ocument( the document will be created from 7riterFs default template.
3$$
Associating a document with a different template

*t times you might want to associate a document with a different template( or perhaps youFre wor+ing with a document that did not start from a template. =ne of the maJor ad)antages of using templates is the ease of updating styles in more than one document( as described in Chapter E( 7or+ing with -tyles. Gf you update styles in a document by loading a new set of styles from a different template %as described in Chapter E'( the document has no association with the template from which the styles were loadedQso you cannot use this method. 7hat you need to do is associate the document with the different template.
>ote
Gn $ibre=ffice 3.C( you could use the Template Changer eCtension to simplify this process. "nfortunately( this eCtension does not wor+ in $ibre=ffice >.0.
5or best results( the names of styles should be the same in the eCisting document and the new template. Gf they are not( you will need to use -dit 9 Find O Ceplace to replace old styles with new ones. -ee Chapter 3 of the 7riter uide( 7or+ing with TeCt( for more about replacing styles using 5ind M 4eplace. 1' "se File 9 >ew 9 &emplates. Gn the Template 0anager dialog( double9clic+ the template you want to use. * new document opens( containing any teCt or graphics that were in the template. .elete any unwanted teCt or graphics from this new document. 2' =pen the document you want to change. %Gt opens in a new window.' #ress 8trl9/ to select e)erything in the document. Clic+ in the blan+ document created in step 1. #ress 8trl9? to paste the content from the old document into the new one. 3' "pdate the table of contents( if there is one. Close the old file without sa)ing. "se $ave As to sa)e this new file with the name of the file from which content was ta+en. Confirm you wish to o)erwrite the old file when as+ed.
;rgani5ing templates
7riter can only use templates that are in $ibre=ffice template folders. You can( howe)er( create new $ibre=ffice template folders and use them to organi2e your templates. 5or eCample( you might ha)e one template folder for report templates and another for letter templates. You can also import and eCport templates. To begin( choose File 9 >ew 9 &emplates from the 0enu bar to open the Template 0anager dialog.
Creating a template folder

To create a template folder& 1' Gn the Template 0anager dialog( doube9clic+ any folder( then clic+ any template to acti)ate the row of icons abo)e the list of templates %see 5igure 303'. 2' Clic+ the /ove to folder button and choose >ew folder from the drop9down menu. Gn the pop9up dialog( type a name for the new folder and clic+ Accept.
3$*
)igure 3$3 +emplate file handling icons
Deleting a template folder

You cannot delete template folders supplied with $ibre=ffice or installed using the 3Ctension 0anagerV you can only delete template folders that you ha)e created. To delete a template folder& 1' Gn the Template 0anager dialog( select the folder that you want to delete. 2' Gn the row of icons abo)e the list of folders( clic+ the 4elete button. * message boC appears( as+ing you to confirm the deletion. Clic+ Jes.
5olders which contain no files are hidden. Gf the folder is )isible( ensure that you want to delete the files that are inside. You may ha)e to put a dummy template into an empty folder in order to delete it %Just select File 9 $ave As &emplate for any file you ha)e opened( mo)e it into the folder to be deleted( and then delete the folderV see 5igure 303'.
Caution
/oving a template
To mo)e a template from one template folder to another template folder& 1' Gn the Template 0anager dialog( double9clic+ the folder that contains the template that you want to mo)e. * list of all the templates contained in that folder appears underneath the folder name. 2' Clic+ the template that you want to mo)e and clic+ the /ove to folder button abo)e the list of templates %see 5igure 303'.
4eleting a template
You cannot delete templates supplied with $ibre=ffice or installed using the 3Ctension 0anagerV you can only delete templates that you ha)e created or imported. To delete a template& 1' Gn the Template 0anager dialog( double9clic+ the folder that contains the template that you want to delete. * list of all the templates contained in that folder appears underneath the folder name. 2' Clic+ the template that you want to delete. 3' Clic+ the 4elete button abo)e the list of templates. * message boC appears and as+s you to confirm the deletion. Clic+ Jes.
3$: LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
mporting a template
Gf the template that you want to use is in a different location( you must import it into a $ibre=ffice template folder. To import a template into a template folder& 1' Gn the Template 0anager dialog( select the folder into which you want to import the template. 2' Clic+ the mport button abo)e the list of template folders. * standard file browser window opens. 3' 5ind and select the template that you want to import( and then clic+ ;pen. The file browser window closes and the template appears in the selected folder.
-'porting a template
To eCport a template from a template folder to another location& 1' Gn the Template 0anager dialog( double9clic+ the folder that contains the template that you want to eCport. * list of all the templates contained in that folder appears underneath the folder name. 2' -elect the template that you want to eCport. 3' Clic+ the -'port button abo)e the list of template folders. The -a)e *s window opens. >' 5ind the folder into which you want to eCport the template and clic+ $ave.
3$3
8hapter ** 0sing <ail <erge

)orm Letters@ <ailing Labels@ and ,nvelopes
!hat is mail merge7

$ibre=ffice 7riter pro)ides )ery useful features to create and print&
0ultiple copies of a document to send to a list of different recipients %form letters' 0ailing labels 3n)elopes
*ll these facilities( though different in application( are based around the concept of a registered data source( from which is deri)ed the )ariable address information necessary to their function. This chapter describes the entire process. The steps include& 1' 6ow to create and register a data source. 2' 6ow to create and print form letters( mailing labels( and en)elopes. 3' =ptionally( how to sa)e the output in an editable file instead of printing it directly.
Creating and registering the data source

* data source is a database containing the name and address records %and optionally other information' from which a mailing list may be deri)ed. *lthough you can create and print mailing labels and en)elopes without using a data source( in most cases using one is the best approach. This chapter assumes that you are using a data source. $ibre=ffice can access a wide )ariety of sources of data to create the database( including spreadsheets( teCt files and databases such as 0y-H$( *dabas( and =./C. Gf the information to be used in the mail merge is currently in a format that $ibre=ffice cannot access directly( you need to con)ert it( for eCample by eCporting it to a comma9separated )alues %C-P' file. 5or the following eCample we start with a spreadsheet with the following column %field' headers& +itle@ )irst name@ Last name@ /ddress@ State!8ounty@ 8ountry@ Post 8ode@ Se-@ and Points. * sample of data is shown in 5igure 30>.
)igure 3$# Spreadsheet data e-ample *fter being created as described below( for a data source to be directly accessible from within a 7riter document( it must be registered. You only need to do this onceV after that( the data source is a)ailable to all components of $ibre=ffice. 1' 5rom within any 7riter document( or from the $ibre=ffice -tart Center( choose File 9 !i5ards 9 Address 4ata $ource.
3$&
2' The choices on the first page of the wi2ard )ary with your operating system. -elect the appropriate type of eCternal address boo+. Gn this eCample( it is ;ther e'ternal data source. Clic+ >e't.
)igure 3$% Select type of e-ternal address boo7 3' =n the neCt page of the 7i2ard( clic+ the $ettings button.
)igure 3$& Starting the Settings part of the Wi3ard >' Gn the .ata -ource #roperties page( select the .atabase type. Gn our eCample( it is $preadsheet. Clic+ >e't.
)igure 3$' Selecting the database type
3$'
A' Gn the neCt dialog( clic+ 3rowse and na)igate to the spreadsheet that contains the address information. -elect the spreadsheet and clic+ ;pen to return to this dialog. *t this time you may wish to test that the connection has been correctly established by clic+ing on the &est Connection button %not shown in illustration'.
)igure 3$( Selecting the spreadsheet document <' Clic+ Finish. E' =n the following page( clic+ >e't. /ecause this is a spreadsheet( do not clic+ Field Assignment.
)igure 3$= Jecause this is a spreadsheet@ do not clic7 )ield /ssignment B' * database file will be created. !ame the file in the path in the $ocation field. The default is Addresses.odbV but you may replace Addresses with another name if you wish. You may also change the name in the T*ddress boo+ nameU field. The name in this field is the registered name( which $ibre=ffice will display in data source listings. Gn our eCample( the name T#ointsU was used for both.
)igure 3*$ Dame the .odb file and the address boo7 D' Clic+ Finish. The data source is now registered.
3$(
4eregistering a data source

To remo)e a registered data source from $ibre=ffice so it is no longer a)ailable for use( as for eCample an obsolete address list( do the following& 1' =pen the Data sources window %by selecting =iew 9 4ata $ources from the 0enu bar( or by pressing )#( or by selecting the .ata -ources icon on the -tandard toolbar'. 2' Gn the left pane( the Data source e-plorer( right9clic+ a data source. 3' -elect Cegistered databases from the conteCt menu. >' Gn the 6egistered databases dialog which opens( select the data source to be remo)ed. A' Clic+ 4elete( then clic+ Jes in the confirmation boC which opens. <' 4epeat steps >' and A' as re@uired. E' Clic+ ;6 to close the 6egistered databases dialog. This does not delete the database from your system. Gt can be registered again using the methods outlined below.
Ce.registering an e'isting data source

To re9register an eCisting database file of addresses do the following& 1' =pen the Data sources window %by selecting =iew 9 4ata $ources from the 0enu bar( or by pressing )#( or by selecting the .ata -ources icon on the -tandard toolbar'. 2' Gn the left pane( the Data source e-plorer( right9clic+ a data source. 3' -elect Cegistered databases from the conteCt menu. >' Gn the 6egistered databases dialog which opens( clic+ the >ew button A' Gn the 8reate Database Lin7 dialog which opens( clic+ the 3rowse button and na)igate to the database file location and select it. Clic+ the ;pen button to return to the 8reate Database Lin7 dialog. <' Change the Cegistered name if re@uired. E' Clic+ the ;6 button to eCit this dialog. B' Clic+ the ;6 button to eCit the 6egistered databases dialog.
Creating a form letter

-'ample: $ending a letter to your customer base
* mail order company organi2ed a campaign to assign credit points to their customers according to the @uantity of goods they buy during one year. *t the end of the year( they want to send a letter to each customer to show the total of credit points collected. You can create a form letter manually( which is the simplest and most comprehensi)e method and is described here( or you can use the 0ail 0erge wi2ard as described in T"sing the 0ail 0erge 7i2ard to create a form letterU starting on page 321. Gf you elect to use the wi2ard( pay close attention to its current limitations( as identified within its description. 1' Create a new teCt document& File 9 >ew 9 &e't 4ocument( or open a pre9eCisting form letter with File 9 ;pen. 2' .isplay the registered data sources& =iew 9 4ata sources %or press )#'.
3$=
3' 5ind the data source that you wish to use for the form letter( in this case Points. 3Cpand the Points and &ables folders( and select $heet1. The address data file is displayed.
)igure 3** Selecting the data source >' !ow create or modify the form letter by typing in the teCt( punctuation( line brea+s( and so on that will be present in all of the letters. To add the mail9merge fields where needed %such as names and addresses'( clic+ in the field heading and drag it to the appropriate point in the letter. !ote that address lines should be in indi)idual paragraphs( not separated by line brea+s as might seem preferable. The reason for this will be made clear in the neCt step.
)igure 3*: Dragging fields to the body of the form letter A' Continue until you ha)e composed the entire document. *t this time you may wish to consider suppressing any blan+ lines that may appear in the resulting letters. Gf not( s+ip ahead to -tep E.
3*$
)igure 3*3 +he completed form letter <' To suppress blan+ lines& a' Clic+ at the end of the first paragraph to be suppressed if empty( and then choose nsert 9 Fields 9 ;ther to display the 5ields dialog. b' -elect the )unctions tab and then clic+ on 8idden Paragraph in the +ype column.
)igure 3*# .idden paragraph insertion
3**
c'
d'
!ow clic+ in the Condition boC and enter the details of the condition that defines a blan+ address field. Gt has the general form of& 12Data!a%e.'a!le.Data!a%e field3 where the nlF %!=T' character indicates the negati)e case and the s@uare brac+ets indicate the condition. 5or eCample( in our #oints database the condition to test if the Last Dame field is empty would be& 124oint%.Sheet5.6a%t Name3 as illustrated in 5igure 31>. To test for multiple conditions use the operators /DD and/or O6 between the conditional statements( for eCample& 124oint%.Sheet5.'itle3AND124oint%.Sheet5.6a%t Name3 Clic+ nsert( but do not close the dialog until you ha)e amended all the lines that should be suppressed.
E' The document is now ready to be printed. a' Choose File 9 Print and respond with Jes in the message boC.
)igure 3*% <ail merge confirmation message b' Gn the 0ail 0erge dialog %5igure 31<'( you can choose to print all records or selected records. To select records to be printed( use 8trl9clic7 to select indi)idual records. To select a bloc+ of records( select the first record in the bloc+( scroll to the last record in the bloc+( and Shift9clic7 on the last record. c' Clic+ ;6 to send the letters directly to the printer. =r( you can sa)e the letters to a file for further editing or formattingV see T3diting merged documentsU below. d' Gf you ha)e not sa)ed the original( prototype form letter document %template' pre)iously( then you should do so now. 6a)ing a form letter template could greatly simplify the creation of other form letters in the future and is highly recommended.
)igure 3*& +he <ail <erge dialog
3*:
-diting merged documents

You may prefer to sa)e the letters to a file( to allow for proofreading or some later formatting. To do this& 1' Gn the 0ail 0erge dialog %5igure 31<'( select File in the output section( instead of using the default Printer selection. 2' This changes the dialog to display the Save merged document section( where $ave as single document is preselected. You can choose to sa)e each letter as an indi)idual document instead.
3' Clic+ ;6. Gn the -a)e as dialog( enter a file name for the sa)ed letters and choose a folder in which to sa)e them. The letters will be sa)ed consecuti)ely as separate pages in the single document( or numbered consecuti)ely in indi)idual files if sa)ed as indi)idual documents. You can now open the letters and edit them indi)idually as you would edit any other document.
Printing mailing labels

/efore beginning this process( note the brand and type of labels you intend to use.
Preparing for printing

To prepare mailing labels for printing& 1' Choose File 9 >ew 9 :abels. 2' =n the ;ptions tab( ensure that the -ynchroni2e contents option is selected. 3' =n the :abels tab %5igure 31B'( select the 4atabase and &able. -elect the 3rand of labels to be used( and then select the &ype of label. >' Gf you are unable to identify your label product in the list( then you can define the labels you ha)e. -elect the 2ser setting in the +ype selection boC. Clic+ on the Format tab of the $abels dialog. The default settings are shown in 5igure 31D. Ta+e a ruler and measure on your labels those dimensions illustrated in 5igure 31E( and enter them into the respecti)e boCes on the left side.
)igure 3*' 6e>uired information for label set"up
3*3
)igure 3*( Select Database@ +able@ label Jrand@ and label +ype
)igure 3*= 0ser label default settings A' You can now sa)e your label template if you are li+ely to use it again. Clic+ $ave. <' Gn the boC that opens( enter names for your label 3rand and &ype. Clic+ ;6.
3*# LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
)igure 3:$ Dame and save the label. E' Clic+ the :abels tab. Clic+ the drop9down arrow under 4atabase field. -elect the first field to be used in the label %in this eCample( &itle'. Clic+ the left arrow button to mo)e this field to the :abel te't area( as shown in 5igure 321.
)igure 3:* <ove fields from Database field list to Label te-t area B' Continue adding fields and inserting desired punctuation( spaces( and line brea+s until the label is composed. 5igure 322 shows the completed label.
)igure 3:: +he completed label

8hapter ** 0sing <ail <erge 3*%
D' Clic+ >ew 4ocument. You now ha)e a new( single9page document containing a series of frames( one for each label of the selected type and filled with the data source address fields that you selected. Huite often some of the fields in your address data source will be unused( leading to blan+ lines in your labels. Gf this is not important( go to T#rintingU on page 31EV otherwise( continue with T4emo)ing blan+ lines from labelsU.
Cemoving blank lines from labels

1' 5irst ensure that the label frames are showing the field contents %data source headings'( rather than their underlying field names. Gf this is not the case( then either press 8trl9)= or choose =iew 9 Field >ames to toggle the )iew. 2' !eCt( ensure that you can see non9printing characters( such as paragraph mar+s( line brea+s and so on. Gf these are not already )isible( choose =iew 9 >onprinting Characters from the menu bar( or press 8trl9)*$( or clic+ on the >onprinting Characters icon the -tandard toolbar. on
You will now see that address field separation is created by line brea+s ( rather than paragraphs . *s the suppression of blan+ address fields depends on hiding paragraphs( not lines( you need to replace line brea+s with paragraphs as follows. 3' Clic+ in the first label( at the end of the last data source address field in the first line of the label. #ress Delete to remo)e the new line character and then press 6eturn %or the ,nter +ey' to insert a paragraph mar+er. 4epeat this action for each line in the address. Gf the line spacing in the first label is not satisfactory( you may wish to correct this before proceeding( by modifying the paragraph style associated with the address. "nless you ha)e changed it( the address uses the .efault style.
Caution
The obJecti)e of step 3' is to replace all line brea+s at the end of data source address fields with paragraphs. -ometimes the address data field may be longer than the width of the label and will wrap to the neCt physical line& ma+e sure that you are not misled by this into deleting and replacing anything other than line brea+ characters.
>' Clic+ again at the end of the first paragraph to be conditionally suppressed and then choose nsert 9 Fields 9 ;ther. -elect the Functions tab and then clic+ on 8idden Paragraph in the +ype column. !ow clic+ in the Condition boC and enter the details of the condition that defines a blan+ address field. Gt has the general form of& 12Data!a%e.'a!le.Data!a%e field3 where the nlF %!=T' character indicates the negati)e case and the s@uare brac+ets indicate the condition. 5or eCample( in our #oints database the condition to test if the Last Dame field is empty would be 124oint%.Sheet5.6a%t Name3 as illustrated in 5igure 31>. To test for multiple conditions( use the operators /DD and/or O6 between the conditional statements( for eCample& 124oint%.Sheet5.'itle3AND124oint%.Sheet5.6a%t Name3 Clic+ nsert, but do not close the dialog until all lines ha)e been amended. A' 4epeat for each paragraph to be conditionally suppressed( remembering to ad)ance the cursor to the end of the line in @uestion before changing the last element of the condition and nserting the result.
3*&
Caution
The last paragraph of the label address bloc+ ends with a special field( Next record:Data!a%e.'a!le ,Next record:4oint%.Sheet5 in our eCample'( and the 6idden paragraph field must be inserted before this field. This can generally be accomplished by clic+ing at the end of the paragraph and then using the Left /rrow +ey once to s+ip bac+ o)er it. * clue that you omitted this action is the obser)ation that some records ha)e been s+ipped and are missing from the final output.
<' 4emembering that we selected -ynchroni2e contents earlier( you should now be able to see a small window containing a -ynchroni2e :abels button. Clic+ on this button and the hidden paragraph fields are propagated to all the labels in your document. You now ha)e a template suitable for future use with the same data source and type of label. Gf you wish to sa)e it( use File 9 &emplates 9 $ave as to sa)e it as an =pen .ocument TeCt Template %.ott' into the pri)ate template directory %folder' that you ha)e pre)iously defined in &ools 9;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice 9 Paths 9 &emplates.
Printing
1' Choose File 9 Print. The message shown in 5igure 31A appears. Clic+ Jes to print. 2' Gn the 0ail 0erge dialog %5igure 31<'( you can choose to print all records or selected records. To select records to be printed( use 8trl9clic7 to select indi)idual records. To select a bloc+ of records( select the first record in the bloc+( scroll to the last record in the bloc+( and Shift9clic7 on the last record. 3' Clic+ ;6 to send the labels directly to the printer. Gf you prefer to sa)e the labels to a file( perhaps to allow some later editing such as changing the typeface or paragraph format( then you should select File in the output section of the 0ail 0erge dialog( rather than using the default Printer selection. This changes the dialog to highlight the Save merged document section( where $ave as single document is preselected. Gn this case( clic+ing ;6 brings up the -a)e as dialog( where a file name can be entered for the sa)ed labels. Gf you did not sa)e the prototype label fields document %template' in -tep < of the 6emoving blan7 lines from documents paragraph( then you are prompted to do so now by another -a)e as dialog. Gn either case( whether printing or sa)ing to file( despite there apparently being only one page of labels( the printed or sa)ed output will be eCpanded to include all of the selected records from the data source.
-diting a saved file of mailing labels

To edit a sa)ed file of mailing labels( open the sa)ed label file in the normal way. You will be prompted to update all lin+s. Choose >o for the following reason& The first label on the page is termed the T0aster $abelU and all other labels are lin+ed to it. Gf you update the lin+s( then all labels will end up containing the same data( which may not be what you want.
3*'
You can edit indi)idual records in the normal way( by highlighting and changing the font name( for eCample. 6owe)er( you cannot edit all labels globally %for eCample( to change the font name for all records' by the techni@ue of selecting the entire document. To achie)e this result you ha)e to edit the paragraph style associated with the label records as follows& 1' 4ight9clic+ any correctly spelled word in a label record. -elect -dit Paragraph $tyle from the conteCt menu. %!ote& Gf you clic+ on a misspelled word( a different menu appears.' 2' Then from the #aragraph -tyle dialog( you can ma+e changes to the font name( the font si2e( the indents( and other attributes.
Printing envelopes
Gnstead of printing mailing labels( you may wish to print directly onto en)elopes. There are two basic ways to create en)elopes( one where the en)elope is embedded within a letter( generally as the first page % nsert in the 3n)elope dialog'( and another where the en)elope is an independent document %>ew 4oc. in the dialog'. Gn each case the addressing data may be manually entered( for eCample by copying and pasting from the letter with which it is associated( or it may originate within an address data source. This section assumes the use of an address data source and( for con)enience( a free9standing en)elope. The production of en)elopes in)ol)es two steps( setup and printing.
$etting up envelopes for printing

1' Choose nsert 9 -nvelope from the menu bar. 2' Gn the 3n)elope dialog( select the Format tab %5igure 323'( where you can select the en)elope format to use. You can then arrange the layout of the en)elope to suit your re@uirements( together with the character and paragraph attributes to be used in the Sender and /ddressee areas. These attributes are accessed using the -dit buttons to the right of the dialog( neCt to the word )ormat.
)igure 3:3 ,nvelope formatting dialog

3*( LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
>ote
Gf the list of en)elope formats in the Si3e section of this dialog does not include the si2e you need( choose 2ser 4efined %at the bottom of the list' and specify the en)elope si2e using the !idth and 8eight boCes. *t this stage it is only possible to )ary the position of the origin points %upper left corners' of the frames that will hold the -ender and *ddressee information( but once the en)elope has been created( full adJustment of si2e and position will become possible and you may wish to ma+e some cosmetic adJustments.
&ip
3' The neCt step is to select the Printer tab %5igure 32>'( from where you may choose the printer you intend to use( its setupQfor eCample( specification of the tray holding en)elopes Qand other printer9related options such as en)elope orientation and shifting. You may need to eCperiment with these settings to achie)e the best results with your printer.
)igure 3:# 8hoosing printer options for an envelope >' -elect the -nvelope tab %5igure 32A'.
)igure 3:% 8hoosing addressee and sender information for envelopes

8hapter ** 0sing <ail <erge 3*=
A' Choose whether or not to add Sender information to the en)elope by selecting or deselecting the $ender option. Gf wanted( edit the information in the Sender boC %-ender is the TfromU on the en)elope'. <' You now ha)e the choice of creating the *ddressee fields by dragging and dropping from the data source headings %as described in TCreating a form letterU on page 30D( and in particular in 5igure 312' or using the facilities of the -nvelope tab. Gf you prefer dragging and dropping( then clic+ >ew 4oc.( drag your data source headings into the /ddressee area on your new en)elope and s+ip to step 10'( otherwise continue with the neCt step. E' Perify( add( or edit the information in the /ddressee boC. You can use the right9hand drop9 down lists to select the database and table from which you can access the *ddressee information( in a similar fashion to that described for T#rinting mailing labelsU( paragraphs 3( > and A. The similarity of the method with 5igure 321 and 5igure 322 will be clear. B' 7hen you ha)e finished formatting( clic+ either the >ew 4oc. or nsert button to finish. *s might be eCpected( >ew 4oc. creates only the en)elope template in a new document( whereas nsert inserts the en)elope into your current document as page 1. Gf you donFt want to proceed with this en)elope( clic+ Cancel or press the ,sc +ey. You can also clic+ Ceset to remo)e your changes and return to the original settings eCtant when the dialog opened. You can now modify the placement of the frames containing the sender and addressee information( or ma+e further changes to the character and paragraph attributes %for eCample( the font' or add a logo or other graphic to the en)elope.
&ip
Gf you fre@uently print en)elopes from the same database onto the same si2e en)elopes( at this point you may wish to create a template from this setup. -ee TCreating an en)elope templateU on page 321.
D' Huite often some of the fields in your address data source will be unused( leading to blan+ lines in your en)elope *ddressee area. Gf this is not important( you can s+ip the neCt few paragraphs and go straight to T0erging and printing the en)elopesU on page 321( otherwise continue as described here.
&ip
a'
The following procedure is )ery similar to that used for a similar purpose in the section on printing mailing labels. Gt is reproduced here for ease of reference.
b'
5irst ensure that the en)elope is showing the field contents %data source headings'( rather than their underlying field names. Gf this is not the case( then either press 8trl9)= or choose =iew 9 Field >ames to toggle the )iew. !eCt( ensure that you can see non9printing characters( such as paragraph mar+s( line brea+s and so on. Gf these are not already )isible( choose =iew 9 >onprinting Characters from the menu bar( or press 8trl9)*$( or clic+ on the >onprinting Characters icon on the -tandard toolbar. You will now see that address field separation is created by line brea+s ( rather than paragraphs . *s the suppression of blan+ address fields depends on hiding paragraphs( not lines( you need to replace line brea+s with paragraphs as follows. Clic+ at the end of the last data source address field in the first line of the en)elope. #ress Delete to remo)e the new line character and then press 6eturn %or the ,nter +ey' to insert a paragraph. 4epeat this action for each line of the en)elope. Gf the line spacing in the *ddressee area is not satisfactory( you may wish to correct this before proceeding( by modifying the paragraph style associated with the address. "nless you ha)e changed it( the address uses the .efault style.
c'
3:$
d'
e'
Clic+ again at the end of the first paragraph to be conditionally suppressed and then choose nsert 9 Fields 9 ;ther. -elect the Functions tab and then clic+ on 8idden Paragraph in the +ype column. !ow clic+ in the Condition boC and enter the details of the condition that defines a blan+ address field. Gt has the general form of& 12Data!a%e.'a!le.Data!a%e field3 where the nlF %!=T' character indicates the negati)e case and the s@uare brac+ets indicate the condition. 5or eCample( in our #oints database the condition to test if the Last Dame field is empty would be& 124oint%.Sheet5.6a%t Name3 as illustrated in 5igure 31>. To test for multiple conditions( use the operators /DD and/or O6 between the conditional statements( for eCample& 124oint%.Sheet5.'itle3AND124oint%.Sheet5.6a%t Name3 Clic+ nsert, but do not close the dialog until all lines ha)e been amended. 4epeat for each paragraph to be conditionally suppressed( remembering to ad)ance the cursor to the end of the line in @uestion before changing the last element of the condition and Gnserting the result.
/erging and printing the envelopes

To merge addresses and print the en)elopes& 1' Choose File 9 Print. * message boC %5igure 31A' appears. Clic+ Jes to print. 2' The 0ail 0erge dialog %5igure 31<' appears. *s with form letters and mailing labels( you can choose to print en)elopes for one( se)eral or all address records in the database. 3' 0a+e your selections and then clic+ ;6 to print direct to the printer. To chec+ the en)elopes before printing them( see T3diting merged documentsU on page 313 for instructions.
Creating an envelope template

7hen your en)elope layout and fields are complete to your satisfaction( you can sa)e the result as a template. 1' Choose File 9 $ave As &emplate. 2' Gn the Template 0anager dialog( select 0y Templates and clic+ on $ave. 3' 3nter a name in the teCt input boC and clic+ Accept to sa)e the template.
2sing the /ail /erge !i5ard to create a form letter

The manual method of creating a form letter described in TCreating a form letterU on page 30D pro)ides the most control o)er the result and is therefore recommended. Gf you prefer to use the 0ail 0erge wi2ard( the techni@ue is described below. =pen a new document with File 9 >ew 9 &e't 4ocument and start the 0ail 0erge wi2ard using &ools 9 /ail /erge !i5ard. The wi2ard opens( as shown in 5igure 32<.
$tep 1: $elect starting document

The wi2ard gi)es )arious options to select your starting document&
"se the current document. Create a new document. -tart with an eCisting document. -tart from a template.
3:*
5or the purposes of this description( we assume that you opened a new teCt document. This will ensure that all the steps in the wi2ard are fully eCplored( although with eCperience you may find it more practical to use a draft you prepared earlier( which will allow for the s+ipping of some steps. -elect 2se the current document and clic+ >e't.
)igure 3:& Select starting document
$tep #: $elect document type

The wi2ard can produce letters or( if a ,a)a 0ail connection eCists( email messages. Gn this eCample( we are producing a letter. -elect :etter and clic+ >e't.
)igure 3:' 8hoose document type
$tep %: nsert address block

This is the most compleC step in the wi2ard. Gn this step %5igure 32B' you will do three things& 1' Tell the wi2ard which data source to use. The data source must be an eCisting fileV in this eCample it is the T#ointsU spreadsheet created earlier. 2' -elect the address bloc+ to use in the document. This means choosing which fields appear %for eCample( whether the country is included' and how they loo+.
3:: LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
)igure 3:( 2nsert address bloc7 3' 0a+e sure that the fields all match correctly. This is )ery important. 5or eCample( the "8 3nglish )ersion of the wi2ard has a field called Z-urnameY. Gf your spreadsheet has a column called T$ast !ameU( you need to tell the wi2ard that Z-urnameY and T$ast !ameU are e@ui)alent. This is described in T0atching the fieldsU on page 32A.
"electin t!e data source 2address list3

1' Gf the current address list( identified beneath the $elect 4ifferent Address :ist button in section 1( is not the one you wish to use( clic+ the button to open the -elect *ddress $ist dialog %5igure 32D' for choosing a data source. 2' Gf you ha)e not already created the address list( you may clic+ Create to do so now. This step will allow you to create a C-P %Comma -eparated Palues' file with a new list of address records. Gf you ha)e an address list that is not registered in $ibre=ffice( but which you wish to use( clic+ Add and select the file from the location in which it is sa)ed. Gn each of the abo)e cases a new data source %=./ file' will be created and registered. 3' -elect the address list and clic+ ;6 to return to step 3 of the wi2ard. 7e retain T#ointsU as our address boo+ for this eCample. The wi2ard can also eCclude certain recordsV clic+ Filter to choose them.
3:3
)igure 3:= Select address list dialog
"electin t!e address bloc&

1' Gn section 2 %shown in 5igure 32B'( select the address bloc+ to appear on the letter( define its appearance( and choose the fields it contains. The main page gi)es two choices. Clic+ /ore to open the -elect *ddress /loc+ dialog for more choices.
)igure 33$ Select address bloc7 2' The -elect *ddress /loc+ dialog displays the original two bloc+s plus other choices for the format of the address bloc+ %you may need to scroll down to see all of the choices'. You can also optionally include or eCclude the country %for eCample( only include the country if it is not 3ngland' in the /ddress bloc7 settings. The formats pro)ided are relati)ely common(
3:# LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
but they might not eCactly match your preference. Gf this is the case( select the address bloc+ that is closest to what you want and clic+ -dit( which opens the !ew *ddress /loc+ dialog. 3' Gn the !ew *ddress /loc+ dialog( you can add or delete address elements using the arrow buttons on the left. To mo)e elements around( use the arrow buttons on the right. 5or eCample( to add an eCtra space between forename and surname in 5igure 331( clic+ Z-urnameY and then clic+ the right arrow button.
)igure 33* Dew address bloc7
Matc!in t!e fields

5inally( it is time to match the wi2ardFs fields with the spreadsheet fields( so that items li+e Z-urnameY and T$ast !ameU match correctly. 1' $oo+ at section 3 of the wi2ard %shown in 5igure 32B on page 323'. The boC at the bottom displays one record at a time( using the address bloc+ format you selected. "se the right and left arrow buttons below that address boC to step through the addresses( chec+ing that they display correctly. .o not assume that all the records display correctly( Just because one or two do. Chec+ them all if you can( or at least a good proportion. 2' Gf the addresses do not display correctly %and they probably will not right away'( clic+ /atch Fields. 3' The 0atch 5ields dialog %5igure 332' has three columns& /ddress ,lements are the terms the wi2ard uses for each field( such as Z5orenameY and Z-urnameY.
"se the <atches to )ield column to select( for each address element( the field from
your data source that matches it.
The Preview column shows what will be shown for this field from the selected
address bloc+( so you can double9chec+ that the match is correct. >' 7hen you ha)e matched all the fields( clic+ ;6 to return to step 3 of the wi2ard. !ow( when you use the arrow buttons to loo+ at all the addresses( they should all loo+ correct. Gf not( go bac+ and change anything youFre not happy with( before clic+ing >e't to mo)e to step >. !ote that you will not be able to continue until you ha)e correctly matched all the fields in your chosen address bloc+. Gf you see Znot yet matchedY in a field position it indicates that the field in @uestion is not correctly matched.
3:%
)igure 33: <atch fields dialog A' !otice the option for $uppress lines with empty fields in section 2 of 5igure 32B. "sing the 7i2ard( you do not ha)e to create your own conditional suppression fields.
$tep ): Create salutation

Gt is possible to create Just about any salutation you want in this step. /y selecting the &his document should contain a salutation option( the General salutation list boC is enabled. -ome general teCts are a)ailable in the list boC( or you can enter your own teCt( such as .ello club member. * pre)iew pane displays your choice. /y also selecting the nsert personali5ed salutation option( further salutation constructs become a)ailable. You can( for eCample( use a different greeting for men and women. To do this( 7riter must ha)e some way of +nowing whether a person is male or female. Gn our spreadsheet %see 5igure 30>' we had a column called Se-. Gn the section Address list field indicating a female recipient( set the Field name to Se- and the Field value to ). The 0ale salutation is then printed for all men and the 5emale salutation for all women.
>ote
You do not need to tell $ibre=ffice who is a male( because it assumes that all non9 female records are males.
Gf you do not ha)e such a column in your spreadsheet( then you can lea)e the Field name and Field value boCes empty and use the customi2ed content of the /ale list boC for the salutation.
3:&
)igure 333 8reate a salutation *s an eCample& 1' Clic+ the !ew button alongside the 0ale list boC. The 8ustom Salutation 4<ale 6ecipients5 dialog opens %see 5igure 33>'. 2' -elect $alutation in the Salutation elements listings. 3' Clic+ the Add to salutation arrow button to add it to boC 1. >' =pen the list boC choices for boC 2( select an appropriate greeting or type your own teCt into the list boC. 3dit it as needed. A' -elect and mo)e across &itle from the Salutation elements listings into boC 1. <' *dd a space and then mo)e :ast >ame across. E' 5inally( mo)e Punctuation /ark across and select the comma from the choices in boC 2. B' The construct is shown in the Preview boC. D' Carry out any final editing. Clic+ ;6.
)igure 33# 8ustomi3ing the salutation

8hapter ** 0sing <ail <erge 3:'
You can see that the ZTitleY field ta+es care of the gender aspect of the salutation. "sing this method allows you to use gender neutral titles such as .octor %.r' and 4e)erend %4e)'( or titles such as 0s or 0aster.
$tep +: AdDust layout

Gn step A( you can adJust the position of the address bloc+ and salutation on the page. You can place the address bloc+ anywhere on the page. The salutation is always on the left( but you can mo)e it up and down the page. "se the buttons shown in 5igure 33A to mo)e the elements.
)igure 33% /dIust layout
$tep (: -dit document and insert e'tra fields

Gn step < you ha)e another opportunity to eCclude particular recipients from the mail merge( as shown in 5igure 33<.
)igure 33& ,dit document

3:( LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
You can also edit the body of the document. Gf you started with a blan+ document( you can write the whole letter in this step. Clic+ -dit 4ocument to shrin+ the wi2ard to a small window %5igure 33E' so you can easily edit the letter.
)igure 33' <inimi3ed mail merge wi3ard You need to perform another important tas+ in this step. The wi2ard only inserts information from the name and address fields( but you may wish to add additional data. Gn our eCample( we want to tell each person how many points they had accumulated during the yearV that information is in the database. To do this& 1' Clic+ -dit 4ocument in step < of the wi2ard. 2' Choose nsert 9 Fields 9 ;ther. The 5ields dialog opens. 3' Clic+ the Database tab. >' =n the left hand side( select /ail merge fields. A' "nder Database selection find your data source %in this eCample( it is Points'. 3Cpand it to see the fields. <' Clic+ the field you want to insert %#oints'( then clic+ nsert to insert the field. You can insert any number of fields any number of times into your mail merge document. E' Clic+ Close when you are done.
)igure 33( 2nsert mail merge fields dialog
>ote
The 4atabase selection lists the data source you selected in step 3. All the information you need for the letter must be contained in that data source.
3:=
$tep ": Personali5e documents

This step creates all your letters( one per recipient. Clic+ing the -dit individual 4ocument button here is similar to step <. The difference is that you now edit a long file containing all of the letters( so you can ma+e changes to a particular letter to one person. Gn this step of the 0ail 0erge wi2ard( clic+ Find to open a dialog that allows searches within the document( perhaps for an indi)idual addressee.
)igure 33= Personali3e document *s with step <( when editing the document( the wi2ard shrin+s to a small window %5igure 33E'. Clic+ on this window to eCpand the wi2ard to its full si2e.
$tep 0: $ave, print or send

You ha)e now completed the mail merge process. The last step is to do something with it. Gn step B( you can sa)e the original sample letter( sa)e the merged document( print the letters right away or( if you created email messages( send them. You probably want to sa)e the starting %prototype' document and the merged document. To do this( select $ave starting document to re)eal the $ave starting document section containing the $ave starting document button. This button will be acti)e only if the document has not already been sa)ed. Clic+ing on this button brings up the standard -a)e as dialog. =nce you ha)e named and sa)ed the document you return to the -tep B dialog as shown in 5igure 3>1.
)igure 3#$ Step ( Save@ print or send

33$ LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
The merged document can now be sa)ed by selecting $ave merged document. This will re)eal the $ave merged document settings section( from which you can select to sa)e either as one large file containing all the indi)idual( generated letters or as a separate file for each letter.
)igure 3#* Saving a merged document 7hen you ha)e sa)ed the merged document( you can print the final letters now or laterV and you can still manually chec+ and edit the letters if necessary. Gf you elect to print at this stage( the dialog shown in 5igure 3>2 appearsV it should be self9eCplanatory.
)igure 3#: Printing the merged document
33*
8hapter *: +ables of 8ontents@ 2nde-es@ and Jibliographies
ntroduction
This chapter describes how to create and maintain a table of contents %T=C'( an indeC( and a bibliography for a teCt document using $ibre=ffice 7riter. To understand the instructions( you need to ha)e a basic familiarity with 7riter and styles %see Chapters < and E'. This chapter does not co)er all the possible ways to use the features a)ailable through the T=C/GndeC dialog in 7riter. -ome common usage eCamples are gi)en.
&ables of contents
7riterFs table of contents feature lets you build an automated table of contents from the headings in your document. These entries are automatically generated as hyperlin+s in the table. 7hene)er changes are made to the teCt of a heading in the body of the document or the page on which the heading appears( those changes automatically appear in the table of contents when it is neCt updated. /efore you start( ma+e sure that the headings are styled consistently. 5or eCample( you can use the .eading * style for chapter titles and the .eading : and .eading 3 styles for chapter subheadings. This section shows you how to&
Create a table of contents @uic+ly( using the defaults. Customi2e a table of contents. >ote
You can use any style you want for the different le)els to appear in the table of contentsV howe)er( for simplicity( most of this chapter uses the default .eading N-O styles.
Creating a table of contents ?uickly

0ost of the time you will probably find the default table of contents %T=C' to be what you need. Gnserting a default T=C is simple& 1' 7hen you create your document( use the following paragraph styles for different heading le)els %such as chapter and section headings'& .eading *( .eading :( and .eading 3. These are what will appear in your T=C. 7riter can e)aluate up to ten le)els of headings. 2' Clic+ in the document where you want the T=C to appear. 3' Choose nsert 9 nde'es and &ables 9 nde'es and &ables. >' Clic+ ;6. The result will be a typical table of contents with the entries generated as hyperlin+s. -ome tips you may find useful&
Gf some of your headings do not show up in the table of contents( chec+ that the headings
ha)e been tagged with the correct paragraph style. Gf a whole le)el of headings does not show up( chec+ the settings in &ools 9 ;utline >umbering. -ee T.efining a hierarchy of headingsU in Chapter <( Gntroduction to -tyles( for more information.
The T=C appears with a gray bac+ground. This bac+ground is there to remind you that the
teCt is generated automatically. Gt is not printed and does not appear if the document is con)erted to a #.5. To turn off this gray bac+ground( go to &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice 9 Appearance( then scroll down to the +e-t Document section and deselect the option for nde' and table shadings.
33#
This change may lea)e a gray bac+ground showing behind the dots between the headings and the page numbers( because the dots are part of a tab. To turn that shading off( go to &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice !riter 9 Formatting Aids and deselect the option for &abs. Gf you cannot place the cursor in the T=C( choose &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice !riter 9 Formatting Aids( and then select -nable in the 8ursor in protected areas section.
Gf you add or delete teCt %so that headings mo)e to different pages' or you add( delete( or change headings( you need to update the table of contents. To do this& 4ight9clic+ anywhere in the T=C and select 2pdate nde'F&able from the pop9up menu.
Caution
Gf you ha)e -dit 9 Changes 9 $how enabled when editing your document and you update the T=C( then errors may occur( as the T=C will still include any deleted headings and you may find that deleted teCt causes page numbering in the T=C to be wrong too. -imply ensure this option is deselected before updating a T=C.
Customi5ing a table of contents

*lmost e)ery aspect of the table of contents can be customi2ed to suit the style and re@uirements of your document. 6owe)er( with this fleCibility also comes some compleCity and it is good to ha)e in mind the desired end result. -tart by clic+ing in the document where you want the table of contents to appear and choose nsert 9 nde'es and &ables 9 nde'es and &ables to open the Gnsert GndeC/Table dialog shown in 5igure 3>3.
)igure 3#3 2nde-!+able page of 2nsert 2nde-!+able dialog
33%
You can also access this dialog at any time by right9clic+ing anywhere in an eCisting table of contents and choosing -dit nde'F&able from the pop9up menu. The Gnsert GndeC/Table dialog has fi)e pages. 3ach of them co)ers a different aspect of the T=C structure and appearance&
"se the 2nde-!+able page to set the attributes of the T=C. "se the ,ntries and Styles pages to format the entries in the T=C. "se the 8olumns page to put the T=C into more than one column. "se the Jac7ground page to add color or a graphic to the bac+ground of the T=C.
You can display a pre)iew boC( located on the left9hand side of each page( to show as you wor+ how the T=C will loo+. %Gf you do not see the pre)iew boC( select the Preview option in the lower right9hand corner of the dialog'. The illustrations in this chapter show the dialog as it appears with the pre)iew boC hidden.
The pre)iew boC only shows the appearance from settings made on the 2nde-!+able( ,ntries and Styles pages. The 8olumns and Jac7ground pages each ha)e their own pre)iew panes.
>ote
*fter ma+ing all your changes( clic+ ;6 to apply them. /efore clic+ing ;6( Gf you choose to re)ert to the default settings for the 8olumns and Jac7ground pages( select each page in turn and clic+ the Ceset button. The settings on the ,ntries and Styles pages must be reset manuallyV the Ceset button has no effect.
,ndex'-able pa e
"se the 2nde-!+able page( pictured in 5igure 3>3( to set the attributes of the T=C.
Changing the title To gi)e the table of contents a different title( type it in the +itle field. To delete the title( clear the +itle field. $etting the type of inde'Ftable /e sure the +ype is set to &able of Contents. -ee T*lphabetic indeCesU on page 3>> and T=ther types of indeCesU on page 3A2 for more about creating other types of indeCes.
>ote
You can change the type of indeC only when you first create it. =nce you define an indeC type %for eCample( ma+e a table of contents' you cannot change the type.
Protecting against manual changes /y default( to pre)ent the T=C from being changed accidentally( the Protected against manual changes option is selected( the T=C can only be changed by using the right9clic+ menu or the Gnsert Table/GndeC dialog. Gf the option is not selected( the T=C can be changed directly on the document page( Just li+e other teCt. 6owe)er( any manual changes will be lost when you update it. Changing the number of levels included 7riter uses 10 le)els of headings when it builds the table of contents %or the number of le)els used in the document( whiche)er is smaller'. To change the number of le)els included( enter the re@uired number in the ,valuate up to level boC. 5or eCample( the T=C in this boo+ includes only the first four heading le)els.
33&
Choosing the scope of the table of contents The for drop9down list in the 8reate inde-!table area( allows you to select whether the T=C will co)er all the headings of the document %-ntire document' or Just the headings of the chapter where it is inserted. 7riter identifies a TchapterU as all the headings between two first le)el outline headings %normally .eading *'. Creating a table of contents from an outline The third section of the 2nde-!+able page is used to determine what 7riter should use to create the T=C. The a)ailable choices %not mutually eCclusi)e' are& =utline *dditional styles GndeC mar+s
/y default 7riter uses the outline le)elsV that is( paragraphs formatted with the paragraph styles associated with outline le)els in &ools 9 ;utline >umbering. Gn the default document( .eading * has outline le)el 1( .eading : outline le)el 2 and so on up to .eading *$. You can change the paragraph styles included in the outline as described in T.efining a hierarchy of headingsU in Chapter <( Gntroduction to -tyles. You can include other paragraph styles in the T=C by assigning an outline le)el to those styles. To do this( modify the paragraph style definition& go to the =utline M !umbering page for the style( and select the re@uired outline le)el. Clic+ ;6 to sa)e the change.
)igure 3## Specifying an outline level on the Outline L Dumbering page for a paragraph style
Creating from additional styles /y selecting the /dditional Styles option on the 2nde-!+able page( you can add more paragraph styles to the T=C. This can be useful when you want to include in the T=C an anneC %appendiC'. Gf the Outline option is also selected( the additional styles will be included in the table of contents together with the ones defined in the outline numbering. 6owe)er( headings included in the T=C using this feature are not hyperlin+ed to the headings in the document body as are headings assigned to outline le)els. Creating from inde' marks This selection adds any indeC entries that you ha)e inserted into the document by using nsert 9 nde'es and &ables 9 -ntry. !ormally you would not use this selection for a table of contents. 6owe)er( if you do wish to use it( be sure to select &able of Contents from the drop9down list in the Gnsert GndeC 3ntry dialog %see 5igure 3A1' when you are entering the indeC entries for use in a T=C( so that 7riter can distinguish between them and any indeC entries intended for inclusion in an alphabetic indeC.
Entries pa e
"se the ,ntries page %see 5igure 3><' to define and format the teCt of entries in the T=C. The teCt of each outline le)el can be styled independently from the other le)els by adding and deleting elements.
33'
Clic+ on a number in the Level column to select the outline le)el whose elements you want to format. The Structure line contains the elements included in the entries for that le)el. 3lements that can be added to the structure line are displayed Just below the structure line( and are grayed out if they cannot be included&
The -Z button represents the Tchapter numberU( which means the heading number )alue
assigned in &ools 9 ;utline >umbering to a heading style( not Just for chapters but also for other le)els of headings %Chapter le)el and le)el 2 )alues are illustrated in 5igure 3>A'.
The - button represents the chapter %or sub9chapter' teCt& That is the teCt formatted with
the paragraph style used for each le)el. Gn 5igure 3>A( 6eading 1 is used for $e)el 1( 6eading 2 for $e)el 2.
The & button represents a tab stop. The Z button represents the page number. The :$ button represents the start of a hyperlin+. %This button appears on the default
Structure line.'
The :- button represents the end of a hyperlin+. %This button appears on the default
Structure line.' The :$ and :- buttons are part of the 8yperlink button set9up. 3ach white field on the Structure line represents a blan+ space where you can add custom teCt.
)igure 3#% /ssigning a chapter number value 4the ,S value5. +he assigned Level : value also shows in the preview pane.
>ote
Gn the =utline !umbering dialog( if you ha)e included any teCt in the Separator 3efore or After teCt input boCes for any gi)en le)el( then that teCt will be part of the -Z field for that le)el. You should ta+e care when building the structure line not to create any unwanted effects in the appearance of your T=C.
33(
)igure 3#& ,ntries page of 2nsert 2nde-!+able dialog
Adding elements To add an element to the Structure line& 1' Clic+ in the white field where you want to insert the element. 2' Clic+ one of the acti)e buttons Just below the Structure line. 5or eCample( to add a tab( clic+ the &ab stop button. * button representing the new element appears on the Structure line. 3' To add custom teCt( such as the word 8hapter( type the teCt in the white field. .onWt forget a trailing space. Changing elements To change an element in the Structure line( clic+ the button representing that element and then clic+ a non9grayed out element that you want to substitute it for( in the row of buttons Just below the Structure line. 5or eCample( to change a chapter number to a tab stop( clic+ the -Z button on the Structure line %it shows then as being pressed' and then clic+ the &ab stop button in the row of a)ailable elements. To cancel before swapping an element( clic+ in one of the white spaces. Applying changes to all outline levels To apply the displayed structure and formatting to all outline le)els( clic+ the All button. 4eleting elements To delete an element from the Structure line( clic+ the button representing that element and then press the Delete +ey on your +eyboard. 5or eCample( to delete the default hyperlin+ setting( clic+ the :$ button and then press the Delete +ey %)unction9Delete on a 0ac'. 4epeat this for the :button. Applying character styles You might want an element to be a bit different from the rest of the line. 5or eCample( you might want the page number to be bold. To apply a character style to an element& 1' /e sure you ha)e defined a suitable character style. 2' =n the Structure line( clic+ the button representing the element to which you want to apply a style. 3' 5rom the 8haracter Style drop9down list( select the desired style.
To )iew or edit the attributes of a character style( select the style from the 8haracter Style drop9 down list and then clic+ the -dit button.
33=
The default character style for hyperlin+s is 2nternet Lin7 %such as those inserted by nsert 9 8yperlink'( which by default is underlined and shown in blue. The default hyperlin+s of T=C entries are set to the 2nde- Lin7 character style.
&ip
Gf you want them to appear underlined and blue( you can select the :$ button on the -tructure line and change the character style selection for T=C entries to 2nternet Lin7. You can also change the attributes for 2nde- Lin7 to what you want.
&ab parameters Clic+ing on the Tab stop button on the structure line brings up two controls& )ill character and +ab stop position& Fill character& select from the three options the tab leader you wish to use. &ab stop position& 3nter the distance to lea)e between the left page margin and the tab stop. &ab position relative to Paragraph $tyle indent 7hen this option is selected( entries are indented according to the settings of their indi)idual formats. 7here a paragraph style specifies an indent on the left( tab stops are relati)e to this indent. Gf this option is not selected( tab stops are relati)e to the left margin position.
"tyles pa e
"se the Styles page %5igure 3>E' to change which paragraph style is assigned to display the teCt of each le)el in the table of contents. Gn most cases( the best strategy is to +eep the assigned styles but change their settings as needed to ma+e the T=C appear the way you want.
)igure 3#' Styles page of 2nsert 2nde-!+able dialog To apply a custom paragraph style to an outline le)el& 1' Gn the Levels list boC( select the outline le)el. 2' Gn the Paragraph Styles list boC( clic+ the desired paragraph style. 3' Clic+ the X button to apply the selected paragraph style to the selected outline le)el. The style assigned to each le)el appears in s@uare brac+ets in the Levels list.
3#$ LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
To remo)e paragraph styling from an outline le)el( select the outline le)el in the Levels list boC( and then clic+ the 4efault button. To )iew or edit the attributes of a paragraph style( clic+ the style in the Paragraph Styles list boC( and then clic+ the -dit button.
>ote
Changes to a paragraph style will affect any teCt in the document that is formatted using this style( not Just the format of the table of contents.
(olu#ns pa e
"se the 8olumns page to change the number of columns for the T=C. 0ultiple columns are more li+ely to be used in an indeC than in a T=C( so this page is described in the section on indeCes. -ee 5igure 3AA.
8ac& round pa e
"se the Jac7ground page to add color or a graphic to the bac+ground of the T=C.
)igure 3#( Jac7ground page@ showing 8olor choices.
Adding color To add color to the bac+ground of the table of contents( select from the color grid.
/y default( the bac+ground to the T=C is shaded gray. This setting is in &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice 9 Appearance( then( in the Te-t Document area( nde' and table shadings is selected. .eselect this option to remo)e the gray bac+ground. !ote that by adding a bac+ground color( you o)erwrite this setting anyway.
>ote
3#*
Adding a graphic To add a graphic to the bac+ground of the table of contents& 1' 5rom the /s drop9down list( select 1raphic. The Jac7ground tab now displays the graphics options( as shown below. 2' Clic+ the 3rowse button. The 5ind graphics dialog opens. 3' 5ind the graphic file you want and then clic+ the ;pen button. The 5ind graphics dialog closes and the selected graphic appears in the graphic pre)iew boC on the right9hand side of the Jac7ground tab. %Gf you do not see the graphic( select the Preview chec+boC.' >' To embed the graphic in your document( clear the :ink chec+boC. To lin+ the graphic to the document but not embed it( select the :ink chec+boC. A' Gn the &ype area of the Jac7ground tab( choose how you want the bac+ground graphic to appear&
To position the graphic in a specific location( select Position and then clic+ the desired
location in the position grid.
To stretch the graphic to fill the entire bac+ground area( select Area. To repeat the graphic across the entire bac+ground area( select &ile.
)igure 3#= Graphic options on the Jac7ground page of the 2nsert 2nde-!+able dialog
4eleting a color or graphic To delete color or a graphic from the table bac+ground& 1' 5rom the /s drop9down list( select Color. 2' Clic+ >o Fill on the color grid.
/aintaining a table of contents

This section shows you how to&
3dit an eCisting T=C "pdate a T=C when changes are made to the document .elete a T=C
3#: LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
Editin a table of contents

To edit an eCisting T=C& 1' 4ight9clic+ anywhere in the T=C. 2' 5rom the conteCt menu( choose -dit nde'F&able. The Gnsert GndeC/Table dialog %5igure 3>3 on page 33A' opens and you can edit and sa)e the table as described in the pre)ious section.
Gf you cannot clic+ in the T=C( it is probably because it is protected. To disable this protection( choose &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice !riter 9 Formatting Aids( and then select -nable in the 8ursor in protected areas section. Gf you wish to edit the T=C without enabling the cursor( you can access it from the !a)igator.
&ip
You can also access the 2nde-!+able dialog from the !a)igator %5igure 3A0 '. 1' =pen the !a)igator %press )%'. 2' Clic+ the eCpansion symbol %R sign or triangle' neCt to nde'es. 3' 4ight9clic+ on &able of Contents1 and choose nde' 9 -dit.
)igure 3%$ /ccess an inde- from the Davigator
.pdatin a table of contents

7riter does not update the T=C automatically( so after any changes to the headings( you must update it manually. To update a T=C when changes are made to the document& 1' 4ight9clic+ anywhere in the T=C. 2' 5rom the conteCt menu( choose 2pdate nde'F&able. 7riter updates the T=C to reflect the changes in the document.
3#3
You can also update the indeC from the !a)igator by eCpanding nde'es and right9clic+ing on &able of Contents1 and choosing nde' 9 2pdate.
Deletin a table of contents

To delete the T=C from a document& 1' 4ight9clic+ anywhere in the T=C. 2' 5rom the conteCt menu( choose 4elete nde'F&able. 7riter deletes the T=C.
>ote
7riter will not prompt you to confirm the deletel "se caution when deleting a T=C.
You can also delete the indeC from the !a)igator by selecting nde' 9 4elete from the menu shown in 5igure 3A0.
Alphabetic inde'es
*n alphabetical indeC %referred to as an indeC' is a list of +eywords or phrases used throughout a document that( if listed in order with page numbers( may help the reader find information @uic+ly. enerally an indeC is found in the bac+ of a boo+ or document. This section describes how to&
*dd indeC entries. Create an alphabetic indeC @uic+ly. Customi2e the display of indeC entries. Customi2e the appearance of the indeC. Piew and edit eCisting indeC entries.
Adding inde' entries

/efore you can create an indeC( you must create some indeC entries. 1' To add a word to the indeC( place the cursor anywhere in that word. Gf you want to add multiple words as one entry( select the entire phrase. 2' Choose nsert 9 nde'es and &ables 9 -ntry to display a dialog similar to that shown in 5igure 3A1. 7hen the dialog opens( the selected teCt appears in the ,ntry teCt input boC. You can accept the word or phrase shown( or change it to whate)er you want. 3' Clic+ nsert to create the entry. You may of course open the dialog before selecting teCt( and then select the teCt re@uired. *fter selecting the teCt( clic+ on the dialog to enter the teCt into the 3ntry teCt input boC.
>ote
* cursor placed immediately before the first character of a word( or immediately after the last character of a word if itWs followed by a space( counts as being in that word.
-ee TCustomi2ing indeC entriesU below for an eCplanation of the fields on this dialog. You can create multiple entries without closing the dialog. 5or each one& 1' Clic+ at the location in the document that you want to indeC. 2' Clic+ again on the dialog. 3' Change the entry if needed( and clic+ nsert. >' 4epeat steps 13 until you ha)e finished with the entries( then clic+ Close.
3##
)igure 3%* 2nserting an inde- entry

Gf field shading is acti)e %see &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice 9 Appearance 9 &e't 4ocument 9 Field shadingsB( when a selected word or phrase has been added to the indeC( it is shown in the teCt with a gray bac+ground. Gf the teCt of an indeC entry has been changed from the teCt of the word selected( the indeC entry is mar+ed by a small gray rectangle at the start of that word.
>ote
&ip
You can also open the Gnsert GndeC 3ntry dialog by clic+ing the 3ntry icon on the Gnsert toolbar( as shown in 5igure 3A2.
)igure 3%: ,ntry icon on 2nsert toolbar
Creating an alphabetic inde' ?uickly

!ow that you ha)e some indeC entries( you can create the indeC. *lthough indeCes can be customi2ed eCtensi)ely in 7riter( most of the time you need to ma+e only a few choices. To create an indeC @uic+ly& 1' Clic+ in the document where you want to add the indeC and clic+ nsert 9 nde'es and &ables 9 nde'es and &ables. 2' Gn the +ype boC on the 2nde-!+able page %5igure 3A3'( select Alphabetical nde'. 3' Gn the Options section( you may want to unchec+ Case sensitive %so that capitali2ed and lower9case words are treated as the same word' and unchec+ Combine identical entries with p or pp. >' Clic+ ;6. The result will be a typical indeC. 7riter does not update an indeC automatically. Gf you add( delete( or change the teCt of indeC entries( you need to update the indeC. To do this( follow the steps outlined in T"pdating a table of contentsU on page 3>3.
3#%
Customi5ing inde' entries

/elow is a brief eCplanation of the fields in the Gnsert GndeC 3ntry dialog % nsert 9 nde'es and &ables 9 -ntry' and how to use them. nde' The type of indeC this entry is for. The default is Alphabetical nde'( but you can use this field to create eCtra entries for a table of contents or user9defined indeCes or lists of almost anything. 5or eCample( you might want an indeC containing only the scientific names of species mentioned in the teCt( and a separate indeC containing only the common names of species. -ee T=ther types of indeCesU on page 3A2. -ntry The word or phrase to be added to the selected indeC. This word or phrase does not need to be in the document itselfV you can add synonyms and other terms that you want to appear in the indeC. 1st key *n indeC 7ey is an entry that has no associated page number and has se)eral subentries that do ha)e page numbers. "sing +eys is a useful way of grouping related topics. %-ee T3Cample of using an indeC +eyU below.' #nd key You can ha)e a three9le)el indeC( where some of the first9le)el +eys ha)e le)el92 entries that are also +eys %without page numbers'. This degree of indeC compleCity is not often necessary. /ain entry 7hen the same term is indeCed on se)eral pages( often one of those pages has more important or detailed information on that topic( so you want it to be the main entry. To ma+e the page number for the main( or most important( entry stand out( select this option and then define the character style for the page number of a main indeC entry to be bold( for eCample. Apply to all similar te'ts -elect this option to ha)e 7riter automatically identify and mar+ any other word or phrase that matches the current selection. The /atch case and !hole words only options become a)ailable if this option is selected. "se this option with care( as it may result in many unwanted page numbers %for minor uses of a word' being listed in the indeC.
Exa#ple of usin an index &ey

*n inde- 7ey is a primary entry under which subentries are grouped. 5or eCample( you might want to create a grouping similar to this& $ibre=ffice Calc...........10 Gmpress......1A 7riter...........A Gn this eCample( LibreOffice is the *st 7ey. The subentries %with the page numbers showing' are the indeCed entries. To insert an indeC entry for the topic Writer( on the Gnsert GndeC 3ntry dialog %5igure 3A1 on page 3>A'( type Writer in the -ntry bo' and LibreOffice in the *st 7ey boC.
Customi5ing the appearance of an inde'

To customi2e an eCisting indeC( right"clic7 anywhere in the indeC and choose -dit nde'F-ntry from the conteCt menu.
3#&
The 2nsert 2nde-!+able dialog %5igure 3A3' has fi)e pages. *ny or all of them can be used to customi2e the appearance of an indeC.
"se the 2nde-!+able page to set the attributes of the indeC. "se the ,ntries and Styles pages to format the entries in the indeC. "se the 8olumns tab to put the indeC into more than one column. "se the Jac7ground tab to add color or a graphic to the bac+ground of the indeC.
The pre)iew boC( located on the left9hand side of the dialog( shows as you wor+ how the indeC will loo+. %Gf you do not see the pre)iew boC( select Preview in the lower right9hand corner of the dialog.' *fter ma+ing your changes( clic+ ;6 to sa)e the indeC so it appears in your document.
The pre)iew boC only shows the appearance from settings made on the 2nde-!+able( ,ntries and Styles pages. The 8olumns and Jac7ground pages each ha)e their own pre)iew panes.
>ote
,ndex'-able pa e
"se the 2nde-!+able page to set the basic attributes of the indeC.
)igure 3%3 2nde-!+able page of 2nsert 2nde-!+able dialog 1' To gi)e the GndeC a different title( type it in the &itle field. To delete the title( clear the &itle field. 2' /e sure the type of indeC is set to Alphabetical nde'. 3' To pre)ent the indeC from being changed accidentally( select Protected against manual changes. Gf this option is selected( the indeC can only be changed using the right9clic+ menu( or the 2nsert 2nde-!+able dialog. Gf the option is not selected( the indeC can be changed directly on the document page( Just li+e other teCt( but any manual changes to an indeC are lost when you update it.
3#'
>' 5rom the drop9down list in the 8reate inde-!table section( select -ntire document. You can also choose to create an indeC for Just the current chapter. A' Parious other options determine how the indeC handles entries&
Combine identical entries. .efines how identical entries are dealt with. !ormally each page number of an indeCed word or phrase will be shown in the indeCV howe)er these can be combined using the Combine identical entries with p or pp. Gf you want a page range displayed( select Combine with G %which will produce something similar to 2331'. Gf you want different entries based on what letters are capitali2ed( select Case sensitive. AutoCapitali5e entries. *utomatically capitali2es the first letter of each entry regardless of how they show within the document itself. 6eys as separate entries. 5or the +eys to ha)e their own page numbers( select this option. Concordance file. 3nables a list of words in an eCternal file to be imported %select using the File button' and then used within the indeC. The concordance file has a special file formatV for further information( refer to concordance file in 8elp 9 :ibre;ffice 8elp. "sing a concordance file can speed up production of an indeC( but unless the words are )ery carefully selected and you edit the indeC afterwards( the resulting indeC can be full of entries for minor mentions of a term( ma+ing it less useful than a more selecti)e indeC. $ort. .efines how the entries are sorted when displayed. The only option is alphanumeric( but you can define which language alphabet will be used.
Entries pa e
"se the ,ntries page to set eCactly how and what will be displayed for each of the entries. The page is similar to 5igure 3A>.
)igure 3%# ,ntries page for creating an alphabetical inde-
3#(
To begin( in the Level column select the indeC le)el whose elements you want to format. $e)el T-U refers to the single letter headings that di)ide the indeC entries alphabetically when the Alphabetical delimiter option is selected in the )ormat section. %You will be able to apply your changes to all indeC le)els later.' The Structure line displays the elements for entries in that le)el. 3ach button on the Structure line represents one element&
The - button represents the entry teCt. The & button represents a tab stop. The Z button represents the page number. The C button represents chapter information. This is not present by default( but can be added by selecting the Chapter info button.
3ach white field on the Structure line represents a blan+ space. You can add custom teCt if you desire.
Adding elements To add an element to the Structure line& 1' #lace the cursor in the white field to the left of where you want to insert the element. 2' Clic+ one of the acti)e buttons below the Structure line. %5or eCample( to add a tab stop( clic+ the &ab stop button.' * button representing the new element appears on the Structure line. 3' To add custom teCt( clic+ in the white space at the position you want to insert it( and type the teCt. .onWt forget a trailing space. Changing elements To change an element in the Structure line( clic+ the button representing that element and then clic+ the element that you want to substitute it for in the row of buttons Just below the Structure line. 5or eCample( to change entry teCt to a tab stop( clic+ the - button on the Structure line %it shows then as being pressed' and then clic+ the &ab stop button in the row of a)ailable elements. 4eleting elements To delete an element from the Structure line( clic+ the button that represents that element and then press the Delete +ey on your +eyboard. 5or eCample( to delete a tab stop( clic+ the & button and then press the Delete +ey %)unction9Delete on a 0ac'. Chapter nfo This button inserts chapter information( such as the chapter heading and number. The information to be displayed is selected from the Chapter entry boC menu. This data is determined in the Outline Dumbering dialog %&ools 9 ;utline >umbering'. Applying character styles 3ach of the items that can be added to the Structure line may be gi)en additional formatting. 5or eCample( you may want the page number to be a different si2e from the rest of the indeC teCt. To do this( apply a character style to one of the elements in the Structure line.
To apply a character style to an element& 1' =n the Structure line( clic+ the button representing the element to which you want to apply a style. 2' -elect the desired style from the 8haracter Style drop9down list. 7riter applies the style to the selected element. To )iew or edit the attributes of a character style( select the style from the 8haracter Style drop9 down list and then clic+ the -dit button.
3#=
Formatting entries *pply additional formatting using the options in the )ormat section. Alphabetical delimiter. This separates the indeC entries into bloc+s that start with the same first letter( using that letter as a header. 5or eCample( if your indeC begins& apple( > author( 10 brea+( 2 bus( >
then selecting this option will gi)e you& A apple( > author( 10 3 brea+( 2 bus( >
6ey separated by commas. *rranges the entries in the indeC on the same line but
separated by commas.
&ab position relative to Paragraph $tyle indent. 7hen chec+ed( entries are indented
according to the settings of their indi)idual formats. 7here a paragraph style with an indent on the left is in use( tab stops will be relati)e to this indent. Gf this option is not selected( tab stops will be relati)e to the left margin position.
"tyles9 (olu#ns and 8ac& round pa es

4efer to T-tyles pageU on page 3>0 and T/ac+ground pageU on page 3>1 for detailed information on these pages.
(olu#ns pa e
"se the Columns page %5igure 3AA' to change the number of columns for the indeC.
)igure 3%% 8olumns page of the 2nsert 2nde-!+able dialog

3%$ LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
Adding multiple columns To display the indeC in more than one column& 1' 3ither enter the number of columns desired in the boC labeled 8olumns or select the icon representing the number of columns. 2' To e)enly distribute the columns according to the page width( chec+ the Auto!idth boC. Gf it is unchec+ed( you can manually set each of the following& Width of each of the columns Spacing between the columns
3' You can choose to ha)e a separator line between the columns&
Style The default is Done( or select from three choices of line style. Width& The width %thic+ness' of the line. The default is $.:%pt. .eight& The height of the line( as a percentage of the full column height. The default is *$$T Position& #osition of the line relati)e to the columns %top( centered( or bottom' if the height is less than 100k. 8olor *llows the color of the separator line to be set.
Maintaining an index
To modify the appearance of an indeC& 1' 6ight"clic7 anywhere in the indeC. 2' 5rom the conteCt menu( choose -dit nde'F&able. The 2nsert 2nde-!+able dialog opens and you can edit and sa)e the indeC using the fi)e tabs described in the pre)ious section. To update or delete an indeC( right"clic7 anywhere in the indeC and select 2pdate nde'F&able or 4elete nde'F&able as re@uired.
Viewing and editing existing index entries

=nce you ha)e added the initial entries( you can ma+e some amendments. You can )iew and edit these using the following steps& 1' 3nsure that field shading is acti)e %=iew 9 Field shadings or 8trl9)('( so you can locate indeC entries more easily. 2' #lace the cursor in the field shading of an eCisting indeC entry in the body of your document and select -dit 9 nde' -ntry. Gn the case of a changed9teCt entry( the field shading is immediately before the word. #lacing the cursor immediately before a word mar+ed as a teCt entry will satisfy both selection criteria. *lternati)ely( right9clic+ at those positions and from the conteCt menu select nde' -ntry. 3' * dialog similar to 5igure 3A< appears. You can mo)e through the )arious indeC entries using the forward and bac+ arrow buttons. Gf there is more than one entry for a single word or phrase( a second row of buttons with a )ertical bar at the point of the arrow head is displayed allowing you to scroll through each of these entries. >' 0a+e the necessary modifications or additions to the indeC entries( and then clic+ ;6.
3%*
)igure 3%& ?iewing and editing inde- entries
Other types of indexes

*n alphabetical indeC is not the only type of indeC that you can build with 7riter. =ther types of indeCes supplied with 7riter include those for illustrations( tables( and obJects( and you can e)en create a user9defined indeC. This chapter does not gi)e eCamples of all the possibilities. To create other indeCes& 1' #lace the cursor where you want the indeC created. 2' -elect nsert 9 nde'es and tables 9 nde'es and tables from the menu bar. 3' =n the 2nsert 2nde-!+able dialog( in the &ype drop9down list( select the indeC wanted. >' 0odify the )arious pages( which are )ery similar to those discussed in pre)ious sections. A' -elect ;6 when e)erything has been set.
-'ample: Creating an inde' of figures

Creating an indeC %list' of figures or tables is easy if the figure captions were created using nsert 9 Caption or manually using a number range )ariable as described in Chapter 1>( 7or+ing with 5ields. 1' =n the 2nsert 2nde-!+able dialog( in the &ype drop9down list( choose llustration nde'. You can change the title of the indeC to something elseV we ha)e used Ta#le !f -ig'res as our title. 2' /e sure Captions is selected in the 8reate from section( and choose the category of caption. The default for Category is 2llustrationV in our eCample we ha)e used )igure for the figure captions. 3' %The category )igure is not supplied with $ibre=fficeV howe)er( if you ha)e defined it when creating a caption in your document( it will appear on this list. -ee Chapter B( 7or+ing with raphics( for more about creating captions.' >' "nder 4isplay( you can choose Ceferences %to include the category( number( and caption teCt'( Category and >umber( or Caption &e't. 7e ha)e chosen Ceferences.
3%:
)igure 3%' 8reating other types of inde-es A' =n the -ntries page( notice that hyperlin+ing from the indeC to the body of the document is not a)ailable( but you can ma+e some other selections.
)igure 3%( ,ntries tab for 2llustration 2nde<' Clic+ ;6. The result is shown below.
)igure 3%= 6esulting inde- of illustrations
3%3
Bibliographies
* bibliography is a list for displaying references used throughout a document. These references are either stored in a bibliographic database or within the document itself. This section shows you how to&
Create a bibliographic databaseV add and maintain entries. *dd a reference into a document. 5ormat the bibliography. "pdate and edit an eCisting bibliography.
Creating a bibliographic database

5or most of this section( the database table used is the sample one that comes with 7riter. 5or information on creating a new table in the bibliographic database( see Chapter B( etting -tarted with /ase( in the Getting Started guide. *lthough you can create references within the document itself( creating a bibliographic database allows reuse in other documents and sa)es a lot of time. -elect &ools 9 3ibliography 4atabase. The Jibliography Database window similar to that in 5igure 3<0 opens. The upper part of the page shows all of the records( in a table layout similar to that of a spreadsheet. The lower part of the page shows all the fields of the selected record.
)igure 3&$ Jibliography Database main window
3%#
%ilterin records
To set up a filter for specific records within the bibliographic database( select &ools 9 Filter from the /ibliographic .atabase menu bar. =n the Standard )ilter dialog %5igure 3<1'( choose the fields( conditions and )alues for the filter and clic+ ;6.
)igure 3&* Setting up a filter for the bibliographic database
(!an in colu#n details

To change the details of columns in the bibliographic database( select -dit 9 Column Arrangement from the menu bar( or clic+ the Column Arrangement button near the top of the window %see 5igure 3<0'. The 8olumn Layout for +able biblio dialog %5igure 3<2' is displayed. This allows you to change which fields are allocated to which columns. *s an eCample( you can select to ha)e /uthor data go into the 2dentifier column( by changing the destination in the drop9down list. The Short name data column destination sets to Done automatically( as you canWt set duplicate destinations for data.
)igure 3&: 8hanging column layout for bibliographic database
(!an in t!e data source

To change the data source in use %for eCample( if you ha)e more than one bibliographic database for different purposes'( select -dit 9 Choose 4ata $ource from the menu bar( or clic+ the 4ata $ource button near the top of the window. The 8hoose Data Source dialog %5igure 3<3' is displayed.
3%%
)igure 3&3 8hoosing a different data source for the bibliographic database
(!an in field details

You can ma+e changes to the bibliography database %for eCample( rename fields or change the length of fields' by doing the following& 1' Gn the main document %not the /ibliography .atabase window'( press )# or clic+ =iew 9 4ata $ources to open the data source window( similar to 5igure 3<>.
)igure 3&# Data Source view of Jibliography database 2' 0a+e sure that the /ibliography database is selected as well as the correct table. You may ha)e to eCpand some le)els to be able to select the correct ones. 3' 6ight"clic7 on the table entry %biblio in the eCample' and select -dit 4atabase File from the conteCt menu. This opens a window similar to 5igure 3<A( which is the main menu for /ase( the database component of $ibre=ffice.
)igure 3&% <ain window for wor7ing with databases

3%& LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
>' Gf &ables %in the Database section' is not selected( select it now. A' 6ight"clic7 on the biblio table name in the +ables section and select -dit from the conteCt menu to display the +able Design window similar to that shown in 5igure 3<<. <' You can now select each of the fields. You can select the teCt in the Field >ame cell and change the entry as re@uired. Clic+ing in the Field &ype cell( allows you to open a selection menu to change the data type in that cell. Gn the )ield Properties section( the data properties can be modified. 5or each data field selected( an eCplanation of that field appears in a window to the right of the section. E' 7hen finished( you will be as+ed to confirm that you want the changes sa)ed.
>ote
5or more information on how to use $ibre=fficeFs database features( see Chapter B( etting -tarted with /ase( in the Getting Started guide.
)igure 3&& <odify table properties window
Adding entries to the database

"se the Jibliography Database dialog %&ools 9 3ibliography 4atabase' to add entries to the database& 1' You can add records directly into the database using the fields in the lower section of the dialog shown in 5igure 3<0 on page 3A>. 2' -elect nsert 9 Cecord from the menu bar of the Jibliography Database dialog( or clic+ the nsert Cecord icon to the left of the hori2ontal scroll bar. 3' 3nter a name for the entry in the $hort >ame boC. Complete other fields as re@uired. "se the +ab +ey to mo)e between fields. >' Gt is best to use a uni@ue name in the Short name field. This field is used when inserting entries into documents.
3%'
A' To complete the entry( mo)e to the last field and press +ab once more. Gf your document re@uires \*uthor( date] style citations( use the Short name field of the database to record the information in the re@uired format.
/aintaining entries in the database

To maintain entries in the database( use the Jibliography Database dialog %&ools 9 3ibliography 4atabase'. Clic+ on the appropriate record and modify the fields as appropriate. 0odified entries are sa)ed automatically to the database when the cursor mo)es off the record.
Adding references AcitationsB into a document

7riter supports two methods of adding references to your document&
5rom a bibliography database( such as the one built in to 7riter. .irectly from the +eyboard when you may ha)e documents in front of you. Enterin references fro# a database
To add references from the bibliographic database into a document& 1' #lace the cursor where you want the reference to appear. 2' 5rom the main menu( choose nsert 9 nde'es and &ables 9 3ibliographic -ntry. 3' Gn the 2nsert Jibliographic ,ntry dialog( choose From bibliography database at the top of the dialog.
)igure 3&' 2nserting bibliographic entries into a document >' -elect the reference from the Short name drop9down list near the bottom of the dialog. The *uthor and Title of the selected reference are shown in the middle of the dialog( to help you )erify that it is the reference you want. A' To insert the reference into the document( clic+ nsert. <' You can +eep the dialog open and insert another reference into the documentV you donFt need to close and reopen it. E' 7hen you ha)e finished inserting all the references( select Close.
Enterin references fro# docu#ents

You may choose to enter your bibliographic entries directly into the document( instead of from an eCternal database. 5or eCample( you may not be wor+ing on your own computer. Clic+ in the document where you want to add the entry.
3%( LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
1' -elect nsert 9 nde'es and &ables 9 3ibliography -ntry. 2' Gn the dialog that opens( select the From document content option. a' -elect >ew. b' Gn the Define Jibliography ,ntry dialog( complete all the fields which are rele)ant to your entry. Type a uni@ue name in the Short name teCt entry boC( because the 2nsert Jibliography ,ntry dialog uses this entry for the citation. c' *n entry must be selected from the menu in the &ype input boC in order to enable the ;6 button. d' Clic+ ;6 when all the fields wanted are completed. e' Clic+ nsert to add the Short name field to the document f' Clic+ in each location you wish to add an entry and repeat this se@uence 3' Clic+ Close. You may of course re9use an entry in your document( by restarting the se@uence abo)e( and then selecting the Short name re@uired( from the current list of entries( instead of selecting to add a new entry
-diting a reference
You can edit a reference in the following manner& 1' 6ight"clic7 on the entry %the cursor then displays to the left of the entry'. 2' 5rom the conteCt menu which opens( select 3ibliography -ntry. The 3dit /ibliography 3ntry dialog opens( similar to below.
)igure 3&( ,dit the citation entry 3' To @uic+ly edit only the Short name( clic+ on the teCt boC( alter the entry and then clic+ /odify. The dialog sa)es the change and closes. >' To edit more of the entry( clic+ on -dit to open the Define Jibliography ,ntry dialog similar to the graphic shown below %5igure 3<D'. A' You can change the citation to attribute by choosing a different -hort name from the drop9 down list. <' 0a+e any changes re@uired and then clic+ ;6 to return to the dialog of 5igure 3<B. E' Gf you are satisfied with your changes( clic+ /odify to accept the changes and eCit the dialog. 7hate)er the source of the citation( the modified references are stored in the document. Gf the source was a bibliography database( that database remains unmodified.
3%=
)igure 3&= +he editable fields
Creating the bibliography

To create the bibliography& 1' #lace the cursor at the point where you wish to insert the bibliography. 2' -elect nsert 9 nde'es and &ables 9 nde'es and &ables and change the +ype to 3ibliography( to display a dialog similar to that shown in 5igure 3E0. The 2nsert 2nde-!+able dialog has fi)e pages.
,ndex'-able pa e
7riter supports two ways of displaying references %citations' in the teCt of a document&
"sing the teCt recorded in the Short name field of each bibliographic entry( for eCample
\ "400].
/y numbering the referenced documents in the se@uence they occur in the teCt( for
eCample \1].
&ip
To specify which citation style is used in the document( use the nde'F&able page on the Gnsert 2nde-!+able dialog( described on page 3<1.
5ormatting the bibliography in)ol)es choices made in two places&
2nsert 2nde-!table dialog %co)ered in this section' Jibliography * paragraph style %see page 3<3'
The basic settings are selected on this page. 1' To gi)e the bibliography a title( enter it in the &itle field. %* title is not re@uired.' 2' You can protect the bibliography from being changed accidentally( by chec+ing Protected against manual changes. Gf this option is selected( the bibliography can only be changed
3&$ LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
using the right9clic+ menu or the 2nsert +able!2nde- dialog. Gf the option is not selected( the bibliography can be changed directly on the document page( Just li+e other teCt( but any manual changes will be lost when you update the bibliography.
)igure 3'$ 2nserting a bibliography 3' To ha)e the bibliographic entries %citations' numbered within the body of the document %for eCample( \1]( \2]...'( select >umber entries. Gf( howe)er( you wish to ha)e the Short name field contents %from the database' appear in the document( deselect this option. >' -elect the type of brac+ets that you want for the referenced entries shown within the body of the document. A' .efine the sorting you re@uire. Currently only alphanumeric sorting is supported. -orting by the se@uence that entries appear in the teCt is done on the ,ntries page.
Entries pa e
The structure of this page %see 5igure 3E1'( is similar to that for tables of contents and for indeCes. 3ach type of source that you use when creating your document will ha)e its own uni@ue wor+s cited format. The 0odern $anguage *ssociation %0$*' documentation format sets out the recommended order for these citations. 5or eCample( see http&//www.mattawanschools.org/. You can define how the entry will appear( based on its source( by selecting from the &ype list of entries( or simply apply the same format to all entries by selecting the All button. 3ach entry in the +ype list has a default structure format. The Structure of the entry is based on the fields a)ailable in the bibliographic database. The ones shown by default for /rticle in the &ype list are& $h -hort name Au *uthor &i Title Je Year
3&*
>ote
Gn this current release of $ibre=ffice 7riter( )ersion >.0.2( only 3ook from the &ype list is editable. *lthough you can add and remo)e items from the structure line for other types( as described in the instructions below( it has no effect on the indeC created. The indeC will be created with the default entries shown abo)e. /ug <3A11.
To remo)e elements from the Structure line( clic+ the element then clic+ the Cemove button. To add an element( clic+ in the Structure line where it is to be inserted. -elect either the &ab stop( or an element in the drop9down list to the left of the nsert button( and then clic+ nsert. The elements in the drop9down list are those fields found in the Jibliography Database. *ll the elements on the Structure line can be formatted using the Character $tyle selection list. To determine how entries are sorted( modify the Sort by options. To sort by the se@uence that entries appear in the teCt( choose 4ocument position. To sort alphanumerically( choose Content. "se $ort keys to group similar references.
)igure 3'* ,ntries page for bibliographies
"tyles9 (olu#ns and 8ac& round pa es

4efer to T-tyles pageU on page 3>0( TColumns pageU on page 3A0 and T/ac+ground pageU on page 3>1 for detailed information on these pages.
Generatin t!e biblio rap!y

To generate the bibliography so that it appears in your document( clic+ ;6. The 2nsert 2nde-!+able dialog closes and the bibliography appears in your document.
3&:
4efining the paragraph style for the bibliography

You can modify the Jibliography * paragraph style to suit your re@uirements. 5or eCample( to number the entries in the bibliography list( you need to define a numbering style and lin+ that numbering style to the Jibliography * paragraph style. To do this& 1' =n the Styles and )ormatting window( clic+ on the :ist $tyles icon. You can either define a new list style or modify one of those supplied. Gn this eCample( we will modify the Dumbering * style. 6ight"clic7 on Dumbering * and choose /odify from the conteCt menu. 2' =n the Dumbering Style dialog( go to the ;ptions page. Gn our eCample we want to ha)e the numbers enclosed in s@uare brac+ets. To do this( type 4 in the 3efore boC and 5 in the After boC( as shown in 5igure 3E2.
)igure 3': Specifying s>uare brac7ets before and after the number in a list 3' !ow go to the Position page of the Dumbering style dialog. Gn the $pacing to te't boC( specify how much indentation you want for the second and following lines of any item in the bibliography list of your document. =ften you will need to eCperiment a bit to see what is the best setting. Gn our eCample %5igure 3E3'( we ha)e chosen 1 cm.
)igure 3'3 Setting the spacing between the margin and the te-t
3&3
>' Clic+ ;6 to sa)e these settings and close the Dumbering Style dialog. 4eturn to the $tyles and Formatting window( clic+ on the Paragraph $tyles icon( choose All $tyles from the list at the bottom of that window( then right"clic7 on 3ibliography 1 and choose /odify. A' =n the Paragraph Style dialog( go to the ;utline O >umbering tab and select >umbering 1 from the drop9down list. %-ee 5igure 3E>.' Clic+ ;6 to sa)e this change to the Jibliography * paragraph style.
)igure 3'# /pplying a numbering style to a paragraph style !ow when you generate the bibliography( the list will loo+ something li+e the one shown below for a boo+ after remo)ing elements from the structure line %the Short name and colon( for eCample'.
)igure 3'% 6esult of changing settings for Jibliography * paragraph style
2pdating, editing and deleting an e'isting bibliography

4ight9clic+ anywhere in the bibliography. Then( in the conteCt menu which opens&
-elect 2pdate nde'F&able to update the bibliography. -elect -dit nde'F&able to open the 2nsert 2nde-!+able dialog so you can edit and sa)e the
table.
-elect 4elete nde'F&able to delete the table without a confirmation re>uest.
&ools for working with bibliographies

Gf you find 7riterFs bibliography feature too limited( try /ibus %http&//bibus9biblio.sourceforge.net/ wi+i/indeC.php/0ainK#age' or Notero %http&//www.2otero.org/'. /oth programs are free and open source and are reported to wor+ well with 7riter.
3&# LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
8hapter *3 Wor7ing with <aster Documents
!hy use a master document7

* master document %p.=.0' can be considered as a container that Joins separate teCt documents %p.=.T' into one larger document( and unifies the formatting( table of contents %T=C'( bibliography( indeC( and other tables or lists. 0aster documents are typically used for producing long documents such as a boo+( a thesis( or a long report. * master document is especially useful in these situations&
7hen graphics( spreadsheets( or other material cause the file si2e or number of pages to
become @uite largeV writing( re)iewing( and editing may be easier when done on subsets of the full document.
7hen different people are writing different chapters or other parts of the full document. 7hen files will be published as stand9alone documents as well as becoming part of a larger
document. The chapters of this 7riter uide are an eCample of this.
7hen subdocuments are used in more than one final document.

You can use se)eral methods to create master documents. 3ach method has its ad)antages and disad)antages. 7hich method you choose depends on what you are trying to accomplish. The different methods are described in this chapter( along with suggestions on when to use each one.
* master document is not always the best method to use in any of the situations gi)en abo)e. You may find that an ordinary document %.=.T' containing sections lin+ed to other files may do the Job Just as well. 5or more about using sections to combine files( see Chapter >( 5ormatting #ages.
&ip
$tyles in master documents and subdocuments

* stand9alone document becomes a subdocument when it is lin+ed into a master document. * document can be used as a subdocument in se)eral master documents. 3ach master document may ha)e different style definitions %font( type si2e( color( page si2e( margins( and so on'( which affect the appearance of the final document( but the indi)idual documents retain their original characteristics. The relationship between styles in a master document and its subdocuments is as follows&
Custom styles used in subdocuments( such as paragraph styles( are automatically

imported into the master document.
Gf more than one subdocument uses a custom style with the same name %for eCample(
my/odyTeCt'( then only the one in the first subdocument to be lin+ed is imported into the master document.
Gf a style with the same name eCists in the master document and in the subdocuments %for
eCample( .efault -tyle'( then the style is applied as defined in the master document.
The styles in the subdocuments are only changed in the master document( so when a
subdocument is opened for editing the original styles are not affected.
Gf you use the same document template for the master document and its subdocuments( the subdocuments will loo+ the same when they are loaded into the master document as they do when )iewed as indi)idual files. 7hen you modify or create a style( ma+e the change in the template %not in the master document or any of the subdocuments'. Then when you reopen the master document or a subdocument( the styles will update from the template.
&ip
3&&
Creating a master document: scenarios

7hich you choose from the three most common scenarios for creating a master document depends on the current state of your document&
You ha)e one eCisting document %a boo+' that you want to split into se)eral subdocuments
%chapters' that will be controlled by the master document.
You ha)e se)eral eCisting documents %chapters' by one or more authors that you want to
combine into one boo+( controlled by the master document.
You ha)e no eCisting documents but intend to write a long boo+ containing se)eral
chapters( possibly by multiple authors. 7e will loo+ at each of these scenarios in turn.
$plitting a document into master and subdocuments

7hen you ha)e one eCisting document that you want to split into a master document and se)eral subdocuments( you can ha)e 7riter split the document automatically at headings with an outline le)el of your choice. *lthough this method is @uic+ and easy( some cleanup wor+ may be necessary&
The page style of the first page %and possibly all pages' in each subdocument re)erts to
.efault -tyle. Gf you are using custom page styles and you want the subdocuments to use the same page layout( whether part of the master document or standalone( you will need to reapply at least the first page style.
The automatically generated file names for the subdocuments are maindocname;.odt(
where I is 1( 2( 3( and so on. Gf you ha)e a #reface or other TchapterU starting with a .eading * before Chapter 1( the file names will not directly correspond to the chapter numbers. You may wish to rename the subdocumentsV see T*dding( deleting( or renaming subdocumentsU on page 3EE.
Gf the original document is associated with a template( the .=.0 file will also be associated
with that template( but the subdocuments will not. The subdocuments will inherit the styles in the original document( but their association with the template will be lost. 8ow to do it: 1' =pen the document and choose File 9 $end 9 Create /aster 4ocument. 2' =n the !ame and #ath of 0aster .ocument dialog %5igure 3E<'& a' !a)igate to the folder where you want to sa)e the master document and its subdocuments %or create a new folder'. b' Type a name for the master document in the )ile name boC. c' Gn the separated by list ( choose the outline le)el where the file should be split into subdocuments. "sually this is ;utline: :evel 1 for a chapter heading( but your document may be structured differently. 5or more information about outline le)els( see T.efining a hierarchy of headingsU in Chapter <( Gntroduction to -tyles. d' $ea)e the /utomatic file name e-tension option selected( and clic+ $ave to split the document into subdocuments and create the master document. Gf you selected Outline Level * and the paragraph style at that le)el is .eading *( each of the subdocuments begins with a .eading * paragraph.
3&'
)igure 3'& Splitting a document into master and subdocuments
Combining several documents into a master document

7hen you ha)e se)eral eCisting documents( you can combine them into one document controlled by a master document. This method wor+s best when all of the documents were created from the same template( but you can also use it when the documents ha)e been created from different templates. This method is especially useful when the subdocuments are created or maintained by multiple writers. 5or eCample( you might be creating an anthology of short stories( a boo+ of symposium papers or compiling a set of separate widget test results with a standard company front page. 8ow to do it: 7e will go with the widget test results scenario as a )ery simple eCample. 1' =pen the test results front page document being used as the master document. To a)oid creating too many subdocuments from this document when it is con)erted to a master document( ha)e only one le)el 1 heading present. Gf there are more( temporarily change them to lower le)el headings and note which they are %add( for eCample( an asteris+ at the end of each heading to remind you which ha)e to re)ert to le)el 1 headings later'. 2' -elect File 9 $end 9 Create /aster 4ocument, name and sa)e this master document %see T6ow to do it&E on page 3<E for full information'. $et us assume our original document was named 5ront#age with a single $e)el 1 heading( and that when we created the master document %=.0 file' we named it Test5ile. The master document is a blan+ file containing only one section. This can be seen by opening the =.0 file and declining to update the lin+s. *lso created at the same time was a subdocument named Test5ile1( an =.T file containing the teCt from the 5ront#age file. 7hen opening the =.0 file and clic+ing Jes to update all lin+s( this file is lin+ed in to the master document to pro)ide the original content. The original 5ront#age file is left intact in its folder.
3&(
)igure 3'' +est)ile documents created from )rontPage 3' =pen the master document and clic+ Jes to update lin+s. The master document opens with the !a)igator open by default. >' Clic+ and hold on the nsert icon( mo)e the cursor down to File and release the button.
)igure 3'( /dding files to the master document A' !a)igate to the location of the test results files %4esults1( 4esults2 and so forth'. -elect the first file to insert( 4esults1 for eCample( and clic+ nsert. The file is inserted abo)e the eCisting entry. <' Clic+ the /ove 2p icon to ha)e the Test5ile teCt abo)e the 4esults1 teCt %file contents are inserted abo)e the selected file in the master document'. E' 4epeat from step > as often as re@uired. Gt does not matter which file is highlighted in the master document when you insert the neCt one( Just select the inserted file and use the /ove 2p or /ove 4own icons to position it as re@uired.
)igure 3'= <oving subdocuments B' To edit the master document( to perhaps add a widget serial number and a clientWs name( in the master document right9clic+ Test5ile1 and select -dit from the conteCt menu. *dd the re@uired content to the file which opens( sa)e and close the file %see T3diting a master documentT on page 3E< for more detailed information'. D' -elect &ools 9 2pdate 9 :inks from the 0enu bar( or clic+ and hold on the 2pdate icon in the !a)igator and mo)e the cursor to :inks and release the button. *ll the edits in the master document will now show.
3&=
$tarting with no e'isting documents

7hen you start with no eCisting documents( you can set up e)erything the way you want from the beginning. 5ollow these steps( in the order gi)en. 3ach step is eCplained in detail in the following subsections. -tep 1. #lan the proJect -tep 2. Create a template -tep 3. Create the master document -tep >. Create subdocuments -tep A. *dd some pages to the master document -tep <. Gnsert the subdocuments into the master document -tep E. *dd table of contents( bibliography( indeC
$tep 1. Plan the proDect

*lthough you can ma+e changes at most steps in this process( the more you can plan before you start( the less wor+ you will ha)e to do to correct any problems later. 6ere are some things you need to plan. Parts of book or report re?uired. 7hat pages will be in the master document and what will be in the subdocuments? Consider as an eCample a boo+ with the parts gi)en in the table below. 0art Title %co)er' page
Copyright page Table of contents %T=C' #reface %5oreword' Chapters 1 to E GndeC
Location Gn master document

Gn master document Gn master document -ubdocument -ubdocuments Gn master document
Page, paragraph, character, frame, and numbering styles. .etermine the styles you wish to use. -ee Chapter <( Gntroduction to -tyles( and Chapter E( 7or+ing with -tyles( for instructions on how to create or modify styles and eCamples of the use of styles in boo+ design. #ay particular attention to setting up headings using styles( as described in T.efining a hierarchy of headingsU in Chapter <( Gntroduction to -tyles. Fields and Auto&e't entries, as re?uired. -ee Chapter 3( 7or+ing with TeCt( and Chapter 1>( 7or+ing with 5ields( for ideas. ;ne or more templates for master and subdocuments. Gf you are starting a new proJect( create the master document and all the subdocuments from the same template. !ot using the same template can create style inconsistencies that could cause your document not to loo+ as you eCpect. 5or eCample( if two subdocuments ha)e a style with the same name that is formatted differently in each document( the master document will use the formatting from the first subdocument that was added. Page numbering. Gn our eCample( the pages are numbered se@uentially from the title page. %The title page style can be defined not to show the page number( but it will still count as page 1.' Therefore the first chapter begins on a higher number page( for eCample page A. To create a boo+ in which the page numbering restarts at 1 for the first chapter( you need to do some additional wor+. -ee T4estarting page numberingU on page 3EA.
3'$ LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
$tep #. Create a template

You can create your template from an eCisting document or template that contains some or all of the page( paragraph( character( and other styles you want for this document( or you can create the template from a blan+ document. 5or more about templates( see Chapter 10( 7or+ing with Templates. /e sure to use File 9 $ave As &emplate when creating the template.
* master document %.=.0' created from a template is associated with that template( but the name of the template is not shown in the .ocument #roperties dialog %File 9 Properties' as it is for .=.T files. Gt can be added as a custom property if you want to record it as a reminder.
>ote
$tep %. Create the master document

Gt does not matter in what order you create the master and subdocuments( and you do not ha)e to create all the subdocuments at the same time( when you are starting the proJect. You can add new subdocuments at any time( as you need them. 5ollow this process to create the master document& 1' =pen a new document from the template you created in -tep 2( by choosing File 9 >ew 9 &emplates( opening /y &emplates %or other location'( then selecting the template you created. /e sure the first page of this new document is set to the page style you want for the first page of the final documentV if it is not( change it. Gn our eCample( the style for the first page is +itle page. 2' Gf any teCt or page brea+s came into this document from the template( delete the teCt. %The T=C( indeC( and any fields in headers and footers can stay.' 3' Clic+ File 9 $end 9 Create /aster 4ocument. -a)e the master document in the folder for this proJect. 7e will return to this master document later. 5or now( you can either lea)e it open or close it.
"sing File 9 >ew 9 /aster 4ocument will create a master document file %.=.0' associated with the default template. Gf your document is( or will be( based on a custom template( use the method described abo)e.
>ote
$tep ). Create subdocuments

* subdocument is no different from any other teCt document. Gt becomes a subdocument only when it is lin+ed into a master document and opened from within the master document. -ome settings in the master document will o)erride the settings in a subdocument( but only when the document is being )iewed( manipulated( or printed through the master document. Create a subdocument in the same way as you create any ordinary document& 1' =pen a blan+ document based on the proJect template %)ery important' by choosing File 9 >ew 9 &emplates( opening /y &emplates %or other location'( then selecting the re@uired template. 2' .elete any unwanted teCt or other material that was brought in from the template( and set the first page to the page style you specified for the first page of a chapter. 3' Clic+ File 9 $ave As. i)e the document a suitable name and sa)e it in the folder for this proJect.
3'*
Gf you already ha)e some of the chapters written( the files are probably not based on the template you Just created for this proJect. You will need to change the template attached to the eCisting files. You can do this manually by opening the re@uired template and copying and pasting content into the blan+ template.
$tep +. Add some pages to the master document

To assist you( do the following&
0a+e sure paragraph mar+s are showing. You can set them in &ools 9 ;ptions 9
:ibre;ffice !riter 9 Formatting Aids( or clic+ the >onprinting Characters icon the -tandard toolbar or press 8trl9)*$. on
-how teCt boundaries( table boundaries( and section boundaries %&ools 9 ;ptions 9
:ibre;ffice 9 Appearance'. Gf your master document does not contain any re@uired Tfront matterU such as a title page( copyright page( or T=C page( add them now. The eCample in this section uses the se@uence of page styles gi)en in T-tep 1. #lan the proJectU on page 3E0. 1' Type the contents of the title page %or lea)e placeholders and fill in later'. 7ith the insertion point in the last blan+ paragraph on the page( clic+ nsert 9 /anual 3reak. =n the Gnsert /rea+ dialog( select Page break and the page style for the second page %8opyright page in our eCample'( and lea)e the Change page number option deselected. Clic+ ;6.
)igure 3($ 2nserting a page brea7 between the title page and the copyright page 2' Type the contents of the copyright page %or lea)e placeholders'. 7ith the insertion point in the last blan+ paragraph on the page( insert another manual page brea+( this time setting the page style to +able of 8ontents page. 3' =n the Table of Contents page( lea)e a blan+ paragraph or two or insert a T=C % nsert 9 nde'es and &ables 9 nde'es and &ables'. The T=C will not ha)e any contents until you add the subdocuments( but you should see a gray mar+ or boC indicating its location. 5or more about inserting and formatting T=Cs( see Chapter 12( Tables of Contents( GndeCes( and /ibliographies.
>ote
.epending on the style definitions for the first paragraph %usually a heading' on the Copyright and T=C pages( you may not need to insert manual page brea+s.
3':
$tep (. nsert the subdocuments into the master document

!ow we are ready to add the subdocuments.
-ubdocuments are inserted into a master document before the item highlighted in the !a)igator. Gf you insert the last subdocument first( and then insert the other subdocuments before the last one( they will end up in the correct se@uence without the necessity of mo)ing them up or down in the list.
&ip
1' .isplay the !a)igator %clic+ =iew 9 >avigator( or press )%( or clic+ the >avigator icon . 2' /e sure the !a)igator is showing the master )iew %see T"sing the !a)igatorU on page 3B0'. Clic+ on the &oggle icon at the upper left to toggle between regular and master )iews. 3' =n the !a)igator( select &e't( then clic+ and hold on the nsert icon( mo)e the mouse pointer down( and clic+ File.
)igure 3(* 2nserting a subdocument into a master document using the Davigator * standard 5ile =pen dialog appears. -elect the re@uired file %which you created in -tep >' and clic+ nsert. This eCample uses E chapters and a prefaceV we will load Chapter E first( as suggested in the Tip abo)e. The inserted file is listed in the !a)igator before the TeCt item( as shown in 5igure 3B2.
)igure 3(: Davigator after inserting one subdocument >' /ecause the +e-t section contains the title page and other material( highlight it and clic+ the /ove 2p icon to mo)e it to the top of the list. A' 6ighlight the subdocument you Just inserted %Chapter E'( then clic+ and hold on the nsert icon( mo)e the mouse pointer( and clic+ File to insert the first subdocumentV in this eCample( #reface. Chapter E remains highlighted. 4epeat with Chapter 1( Chapter 2( and so on until all the subdocuments ha)e been added to the list. The !a)igator will now loo+ something li+e 5igure 3B3. <' -a)e the master document again.
3'3
)igure 3(3. +he Davigator showing a series of files in a master document
$tep ". Add table of contents, bibliography, inde'

You can generate a table of contents( bibliography( or indeC for the boo+( using the master document. You must insert these items into a teCt section in the master document. 5or more about these document elements( see Chapter 12( Creating Tables of Contents( GndeCes( and /ibliographies. #ut the insertion point on the page in the first teCt section where the table of contents is to go and choose nsert 9 nde'es and &ables 9 nde'es and &ables to create the table of contents. Gf you do not ha)e a TeCt section at the end of the master document( insert one before the last subdocument( then mo)e it down so it is after the last subdocument. !ow( if you ha)e included bibliographic entries in your subdocuments( you can put the insertion point on the page in this last teCt section where the bibliography is to go and create the bibliography. Gf you ha)e included indeC entries in your subdocuments( put the insertion point on the page in the last teCt section where the indeC is to go and create the indeC. 5igure 3B> shows the !a)igator after addition of a T=C and indeC.
)igure 3(# Davigator showing subdocuments@ table of contents@ and inde- in a master document
3'# LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
Cestarting page numbering

The eCample in the pre)ious section showed a )ery basic collection of files with se@uential page numbering. This is useful for many documents( including e9boo+s( but a typical printed boo+ has the following se@uence of page numbers&
!o page numbers on co)er page or copyright page $ower9case roman numerals in the front matter( starting with i *rabic numerals in the body of the document( starting with 1 #age numbering se@uential through the rest of the boo+
To set up a master document to produce such a boo+( you need to define a different paragraph style for the heading of the first chapter and assign two special characteristics to it. -'ample 3ach chapter may start with a .eading * paragraph( set up on the TeCt 5low tab of the #aragraph -tyle dialog to start on a new page %5igure 3BA'. The #age number is set to 0( with the effect that numbering continues from the number of the pre)ious page.
)igure 3(% +e-t )low tab of Paragraph Style dialog for .eading * $oo+ on the =utline M !umbering tab %5igure 3B<' of this dialog to see what outline le)el .eading * is assigned to. "sually this will be =utline $e)el 1. The le)el cannot be changed here because it has been set in &ools 9 ;utline >umbering.
)igure 3(& Outline L Dumbering tab of Paragraph Style dialog for .eading *
3'%
=nly one paragraph style can be assigned to =utline $e)el 1 through &ools 9 ;utline >umbering. 6owe)er( you can assign additional paragraph styles to any outline le)el by using the =utline M !umbering tab on the #aragraph -tyle dialog. Therefore( you want to define a style called .eading * 8hapter * that is identical in appearance to .eading * but has one essential difference& on the TeCt 5low tab( set the #age number to 1 %5igure 3BE'. Then( on the =utline M !umbering tab( set the =utline le)el to $e)el 1 %5igure 3BB'. This ensures that the heading will appear in the Table of Contents along with the other chapter headings. %The !umbering -tyle for this heading is !one( as it was not assigned an outline le)el through the =utline !umbering dialog. !ow( assign the new style to the first paragraph of Chapter 1( and youFre done.
)igure 3(' Set the page number to restart at * for this heading style
)igure 3(( /ssign the style to outline level
-diting a master document

*fter creating a master document( you may want to change its appearance or contents.
Changing the appearance of the master document

You can change the styles in the template as your proJect de)elops. .o not ma+e changes to styles in the master document or in any of the subdocumentsQma+e those changes in the template.
3'&
To update the master document %and all of the subdocuments' with changes to the template( Just open the master document. You will get two messages& first( to as+ if you want to update all lin+sV and second( if you want to apply the changed styles. *nswer Ges to both of these messages.
-diting subdocuments
You cannot edit a subdocument from within the master document. Gnstead( you must open the subdocument( either by double9clic+ing on it in the master documentFs !a)igator( or by opening it from outside the master document. Then you can edit it Just as you would edit any other document. Gf( while editing a subdocument( you want to ma+e changes to the styles that apply to the master document( follow the recommendations in TChanging the appearance of the master documentU abo)e. Gf you change the contents of any subdocument( you need to manually update the table of contents( bibliography( and indeC from within the master document.
Adding, deleting, or renaming subdocuments

To add a subdocument( follow the method described in T-tep <. Gnsert the subdocuments into the master documentT on page 3E3. To delete a subdocument( right9clic+ on its file name in the !a)igator and choose .elete. Gf you rename a subdocument by changing its file name( the neCt time you update lin+s in the master document( that subdocument will show up as a bro+en lin+ %shown in red'. You can fiC this by right9clic+ing on it in the !a)igator( choosing 3dit $in+( and selecting the renamed fileV howe)er( the file name shown in the !a)igator does not change %only the lin+ changes'. This can be @uite confusing( so a better strategy is to delete the subdocument from the !a)igator and then add the renamed file.
Cross.referencing between subdocuments

The methods described earlier in this chapter are all most writers will need when using master documents. 6owe)er( you might want to include automatically updated cross9references between subdocuments. This section describes how to do this. The process to create cross9references between subdocuments is time consuming( but it wor+s.
Preparing items as targets for cross.referencing

/efore you can insert a cross9reference to anything that is not automatically shown on the Cross9references tab of the 5ields dialog( such as a heading( you must prepare or TsetU that heading as an item to be referenced. To do this( you can either use boo+mar+s or set references. 7hen you set references( be sure to select the entire teCt you want to use as the reference( such as a heading or figure number. 8eep a list of your names for the reference fields( and be sure each name is uni@ue. =ne way to +eep trac+ of this information is to sa)e it in a separate file. The field names are case9sensiti)e. You can chec+ the field name by holding the cursor o)er the referenced item. Gn our eCample %5igure 3BD'( the heading has the field name word count.
)igure 3(= )inding the field name for a heading

8hapter *3 Wor7ing with <aster Documents 3''
.sin boo&#ar&s
/oo+mar+s are listed in the !a)igator and can be accessed directly from there with a single mouse clic+. To insert a boo+mar+& 1' -elect the teCt you want to boo+mar+. Clic+ nsert 9 3ookmark. 2' =n the Gnsert /oo+mar+ dialog( the larger boC lists any pre)iously defined boo+mar+s. Type a name for the new boo+mar+ in the top boC. Clic+ ;6.
)igure 3=$ 2nserting a boo7mar7
"ettin references
=pen the subdocument in which you want to set references. 1' Clic+ nsert 9 Cross.reference. 2' =n the 8ross"references tab of the 5ields dialog %5igure 3D1'( clic+ $et Ceference in the +ype list. The Selection list shows any references that ha)e been defined. You can lea)e this page open while you set many headings as references. 3' Clic+ in the document and highlight the teCt of the first heading to be used as a target for a cross9reference. Clic+ on the 5ields dialog. The teCt of the heading will appear in the ?alue boC in the lower right of the dialog. Gn the Dame boC( type some teCt by which you can identify this heading. >' Clic+ nsert. The teCt you typed in the Dame boC now appears in the Selection list. A' 4epeat steps 3 and > as often as re@uired( +eeping a note of your references as needed. <' 4epeat for other subdocuments if wanted. -a)e and close.
nserting the cross.references

1' =pen the master document. Gn the !a)igator( select a subdocument( right9clic+ and choose -dit from the conteCt menu. The subdocument opens for editing. 2' Gn the subdocument( place the cursor where you want the cross9reference to appear. Clic+ nsert 9 Cross Ceference. 3' =n the 8ross"references tab of the 5ields dialog %5igure 3D2'( select nsert Ceference in the +ype list on the left hand side. The Selection list in the middle column shows only the reference field names for the subdocument you are using( so ignore that list and chec+ the list you created manually in T-etting referencesU. -elect Ceference in the 2nsert reference to list.
3'(
)igure 3=* Setting te-t to be used as a target for a cross"reference
)igure 3=: )ields dialog showing manual entry of field name >' Gn the >ame field in the lower right hand column( type the name of the reference you set in the subdocument you are referring to. Gn our eCample( the reference is in Chapter 3( and its name is word count.
3'=
A' Clic+ nsert, type any teCt you want to appear between the reference and page number %such as Ton pageU'( and then insert another reference with Page from the 2nsert reference to list. The cross9references will show an error as shown in 5igure 3D3. 7hen you ho)er the mouse pointer o)er one of these fields( you will see the field name.
)igure 3=3 ?iewing the field name %You can turn on the display of field codes by clic+ing =iew 9 Field >ames. The two error fields shown in 5igure 3D3 now loo+ li+e 5igure 3D>.'
)igure 3=# Displaying field codes <' *fter you ha)e inserted all the cross9references re@uired in the subdocument( sa)e and close it and return to the master document window. -elect &ools 9 2pdate 9 :inks from the 0enu bar( or clic+ and hold on the 2pdate icon in the !a)igator and mo)e the cursor to :inks and release the button. *ll the edits in the master document will now show. 7ithin the master document( na)igate to the page of the subdocument on which you inserted the cross9reference field. You should now see the teCt of the cross9reference appear in the spot where you inserted it. Gf it does not wor+( sa)e the master document( close it( and open it again( updating the lin+s.
)igure 3=% )ield contents visible This techni@ue also wor+s if you open a subdocument directly in step 2 %that is( not from within the master document' and insert a cross9reference field.
2sing the >avigator

The !a)igator is a )ery useful tool that helps you mo)e @uic+ly to specific parts of your document. Gt also pro)ides information about the content of the document and enables you to reorgani2e some of the content. 5or eCample( if each chapter in your final boo+ is a separate document( then in the master document they can be reorderedV the references are renumbered automatically and the table of contents and indeC can be updated. Gn 7riter( the !a)igator has two distinct forms. =ne form is used in ordinary teCt documents and the other in master documents. Gn an ordinary teCt document( the !a)igator displays lists of the graphics( tables( indeC entries( hyperlin+s( references( and other items in the document( as shown on the left hand side of 5igure 3D<. Clic+ the indicator %L sign or triangle' by any list to display the contents of the list. You can double9clic+ an entry in the !a)igator and Jump immediately to that place in the document.
3($
Gn a master document( you can toggle between the regular and master )iews by clic+ing on the &oggle icon at the upper left. Gn the master )iew( the !a)igator lists the subdocuments and teCt sections( as shown on the right hand side of 5igure 3D<. The use of the !a)igator in a master document is co)ered in more detail later in this chapter %see T-tep <. Gnsert the subdocuments into the master documentU on page 3E3 and TCross9referencing between subdocumentsU on page 3EE'.
)igure 3=& +he Davigator for a te-t document 4left5 and for a master document 4right5
Creating one file from a master document and its subdocuments

0aster documents are .odm files containing lin+ed subdocuments( which are in .odt format. *lthough lin+ed files are )ery useful when writing and editing a large document such as a boo+( sometimes you might need to ha)e a copy of the entire boo+ in one file. To eCport a master document to a .odt file %without affecting the original .odm file'& 1' =pen the master document. Choose File 9 -'port from the menu bar. 2' =n the 3Cport dialog %5igure 3DE'( type a name for the eCported .odt file and choose ;4F &e't 4ocument A.odtB from the )ile format list %it should be the default choice'. Clic+ -'port. This step creates from the .odm file( a write protected .odt file( with each subdocument in a separate section.
3(*
)igure 3=' ,-porting a master document to an Open Document +e-t 4.odt5 file 3' Close the master document and open the new .odt file( updating all lin+s. >' To brea+ the lin+s and remo)e the write protect( go to Format 9 $ections( select the first item in the Section list( then press Shift9clic7 on the last item in the list in order to select all the items in the list. .eselect both the :ink in the Lin7 section and Protected in the Write protection section. A' Clic+ ;6. <' Gf you wish to eliminate some or all of the sections to ha)e a plain teCt document( select the sections you wish to remo)e( and clic+ Cemove. The contents of those sections remain in the documentV only the section mar+ers are remo)ed. Clic+ ;6.
Problem solving: Anchoring pictures to a page

-ome combinations of choices do not wor+ together( and some techni@ues that affect master documents are not at all ob)ious. This section describes one problem and what to do about it. &he problem * picture %graphic' anchored Tto pageU in a subdocument is not displayed in the master document although it always appears correctly in the subdocument. /ecause the master document reorgani2es the page flow( page numbers( and cross9references when it collates all the subdocuments together( the absolute reference to a page I in a subdocument is lost in the master document. The picture loses its anchor reference and simply disappears. &he solution To a)oid this problem but +eep pictures positioned precisely on a particular page( anchor the pictures as follows& 1' 4ight9clic+ on the picture and choose Picture from the conteCt menu. 2' =n the +ype tab of the #icture dialog %5igure 3DB'( set the anchor to +o character or +o paragraph. 3' "nder Position( choose suitable hori2ontal and )ertical references to the page. Clic+ ;6 to sa)e the changes.
3(:
)igure 3=( /nchoring a graphic and setting its position on a page
3(3
8hapter *# Wor7ing with )ields
ntroduction to fields
5ields are eCtremely useful features of 7riter. They are used for a )ariety of purposesV for eCample( data that changes %such as the current date or the total number of pages' or might change %the name of a product or boo+ under de)elopment'( user9defined numbering se@uences( automatic cross9references( and conditional content %words or paragraphs that are )isible or printed in some conditions but not others'. GndeC entries are also fields. This chapter describes some common uses of fields. * full discussion of fields and their use is beyond the scope of this boo+. #ower users can find more details in the application 6elp.
5ields ha)e a gray bac+ground when )iewed on screen( unless you ha)e deselected the Field shadings option or changed the color of field shadings on the /ppearance page of the &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice dialog. This gray bac+ground does not show when you print the file to hard copy or #.5. To turn field shadings on or off @uic+ly( choose =iew 9 Field $hadings or press 8trl9)(.
&ip
Euick and easy field entry

You can @uic+ly insert common fields into your document by choosing nsert 9 Fields from the menu bar and selecting the re@uired field from the list( as shown in 5igure 3DD.
)igure 3== 2nserting common fields
2sing document properties to hold metadata and information that changes

The #roperties dialog %File 9 PropertiesB for a document has siC tabs. The information on the General page and the Statistics page is generated by the program. =ther information %the name of the person on the Created and 0odified lines of the General page' is deri)ed from the 0ser Data page in &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice. The 2nternet page is rele)ant only to 6T0$ documents %7riter/7eb'. The file sharing options on the Security page are discussed elsewhere in this boo+.
3(&
"se the Description and 8ustom Properties pages to hold&
0etadata to assist in classifying( sorting( storing( and retrie)ing documents. -ome of this
metadata is eCported to the closest e@ui)alent in 6T0$ and #.5V some fields ha)e no e@ui)alent and are not eCported.
Gnformation that changes. You can store data for use in fields in your documentV for
eCample( the title of the document( contact information for a proJect participant( or the name of a product might change during the course of a proJect. This dialog can be used in a template( where the field names can ser)e as reminders to writers of information they need to include. $ater in this chapter( we will see how to use this information in fields. You can return to this dialog at any time and change the information you entered. 7hen you do so( all of the references to that information will change where)er they appear in the document. 5or eCample( on the Description page %5igure >00' you might need to change the contents of the +itle field from the draft title to the production title.
)igure #$$ +he Description page of the documentUs Properties dialog To open the #roperties dialog( choose File 9 Properties. "se the 8ustom Properties page %5igure >01' to store information that does not fit into the fields supplied on the other pages of this dialog. 7hen the Custom #roperties page is first opened in a new document( it may be blan+. %Gf the new document is based on a template( this page may contain fields.' Clic+ Add to insert a row of boCes into which you can enter your custom properties.
The Dame boC includes a drop9down list of typical choicesV scroll down to see all the
choices. Gf none of the choices meet your needs( you can type a new name into the boC.
Gn the +ype column( you can choose from teCt( dateLtime( date( number( duration( or yes/no
for each field. You cannot create new types.
Gn the ?alue column( type or select what you want to appear in the document where this
field is used. Choices may be limited to specific data types depending on the selection in the Type columnV for eCample( if the Type selection is .ate( the Palue for that property is limited to a date.
To remo)e a custom property( clic+ the button at the end of the row. &ip
To change the format of the .ate )alue( go to &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :anguage $ettings 9 :anguages and change the $ocale setting. /e carefull This change affects all open documents( not Just the current one.
3('
)igure #$* 8ustom Properties page@ showing drop"down lists of names and types
2sing other fields to hold information that changes

=ne way that people use fields is to hold information that is li+ely to change during the course of a proJect. 5or eCample( the name of a manager( a product( or e)en your entire company may change Just before the document is due to be printed. Gf you ha)e inserted the changeable information as fields( you can change the information in one place( and it will automatically change in all the places where that field occurs. 7riter pro)ides se)eral places where you can store the information referred to by a field. 7e will loo+ at some of them here. -e)en document properties %.ate( Time( #age !umber( #age Count( -ubJect( Title( and *uthor' are on the nsert 9 Fields menu %5igure 3DD'. To insert one of these fields( clic+ on it in the menu. -ome of these fields get their information from the .ocument #roperties dialog %5igure >00.' =ther document properties are on the Doc2nformation and Document pages of the 5ields dialog %5igure >02 and 5igure >03'( reached by choosing nsert 9 Fields 9 ;ther or pressing 8trl9):. !otice the 8ustom item in the +ype list of the Doc2nformation pageV this is deri)ed from the 8ustom Properties page of the .ocument #roperties dialog %5igure >01'. To insert one of these fields( select it in the +ype list and then select from the Select and )ormat lists if choices appear. 5inally( clic+ nsert.
3((
)igure #$: 2nserting a Date <odified field using the Doc2nformation page of the )ields dialog
)igure #$3 2nserting a )ile name field using the Document page of the )ields dialog -ome of these items are pic+ed up from the 0ser Data page of the &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice dialog %co)ered in Chapter 2( -etting up 7riter'( so ma+e sure the information on that page is correct.
*lthough these fields are often used to hold information that changes( you can ma+e the content unchangeable by selecting the Fi'ed content option %)isible in 5igure >02( lower right' when inserting the field. Gf necessary( you can come bac+ to this dialog later and deselect this option to ma+e the field )ariable again.
&ip
3(=
2sing Auto&e't to insert often.used fields

Gf you use the same fields often( you will want a @uic+ and easy way to insert them. "se *utoTeCt for this purpose. To define an *utoTeCt entry for a field& 1' Gnsert a field into your document( as described pre)iously. 2' -elect the field you inserted( and then choose -dit 9 Auto&e't %or press 8trl9)3'. 3' =n the *utoTeCt dialog( choose the group where this new entry will be stored %in this eCample( it is going into <y /uto+e-t'( type a name for the entry( and change the suggested shortcut if you wish. >' Clic+ the Auto&e't button and clic+ >ew to ha)e the entry inserted as a field. .o not choose >ew Ate't onlyB because the *utoTeCt entry will be plain teCt( not a field. %The selection Dew does not appear until you ha)e selected a group and typed a name for the entry.' Clic+ Close to close the *utoTeCt dialog.
)igure #$# 8reating a new /uto+e-t entry !ow whene)er you want to insert this field at the cursor position( type the shortcut( and then press )3.
4efining your own numbering se?uences

You may want to define your own numbering se@uences( for eCample to use in situations where you do not always want the number at the start of the paragraph or where you want more control than the built9in numbering choices gi)e you. This topic describes how to create and use a numbering se@uence( using a Tnumber range )ariableU field.
Create a number range variable

To create a number range )ariable using *rabic %1( 2( 3' numbers& 1' #lace the insertion point in a blan+ paragraph in your document. 2' Choose nsert 9 Fields 9 ;ther or press 8trl9): and select the ?ariables page. 3' Gn the +ype list( select >umber range. Gn the )ormat list( select Arabic A1 # %B. Type whate)er you want in the Dame field. %7e ha)e used $tep in this eCample.'
3=$
)igure #$% Defining a number range variable >' Clic+ nsert. The name of the )ariable %$tep' now appears in the Selection list( and a number field %showing 1' appears at the insertion point in your document. The 5ields dialog remains open( so you may need to mo)e it out of the way to see the field in the document. A' Gf you clic+ se)eral more times on the nsert button in the 5ields dialog( the numbers #, %, )( and so on will appear in the document. !ow you may want to change the -tep se@uence to a different number( forwards from the current )alue( or bac+wards to a pre)ious )alue( so you can use the same se@uence name more than once in your document %for eCample( to begin each set of instructions'. To do that( you need to insert a new field of the same name( while instructing $ibre=ffice to force the )alue to the new choice. 1' =pen the 5ields dialog to the ?ariables page. 0a+e sure the )ariable name $tep appears in the Dame boC. 2' Gn the ?alue boC( type 1 %we will illustrate a numbering restart here( but any number will wor+'( as shown in 5igure >0<. Clic+ nsert. 3' To continue with the normal se@uence %that is( to ha)e the neCt -tep )alue be #'( you need to delete the contents of the Palue boC after inserting at step 2.
3=*
)igure #$& Defining a field to restart a number range variable
2se Auto&e't to insert a number range field

You certainly do not want to go through all of that e)ery time you want to put in a -tep number. Gnstead( create two *utoTeCt entries( one for the Step 4?alueR*5 field %call it $tep1( for eCample' and one for the Step R Step9* field %$tep>e't'. Then insert the fields in the same way you would insert any other *utoTeCt. -ee T"sing *utoTeCt to insert often9used fieldsU on page 3D0. You can create similar fields for substeps or other se@uences that you want to be numbered with letters %a( b( c'( 4oman numerals %i( ii( iii'( or some other se@uence. Gn the 5ields dialog( choose the re@uired format in the )ormat list when creating the field codes.
Gf a user9defined )ariable is not in use in the document( the icon neCt to the ?alue boC is acti)e. You can delete the )ariable by clic+ing this icon. To remo)e a )ariable that is used in the current document( first delete from the document all fields using that )ariable %or con)ert them all to teCt( as described on page 3DB'( and then remo)e the )ariable from the list.
&ip
2sing automatic cross.references

Gf you type in cross9references to other parts of the document( those references can easily get out of date if you reword a heading( add or remo)e figures( or reorgani2e topics. 4eplace any typed cross9references with automatic ones and( when you update fields( all the references will update automatically to show the current wording or page numbers.
3=:
&ip
-ome people use 7riterFs 6yperlin+ feature for cross9references( but it has the maJor disad)antage that the )isible teCt of the hyperlin+ does not change if you change the teCt of the item to which it lin+s. 5or that reason( you are ad)ised to use cross9references in most situations. The eCception is when you are creating a document to be sa)ed as 6T0$V cross9 references do not become hyperlin+s in an 6T0$ document.
The 8ross"references page of the 5ields dialog %5igure >0E' lists some items( such as headings( numbered paragraphs( and boo+mar+s. Gf figure captions( table captions( user9defined number range )ariables( and some other items ha)e been defined in a document( that type also appears in the list.
)igure #$' +he 8ross"references page of the )ields dialog
nserting cross.references
To insert a cross9reference to a heading( figure( or other item shown on the 8ross"references page& 1' Gn your document( place the cursor where you want the cross9reference to appear. 2' Gf the 5ields dialog is not open( choose nsert 9 Cross Ceference or press 8trl9):. =n the 8ross"references page %5igure >0E'( in the +ype list( clic+ the type of item you are referencing %for eCample( 6eading or 5igure'. 3' You can lea)e this page open while you insert many cross9references. >' Clic+ on the re@uired item in the Selection list( which shows both automatically created entries %for eCample 6eadings' as well as user9defined references %for eCample boo+mar+s'. A' Gn the 2nsert reference to list( choose the type of reference re@uired. The choices )ary with the item being referenced. 5or headings( usually you will choose Ceference %to insert the full teCt of the heading' or Page %to insert the number of the page the heading is on'.
3=3
5or figures( you will usually choose Category and >umber %to insert the word T5igureU and its number'( Ceference %to insert the word T5igureU with its number and the full teCt of the caption'( Page %to insert the number of the page the figure is on'( or >umbering %to insert only the figure number'. <' Clic+ nsert. 5or a full list of the reference formats a)ailable( and their use( consult the 6elp.
Available formats
5or all the types of reference( you can select one of the following formats&
#age& the page number of the target Chapter& the number of the chapter where the referenced target is located. 4eference& the full teCt set as reference. *bo)e//elow& Gnserts the words abo)e or below depending on the position of the field relati)e to the referenced target. using the formatting specified in the page style. This is )ery useful when putting a reference to a page in the front matter where roman numerals are usually employed.
*s #age -tyle& similar to #age( this inserts the page number where the reference is( but
Gf you select 6eadings or !umbered #aragraphs as type( the following two additional options become a)ailable&
!umber %no conteCt'& inserts only the number of the heading or of the numbered
paragraph. 5or eCample( if referencing a numbered item 2.>( it inserts >.
!umber %full conteCt'& inserts the full number including higher hierarchical le)els. 5or
eCample( if referencing a numbered item 2.>( the full numbering %2.>' is inserted. 5inally( for obJects inserted with captions such as a table or a figure( you can choose&
Category and !umber& inserts both the category and number of the referenced obJect %for
eCample( 5igure <'. This is generally the most used formatting for figures and tables.
Caption TeCt& inserts the full caption of the referenced obJect. 5or eCample( 5igure <& This is
an eCample figure.
!umbering& inserts the se@uential number of the referenced obJect( without the category
%for eCample( if referencing Table 2( the field will contain only the number 2'.
Preparing items as targets for cross.referencing

=ccasionally you might want to insert a cross9reference to something that is not automatically shown on the 8ross"references page. /efore you can insert a cross9reference to such an item( you must prepare the item as a target to be referenced. To do this( you can either use boo+mar+s or set references. *fter a target has been defined( you can cross9reference to it as described on page 3D3. 5or an eCample of the use of this techni@ue( see T-ol)ing the page count problemU in Chapter >( 5ormatting #ages.
.sin boo&#ar&s
/oo+mar+s are listed in the !a)igator and can be accessed directly from there with a single mouse clic+. Gn 6T0$ documents( boo+mar+s are con)erted to anchors that you can Jump to using a hyperlin+. 1' -elect the teCt you want to boo+mar+. %You can also insert a boo+mar+ to a location without selecting teCt( by clic+ing in the re@uired place in the teCt.' Choose nsert 9 3ookmark.
3=#
2' =n the Gnsert /oo+mar+ dialog( the larger boC lists any pre)iously defined boo+mar+s. Type a name for this boo+mar+ in the top boC. Clic+ ;6.
)igure #$( 2nserting a boo7mar7
"ettin references
1' Choose nsert 9 Cross reference or press 8trl9):. 2' =n the 8ross"references page of the 5ields dialog %5igure >0D'( select $et Ceference in the +ype list. The Selection list shows any references that ha)e been defined. You can lea)e this dialog open while you set many items as references.
)igure #$= Setting te-t to be used as a target for a cross"reference 3' Clic+ in the document and highlight the teCt of the first item to set as a target for a cross9 reference. Clic+ on the 5ields dialog. The teCt of the item will appear in the ?alue boC in the lower right. Gn the Dame boC( type some teCt by which you can identify this item. >' Clic+ nsert. The teCt you typed in the Dame boC now appears in the Selection list. A' 4epeat steps 3 and > as often as re@uired.
3=%
2sing fields in headers and footers

You can insert fields into headers or footers( using techni@ues described earlier in this chapter&
To insert a page number( document title( author( creation date and time( current date and
time( or total page count field( use .ocument #roperties %see page 3B<' or choose nsert 9 Fields 9 SitemT from the menu bar.
You can insert a cross9reference to a boo+mar+( heading( or other item from nsert 9
Fields 9 ;ther 9 Cross.references.
Gf you ha)e used .eading * for your chapter titles( you can use a .ocument field to insert
the current chapter title( so the header or footer contents change from one chapter to the neCt. -ee 5igure >10. %7riter calls chapter titles 8hapter names.' Gf you ha)e used outline numbering on your .eading *( you can choose whether to include these numbers in the field %8hapter number and name'. "se nsert 9 Fields 9 ;ther 9 4ocument.
)igure #*$ 2nserting the current chapter name and number into your document
You can insert cross9references to other heading le)els by specifying a )alue in the Level
boC in the lower right of the Document page of the 5ields dialog %5igure >10'. That is( $e)el 1 j 6eading 1( $e)el 2 j 6eading 2( and so on.
>ote
* cross9reference field in the header of a page pic+s up the first heading of that le)el on the page( and a field in the footer pic+s up the last heading of that le)el.
To include the chapter number with the page number( position the cursor Just before the
Page field you inserted. Choose nsert 9 Fields 9 ;ther. =n the Document page of the 5ields dialog( select Chapter in the +ype column and Chapter number without separator in the )ormat column. Clic+ nsert. o to the header or footer where you inserted this field( type the character you want to appear between the chapter number and the page numberQfor eCample( a period or a dash.
3=&
The table of contents will not automatically pic+ up these chapter numbers( so you will need to ma+e a change on the nde'es and &ables menu item( as described in Chapter 12( Creating Tables of Contents( GndeCes( and /ibliographies. You can add a page count to the footerQfor eCample T#age D of 12U. Type the word T#ageU and a space in front of the Page field. Type a space( the word TofU( and a space after the Page field. Then choose nsert 9 Fields 9 Page Count.
2sing fields instead of outline numbering for appendi' numbering

Chapter <( Gntroduction to -tyles( describes how to use paragraph styles to define a hierarchy of headings to be included in a table of contents. This method has one maJor limitation& only one numbering se@uence can be specified in &ools 9 ;utline >umbering. 6owe)er( many boo+s contain *ppendiCes %typically designated *( /( C' in addition to the chapters %typically designated 1( 2( 3'. To sol)e this problem( you can use one paragraph style %6eading 1' for both chapter and appendiC names( and define two number range fields for the chapters and appendiCes respecti)ely. The number range field for chapters will use numbers( and the number range field for appendiCes will use letters. You can then use the same field in the header or footer of chapters and appendiCes. 1' .efine the first number range )ariable( in this eCample 8hapter( as described in T.efining your own numbering se@uencesU on page 3D0. To insert the field into your .eading *( type )(apter6space>. Choose nsert 9 Fields 9 ;ther. =n the ?ariables page( select >umber range( Chapter, Arabic A1 # %B. Clic+ nsert. You will need to do this manually for each .eading * that is to be a chapter title. 2' .efine and insert a second number range )ariable for the appendiCes( using >umber range( Appendi'( A 3 C'( as shown in 5igure >11. Type 7ppendi86space> and then insert the )ariable. .o this for each .eading * that is to be an appendiC title. 3' 7hen you create the table of contents( the chapters and appendiCes will be designated correctly.
&ricks for working with fields

6eyboard shortcuts for fields
6ere are some handy +eyboard shortcuts to use when wor+ing with fields& 8trl9): 8trl9)( 8trl9)= )= =pen the 5ields dialog. Turn field shadings on or off. -how or hide field names. "pdate fields.
Fi'ing the contents of fields

You can specify Fi'ed content for many items on the Document and Doc2nformation pages so the field contents do not update. 5or eCample( you might use a field to insert the creation date of a document( and you would not want that date to change. Gn another place you might use a date field to show the current date( which you do want to changeV in that case( deselect Fi'ed content when you insert the field.
3='
)igure #** Defining a number range variable for /ppendi-es
Converting fields into te't

7riter does not pro)ide an easy way to con)ert a field into regular teCt( so that it is no longer updated. 6owe)er( you can do this as follows& 1' -elect the field and choose -dit 9 Cut or 8trl9;. 2' Choose -dit 9 Paste $pecial. Clic+ R"nformatted teCtR in the $election list( and then clic+ ;6. *lternati)ely( press 8trl9/lt9Shift9P to paste unformatted teCt. This is not a )ery good solution if you ha)e hundreds of fields that you want to change( but you could use a macro to automate the process. *fter you change a field to teCt( you cannot change the teCt bac+ into a field.
4eveloping conditional content

Conditional content is teCt and graphics that are included or eCcluded depending on a condition you specify. * simple eCample is a reminder letter for an o)erdue account. The first and second reminders might ha)e a subJect line of T4eminder !oticeU( but the third reminder letter might ha)e the subJect T5inal !oticeU and a different final paragraph. * more compleC eCample is a software manual for a product that comes in two )ersions( #ro and $ite. /oth product )ersions ha)e much in common( but the #ro )ersion includes some features that are not in the $ite )ersion. Gf you use conditional content( you can maintain one file containing information for both )ersions and print %or create online help' customi2ed for each )ersion. You do not ha)e to maintain two sets of the information that is the same for both )ersions( so you will not forget to update both )ersions when something changes.
3=(
Choose the types of conditional content to use

This section describes se)eral 7riter features that can help you design and maintain conditional content. You can use one or any combination of these features in the same document.
(onditional text
7ith conditional teCt( you can ha)e two alternati)e teCts %a word( phrase( or sentence'. =ne teCt will be displayed and printed if the condition you specify is met( and the other will be displayed and printed if the condition is not met. You cannot include graphics or edit the teCt eCcept in the field dialog %not in the body of the document'. You also cannot format part of the teCt %for eCample( bolding one word but not the others'( but you can format the field to affect all of the field contents %for eCample( bolding all of the words'. You cannot include a cross9reference or other field in the teCt.
1idden text
7ith hidden teCt %a word( phrase( or sentence'( you ha)e only two choices& show or hide. Gf the condition you specify is met( the teCt is hiddenV if the condition is not met( the teCt is displayed. The disad)antages are the same as for conditional teCt& you cannot include graphics( edit the teCt in the body of the document( format part of the teCt( or include a field.
1idden para rap!s

6idden paragraphs are li+e any other paragraphs( but you can specify a condition under which the paragraph is not displayed or printed. * blan+ paragraph can also be hiddenQfor eCample( if a database field has no content for the current record. This is )ery useful when merging an address into a letter& if you allow two lines for the street address and the database record uses only one line( you can pre)ent the blan+ line from appearing in your document. You can include graphics( edit the teCt in the body of the document( format any part of the teCt( and include fields.
1idden sections
6idden sections are li+e hidden paragraphs( but they can include more than one paragraphQfor eCample( a heading plus one or more paragraphs. 6owe)er( a section cannot contain less than a paragraph( so you cannot use this method for single words or phrases. The contents of a hidden section beha)e Just li+e the contents of any other part of the document( but you can specify a condition under which the section is not displayed or printed. Gn addition( you can password protect a section.
Plan your conditional content

Conditions are what programmers call logical e-pressions. You must formulate a logical eCpression for each condition because a condition is always either true %met' or false %not met'. You can use the same condition in many places in your document( for different types of conditional content. To ma+e conditional content wor+( you need to& 1' Choose or define a )ariable. 2' .efine a logical eCpression %condition' in)ol)ing the selected )ariable.
(!oose or define a variable

You can use the following )ariables in your condition&
"ser9defined )ariables #redefined $ibre=ffice )ariables( which use statistical )alues from the document properties "ser data .atabase field contentsQfor eCample from your address boo+
3==
You cannot use internal )ariables %for eCample( page number or chapter name' to formulate conditions. The eCamples in this chapter use user9defined )ariables.
Define a lo ical expression 2condition3 involvin t!e selected variable

The condition compares a specified fiCed )alue with the contents of a )ariable or database field. To formulate a condition( use the same elements as you would to create a formula& operators( mathematical and statistical functions( number formats( )ariables( and constants. The possible operators are gi)en in the online helpV loo+ in the indeC under Toperators& in formulasU. You can define @uite compleC eCpressions( but in most cases a simple condition will do the Job.
Create the variable

To create your )ariable( choose nsert 9 Fields 9 ;ther or press 8trl9):. You can use choices found on the Doc2nformation( ?ariables( and Database pages.
Doc,nfor#ation fields
T"sing document properties to hold metadata and information that changesU on page 3B< described how to set up a custom document property. You can use that document property as the )ariable in your condition statement( or you can create another document property field specifically for conditions.
.ser$defined variable field

To set up a )ariable or user field& 1' #lace the cursor where you want the field to be inserted. 2' =n the 5ields dialog( select the ?ariables page.
)igure #*: Defining a variable to use with conditional content

#$$ LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
3' -elect $et variable in the +ype list and &e't in the )ormat list. Type a name for the )ariable in the Dame boC( and a )alue in the ?alue boC. G ha)e chosen Pro:ite for the name %to remind me that this )ariable is related to the two product )ersions'( and G set the )alue as :ite because G can remember TGf it is the $ite )ersion( then this teCt should be hidden.U >' -elect nvisible so the field does not show in the document. Clic+ nsert( then clic+ Close. A' * small gray mar+ should be )isible where you inserted the field. 7e will come bac+ to this field later.
/ecause the gray mar+ is so small( you may ha)e trouble finding it again( especially if you ha)e other fields in the document. You may prefer to lea)e the )ariable field )isible while you wor+( and change it to in)isible Just before you create final copy. *t any time( you can place the insertion point Just before the field and choose -dit 9 Fields or right9clic+ the field( and then clic+ Fields on the conteCt menu. =n the 3dit 5ields dialog %5igure >1<'( select or deselect the nvisible option.
&ip
Apply the condition to the content

!ow that you ha)e defined the )ariable( you can use it in a condition statement. This topic describes some of the possibilities.
(onditional text
5irst( let us set up some conditional teCt that will insert the words 1reat Product :ite into the $ite )ersion and 1reat Product Pro into the #ro )ersion of the manual. You would use this field whene)er you want to mention the name of the product. 1' #lace the cursor where you want one of these phrases to appear. %You can mo)e or delete it later( if you wish.' 2' =pen the 5ields dialog by clic+ing nsert 9 Fields 9 ;ther( select the )unctions page( and select Conditional te't in the +ype list. 3' *s shown in 5igure >13( type Pro:ite -E [:ite[ in the 8ondition boC( 1reat Product :ite in the +hen boC( and 1reat Product Pro in the ,lse boC.
)igure #*3 2nserting conditional te-t
>ote
These fields are case9sensiti)e( and @uotation mar+s are re@uired around a teCt )alue such as :ite.
>' Clic+ nsert to insert the field( then clic+ Close. You should see 1reat Product :ite in your teCt.
8hapter *# Wor7ing with )ields #$*
&ip
Gf you want to insert this field into your teCt in many places %as you probably would for a product name'( create an *utoTeCt entry for it. -ee T"sing *utoTeCt to insert often9used fieldsU on page 3D0 for instructions.
1idden text
You might use hidden teCt for words or short phrases that describe features of reat #roduct #ro that are not found in the $ite )ersion. You can reuse the same field in se)eral places in your documentQfor eCample( by copying and pasting it. To create a hidden teCt field& 1' Choose nsert 9 Fields 9 ;ther and select the )unctions page. 2' -elect 8idden te't in the +ype list( as shown in 5igure >1>. 3' Type Pro:ite -E [:ite[ in the 8ondition boC and type the re@uired teCt in the .idden te-t boC. 4emember( this is the teCt that is hidden if the condition is true. >' Clic+ nsert to create and insert the field.
)igure #*# 8reating a condition for hidden te-t
1idden para rap!s

* paragraph is hidden if the condition is true. To hide a paragraph& 1' Clic+ in the paragraph to be hidden. 2' Choose nsert 9 Fields 9 ;ther and select the )unctions page %5igure >1>'. 3' -elect 8idden paragraph in the +ype list. >' 5or this eCample( type Pro:ite -E [:ite[ in the 8ondition boC. A' Clic+ nsert to create and insert the field. Gf an eCtra paragraph mar+ appears( delete it. To show hidden paragraphs so you can edit them( do one of the following&
Choose =iew 9 8idden Paragraphs from the menu bar( so it is chec+ed %shows all hidden
paragraphs'.
=n the &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice !riter 9 Formatting Aids page( select the )ields
.idden paragraphs option %shows all hidden paragraphs'.
.ouble9clic+ in front of the )ariable that you used to define the condition for hiding the teCt(
and enter a different )alue for the )ariable %shows all hidden paragraphs'.
.ouble9clic+ in front of the hidden teCt field or the hidden paragraph field( and change the
condition statement %changes only the selected hidden paragraph'.
#$:
1idden sections
* conditional section is hidden if the condition is true. To create a conditional section& 1' -elect the teCt that you want to be included in the conditional section. %You can edit this teCt later( Just as you can edit any other teCt.' 2' Choose nsert 9 $ection. =n the Gnsert -ection dialog %5igure >1A'( select the Section tab( then select 8ide and enter the condition in the with 8ondition boC. You can also gi)e the section a name( if you wish %strongly recommended( so you can find it again easily if you ha)e se)eral sections in your document'. 3' Clic+ nsert to insert the section into your document. To show a hidden section so you can edit it& 1' Choose Format 9 $ections. 2' =n the 3dit -ections dialog %similar to the Gnsert -ection dialog'( select the section from the list. 3' .eselect 8ide( and then clic+ ;6. You can now edit the contents of the section. *fterwards( you can choose Format 9 $ections again and select 8ide to hide the section again. To show all the hidden sections so you can edit them( change the )alue of the )ariable to something that the conditions will not recogni2e. Gn our eCample( you could change the )alue to 1.
)igure #*% 8reating a section to be hidden when a specified condition is met To ma+e the hidden section a normal part of the document %that is( to remo)e the section mar+ers( but not the contents of the section'& 1' -how the hidden section( as described abo)e. 2' =n the 3dit -ections dialog( select the section from the list. 3' Clic+ Cemove. The contents of the section are now a normal part of the document.
Change the value of the variable

1' 5ind the )ariable field you created in TCreate the )ariableU on page >00. 2' Clic+ once Just in front of this field( then right9clic+ and clic+ Fields on the conteCt menu. 3' =n the 3dit 5ields& Pariables dialog %5igure >1<'( change the )alue of the )ariable to Pro.
#$3
>' Gf you ha)e set fields to update automatically( all of the conditional and hidden teCt that uses this )ariable as a condition will change.
&ip
Conditional teCt and hidden teCt can only be edited in the 3dit 5ields dialog.
)igure #*& 8hanging the value of the variable

To turn on automatic updating of fields( choose &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice !riter Y 1eneral( and select Fields under 2pdate: Automatically.
&ip
2sing placeholder fields

* placeholder field prompts you to enter something %teCt( a table( a frame( a graphic( or an obJect'. To insert a placeholder field into a document& 1' =n the )unctions page of the 5ields dialog( select Placeholder in the +ype column and select what the placeholder is for in the )ormat column. 2' Gn the Placeholder boC( type the teCt that you want to appear in the placeholder field. 3' Gn the 6eference boC( type the teCt that you want to display as a help tip when you rest the mouse pointer o)er the field. 5igure >1E shows the results of inserting a placeholder field for a graphic.
#$#
)igure #*' 2nserting a placeholder field /ecause the VLogo1 field is a graphics placeholder( when you clic+ on the field in the document( the Gnsert picture dialog opens( prompting you to select a graphic %picture'. 7hen you select a picture and clic+ ;pen( the picture replaces the field in the document. -imilarly( clic+ing on a table placeholder field opens the Gnsert Table dialog( clic+ing on a frame placeholder field opens the 5rame dialog( and clic+ing on an obJect placeholder field opens the Gnsert =$3 =bJect dialog. The teCt placeholder field is different& you simply clic+ on it and type some teCt in the Placeholder boC( which replaces the field.
2sing input fields and input lists

nput field *n input field is a )ariable that you can clic+ in a document to open a dialog where you can edit the teCt displayed in the field. To insert an input field& 1' Choose nsert 9 Fields 9 ;ther and choose the )unctions page. 2' Choose nput field in the +ype list %5igure >1B'. 3' =ptionally type some teCt in the Ceference boC. This teCt will appear as a tooltip when the users ho)er a mouse cursor o)er the field. >' Clic+ nsert. Gn the small dialog that opens( type some teCt for the )ariable %for eCample( a brief instruction to the user regarding the purpose of the field'V this teCt can be the same or different from the teCt in the 4eference boC in the pre)ious step. A' Clic+ ;6. To edit an input field( clic+ on it in the document. Gn the small dialog that opens( edit the teCt of the field.
#$%
)igure #*( 2nserting an input field To edit the fieldFs reference( right9clic+ on the field and choose Fields from the conteCt menu. This opens the 3dit 5ields& 5unctions dialog.
)igure #*= ,diting an input field nput list *n input list is a teCt field that displays one item from a list. To insert an input list field into a document& 1' Choose nsert 9 Fields 9 ;therV on the )unctions page( choose nput list in the +ype list.
#$&
)igure #:$ Defining an input list field 2' Type the names of the list items in the tem boC on the upper right( clic+ing Add after each item. The items then appear in the tems on list boC. To change the order of the items( select an item and clic+ the /ove 2p or /ove 4own buttons. 3' Type the name of the list in the >ame field on the lower right. >' Clic+ nsert. To display the Choose Gtem dialog( clic+ the Gnput list field.
)igure #:* 8hoosing an item from an input list
#$'
To add( edit( and remo)e items from this list( and change their order in the list( clic+ the -dit button in the Choose Gtem dialog. This displays the 3dit 5ields& 5unction dialog.
)igure #:: ,diting the items on an input list To @uic+ly edit all input fields and lists in a document( press 8trl9Shift9)=. The first input field or list in the document opens. Clic+ing ;6 or >e't mo)es to the neCt input field or list. *fter the last input field or list( clic+ing >e't or ;6 returns you to the document.
#$(
8hapter *% 0sing )orms in Writer
ntroduction to forms
This chapter co)ers the use of forms within 7riter documents. 0ost of the information here also applies to forms in other $ibre=ffice components( but there are some differences. The chapter presents information on using forms in four main sections& setting up a basic form( an eCample for creating a form( lin+ing a form to a data source( and finally some ad)anced techni@ues. $ibre=ffice forms co)er a lot of ground and not e)erything is included here. !otable omissions are using forms in 6T0$ documents and writing macros to lin+ to form controls.
!hen to use forms

* standard teCt document displays information& a letter( report( or brochure( for eCample. Typically the reader may edit e)erything or nothing in the document. * form has sections that are not to be edited( and other sections that are designed for the reader to ma+e changes. 5or eCample( a @uestionnaire has an introduction and @uestions %which do not change' and spaces for the reader to enter answers. $ibre=ffice offers se)eral ways to enter information into a form( including chec+ boCes( option buttons( teCt boCes( pull9down lists( and other items( collecti)ely +nown as form controls. 5orms are used in three ways&
To create a simple document for the recipient to complete( such as a @uestionnaire sent out
to a group of people who fill it in and return it.
To lin+ into a database or data source and allow the user to enter information. -omeone
ta+ing orders might enter the information into a database using a form.
To )iew information held in a database or data source. * librarian might call up information
about boo+s. "sing forms to access a database offers a fast and easy way to build up compleC graphical front ends. Your form can include not only the fields that lin+ up to the data source but also teCt( graphics( tables( drawings and other elements. * typical way to use a simple form is& 1' You design the form( then sa)e it when you are happy with it. 2' You send the form to others %for eCample( by email'. 3' They fill in the form( sa)e it and send it bac+ to you. >' You open the form and see what their answers are.
/y using a data source( or setting a form to update o)er the web( you can automatically gather data. 6owe)er( both of those are more compleC and you might prefer to +eep things simple.
&ip
Alternatives to using forms in !riter

Gn $ibre=ffice( the /ase component pro)ides an alternati)e way to access a data source. There are a lot of similarities between forms in /ase and 7riter( but one may be better for a particular tas+ than the other. /ase is appropriate only if the form accesses a data sourceV you would not use it for simple forms. $ibre=ffice Calc( Gmpress( and .raw also support forms in almost the same way that 7riter does.
#*$
Creating a simple form

This section eCplains how to create a simple form without any lin+s to a data source or database and without ad)anced customi2ation.
Create a document
There is nothing special to be done when creating a document to use as a form. Create a new 7riter document with File 9 >ew 9 &e't document.
;pen the form toolbars

Two toolbars control form creation& 5orm Controls and 5orm .esign. -elect =iew 9 &oolbars 9 Form Controls and =iew 9 &oolbars 9 Form 4esign to show them both. The 5orm Controls toolbar has a button for each of the most commonly used types of control. You can also open the 5orm .esign toolbar from the 5orm Controls toolbar. -ome of the less commonly used controls are on a third toolbarQ0ore ControlsQalso opened from the 5orm Controls toolbar. You can doc+ these toolbars in different places on the 7riter window( or lea)e them floating. 5igure >23 shows the three toolbars floating. 7hen they are floating( you can also change them from )ertical to hori2ontal and change the number of tools on a rowV to ma+e these changes( drag a corner of the toolbar. -ee T5orm controls referenceU on page >13 for descriptions of the tools on these toolbars.
)igure #:3 +he )orm 8ontrol@ <ore 8ontrols and )orm Design +oolbars
Activate design mode

Clic+ the 4esign /ode ;nF;ff button on the 5orm Controls toolbar to turn design mode on. %Clic+ it again when you want to turn it off.' This acti)ates the buttons for inserting form controls and selects controls for editing. 7hen design mode is off( the form beha)es as it would for the end user. /uttons can be pressed( chec+ boCes selected( list items selected( and so on.
#**
nsert form controls

1' To insert a form control into the document( clic+ the controlFs icon to select it. The mouse 2' 3' >' A' pointer changes to loo+ li+e this& Clic+ in the document where you want the control to appear. %You can mo)e it later.' 6olding the left mouse button down( drag the control to si2e it. -ome controls ha)e a fiCed si2e symbol followed by the name of the control %for eCample( 8hec7 Jo- or Option Jutton'. The control button remains acti)e( so you can insert se)eral controls of the same type without needing to go bac+ to the toolbar. To change to another tool( clic+ its icon on the toolbar.
<' To stop inserting controls( clic+ on the $elect button on the 5orm Controls toolbar( or clic+ on any of the controls you ha)e Just inserted. The mouse pointer changes bac+ to its normal appearance.
&ip
6olding down Shift when creating a form control ma+es the control s@uare. Gf you press Shift when resi2ing an eCisting control( its proportions are +ept the same. 7hen you insert a group boC( list boC( or combo boC( a wi2ard is launched to guide you through the setup. Gf you prefer not to run the wi2ard( clic+ the !i5ards ;nF;ff button on the 5orm Controls toolbar.
>ote
Configure controls
*fter inserting the controls( you need to configure them to loo+ and beha)e as you want. 4ight9clic+ on a form control within your document and select Control from the conteCt menu to open the #roperties dialog boC for the selected control. .ouble9clic+ing on a form control also opens this dialog boC. The #roperties dialog boC has three pages& eneral( .ata( and 3)ents. 5or simple forms( only the eneral page is of any interest. =n this page you can set the loo+ and feel of the control. -ee TConfigure form controlsU on page >20 and T5orm control formatting optionsU on page >30 for more information( and the descriptions in the 6elp for details. Configuration for use with a database is discussed in TCreating a form for data entryU on page >2A. The fields on this dialog boC )ary with the type of control. 5or eCample&
-ome controls ha)e )isible labels( such as #ush /utton and =ption /utton. The label teCt
can be set.
The $ist /oC contains a list of options to choose from. -et these in the $ist entries boC.
!otice the scroll bar in this dialog boC. You can use the scroll bar or enlarge the dialog boC to see additional fields.
#*:
)igure #:# ,-ample of the Properties dialog bo- for a form control
2se the form

To use the form( lea)e design mode by clic+ing the 4esign /ode ;nF;ff button it. -a)e the form document. to deacti)ate
Form controls reference

%or# (ontrol toolbar
-elects a form control to perform some other action on it. -elect .esign mode on/off Control Toggles between design mode on %to edit forms' and design mode off %to use forms'. $aunches form control properties dialog boC. This dialog boC can be +ept open as different controls are selected. $aunches form properties dialog boC( controlling properties for the form as a whole( such as which data source it connects to. * boC that can be selected or deselected on the form. You can label the boC. * control to create a boC into which the form user can type any teCt. * control allowing numeric formatting options. 5or eCample( you can set maCimum and minimum )alues for the number entered( or the number type %decimal places( scientific( currency'. Creates a button that can be lin+ed to a macro. The label is the name that appears on the button.
5orm Chec+ /oC TeCt /oC 5ormatted 5ield
#ush /utton
#*3
%or# (ontrol toolbar

=ption /utton Creates an option button %also +nown as a radio button'. 7hen multiple buttons are grouped together( only one can be selected at a time. The easiest way to group multiple buttons is to use the roup /oC button on the 0ore Controls toolbar( with wi2ards enabled. Creates a list of options as a pull9down menu that the user can choose from. Gf wi2ards are on( creating a list boC launches the $ist /oC 7i2ard. This wi2ard is only useful if your form is lin+ed to a data source. Gf the form is not lin+ed to a data source( turn wi2ards off and create an empty list boC. Then clic+ the control button and( in the List ,ntries option on the General tab( enter the options you want to appear on the list. Combo /oC *s with a $ist /oC( you set up a list of choices. Gn addition( a panel at the top either displays the choice made or allows the form user to type in something else. This wor+s the same as the $ist /oC. * teCt label. The difference between this and Just typing on the page is that( as a control( you can lin+ a label field to macros so( for eCample( something happens when the mouse passes o)er it or clic+s on it. $aunches the 0ore Controls toolbar. $aunches the 5orm .esign toolbar( which can also be opened with =iew 9 &oolbars 9 Form 4esign. -ome form controls %$ist /oC and Combo /oC' ha)e optional wi2ards. Gf you do not want the wi2ard to launch when you create one of these controls( use the !i5ards ;nF;ff button to switch wi2ards off.
$ist /oC
$abel 5ield
0ore Controls 5orm .esign 7i2ards =n/=ff
More (ontrols toolbar

-pin /utton *llows form users to choose a number by cycling through the list of numbers. You can specify maCimum( minimum( default( and the step between numbers. This control is not commonly used in 7riter( as the number is not displayed. Gn Calc( howe)er( a .ata tab appears on the Control #roperties dialog boC( so you can lin+ the spin button to a cell. -crollbar Creates a scrollbar( with a number of options to define the eCact appearance. This control is not commonly used in 7riter. Gn Calc( a .ata tab appears on the Control #roperties dialog boC( allowing you to lin+ the scroll bar to a cell. Gmage /utton /eha)es eCactly li+e a push button( but displays as an image. Choose the image in the raphics option on the General tab in the Control #roperties dialog boC. =nly useful when the form is connected to a data source and a field in the data source eCists that can hold images. You can add new images to the database or retrie)e and display images from it.
Gmage Control
#*#
More (ontrols toolbar

.ate 5ield -tores a date. You need to configure the earliest and latest dates the field will accept( the default date( and the date format. You can add a spinner. 7or+s li+e a date field but specifies a time. *llows a user to select a file( either by typing the path and name directly or by clic+ing on a /rowse button and choosing the file from a dialog boC. .isplays a number. You need to specify formatting( maCimum( minimum and default )alues. You can add a spinner. 7or+s li+e a numeric fieldV additionally you can add a currency symbol. #attern fields are useful when the form lin+s into a data source. -pecify an 3dit 0as+ to restrict what a user can enter into the field. -pecify a $iteral 0as+ to restrict which data is displayed from the data source. The group boC control has two different uses depending on whether wi2ards are on or off. Gf wi2ards are on( creating a group boC launches the roup 3lement wi2ard. This creates a group of options buttons %in which only one may be selected at a time'. Gn most cases( using a group boC is the best way to create a set of option buttons. Gf wi2ards are off( a group boC is simply a )isual boC to group together different controls. Gt has no effect on the way the controls operate. Table Control Table Control is only useful with a data source. Gf no data source is specified( you will be prompted to choose one in the Table 3lement 7i2ard. You then pic+ the fields to display and( when design mode is off( the data appears in the table. The table also includes controls to step through the records. 4ecords can be added( deleted( and modified in the table. !a)igation /ar * na)igation bar is the same as the 5orm !a)igation toolbar % =iew 9 &oolbars 9 Form >avigation'( but can be placed anywhere in the document and be resi2ed.
Time 5ield 5ile -election
!umeric 5ield Currency 5ield #attern 5ield
roup /oC
%or# Desi n toolbar

-elect .esign mode on/off Control -elects a form control to perform an action on it. Toggles between design mode on %to edit forms' and design mode off %to use forms'. $aunches form control properties dialog boC. This dialog boC can be +ept open as different controls are selected. $aunches form properties dialog boC( controlling properties for the form as a whole( such as which data source it connects to.
5orm
#*%
%or# Desi n toolbar

5orm !a)igator The 5orm !a)igator is a utility displaying all the forms and controls in the current document. Gt allows you to edit and delete them easily. Gf you use the 5orm !a)igator( itWs recommended that you gi)e your controls names %in the properties dialog boC'. The name appears in the na)igator so( for eCample( if you ha)e ten teCt boCes( you can tell which is which. *dd 5ield *dd 5ield is only useful if you ha)e specified a data source for the form. Gf no data source is specified( an empty boC opens. Gf you ha)e specified a data source( *dd 5ield opens a list of all the fields in the specified table( which you can then drag and drop onto the page. The fields are placed on the page with the name of the field before them. This is a @uic+ and easy way to create a form from a data source. *cti)ation =rder =pen in .esign 0ode *utomatic Control 5ocus #osition and -i2e *llows you to specify the order in which focus shifts between controls. You can test the order by lea)ing design mode and using +ab to switch between the controls. =pens the current form in design mode %to edit the form rather than entering data into it'. Gf acti)ated( focus is set to the first form control. $aunches the #osition and -i2e dialog boC( allowing you to specify both by typing in precise )alues( rather than dragging the control. You can also loc+ the si2e or position( so they do not get changed accidentally. 5or some controls( you can rotate and set the slant and corner radius. ,ust as with a frame( any form control can be anchored to page( paragraph or character and also anchored as a character %meaning that it beha)es li+e any other character on the page'. The *lignment button is disabled unless the control is anchored as a character. You can align a control in different ways( for eCample so the top of the control lines up with the top of the teCt or the bottom lines up with the bottom of the teCt. .isplays a grid of dots on the page( to help you line up controls. 7hen a control is brought close to a grid point or line( it will snap to the grid. This ma+es it is easier to line up controls. 7hen a control is being mo)ed( lines eCtend from the control hori2ontally and )ertically to help you position it accurately.
Change *nchor
*lignment
.isplay -nap to
rid rid
uides when 0o)ing
#*&
-'ample: a simple form

Create the document
=pen a new document %File 9 >ew 9 &e't 4ocument'. Gt is a good idea to write down the outline of the document( without form controls( though of course it can easily be changed later.
)igure #:% 2nitial document without form controls
Add form controls

The neCt step is to add the form controls to the document. 7e will ha)e four controls&
>ame is a teCt boC. $e' is two option buttons( male or female. Favourite shape is a list of options. All shapes you like is a series of chec+ boCes.
To add these controls& 1' -elect =iew 9 &oolbars 9 Form Controls to open the 5orm Control toolbar. 2' Gf the tools are not acti)e( clic+ the 4esign /ode ;nF;ff button to acti)ate them.
3' Clic+ the &e't 3o' button ( then clic+ in the document and( with the left mouse button held down( drag the shape of the !ame teCt boC to approCimately the si2e you want. >' 0a+e sure the !i5ards ;nF;ff button Controls button is on %shaded with a border'. Clic+ the /ore
to launch the 0ore Controls toolbar.
A' =n the 0ore Controls toolbar( clic+ the 1roup 3o' button . .raw a group boC by the -eC& entry. The roup 3lement 7i2ard opens. a' =n the first page of the wi2ard( enter two names for the options fields& /ale and Female. Clic+ the 99 button after each entry. Clic+ >e't 99.
#*'
)igure #:& Specifying names for option fields b' =n the neCt page( select the option >o, one particular field is not going to be selected. Clic+ >e't 99.
)igure #:' Selecting a default field c' i)e a )alue to your fields. Typically( you would gi)e one field the )alue 1 and the other field the )alue 2. Gf there are more than 2 option fields( you would gi)e them )alues of 3( >( and so on. Clic+ >e't 99.
)igure #:( /ssigning field values
#*(
d'
You can either delete the caption or gi)e a caption to your delete the caption. Then clic+ Finish.
roup /oC. Gn this eCample(
)igure #:= 8reate 8aption Option <' !ow create the list boC. =n the 5orm Controls toolbar( clic+ the !i5ards ;nF;ff button to turn wi2ards off. Clic+ the :ist 3o' button and draw a list boC by )avourite Shape in the document. This will Just be an empty pane for now. E' 5inally create four chec+ boCes by /ll shapes you li7e. Clic+ on the Check 3o' button and then draw out four chec+ boCes( side by side across the page. You should now ha)e a document loo+ing something li+e 5igure >30.
)igure #3$ Document with form controls

8hapter *% 0sing )orms in Writer #*=
on!g"re form controls

!o further configuration is re@uired to the !ame and -eC fields( but you could( if you wish( gi)e a name to each control and change the appearance of the controls. The list boC must be configured to add the list of options. The chec+ boCes must be configured to add in the names %instead of Chec+ /oC( Chec+ /oC 2( and so forth'. 5ollowing are instructions to configure these controls& 1' /e sure design mode is on. .ouble9clic+ on the $ist /oC control within the document to open the controlFs #roperties dialog boC. -elect the General tab. 2' Gn the List ,ntries teCt input boC %scroll down if it is not )isible'( type the names of the shapes %Circle( Triangle( -@uare( #entagon' one at a time. *fter each( press Shift9,nter. You should end up with a line saying )ircle 9 Triangle 9 %:'are 9 Pentag!n .
)igure #3* Properties dialog bo- for a list bo3' Clic+ on the first Chec+ /oC. The #roperties dialog boC stays open but changes to show the properties for the chec+ boC. >' Change the teCt in the Label teCt input boC from )(ec+ ;!8 to )ircle and press ,nter. The cursor mo)es to the Label )ield teCt input boC( and the label on the chec+ boC in the document changes immediately.
#:$
)igure #3: +op part of Properties dialog bo- for a chec7 boA' Clic+ on each of the other three chec+ boCes in turn. Change the teCt in the Label teCt input boC in the #roperties dialog boC to Triangle( -@uare( and #entagon in turn. <' Close the #roperties dialog boC. E' Turn design mode off and close the two Controls toolbars.
You ha)e now completed the form( which should loo+ something li+e 5igure >33.
)igure #33 8ompleted form
#inishing to"ches
The form is complete( but you are free to ma+e further changes to the document. Gf you were sending this out to other people to complete( you would probably want to ma+e the document read9 only. The effect would be that users would be able to fill in the form but not to ma+e any other changes to the document. To ma+e the document read9only( select File 9 Properties( select the Security tab and enable the ;pen file read.only option.
>ote
Gf the document is read9only( anyone filling in the form will need to use File 9 $ave as to sa)e the document.
#:*
Accessing data sources

The most common use for a form is as the front end of a database. You can pro)ide a form that allows users to enter information into a contacts database and( because it is part of a 7riter document( the form can contain graphics( formatting( tables( and other elements to ma+e it loo+ Just the way you want. 0odifying the form is as simple as editing a document. $ibre=ffice can access numerous data sources. These include =./C( 0y-H$( =racle ,./C( spreadsheets and teCt files. *s a general rule( databases can be accessed for read and writeV other data sources %such as spreadsheets' are read9only.
To see the list of supported data source types for your operating system( choose File 9 >ew 9 4atabase. =n the first page of the .atabase 7i2ard %5igure >3>'( select Connect to an e'isting database and then open the drop9down list. *n eCample is shown in 5igure >3B.
&ip
Creating a database
Chapter B( etting -tarted with /ase( in the Getting Started guide co)ers in more detail how to create a database. 6ere we gi)e a short guide to creating a )ery simple database with $ibre=ffice /ase. 1' -elect File 9 >ew 9 4atabase to start the .atabase 7i2ard.
)igure #3# Database Wi3ard 2' -elect Create a new database and clic+ >e't 99. 3' =n the neCt page( select Jes, register the database for me and ;pen the database for editing. 4egistering the database means that it can be accessed from other $ibre=ffice components such as 7riter and Calc. You need to do this if you want to lin+ forms into it. >' Clic+ Finish and sa)e your new database( gi)ing it a name. "nli+e creating other documents in $ibre=ffice( databases must be sa)ed when you first create them.
#::
*fter sa)ing the database( you should see the main /ase window %5igure >3A'( which contains three panels. The left9hand panel is .atabase( with icons for Tables( Hueries( 5orms and 4eports.
)igure #3% <ain Jase window The neCt step is to create a table. *gain( this is co)ered in more detail in Chapter B( etting -tarted with /ase( in the Getting Started guide. 6ere we are going to create a small table as an eCample. 1' Choose &ables in the left9hand column( then choose Create &able in 4esign =iew under Tas+s. 2' "se the Table .esign window to tell /ase which fields to create. 7e will ha)e three input data fields& !ame( *ddress( and Telephone. 3' =n the first line( enter under 5ield !ame( <*( and set the 5ield Type to <nteger 4<&T=>=$5. Gn the gray boC at the left of the line( right9clic+ and select Primary 6ey( bringing up a +ey icon in the boC. Gn the Field Properties at the bottom of the window is an Auto =alue optionV change this to ?es. =ptionally( type Pri"ar@ +e@ in the .escription column. -ee 5igure >3<.
-etting up the #rimary 8ey field with *uto Palue set to Jes is an important step. Gf this is not done( the form you create later will be much tric+ier to use and may generate errors for the user. Gt could e)en pre)ent the user from sa)ing the records in the form. 0a+e sure you get this step rightl
&ip
#:3
)igure #3& Setting a primary 7ey >' =n the neCt three lines( enter under 5ield !ame &a"e@ 7ddress and Telep(!ne. *ccept the default 5ield Type of TeCt \P*4C6*4] and lea)e .escription blan+.
)igure #3' Database table design A' -a)e the table %File 9 $ave'. You will be prompted to name it. The name can be anything you li+e. Clic+ ;6. <' 5inally( close the table design window to return to the main /ase window. Gf File 9 $ave is a)ailable( select it to sa)e the whole database.
Accessing an existing data so"rce

Gf you ha)e an eCisting data source( such as a spreadsheet or database( you simply need to tell $ibre=ffice about it. This is called registering a data source. To register an eCisting data source& 1' -elect File 9 >ew 9 4atabase to launch the .atabase 7i2ard. 2' -elect Connect to an e'isting database and choose the type from the drop9down list.
#:#
3' Clic+ >e't and follow the instructions to select the database to register %the eCact process )aries between different types of data source'. >' Gn -tep 3& -a)e and proceed( chec+ that Jes, register the database for me is selected. .eselect ;pen the database for editingV you Just need to register it( not edit it through /ase.
)igure #3( 0sing the Database Wi3ard to connect to an e-isting database
Creating a form for data entry

7hether you created a new database( or already had a data source( it must be registered with $ibre=ffice %see abo)e'. =nce it is registered( lin+ing your form to the data source is simple. 5ollow these steps to create a new form and lin+ it to a registered data source. 1' Create a new document in 7riter %File 9 >ew 9 &e't 4ocument'. 2' .esign your form( without putting in the actual fields %you can always change it later'. 3' -how the 5orm Controls toolbar %=iew 9 &oolbars 9 Form Controls'. >' Clic+ the 4esign /ode ;nF;ff button to put the document into design mode( if necessary. 7ith design mode off( most of the toolbar buttons are grayed out. Gf the .esign 0ode button is also grayed out( clic+ on the $elect button to acti)ate it.
#:%
A' Clic+ the &e't 3o' button . Clic+ in the document and( holding down the left mouse button( drag the mouse to create a teCt boC for the first form field %for eCample( !ame( if you are lin+ing to the database created abo)e'. <' Clic+ the &e't 3o' button again and drag the mouse to draw another field. *dditional fields( of any type( can be added in the same way %clic+ and drag'. -o far you ha)e followed the same steps used before when creating your first form. !ow you will lin+ the form with the data source you registered. 1' Clic+ the Form button in the Form Controls toolbar( or right9clic+ on any of the fields you inserted and select Form( to open the 5orm #roperties dialog boC. 2' Gn the Form Properties dialog boC( clic+ on the 4ata tab.
-et 4ata $ource to be the data source you registered. -et Content &ype to be Table. -et Content to be the name of the table you want to access. Close the dialog boC.
)igure #3= )orm properties@ connecting to a data source 3' 5or each form control in turn( clic+ on the control to select it %so small green boCes appear around it'( then launch the Properties dialog boC& either right9clic+ and select Control or clic+ on the Control button on the Form Controls toolbar. >' Gn the Properties dialog boC( clic+ on the 4ata tab %5igure >>0'. Gf you set up the form correctly( the 4ata Field option will contain a list of the different fields in the data source %for eCample( !ame( *ddress and Telephone'. -elect the field you want.
#:&
)igure ##$ )orm control properties@ Data tab A' 4epeat for each control in turn until e)ery control that should be assigned to a field has been assigned.
Gf you created a database in $ibre=ffice /ase and your #rimary 8ey field had Auto =alue set to Ges( that field does not need to be part of the form. Gf Auto =alue was set to Do( you will ha)e to include it and ha)e your users enter a uni@ue )alue into that field whene)er they ma+e a new entryQnot something that is recommended.
&ip
-ntering data into a form

=nce you ha)e created a form and tied it to a database( you want to use it to enter data into your data source( or modify data already there. 1' 0a+e sure that the form is not in design mode. Gn the Form Controls toolbar( clic+ on the 4esign /ode ;nF;ff button . Gf design mode is off( most of the buttons on the toolbar will be grayed out. 2' 0a+e sure that the 5orm !a)igation toolbar is on %=iew 9 &oolbars 9 Form >avigation'. This toolbar normally appears at the bottom of the window.
)igure ##* )orm Davigation toolbar 3' Gf there is eCisting data in the data source( use the control buttons on the 5orm !a)igation toolbar to loo+ at different records. You can amend data in a record by editing the )alues in the form. To submit the changes( press the ,nter +ey with the cursor in the last field. The record is sa)ed and the neCt record is displayed. >' Gf there is no data in the form( you can start entering information by typing into the fields of the form. To submit the new record( press the ,nter +ey with the cursor in the last field. A' =ther functions can be performed from the 5orm !a)igation toolbar( including deleting a record and adding a new record.
Gf a user tries to fill in the form and recei)es the error T*ttempt to insert null into a non9nullable columnU( then the form designer should go bac+ to the database and confirm that the #rimary 8ey field has the *uto Palue set to Yes. This error will pre)ent the form user from sa)ing the records.
&ip
#:'
Advanced form customi5ation

:inking a macro to a form control
You can set any form control %for eCample( teCt boC or button' to perform an action when triggered by some e)ent. To see the full list of e)ents( right9clic+ on the form control when the design mode is on( select Control and clic+ on the -vents tab.
)igure ##: 8ontrol properties@ ,vents tab To assign a macro to an e)ent& 1' Create the macro. -ee Chapter 13( etting -tarted with 0acros( in the Getting Started guide. 2' /e sure the form is in design mode. 4ight9clic+ on the form control( select Control and clic+ on the -vents tab. 3' Clic+ the browse button to bring up the Assign action dialog boC %5igure >>3'. >' Clic+ the /acro button and select the macro from the list in the 0acro -elector dialog boC. You return to the *ssign action dialog boC. 4epeat as needed( then clic+ ;6 to close the dialog boC. 0acros can also be assigned to e)ents relating to the form as a whole. To assign these( right9clic+ on a form control in the document( select Form and clic+ on the -vents tab.
#:(
)igure ##3 /ssign action dialog bo-
Cead.only documents
6a)ing created your form( you want whoe)er is using it to be able to access the information stored in the database( or complete the form( without changing the layout. To do this( ma+e the document read9only by choosing File 9 Properties 9 $ecurity and selecting the ;pen file read.only option.
Fine.tuning database access permissions

/y default( when a database is accessed from a form( any changes can be made to it& records can be added( deleted( and amended. You may not want that beha)ior. 5or eCample( you may want users to be able only to add new records or to be prohibited from deleting eCisting records. Gn design mode( right9clic+ on a form control and select Form from the conteCt menu. =n the Data tab of the 5orm #roperties dialog boC are a number of options& *llow additions( *llow deletions( *llow modifications and *dd data only. -et each of these to Ges or Do to control the access users ha)e to the data source. Gndi)idual fields can also be protected. This might be useful if you wanted a user to be able to modify some parts of a record but only )iew others( such as a stoc+ list where item descriptions are fiCed and @uantities can be modified. To ma+e an indi)idual field read9only( in design mode( right9clic+ on the form control within the document and select Control from the conteCt menu. -elect the General tab and set Cead.only to ?es.
#:=
)igure ### Data Properties of a form
#orm control formatting options

You can customi2e the way form controls loo+ and beha)e in a number of ways. These are all accessed in design mode. 4ight9clic+ on the form control( select Control from the conteCt menu and select the 1eneral tab in the Properties dialog boC.
-et a label for the control in the Label boC %not to be confused with the boC called Label
)ield'. -ome form controls( such as push buttons and option buttons( ha)e )isible labels that can be set. =thers( such as teCt boCes( do not.
-et whether the form control will print out if the document is printed with the #rint option. "se the 5ont setting to set the font( typeface( and si2e for a fieldFs label or for teCt typed
into a field. This setting does not affect the si2e of chec+ boCes or option buttons.
5or a teCt boC( you can set the maCimum teCt length. This is )ery useful when adding
records into a database. 3)ery database teCt field has a maCimum length and( if the data entered is too long( $ibre=ffice displays an error message. /y setting the maCimum teCt length of the form control to be the same as that of the database field( this error can be a)oided.
You can set the default option for a form control. /y default( a control is blan+( or has e)ery
option unselected. You can set the control to start with a particular option or list item selected.
5or controls where a password is being entered( setting the #assword character %for
eCample to p' displays only that character( but sa)es what the user really types.
You can add additional information and help teCt for a form control. =ther formatting controls such as bac+ground color( 39. loo+( teCt formatting( scroll bars(
and borders allow you to further define how the control appears.
#3$
MForms
I5orms are a new type of web form( de)eloped by the 7orld 7ide 7eb Consortium %73C'. $ibre=ffice supports the I5orms 1.0 open standard for creating web forms with I0$. Gn $ibre=ffice( an I5orms document is a special type of 7riter document. I5orms use the same controls as the ordinary forms described in this chapter. *fter you create and sa)e an I5orms document( you can open the document( fill out the form( and submit the changes to a ser)er. * detailed discussion of I5orms is beyond the scope of this chapter( as it is related more to databases than word processing. * good tutorial introduction is ,. .a)id 3isenbergFs ;)orms and OpenDocument in OpenOffice.org( a)ailable from http&//opendocument.Cml.org/files/CformsKoooK0<K10K2A.pdf and from http&//boo+s.e)c9cit.info/CformsKoooK0<K0BK1A.odt. *nother good resource is Palden $onghurstWs 0sing ;)orms and the OpenDocument format in OpenOffice.org and StarOffice( http&//wi+i.ser)ices.openoffice.org/wi+i/.ocumentation/"singKI5orms
#3*
8hapter *& 8ustomi3ing Writer
ntroduction
This chapter describes some common customi2ations that you may wish to do. You can customi2e menus( toolbars( and +eyboard shortcuts in $ibre=ffice( add new menus and toolbars( and assign macros to e)ents. 6owe)er( you cannot customi2e conteCt %right9clic+' menus. =ther customi2ations are made easy by eCtensions that you can install from the $ibre=ffice website or from other pro)iders.
Customi2ations to menus and toolbars can be sa)ed in a template. To do so( first sa)e them in a document and then sa)e the document as a template as described in Chapter 10( 7or+ing with Templates.
>ote
Customi5ing menu content

Gn addition to changing the menu font %described in Chapter 2( -etting up 7riter'( you can add to and rearrange categories on the menu bar( add commands to menus( and ma+e other changes. To customi2e menus& 1' Choose &ools 9 Customi5e. 2' =n the Customi2e dialog( go to the /enus page.
)igure ##%. +he <enus page of the 8ustomi3e dialog 3' Gn the Save 2n drop9down list( choose whether to sa)e this changed menu for the application %7riter' or for a selected document. >' Gn the section LibreOffice Writer <enus( select from the /enu drop9down list the menu that you want to customi2e. The list includes all the main menus as well as submenus( that is menus that are contained under another menu. 5or eCample( in addition to )ile( ,dit( ?iew(
#3#
and so on( there is )ile W Send and )ile W+emplates. The commands contained in the selected menu are shown in the central part of the dialog. A' To customi2e the selected menu( clic+ on the /enu or /odify buttons. You can also add commands to a menu by clic+ing on the Add button. These actions are described in the following sections. "se the up and down arrows neCt to the ,ntries list to mo)e the selected menu item to a different position. <' 7hen you ha)e finished ma+ing all your changes( clic+ ;6 to sa)e them.
Creating a new menu

Gn the <enus page of the Customi2e dialog( clic+ >ew to display the !ew 0enu dialog( shown in 5igure >><. 1' Type a name for your new menu in the <enu name boC. 2' "se the up and down arrow buttons to mo)e the new menu into the re@uired position on the menu bar. 3' Clic+ ;6 to sa)e. The new menu now appears on the list of menus in the Customi2e dialog. %Gt will appear on the menu bar itself after you sa)e your customi2ations.' *fter creating a new menu( you need to add some commands to it( as described in T*dding a command to a menuU on page >3<.
)igure ##& /dding a new menu
/odifying e'isting menus

To modify an eCisting menu( either user9made or inbuilt( select it in the <enu list and clic+ the /enu button to drop down a list of modifications& /ove( Cename( 4elete. !ot all of these modifications can be applied to all the entries in the <enu list. 5or eCample( Cename and 4elete are not a)ailable for the supplied menus( and /ove is not a)ailable for submenus. To mo)e a menu %such as )ile'( choose /enu 9 /ove. * dialog similar to the one shown in 5igure >>< %but without the <enu name boC' opens. "se the up and down arrow buttons to mo)e the menu into the re@uired position. To mo)e submenus %such as )ile [ Send'( select the main menu %File' in the <enu list and then( in the <enu 8ontent section of the dialog( select the submenu %$end' in the ,ntries list and use the
8hapter *& 8ustomi3ing Writer #3%
arrow +eys to mo)e it up or down in the se@uence. -ubmenus are easily identified in the ,ntries list by a small blac+ triangle on the right hand side of the name. Custom menus( and supplied submenus( can be renamed by pressing the /enu button in the upper section of the page and selecting Cename. Gn addition to renaming( you can allocate a letter in a custom menuWs name( which will become underlined( to be used as a +eyboard shortcut( that allows you to select that menu when you press /ltL that letter. 3Cisting submenus can be edited to change the letter which is used to select them from the +eyboard once the menu is open. 1' -elect a custom menu or a submenu in the <enu drop9down list. 2' Clic+ the /enu button and select Cename. 3' *dd a tilde %q' in front of the letter that you want to use as an accelerator. 5or eCample( to select the $end submenu command by pressing S %after opening the 5ile menu using /lt9)'( enter A%end. This changes it from the default d.
Gt is possible to use a letter already in use in the menu list %for eCample( in the Gnsert menu( the letter v is used in ,nvelope and in <ovie and sound as an accelerator'. 6owe)er( you should use an unused letter if possible( to ma+e it simpler for the user to na)igate.
>ote
Adding a command to a menu

You can add commands to the supplied menus and to menus you ha)e created. =n the Customi2e dialog( select the menu in the <enu list and clic+ the Add button in the <enu 8ontent section of the dialog. The *dd Commands dialog is displayed.
)igure ##' /dding a command to a menu =n the *dd Commands dialog( select a category and then the command( and clic+ Add. The dialog remains open( so you can select se)eral commands. 7hen you ha)e finished adding commands( clic+ Close. /ac+ on the Customi2e dialog( you can use the up and down arrow buttons to arrange the commands in your preferred se@uence.
#3& LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide
&ip
You can also add a command to a menu by clic+ing on it and dragging to the 0enu list on the Customi2e dialog. Choose the menu you want to modify before dragging the command. Thus( you can also place the command in your preferred location. This procedure wor+s too when you add a command to a toolbar %see T*dding a command to a toolbarU on page >3B'.
/odifying menu entries

Gn addition to changing the se@uence of entries on a menu or submenu( you can add submenus( rename or delete the entries( and add group separators. To begin( select the menu or submenu to be modified( from the <enu list near the top of the Customi2e page( then select the entry in the ,ntries list under <enu 8ontent. Clic+ the /odify button and choose the re@uired action from the drop9down list of actions. Add $ubmenu does Just that. *fter adding a submenu( it can be selected in the <enu list in the top section of the page and another submenu can be nested within it. 3egin a group adds a separator line after the highlighted entry. Cename allows you to rename the entries and to modify the accelerator letter used in the menu entry for items other than submenus %see T0odifying eCisting menusT on page >3A'. 4elete remo)es the selected entry from the ,ntries list.
Customi5ing toolbars
You can customi2e toolbars in se)eral ways( including choosing which icons are )isible and loc+ing the position of a doc+ed toolbar %as described in Chapter 1( Gntroducing 7riter'( and adding or deleting icons %commands' in the list of those a)ailable on a toolbar. You can also create new toolbars. This section describes how to create new toolbars and add or delete icons on eCisting ones.
)igure ##(. +he +oolbars page of the 8ustomi3e dialog

8hapter *& 8ustomi3ing Writer #3'
To get to the toolbar customi2ation dialog( do any of the following&
=n the toolbar( right9clic+ in the toolbar and choose Customi5e &oolbar. Choose =iew > &oolbars > Customi5e from the menu bar. Choose &ools > Customi5e from the menu bar and go to the +oolbars page.
/odifying e'isting toolbars

To modify an eCisting toolbar& 1' Gn the Save 2n drop9down list( choose whether to sa)e this changed toolbar for the application %7riter' or for a selected document. 2' Gn the section LibreOffice Writer +oolbars( select from the +oolbar drop9down list the toolbar that you want to modify. 3' Clic+ on the &oolbar or /odify buttons( and add commands to a toolbar by clic+ing on the Add button. You can also create a new toolbar by clic+ing on the >ew button. These actions are described in the following sections. >' 7hen you ha)e finished ma+ing all your changes( clic+ ;6 to sa)e them.
Adding a command to a toolbar

Gf the list of a)ailable buttons for a toolbar does not include all the commands you want on that toolbar( you can add commands. 7hen you create a new toolbar( you need to add commands to it. 1' =n the +oolbars page of the Customi2e dialog( select the toolbar in the &oolbar list and clic+ the Add button in the +oolbar 8ontent section of the dialog. 2' The *dd Commands dialog %5igure >>E' is the same as for adding commands to menus. -elect a category and then the command( and clic+ Add. The dialog remains open( so you can select se)eral commands. 7hen you ha)e finished adding commands( clic+ Close. Gf you insert an item which does not ha)e an associated icon( the toolbar will display the full name of the item& the neCt section describes how to choose an icon for a toolbar command. 3' /ac+ on the Customi2e dialog( you can use the up and down arrow buttons to arrange the commands in your preferred se@uence. >' 7hen you are done ma+ing changes( clic+ ;6 to sa)e.
You can also add a command to a menu by clic+ing on it and dragging to the toolbar on the Customi2e dialog. Choose the toolbar you want to modify before dragging the command. Thus( you can also place the command in your preferred location.
&ip
Choosing icons for toolbar commands

Toolbar buttons usually ha)e icons( not words( on them( but not all of the commands ha)e associated icons. To choose an icon for a command( select the command in the +oolbar 8ontent 8ommands list in the Customi2e dialog( and clic+ /odify 9 Change icon. =n the Change Gcon dialog( you can scroll through the a)ailable icons( select one( and clic+ ;6 to assign it to the command. To use a custom icon( create it in a graphics program and import it into $ibre=ffice by clic+ing the mport button on the Change Gcon dialog. Custom icons must be 1<r1< in si2e and cannot contain more than 2A< colors.
#3(
)igure ##= 8hange 2con dialog
Exa#ple4 *ddin a %ax icon to a toolbar

You can customi2e $ibre=ffice so that a single clic+ on an icon automatically sends the current document as a faC. 1' /e sure the faC dri)er is installed. Consult the documentation for your faC modem for more information. 2' Choose &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice !riter 9 Print. The dialog shown in 5igure >A0 opens.
)igure #%$ Setting up LibreOffice for sending fa-es 3' -elect the faC dri)er from the Fa' list and clic+ ;6. >' 4ight9clic+ in the -tandard toolbar. Gn the drop9down menu( choose Customi5e &oolbar. The +oolbars page of the Customi2e dialog appears %5igure >>B'. Clic+ Add.
#3=
A' =n the *dd Commands dialog %5igure >A1'( select 4ocuments in the 8ategory list( then select $end 4efault Fa' in the 8ommands list. Clic+ Add. !ow you can see the new icon in the 8ommands list of the +oolbars page. <' Gn the 8ommands list( clic+ the up or down arrow button to position the new icon where you want it. Clic+ ;6 and then clic+ Close. Your toolbar now has a new icon to send the current document as a faC.
)igure #%* /dding a Send )a- command to a toolbar
Creating a new toolbar

To create a new toolbar& 1' Choose &ools 9 Customi5e 9 &oolbars from the menu bar. 2' Clic+ >ew. =n the !ame dialog( type the new toolbarFs name and choose from the Save 2n drop9down list where to sa)e this changed menu& for the application %7riter' or for a selected document.
The new toolbar now appears on the list of toolbars in the Customi2e dialog. *fter creating a new toolbar( you need to add some commands to it( as described abo)e.
Assigning shortcut keys

Gn addition to using the built9in +eyboard shortcuts %listed in *ppendiC *'( you can define your own. You can assign shortcuts to standard $ibre=ffice functions or your own macros and sa)e them for use with the entire $ibre=ffice suite.
/e careful when reassigning your operating systemFs or $ibre=fficeFs predefined shortcut +eys. 0any +ey assignments are uni)ersally understood shortcuts( such as )* for 6elp( and are always eCpected to pro)ide certain results. *lthough you can easily reset the shortcut +ey assignments to the $ibre=ffice defaults( changing some common shortcut +eys can cause confusion( especially if other users share your computer.
Caution
##$
To adapt shortcut +eys to your needs( use the Customi2e dialog( as described below. 1' Choose &ools 9 Customi5e 9 6eyboard. The Customi2e dialog opens. 2' To ha)e the shortcut +ey assignment a)ailable in all components of $ibre=ffice( select the :ibre;ffice button. 3' !eCt select the re@uired function from the 8ategory and )unction lists. >' !ow select the desired shortcut +ey in the Shortcut 7eys list at the top of the page and clic+ the /odify button on the right. The selection now appears in the Keys list on the lower right. A' Clic+ ;6 to accept the change. !ow the chosen shortcut +ey will eCecute the function chosen in step 3 abo)e whene)er it is pressed. 4epeat as re@uired.
*ll eCisting shortcut +eys for the currently selected )unction are listed in the Keys selection boC. Gf the Keys list is empty( it indicates that the chosen +ey combination is free for use. Gf it were not( and you wanted to reassign a shortcut +ey combination that is already in use( you must first delete the eCisting +ey. -hortcut +eys that are grayed9out in the listing on the Customi2e dialog( such as )* and )*$@ are not a)ailable for reassignment.
>ote
-'ample: Assigning styles to shortcut keys

You can configure shortcut +eys to @uic+ly assign styles in your document. -ome shortcuts are predefined( such as 8trl9$ for the +e-t body paragraph style( 8trl9* for the .eading * style and 8trl9: for .eading :. You can modify these shortcuts and create your own. 1' Clic+ &ools 9 Customi5e 9 6eyboard. The Keyboard page of the Customi2e dialog %5igure >A2' opens. 2' To ha)e the shortcut +ey assignment a)ailable only for 7riter( select !riter in the upper right corner of the pageV otherwise select :ibre;ffice to ma+e it a)ailable to e)ery component. 3' Choose the shortcut +ey you want to assign a style to. Gn this eCample( we ha)e chosen 8trl9=. This enables the /odify button. >' Gn the )unctions section at the bottom of the dialog( scroll down in the 8ategory list to Styles. Clic+ the R sign to eCpand the list of styles. A' Choose the category of style. %This eCample uses a paragraph style( but you can also choose character styles and others.' The )unction list will display the names of the a)ailable styles for the selected category. The eCample shows some of $ibre=fficeFs predefined styles. <' To assign 8trl9= to be the shortcut +ey combination for the $ist 1 style( select List * in the )unction list( and then clic+ /odify. 8trl9= now appears in the Keys list on the right( and List * appears neCt to 8trl9= in the Shortcut 7eys boC at the top. E' 0a+e any other re@uired changes( and then clic+ ;6 to sa)e these settings and close the dialog.
##*
)igure #%: Defining 7eyboard shortcuts for applying styles
-'ample: Assigning macros to shortcut keys

* common use for assigning macros to shortcut +eys is to enable @uic+ and easy insertion of special characters. This eCample shows how to set up +eyboard shortcuts for inserting en9dashes and em9dashes.
To enable macro recording( go to &ools 9 ;ptions 9 :ibre;ffice 9 Advanced and select the -nable macro recording option. /y default( this feature is turned off when $ibre=ffice was installed on your computer.
>ote
5irst( you need to record a macro for inserting each type of dash. Then( you need to assign those macros to shortcut +ey combinations. 1' Choose &ools 9 /acros 9 Cecord /acro to start recording a macro. 2' * small window is displayed so you +now that $ibre=ffice is recording. %This window may loo+ slightly different on different operating systems.'
3' Choose nsert 9 $pecial Characters to open the -pecial Characters dialog. -croll down until you find the en9dash %"L2013' and em9dash %"L201>' characters. -elect one of them and clic+ ;6.
##:
)igure #%3 )ind and choose the en"dash >' Clic+ the $top Cecording button to stop recording( sa)e the macro( and display the $ibre=ffice /asic 0acros dialog %see 5igure >A>'. Type a descripti)e name for the new macro in the /acro name boC on the upper left.
)igure #%# Daming the new macro and storing it A' /e sure to open the library container named /y /acros. 5ind the library named $tandard under /y /acros. -elect /odule1 and clic+ $ave. <' 4epeat steps 1> to create other macros( for eCample to insert an em9dash. E' Choose &ools 9 Customi5e 9 6eyboard tab %5igure >AA'. Gn the Shortcut 7eys list( pic+ an unused combination %for eCample( 8trl9Shift9< for an em9dash'. Gn the 8ategory list( scroll down to :ibre;ffice /acros( clic+ the R sign %or small triangle( depending on your operating system'( then clic+ the R %or triangle' neCt to the $tandard library and choose /odule1. Gn the )unction list( choose -mdash and clic+ the /odify button on the upper right. The selected +ey combination now appears in the Keys list on the lower right( and -mdash appears neCt to 8trl9Shift9< in the Shortcut +eys list. B' 4epeat for the en9dash macro( selecting perhaps 8trl9Shift9D for the shortcut +ey and then clic+ ;6.
8hapter *& 8ustomi3ing Writer ##3
&ip
5or inserting en9 and em9dashes( and other special characters( you may find eCtensions such as Compose -pecial Characters useful. -ee T*dding functionality with eCtensionsU on page >>A.
)igure #%% Defining 7eyboard shortcuts for running macros
$aving changes to a file

Changes to the shortcut +ey assignments can be sa)ed in a +eyboard configuration file for use at a later time( thus permitting you to create and apply different configurations as the need arises. To sa)e +eyboard shortcuts to a file& 1' *fter ma+ing your +eyboard shortcut assignments( clic+ the $ave button on the Customi2e dialog %5igure >A2'. 2' Gn the -a)e 8eyboard Configuration dialog( select /ll files from the $ave as &ype list. 3' !eCt enter a name for the +eyboard configuration file in the File name boC( or select an eCisting file from the list. Gf you need to( browse to find a file from another location. >' Clic+ $ave. * confirmation dialog appears if you are about to o)erwrite an eCisting file( otherwise there will be no feedbac+ and the file will be sa)ed.
###
:oading a saved keyboard configuration

To load a sa)ed +eyboard configuration file and replace your eCisting configuration( clic+ the :oad button on the Customi2e dialog( and then select the configuration file from the $oad 8eyboard Configuration dialog.
Cesetting the shortcut keys

To reset all of the +eyboard shortcuts to their default )alues( clic+ the Ceset button near the bottom right of the Customi2e dialog. "se this feature with care as no confirmation dialog will be displayedV the defaults will be set without any further notice or user input.
Assigning macros to events

Gn $ibre=ffice( when something happens( we say that an e)ent occurred. 5or eCample( a document was opened( a +ey was pressed( or the mouse mo)ed. You can associate a macro with an e)ent( so the macro is run when the e)ent occurs. 5or eCample( a common use is to assign the Topen documentU e)ent to run a macro that performs certain setup tas+s for the document. To associate a macro with an e)ent( use the ,vents page of the Customi2e dialog. 5or more information( see Chapter 13( etting -tarted with 0acros( in the Getting Started guide.
Adding functionality with e'tensions

*n eCtension is a pac+age that can be installed into $ibre=ffice to add new functionality. -e)eral eCtensions are shipped bundled with $ibre=ffice and are installed with the program. =thers can be downloaded from )arious websites. The official eCtension repository is located at http&//eCtensions.libreoffice.org/. These eCtensions are free of charge. -ome eCtensions from other sources are free of chargeV others are a)ailable for a fee. Chec+ the descriptions to see what licenses and fees apply to the ones that interest you.
nstalling e'tensions
3Ctensions can be installed in any of three ways. 1' .irectly from the p.oCt file in your systemWs file browser. 2' 5rom your web browser if it can be configured to open this file type from a web page hyperlin+. 3' .irectly from &ools 9 -'tension /anager by clic+ing Add. To install directly from a sa)ed p.oCt file on your system( double9clic+ the file. To install from a suitably enabled web browser( select the hyperlin+( and then select to =pen the file. Gn both cases( after the 3Ctension 0anager opens( a warning dialog opens for you to )erify the installation and then continue. The file is installed as a Tuser onlyT file in a multi9user system.
)igure #%& 2nstallation warning dialog

8hapter *& 8ustomi3ing Writer ##%
To install directly from 3Ctension 0anager& 1' Gn $ibre=ffice( select &ools 9 -'tension /anager from the menu bar. The option to )iew the eCtensions bundled with $ibre=ffice can be deselected to easier )iew those installations that ha)e been added by a user. 2' Gn the 3Ctension 0anager dialog %5igure >AB'( clic+ Add. 3' * file browser window opens. 5ind and select the eCtension you want to install and clic+ ;pen. >' "sers with administrator or root pri)ileges will see a dialog where they can choose to install eCtensions Rfor all usersR %shared' or Ronly for meR %user'. !ormal users without those pri)ileges can install( remo)e( or modify eCtensions only for their own use %user'.
)igure #%' Dialog showing the installation choices A' The eCtension begins installing. <' Gn all three cases( during the process you may be as+ed to accept a license agreement. 7hen the installation is complete( the eCtension is listed in the 3Ctension 0anager dialog.
To get eCtensions that are listed in the repository( you can open the 3Ctension 0anager and clic+ the 1et more e'tensions online lin+. You do not need to download them separately.
&ip
)igure #%( 0sing the ,-tension <anager
##&
/ppendi- / Keyboard Shortcuts

0sing Writer Without a <ouse
ntroduction
You can use $ibre=ffice without re@uiring a pointing de)ice( such as a mouse or touchpad( by using its built9in +eyboard shortcuts. $ibre=ffice has a general set of +eyboard shortcuts( a)ailable in all components( and a component9 specific set directly related to the wor+ of that component. This appendiC lists the default set for 7riter. 5or general shortcuts( see *ppendiC * of the Getting Started guide. 5or help with $ibre=fficeFs +eyboard shortcuts( or using $ibre=ffice with a +eyboard only( search the $ibre=ffice 6elp using the TshortcutU or TaccessibilityU +eywords. Gn addition to using the built9in +eyboard shortcuts listed in this *ppendiC( you can define your own. -ee Chapter 1<( Customi2ing 7riter( for instructions.
-ome of the shortcuts listed here may not wor+ if your operating system uses the same shortcuts for other tas+s.
>ote
To get around this problem( assign different +eys to these shortcuts by reconfiguring either $ibre=ffice %see Chapter 1<' or your operating system %see system documentation'.
&ip for /acintosh users

-ome +eystro+es are different on a 0ac from those used in 7indows and $inuC. The following table gi)es some common substitutions for the instructions in this boo+. 5or a more detailed list( see the application 6elp. Windows or Linux
6ight"clic7 8trl 48ontrol5 )% )**
Mac equivalent
8ontrol9clic7 z %8ommand' ShiftLzL)% zL+
Effect
=pens conteCt menu "sed with other +eys =pens the !a)igator =pens the-tyles and 5ormatting window
;pening menus and menu items

"!ortcut ;eys +esult
=pens a menu where VQ1 is the underlined character of the menu you want to open. 5or eCample( /lt9) opens the menu File. 7ith the menu open( you will again find underlined characters. You can access these menu items directly by simply pressing the underlined character +ey. 7here two menu items ha)e the same underlined character( press the character +ey again to mo)e to the neCt item. ,-ample& to access the Printer $ettings item of the File menu after opening it( press 6 twice to mo)e from the initial 4igital $ignatures selection to Printer $ettings. ,-ception& :anguage in the &ools menu has no underlined characters.
/lt9VQ1
##(
"!ortcut ;eys
+esult
4epeatedly pressing )& switches the focus and circles through the following obJects&
)&
0enu bar 3)ery toolbar from top to bottom and from left to right 3)ery free window from left to right .ocument
Shift9)& 8trl9)& )*$ or /lt ,sc
-witches through obJects in the opposite direction. -witches the focus to the document. -witches to the 0enu bar and bac+. Closes an open menu.
Accessing a menu command

#ress /lt or )& or )*$ to select the first item on the menu bar %the File menu'. 7ith the right"arrow( the neCt menu to the right is selectedV with the left"arrow( the pre)ious menu. The .ome and ,nd +eys select the first and the last item on the 0enu bar. The down"arrow opens a selected menu. *n additional down"arrow and up"arrow mo)es the selection through the menu commands. The right"arrow opens any eCisting submenus. #ress ,nter to eCecute the selected menu command.
-'ecuting a toolbar command

#ress )& repeatedly until the first icon on the toolbar is selected. "se the right and left arrows to select an icon on a hori2ontal toolbar. -imilarly( use the up and down arrows to select an icon on a )ertical toolbar. The .ome +ey selects the first icon on a toolbar and the ,nd +ey( the last. #ress ,nter to eCecute the selected icon. Gf the selected icon normally demands a consecuti)e mouse action( such as inserting a rectangle( then pressing the ,nter +ey is not sufficient& in these cases press 8trl9,nter.
#ress 8trl9,nter on an icon for creating a draw obJect. * draw obJect will be placed into the
middle of the )iew( with a predefined si2e.
#ress 8trl9,nter on the -election tool to select the first draw obJect in the document. Gf you
want to edit( si2e( or mo)e the selected draw obJect( first use 8trl9)& to mo)e the focus into the document. Gf a toolbar is longer than can be displayed on screen( it shows an icon at the right or lower edge. -elect the toolbar and press Page0p or PageDown to display the remaining icons.
>avigating and selecting with the keyboard

You can na)igate through a document and ma+e selections with the +eyboard.
To mo)e the cursor( press the +ey or +ey combination gi)en in the following table. To select the characters under the mo)ing cursor( additionally hold down the Shift +ey when
you mo)e the cursor.
##=
;ey
6ight@ left arrow 7eys 0p@ down arrow 7eys .ome ,nd Pg0p PgDn
%unction
0o)es the cursor one character to the left or to the right. 0o)es the cursor up or down one line. 0o)es the cursor to the beginning of the current line. 0o)es the cursor to the end of the current line. -crolls up one page. -croll down one page.
0lus (trl &ey

0o)es the cursor one word to the left or to the right. %8trl9/lt' 0o)es the current paragraph up or down. 0o)es the cursor to the beginning of the document. 0o)es the cursor to the end of the document. 0o)es the cursor to the header. 0o)es the cursor to the footer.
Controlling dialogs
7hen you open any dialog( one element %such as a button( an option field( an entry in a list boC( or a chec+boC' is highlighted or indicated by a dotted boC around the field or button name. This element is said to ha)e the focus on it. "!ortcut ;eys
,nter
+esult
*cti)ates the selected button. Gn most cases where no button is selected( ,nter is e@ui)alent to clic+ing ;6. Closes the dialog without sa)ing any changes made while it was open. Gn most cases( ,sc is e@ui)alent to clic+ing 8ancel. 7hen an open drop9down list is selected( ,sc closes the list. Toggles a chec+boC on or off. 0o)es the focus up and down a list. Gncreases or decreases the )alue of a )ariable. 0o)es the focus )ertically within a section of a dialog. 0o)es the focus hori2ontally within a section of a dialog. *d)ances the focus to the neCt section or element of a dialog. 4eturns the focus to the pre)ious section or element in a dialog. -hows items in a drop9down list.
,sc Spacebar 0p@ down arrow +eys 6ight@ left arrow +eys +ab Shift9+ab /lt9Down"arrow
/acros
"!ortcut ;eys
8trl9X %multiplication sign& on number pad only' Shift98trl9C
#%$
+esult
4uns a macro field. -tops a running macro.
$hortcut keys for controlling documents and windows

"!ortcut ;eys
8trl9O 8trl9S 8trl9D 8trl9Shift9D 8trl9P 8trl9) 8trl9. 8trl9Shift9) 8trl9Shift9B 8trl9Shift96 8trl9Shift92 )*
Effect
=pens a document. -a)es the current document. Creates a new document. =pens Templates and .ocuments dialog. =pens the #rint dialog. *cti)ates the 5ind toolbar. =pens the 5ind M 4eplace dialog. -earches for the last entered search term. Toggles the )iew between full9screen mode and normal mode. 4edraws the document )iew. 3nables or disables the selection cursor in read9only teCt. -tarts the $ibre=ffice 6elp. Gn the $ibre=ffice 6elp& Jumps to main help page.
Shift9)* Shift9): )& Shift9)& )*$ Shift9)*$ 8trl9)# or /lt9)# 8trl9C
=pens ConteCt 6elp. Turns on 3Ctended Tips for the currently selected command( icon or control. -ets focus in neCt subwindow %for eCample( document/data source )iew'. -ets focus in pre)ious subwindow. *cti)ates the first menu %5ile menu'. =pens the conteCt menu. Closes the current document %closes $ibre=ffice when the last open document is closed'. 3Cits application.
#%*
Function keys for !riter

"!ortcut &eys
)* Shift9)* ): 8trl9): Shift9): )3 8trl9)3 )# Shift9)# )% 8trl9Shift9)% )' 8trl9)' )( 8trl9)( Shift9)( 8trl9Shift9)( )= 8trl9)= Shift9)= 8trl9Shift9)= )*$ 8trl9)*$ )** Shift9)** 8trl9Shift9)**
Effect
=pens 7riter 6elp at the 6ome page. #ressing )* again opens the home page of the acti)e tab. 3nables the eCtended help tips under the mouse pointer until the neCt clic+. =pens or closes the 5ormula /ar. =pens the 5ields dialog. .isplays tips for the currently selected command( icon( or control. Gnserts the *utoTeCt entry corresponding to the typed shortcut. =pens the *utoTeCt dialog( where you can edit an *utoTeCt entry or create a new entry from the selected teCt. =pens or closes the Piew .ata -ources window. -elects the neCt frame. =pens or closes the !a)igator. =pens the !a)igator with cursor in page number field. -tarts the spelling and grammar chec+er. =pens the Thesaurus. Turns 3Ctension -election mode on or off. Turns field shadings on or off. Turns 0ultiple -election mode on or off. Turns /loc+ -election mode on or off. "pdates fields. -hows or hides field names. Calculates Table. =pens a dialog for editing input fields and lists. -ee T=pening menus and menu itemsT on page >>B for details. .isplays or hides non9printing characters. =pens or closes the -tyles and 5ormatting window. Creates a new style from a selection. "pdates a style.
#%:
"!ortcut &eys
)*: 8trl9)*: Shift9)*: 8trl9Shift9)*:
Effect
Turns paragraph numbering on or off. Gnserts or edits a table. Turns bullets on or off. Turns numbering/bullets off.
$hortcut keys for !riter

"!ortcut ;eys
8trl9/ 8trl9D 8trl9, 8trl9) 8trl9. 8trl9B 8trl9L 8trl96 8trl9< 8trl9N 8trl9O 8trl9Shift9J 8trl9Shift9P 8trl9G 8trl9Plus Key495 8trl9.yphen4Y5 8trl9Shift9.yphen 4Y5 8trl9Shift9; 8trl9! 4slash5
Effect
-elects all content in a document( unless the cursor is in a table %see T-hortcut +eys for tablesU on page >AA'. .ouble underlines selected teCt or teCt typed afterward. #ress again to turn off. Centers the paragraph. =pens the 5ind toolbar. =pens the 5ind and 4eplace dialog. ,ustifies the paragraph. *ligns the paragraph to the left. *lign the paragraph to the right. 4emo)es direct formatting from the selected teCt or obJects %as in Format 9 Clear 4irect Formatting'. .ecreases the si2e of the selected teCt. Gncreases the si2e of the selected teCt. -ubscripts selected teCt or teCt typed afterward. #ress again to turn off. -uperscripts selected teCt or teCt typed afterward. #ress again to turn off. 4edoes last action. Calculates the selected teCt and copies the result to the clipboard. Gnserts a conditional hyphen. Gnserts a non9brea+ing hyphen %not used for hyphenation'. -tops applying direct character formats whilst typing( from the cursor point onward. Gnserts a no9width optional line brea+.
#%3
"!ortcut ;eys
8trl9Shift9Space Shift9,nter 8trl9,nter 8trl9Shift9,nter /lt9,nter /lt9,nter /rrow Left Shift9/rrow Left 8trl9/rrow Left 8trl9Shift9/rrow Left /rrow 6ight Shift9/rrow 6ight 8trl9/rrow 6ight 8trl9Shift9/rrow 6ight /rrow 0p Shift9/rrow 0p /rrow Down Shift9/rrow Down .ome Shift9.ome ,nd Shift9,nd 8trl9.ome 8trl9Shift9.ome 8trl9,nd 8trl9Shift9,nd 8trl9Page0p 8trl9PageDown 2nsert
Effect
Gnserts a non9brea+ing space %not used for hyphenation and not eCpanded if teCt is Justified'. Gnserts a line brea+ without paragraph change. Gnserts a page brea+. Gnserts a column brea+ in multi9column teCts. Gnserts a new paragraph without numbering. Gnserts a new paragraph directly before or after a section or a table. 0o)es cursor to left. 0o)es cursor with selection to the left. oes to beginning of word. -elects to the left word by word. 0o)es cursor to right. 0o)es cursor with selection to the right. oes to start of neCt word. -elects to the right word by word. 0o)es up one line. -elects lines in an upwards direction. 0o)es cursor down one line. -elects lines in a downward direction. oes to beginning of line. oes and selects to the beginning of a line. oes to end of line. oes and selects to end of line. oes to start of document. oes and selects teCt to start of document. oes to end of document. oes and selects teCt to end of document. -witches cursor between teCt and header. -witches cursor between teCt and footer. Turns Gnsert mode on or off.
#%#
"!ortcut ;eys
Page0p Shift9Page0p PageDown Shift9PageDown 8trl9Del 8trl9Jac7space 8trl9Shift9Del 8trl9Shift9Jac7space 8trl9+ab 8trl9Shift9+ab /lt9W 8trl9double"clic7 or 8trl9Shift9)*$
Effect
0o)es up one screen page. 0o)es up one screen page with selection. 0o)es down one screen page. 0o)es down one screen page with selection. .eletes teCt to end of word. .eletes teCt to beginning of word. .eletes teCt to end of sentence. .eletes teCt to beginning of sentence. "ses neCt suggestion with automatic word completion. "se pre)ious suggestion with automatic word completion. Gn the spelling chec+er dialog& Calls bac+ the original un+nown word into the teCt boC. .oc+s or un9doc+s the !a)igator( -tyles and 5ormatting window( or other windows.
$hortcut keys for tables

"!ortcut ;eys
8trl9/
Effect
Gf the acti)e cell is empty( 8trl9/ selects the whole tableV otherwise( it selects the contents of the acti)e cell. #ress 8trl9/ a second time to select the entire table. Gf the acti)e cell is empty( 8trl9.ome mo)es the cursor to the beginning of the table. #ress 8trl9.ome again to mo)e the cursor to the beginning of document. Gf the acti)e cell is not empty( 8trl9.ome mo)es the cursor to the beginning of the acti)e cell. * second press of 8trl9.ome mo)es the cursor to the beginning of the current table. * third press mo)es the cursor to the beginning of the document.
8trl9.ome
8trl9,nd
Gf the acti)e cell is empty( 8trl9,nd mo)es the cursor to the end of the table. #ress 8trl9,nd again to mo)e the cursor to the end of document. Gf the acti)e cell is not empty( 8trl9,nd mo)es the cursor to the end of the acti)e cell. * second press of 8trl9,nd mo)es the cursor to the end of the current table. * third press mo)es the cursor to the end of the document.
8trl9+ab
Gnserts a tab stop %only in tables'. .epending on the 7indow 0anager in use( /lt9+ab may be used instead.
#%%
"!ortcut ;eys
8trl9Shift9/rrow 0p 8trl9Shift9/rrow Down /lt9/rrow 7eys /lt9Shift9/rrow 7eys 8trl9/lt9Shift9/rrow 7eys /lt92nsert /lt9Del
Effect
,umps to start of table. ,umps to end of table. Gncreases or decreases the si2e of the column or row on the right or bottom cell edge. Gncreases or decreases the si2e of the column or row on the left or top cell edge. $i+e /lt( but modifies only the acti)e cell. #ro)ides 3 seconds in Gnsert mode( during which time pressing an arrow +ey inserts a row or column( or 8trl9/rrow Key inserts a cell. #ro)ides 3 seconds in .elete mode( during which time pressing an arrow +ey deletes a row or column( or 8trl9/rrow Key merges the acti)e cell with the neighboring cell. 4emo)es cell protection from all selected tables. Gf no table is selected( then cell protection is remo)ed from all of the tables in the document. Gf nothing is selected( the contents of the neCt cell are deleted. Gf cells are selected( the whole row%s' of the selection are deleted. Gf all rows are selected completely or partially( the entire table is deleted.
8trl9Shift9+
8trl9Shift9Del
$hortcut keys for paragraphs and heading levels

"!ortcut ;eys
8trl9$ %2ero' 8trl9* 8trl9: 8trl93 8trl9# 8trl9% 8trl9/lt90p /rrow or 8trl90p /rrow 8trl9/lt9Down /rrow or 8trl9Down /rrow +ab
Effect
*pplies TeCt /ody paragraph style. *pplies 6eading 1 paragraph style. *pplies 6eading 2 paragraph style. *pplies 6eading 3 paragraph style. *pplies 6eading > paragraph style. *pplies 6eading A paragraph style. 0o)es the acti)e paragraph or selected paragraphs up one paragraph. 0o)es the acti)e paragraph or selected paragraphs down one paragraph. 7hen the cursor is at the beginning of the heading teCt( mo)es a heading in format .eading ; %I j 1D' down one le)el in the outline. .oes not affect the applied paragraph style.
#%&
"!ortcut ;eys
Shift9+ab
Effect
7hen the cursor is at the beginning of the heading teCt( mo)es a heading in format .eading ; %I j 210' up one le)el in the outline. .oes not affect the applied paragraph style. *t the start of a heading& Gnserts a tab stop. .epending on the 7indow 0anager in use( /lt9+ab may be used instead.
8trl9+ab
$hortcut keys for moving and resi5ing frames, graphics, and obDects
"!ortcut ;eys
,sc
Effect
Cursor is inside a teCt frame and no teCt is selected& ,sc selects the teCt frame. TeCt frame is selected& ,sc clears the cursor from the teCt frame.
): or ,nter or any +ey that produces a character on screen /lt9/rrow Keys /lt98trl9/rrow Keys /lt98trl9Shift9 /rrow Keys 8trl9+ab
Gf a teCt frame is selected& positions the cursor to the end of the teCt in the teCt frame. Gf you press any +ey that produces a character on screen( and the document is in edit mode( the character is appended to the teCt. 0o)es the selected obJect. 4esi2es an obJect by mo)ing the lower right corner. 4esi2es an obJect by mo)ing the top left corner. -elects the anchor of an obJect %in 3dit #oints mode'.
$hortcut keys in the 1allery

"!ortcut &eys
+ab Shift9+ab
+esult
0o)es between areas. 0o)es between areas %bac+wards'
#%'
$hortcut keys in the >ew &heme area of the 1allery

"!ortcut &eys
0p /rrow Down /rrow 8trl9,nter Shift9)*$ 8trl90 8trl96 8trl9D 2nsert
+esult
0o)es the selection up. 0o)es the selection down. =pens the #roperties dialog. =pens a conteCt menu. 4efreshes the selected theme. =pens the 3nter Title dialog. .eletes the selected theme. Gnserts a new theme.
$hortcut keys in the 1allery preview area

"!ortcut &eys
.ome ,nd Left /rrow 6ight /rrow 0p /rrow Down /rrow Page 0p Page Down 8trl9Shift92nsert 8trl92 8trl9+ 8trl9P Spacebar ,nter -tep bac+ward %only in obJect )iew'
+esult
,umps to the first entry. ,umps to the last entry. -elects the neCt -elects the neCt -elects the neCt -elects the neCt allery element on the left. allery element on the right. allery element abo)e. allery element below.
-croll up one screen. -croll down one screen. Gnserts the selected obJect as a lin+ed obJect into the current document. Gnserts a copy of the selected obJect into the current document. =pens the -nter &itle dialog. -witches between themes )iew and obJect )iew. -witches between themes )iew and obJect )iew. -witches between themes )iew and obJect )iew. -witches bac+ to main o)er)iew.
#%(
$electing rows and columns in a database table Aopened by F)B

"!ortcut &eys
Spacebar 8trl9Spacebar Shift9Spacebar 8trl9Page 0p 8trl9Page Down
+esult
Toggles row selection( eCcept when the row is in edit mode. Toggles row selection. -elects the current column. 0o)es pointer to the first row. 0o)es pointer to the last row.
$hortcut keys for drawing obDects

"!ortcut &eys
-elect the toolbar with )&. "se the Down /rrow and 6ight /rrow to select the desired toolbar icon and press 8trl9,nter. -elect the document with 8trl9)& and press +ab. +ab Shift9+ab 8trl9.ome 8trl9,nd ,sc ,sc %in 6andle -election 0ode' 0p!Down!Left!6ight /rrow
+esult
Gnserts a .rawing =bJect.
-elects a .rawing =bJect. -elects the neCt .rawing =bJect. -elects the pre)ious .rawing =bJect. -elects the first .rawing =bJect. -elects the last .rawing =bJect. 3nds .rawing =bJect selection. 3Cit 6andle -election 0ode and return to =bJect -election 0ode. 0o)e the selected point %the snap9to9grid functions are temporarily disabled( but end points still snap to each other'. 0o)es the selected .rawing =bJect one piCel %in -election 0ode'. 4e9si2es a .rawing =bJect %in 6andle -election 0ode'. 4otates a .rawing =bJect %in 4otation 0ode'. =pens the properties dialog for a .rawing =bJect. *cti)ates the #oint -election mode for the selected drawing obJect.
/lt90p!Down!Left!6ight /rrow
#%=
"!ortcut &eys
Spacebar
+esult
-elect a point of a drawing obJect %in #oint -election mode' / Cancel selection. The selected point blin+s once per second.
Shift9Spacebar 8trl9+ab
-elect an additional point in #oint -election mode. -elect the neCt point of the drawing obJect %#oint -election mode'. Gn 4otation mode( the center of rotation can also be selected.
8trl9Shift9+ab 8trl9,nter 8trl9,nter at the -election icon ,sc
-elect the pre)ious point of the drawing obJect %#oint -election mode'. * new drawing obJect with default si2e is placed in the center of the current )iew. *cti)ates the first drawing obJect in the document. $ea)e the #oint -election mode. The drawing obJect is selected afterwards. 3dit a point of a drawing obJect %#oint 3dit mode'.
*ny teCt or numerical +ey
Gf a drawing obJect is selected( switches to edit mode and places the cursor at the end of the teCt in the drawing obJect. * printable character is inserted. The position of the obJectWs center is fiCed. The ratio of the obJectWs width to height is fiCed.
/lt +ey while creating or scaling a graphic obJect Shift +ey while creating or scaling a graphic obJect
#&$
nde'
A
accessibility features >>B address boo+ 30E address data source 30< align cells in table 2D0 aligning graphics 2A2 alphabetic indeC adding indeC entries 3>> columns 3A0 creating 3>> anchoring frames 123 antialiasing screen font >3 appearance options A0 arranging graphics 2A1 *sian languages <> *ssign action dialog %form' >2D *utoCaption <1( 2AE *utoCorrect <A( ED( D> *utofit 2E3 autoformat table 2D1 automatic caption <1( 2BA automatic sa)ing 2D *utoTeCt D< *utoTeCt dialog boC 3D0 *utoTeCt for entering fields 3D0 undoing 1B3 Citation 0odify 3AD citations 3AB clipboard >> closing a document 32 closing 7riter 32 color options >< columns changing the number 11D defining 11E distributing teCt e)enly 11D formatting 11B newspaper9style 11D separator lines 11B comments 100 comparing documents DD( 102 compatibility options <0 compleC teCt layout languages <> conditional content 3DB( 3DD conditional teCt 3DD( >01 con)ert colors to grayscale AD counting words 10E create document from template 2D> cross9reference 1>< cross9references between documents 3EE in headers or footers 3D< inserting references 3D3 o)er)iew 10>( 3D2 preparing headings as targets 3EE setting references 3EB( 3DA Ctrl9clic+ re@uired to follow hyperlin+s >B customi2ing +eyboard shortcuts >>0 menus >3> toolbars >3E cutting and copying teCt <D
3
/ase main window >23 bibliographic database adding entries 3AE columns 3AA creating 3A> fields 3A< filter 3AA bibliography creating 3A> creating database 3A> editing 3<> 3diting a reference 3AD master document 3E> paragraph style 3<3 references 3AB boo+ pre)iew 1AB boo+let printing 1AA boo+mar+s 10>( 3D3( 3D> brochure printing 1AA bulleted list B0 /ullets and !umbering toolbar B0
4
dashes E> data source accessing eCisting >2> accessing using a form >22 definition 30< database access permissions >2D creating >22 Table .esign window >23 .atabase 7i2ard >22( >2A default file format A2 default template 2DD dictionaries <3 different first page 113 digital rights management %.40' 1<< digital signature 1E1
C
Caption dialog 2AB captions 2AE change case 10E change trac+ing options <0 character formatting EB character styles
2nde-
#&*
direct cursor AE .ocGnformation field >00 doc+ing/floating windows 20 document closing 32 create from template 2D> sa)ing 2D sa)ing as a 0icrosoft 7ord 2D document status option >1 document )iews 2A .ocumentation 11 double9sided printing AD drag and drop 23E .rawing =bJect #roperties toolbar 2>B drawing obJects grouping 2>D properties 2>B .rawing toolbar 2>B drawing tools 2>E dupleC printer AD
e9mail options <2 e9mailing 0ail 0erge 7i2ard 10> en and em dashes E> endnotes B3( 132 en)elope formatting address bloc+s 1AD 0ail 0erge dialog 321 mail merge from database 1AB printing 1AB en)elope printing 1AB 3#- images in #.5 1<3 eCport directly as #.5 1<2( 1<E eCporting to #.5 1<2 eCtensions >>A
F
faC icon( adding to toolbar >3D faC sending 1<2 5aC 7i2ard 2D< 5.5 1<3 features 1B field names( show/hide 3DE field shadings on/off 3DE fields automatic updating >0> *utoTeCt entry 3D2 *utoTeCt for entering 3D0 boo+mar+ 10>( 3D> boo+mar+s 3D3 con)erting into teCt 3DB cross9reference 10>( 3D2
.ocGnformation >00 document properties 3BB document title 3D< entering 3B< fiCed content 3BD( 3DE gray bac+ground on screen 3B< hidden teCt >02 in headers and footers 3D< +eyboard shortcuts 3DE number range )ariable 3D0 page count 3DE page number 3B<( 3D< placeholder >0> updating 3DE user9defined )ariable 3D2( >00 5ields dialog boC Cross9references tab 3D3( 3DA .ocGnformation tab 3BD .ocument page 3BD .ocument tab 3D< 5unctions tab& conditional teCt >01 5unctions tab& hidden teCt >02 5unctions tab& placeholder field >0A open using +eyboard 3DE 4eferences tab 3ED file locations >A file sharing options >E 5ill 5ormat mode 1EA finding and replacing teCt E0 floating toolbars 1D( 20 font family AE font history >3 font options >3 font replacements > footnote or endnote mar+er B3 footnotes B3( 131 form accessing data sources >22 adding form controls >1E configuring controls >12 configuring form controls >20 control formatting options >30 creating >11 customi2ation( ad)anced >2B data entry form creation >2A database access permissions >2D design mode >11 entering data >2E eCample of creating a form >1E form controls reference >13 form properties >2< 5orm #roperties dialog >2< inserting form controls >12 lin+ing macro to a control >2B read9only >2D
#&:
toolbars >11 when to use >10 I5orms >31 >11 5orm Controls toolbar >11 5orm .esign toolbar >11( >1A form letter creating with wi2ard 321 5orm #roperties dialog >2< 5ormatting *ids options A< formatting( finding and replacing E2 frame anchoring 123 border 122 creating 121 lin+ing 123 mo)ing( resi2ing( and changing attributes 121 5rame dialog 122( 12>
1
allery creating a new theme 2<3 deleting images 2<2 deleting obJects 2<2 6ide/-how button 2>1 location 2<3 opening 2>0 general options >0 general options for 7riter AA graphics adding captions 2AE adding from file 23E alignment 2A0 arrangement 2A0 lin+ing 23B modifying 2>1 positioning 2A0 resi2ing 2>A wrapping teCt around 2A2 grid inter)als AE
icon si2e and style >2 icons in menus >3 image map 2<0 images adding from file 237 lin+ing 23B resi2ing 2>A scanned 2>0 wrapping teCt around 2A2 indent distance AA indents EE indeC capitali2ing entries 3>B creating 3>> customi2ing 3>< +ey 3><( 3>B sorting entries 3>B indeC entries 3>> customi2ing 3><( 3>B editing 3A1 GndeC $in+ character style 3>0 Gnsert /oo+mar+ dialog 3EB( 3DA Gnsert GndeC 3ntry dialog 3>< Gnsert GndeC/Table dialog 33< Gnsert #icture dialog 23B Gnsert -ection dialog 12B Gnsert -ection dialog boC >03 Gnternational -upport 11
6
+eyboard shortcuts assigning >>0( >>B customi2ing >>1 loading from a file >>A resetting to default )alues >>A sa)ing to a file >>> select nonconsecuti)e items 1 6elp *gent >1 6elp system 10 hidden paragraphs 3DD hidden section 130 hidden sections 3DD hidden teCt 3DD( >02 6ide/-how button 2>1 6T0$ compatibility A> 6T0$ documents AE hyperlin+s editing 10< inserting 10> hyphenation D3 manual D>
:
label printing 1<0 labels printing 1<0 landscape page in portrait document 11A landscape pages 11> language settings <3 $ibre$ogo 2<> licensing of $ibre=ffice 1> line numbering DB lines B0 lin+ed styles 20A lin+ing 103 lin+ing frames 123 load/sa)e options A0 loading styles 1EE locale settings <3 logical eCpressions 3DD
#&3
2nde-
/
macro lin+ing to a form control >2B macros assigning to e)ents >>A mail merge *dJust $ayout dialog 32B Create -alutation dialog 32E edit sa)ed file 31E en)elopes 321 0ail 0erge dialog 312( 321 0atch 5ields dialog 32A !ew *ddress /loc+ dialog 32A o)er)iew 30< personali2e documents 330 sa)e( print or send 330 -elect *ddress /loc+ dialog 32> -elect *ddress $ist dialog 323 0ail 0erge dialog 312( 321 mail merge e9mail options <2 0ail 0erge 7i2ard e9mailing 7riter document 1 changing styles 3E< combining se)eral documents 3 !a)igator 3B0 no eCisting documents 3E0 planning 3E0 splitting one document 3<E styles 3<<( 3E0 subdocument creation 3E1 subdocument inclusion 3E3 table of contents 3E> template 3E1 title page 3E2 0atch 5ields dialog 32A measurement unit EB memory options >2 menus 1D adding commands >3< creating >3A customi2ing >3> modifying >3A modifying entries >3E merge cells in table 2D0 merging and splitting cells in table 2EA
#&#
merging documents 102 0icrosoft =ffice file con)ersion A> 0icrosoft 7ord <0 middle mouse button function >> 0ore %5orm' Controls toolbar >11( >1> mouse positioning >>
>
name and initials of user >0 !a)igator in master document 3B0 in normal document 33 nested tables 2<D !ew *ddress /loc+ dialog 32A newsletter layout 111 non9brea+ing hyphen E> non9brea+ing spaces E> !umber 5ormat dialog 12E number range )ariable 3D0 number recognition AD( 12E( 2B0 numbered lists B0 numbering pages 13D numbering pages by chapter 1>2 numbering se@uence( defining 3D0
;
=ffice *ssistant >1 =pen -ource Gnitiati)e %=-G' 1> =pen/-a)e dialogs >1 =rganiser page 20> organi2ing templates 301 orientation of page 11> o)erwrite mode 10< =IT files 2DB
P
page brea+( manual 112 page count in header or footer 3DE page count( problem 1>< page layout choosing best method 110 different first page 113 headers and footers 13A landscape page 11> landscape page in portrait document 11A margins( changing 11< newsletter 111 orientation 11> portrait headers on landscape pages 13E sna+ing columns 111 using columns 11E using frames 120 using sections 12E using styles 112 using tables 12A page number automatic 13D numbering by chapter 1>2
odd and e)en 1>> restarting 1>> restarting( problems 1>A page numbers 3B< page styles 112 paragraph formatting EA spacing at tops of pages <1 paragraph ends A< paragraph mar+ers 120 paragraph styles *lignment page 20D bac+ground and borders 21< conditional 21< drop cap 21A 5ont options 211 Gndents M -pacing 20E neCt style 1D2 =utline M !umbering 21A outline le)els 1DA #osition page 212 4otating teCt 213 TeCt flow 20D password protection 30 password9protect #.5 1<< pasting teCt <D path options >A #.5 blan+ page eCport 1<> digital rights management %.40' 1<< embed standard fonts 1<> encrypt 1<< 3#- %3ncapsulated #ost-cript' images 1<3 eCport documents to 1<2 image compression and resolution 1<2 initial )iew selection 1<> pages to eCport 1<2 password9protect 1<< security settings 1<< tagged 1<3 user interface settings 1<> #.5 =ptions dialog 1<2 personal data( remo)ing 1E1 #ersonali2ation >D personas >D pictures adding 2<1 adding from file 237 lin+ing 23B resi2ing 2>A transparency 2>3 wrapping teCt around 2A2 placeholder field >0> pre)iew of fonts >3 print file directly 1A2 print options >>( AB printer metrics <0 printer settings A1 printer warnings >>
2nde-
printing blac+ and white on color printer 1AE boo+let 1AA brochure 1AA choosing what to print 1A2 en)elopes 1AB grayscale on color printer 1AE labels 1<0 multiple pages per sheet 1A3 page orientation 1A3 pre)iewing 1AE selecting what to print 1AA 1AE #roperties dialog 3BE( >12 protecting a document DD
E
Huic+starter enabling >2 7indows 2<
C
read9only forms >2D recording changes DD redlines DD redo 3E 4egister9true 20B regular eCpressions E0 reJecting changes 100 relati)e font si2e 211 remo)ing personal data 1E1 replacement table %font' >< re)ision mar+s DD rulers 22( EE rulers( changing margins 11<
$
-a)e 2D scaling factor >2 scanner 2>0 screen font antialiasing >3 searching in ,apanese <> section boundaries A0 conditional >03 creating 12B deleting 13> editing the format 133 hidden >03 hiding 130 lin+ing 12D lin+s( updating 13> naming 12B password9protecting 12D sa)ing 132 uses of 12B write9protecting 12D security 30
#&%
security options >E -elect *ddress /loc+ dialog 32> -elect *ddress $ist dialog 323( 32> selecting teCt > send document as e9mail 1>B sideheads 12A si2e optimi2ation A2 sna+ing columns 111 snap to grid AE sorting data in a table 2D1 spacing at tops of pages <1 spacing between paragraphs and tables <0 special characters E3 spelling B< spelling options <> split cells in table 2D0 spreadsheet functions in table 2B2 -tyle dialog 1BB styles assigning to shortcut +eys >>1 creating by drag and drop 1EB loading from template or document 1EE neCt style 1D2 relati)e font si2e 211 tab stops 21> updating from selection 1E< -tyles and 5ormatting window 1EA styles filters 6ide 1EB subdocuments 3<E( 3E0( 3E1 sum cells in table 2D1 superordinate obJect settings 2ED support 10 system font for user interface >3
&
tab stops AA( EE( 21> table allow to brea+ across pages 2ED autoformat 2D1 automatic caption 2BA bac+ground colors and graphics 2EE borders 2EA boundaries A0( 2EB caption 2B> heading 2<D lin+ing graphic file 2EB merging and splitting 2EA nested table 2<D number recognition 2B0 page layout using 12A page or column brea+ 2ED properties 2 sort cells 2D1
spacing at tops of pages <1 spreadsheet functions 2B2 sum cells 2D1 teCt flow 2ED Table .esign window >23 Table 5ormat dialog boC 12E TeCt 5low tab 11A Table menu and toolbar 2BD table of contents adding elements 33D bac+ground 3>1 changing number of le)els included 33< character styles 33D columns 3>1 creating 33> creating from additional styles 33E creating from an outline 33E creating from indeC mar+s 33E customi2ing 33A deleting 3>> editing 3>3 formating entries 33E graphic in bac+ground 1>B Gnternet $in+ character style 3>0 paragraph style 3>0 protecting against manual changes 33< scope 33E Tab parameters 3>0 Tab position relati)e to #aragraph -tyle indent 3>0 updating 3>3 table options AD tear9off toolbars 1D template create document from 2E( 2D> creating from document 2DA creating using wi2ard 2D< deleting 302 description 2D> editing 2DE eCporting 303 folders 301 importing 303 mo)ing 302 setting a default 2DD update document styles from 2DE teCt boundaries A0 teCt flow in tables 2ED teCt si2e in user interface >2 teCt wrapping 2A2 theme deleting 2<3 theme( allery 2<2 themes % allery' 2<3 thesaurus D1 toolbars 1D adding commands >3B choosing icons for commands >3B creating >>0
#&&
tooltips >1 trac+ing changes DD transparency 2>3 two9digit years >1
!
wildcards E0 wi2ard *ddress .ata -ource 30< 0ail 0erge 321 word completion DA word count 10E wor+space 1B wrap off 2A3 wrap through 2A< wrapping teCt around graphics 2A2
2
undo 3E update fields and charts automatically AA update lin+s when loading AA updating fields 3DE "4$ 4ecognition 10> "ser .ata options >0 "ser guides 11 user9defined )ariable field 3D2 user9specific settings A1
M
I5orms >31 I0$ A2
=
)ariables 3DD )iew options >2 Piew options for 7riter A<
J
year %two digits' >1
2nde-
#&'

WG40 WriterGuideLO PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

WG40 WriterGuideLO PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LibreOffice 4.

Publication date and software version

Documentation for LibreOffice is available at http !!www.libreoffice.org!get"help!documentation

Chapter 1 ntroducing !riter.............................................................................................................. 1"

Chapter # $etting up !riter................................................................................................................ %9

Chapter % !orking with &e't...............................................................................................................("

Chapter ) Formatting Pages.............................................................................................................1*9

Chapter + Printing, -'porting, Fa'ing, and -./ailing................................................................... 1+1

LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide

Chapter ( ntroduction to $tyles...................................................................................................... 1"%

Chapter " !orking with $tyles......................................................................................................... #*%

Chapter 0 !orking with 1raphics.................................................................................................... #%+

Chapter 9 !orking with &ables........................................................................................................ #("

Chapter 1* !orking with &emplates.................................................................................................. #9%

Chapter 11 2sing /ail /erge..............................................................................................................%*+

Chapter 1# &ables of Contents, nde'es, and 3ibliographies.........................................................%%%

Chapter 1% !orking with /aster 4ocuments................................................................................... %(+

Chapter 1) !orking with Fields......................................................................................................... %0+

Chapter 1+ 2sing Forms in !riter......................................................................................................)*9

Chapter 1( Customi5ing !riter.......................................................................................................... )%%

Appendi' A 6eyboard $hortcuts.........................................................................................................))"

LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide

LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide

!ho is this book for7

!hat is in this book7

!here to get more help7

Free online support

Paid support and training

!hat you see may be different

2sing :ibre;ffice on a /ac

!hat are all these things called7

LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide

!ho wrote this book7

Gan $aurenson -cott 4hoades 4obert -cott -haron 7histon

Fre?uently asked ?uestions

LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide

>ew features in :ibre;ffice !riter ).*

Gntegration with se)eral content and document management systemsQincluding *lfresco(

8hapter * 2ntroducing Writer

Parts of the main !riter window

)igure : Parts of the main Writer window

LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide

Displayin or !idin toolbars

"ub#enus and tear$off toolbars

)igure 3 ,-ample of a tear"off toolbar

8hapter * 2ntroducing Writer

)igure % <oving a floating toolbar

Doc&in 'floatin windows and toolbars

LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide

)igure ' +he .ide button

)igure ( Show button and /utohide

8hapter * 2ntroducing Writer

)igure = Selection of visible toolbar icons

Cight.click Aconte'tB menus

)igure *$. /ccessing the ruler settings

)igure ** Left end of Status bar

3Ctending selection %)(' *dding selection 4Shift9)(5 /loc+ selection 48trl9Shift9)(5

is displayed hereV otherwise( it is blan+.

LibreOffice #.$ Writer Guide

)igure *3. ?iew layouts single@ side"by"side@ boo7

Changing document views

$tarting a new document

From the $tart Center